JP6689045B2 - Amusement machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine (generally referred to as a “pachinko machine”) and a rotating drum type gaming machine (generally referred to as a “pachi-slot machine”).

  A gaming machine such as a pachinko machine is configured to accept a game medium in which the game medium is driven by a player's operation, a plurality of obstacle nails implanted in the game area, and the game medium in the game area. There is a receiving opening (general winning opening, starting opening, variable winning opening (variable starting opening, big winning opening, prize winning opening), V winning opening, etc.), and a game medium is received in the receiving opening. Then, it is possible to entertain the player by giving a privilege to the player (such as payout of the game medium, occurrence of an advantageous game state in which the player has an advantage such as opening / closing of the variable winning opening, etc.).

  This type of gaming machine has an upper plate in which a game medium to be driven into the game region is stored below the game region in a front view, and a lower plate which is arranged below the upper plate and in which the game medium is stored. It has and. (For example, Patent Document 1)
  However, in a gaming machine provided with such a dish storage tank, a more suitable one is required to realize the function as a dish.

JP, 2005-126835, A

  The present invention proposes a configuration of a lower plate that is more suitable for a game machine.

The present invention is
A game board in which a game area in which a predetermined game is played is formed,
A body frame to which the game board is attached,
A door frame provided on the body frame so as to be openable and closable,
An upper plate body in which a game medium for playing a game in the game area is stored,
A lower plate body provided on the door frame and having a storage area formed by a bottom wall portion of a predetermined shape and a standing wall portion of a predetermined height;
Equipped with
The standing wall portion is composed of a plurality of standing wall portions extending in the same direction or different directions,
The cover means provided to cover the upper part of the storage area is formed as a member separate from the lower tray body, and is directly connected to the lower tray body regardless of the open / closed state of the door frame with respect to the body frame. Fixedly installed in the form
The cover means includes a cover standing wall portion directly connected to the lower tray body, and a cover ceiling portion that is continuous with an upper portion of the cover standing wall portion and covers the storage area at a position higher than the standing wall portion of the lower tray body. Including,
Above the cover ceiling part, the cover means functions so as to be a predetermined internal space that is out of reach of the player,
The standing wall portion of the lower dish body is configured such that the outer surface thereof is covered with a part of the bulging portion that forms the front surface of the door frame, and is difficult to be seen from the front of the gaming machine.
The cover means is configured as a separate body from the member forming the bulging portion,
It is configured so that the player can take out the game medium stored in the storage area from a position higher than the upper end of the standing wall portion of the lower tray body and lower than the cover ceiling portion,
The connecting portion between the cover means and the lower tray body is connected so as to contact two or more standing wall portions of the plurality of standing wall portions.

  According to the present invention, a more suitable lower plate can be provided.

It is a front view of a pachinko machine which is one embodiment of the present invention. It is a right side view of a pachinko machine. It is a left side view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the front right. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the back. It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front in the state where the door frame was opened from the main body frame and the main body frame was opened from the outer frame. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame as seen from the front. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame and seen from behind. It is a front view of the outer frame in a pachinko machine. It is a right view of an outer frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled an outer frame and was seen from the front. (A) is a perspective view of a portion of the outer frame side upper hinge member in the outer frame as viewed from below with the left frame member omitted, and (b) is an exploded perspective view showing (a) in an exploded manner. is there. FIG. 7A is an enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the main body frame side upper hinge member of the main body frame is removed with respect to the outer frame side upper hinge member of the outer frame, and FIG. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the state which the main body side upper hinge member is attached to. It is explanatory drawing which shows the effect | action of the lock member in an outer frame. It is a front view of the door frame in a pachinko machine. It is a right view of a door frame. It is a left side view of a door frame. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the front right. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the front left. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the back. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the AA line in FIG. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the BB line in FIG. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the CC line in FIG. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame for every main member and saw it from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame for every main member and was seen from back. (A) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit as seen from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit for every main member and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame base unit for every main member and was seen from back. (A) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the rear. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as disassembled and seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the rear case and the fraud prevention member removed. (A) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit as seen from the rear. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit as seen from the front with the lid member removed, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit as seen from the rear with the lid member removed. It is a front view of the foul cover unit with a lid member removed. (A) is a front view of the handle unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the handle unit as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the handle unit as seen from the rear. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit disassembled and seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit disassembled and seen from the rear. (A) is a perspective view of the plate unit of the door frame as viewed from the front right, and (b) is a perspective view of the plate unit as viewed from the front left. (A) is a perspective view of the plate unit as viewed from the upper right rear, and (b) is a perspective view of the plate unit as viewed from the lower left rear. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the plate unit for every main member and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the plate unit for every main member and was seen from back. It is explanatory drawing which expands and shows the site | part of a lower plate in the state which removed the lower plate cover in the cross-sectional view of FIG. (A) is an explanatory view schematically showing an example in which a lower plate is provided with a ball guiding portion, and (b) is an explanatory view schematically showing an example in which a lower plate is provided with a ball guiding portion different from (a). Yes, (c) is an explanatory view schematically showing an example in which a different sphere guiding portion is provided. (A) is an explanatory view schematically showing a lower plate that can be divided, and (b) is an explanatory view schematically showing a state in which the storage area of the lower plate is expanded according to the size of the space behind the effect operation unit. It is a figure and (c) is explanatory drawing which shows the lower tray of (b) with a schematic perspective view. (A) is a front view of the production operation unit in a door frame, (b) is a right side view of the production operation unit. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation unit from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which saw the production operation unit from the back. It is the explanatory view which saw the production operation unit from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the DD line in FIG. 48 (a). It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the EE line in FIG.48 (b). 48A is a cross-sectional view taken along line FF in FIG. 48B, and FIG. 48B is an enlarged view of a portion A in FIG. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembles the production operation unit for each main member and is seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembles the production operation unit for each main member and is seen from the rear. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button disassembled and seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button disassembled and seen from the rear. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the decoration board unit of the production operation unit and was seen from the front. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the base unit of the production operation unit from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the base unit of the production operation unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the base unit of the production operation unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the base unit of the production operation unit and was seen from behind. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state which pressed the operation button in the cross section of the production | operation production unit of FIG. (A) is a view of the operation unit viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. In the figure, a part of the operation button is cut away and the portion that is about to be hidden by the first button decoration portion or button frame of the operation button is shown. It is an explanatory view shown, and (b) is an explanatory view showing a portion which is about to be concealed by the 1st button decoration part of an operation button, a button frame, etc. in a section view of a production operation unit. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the external appearance of the production operation unit by the perspective view seen from the front, (b) is explanatory drawing which looked at the external appearance of the production operation unit from the direction which the center axis of the operation button has extended. . 48A is a front view of a second effect operation unit different from that of the effect operation units of FIGS. 48 to 63, and FIG. 46B is a right side view of the second effect operation unit. (A) is a perspective view of the second effect operation unit as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the second effect operation unit as seen from the rear. It is the explanatory view which saw the 2nd production operation unit from the direction where the central axis of an operation button has extended. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the GG line in FIG. 64 (a). It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the HH line in FIG.64 (b). 64A is a cross-sectional view taken along line I-I in FIG. 64B, and FIG. 64B is an enlarged view of a portion A in FIG. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the 2nd production | operation operation unit for every main member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the 2nd production | operation operation unit for every main member, and was seen from back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the operation buttons of the second effect operation unit as seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the operation buttons of the second effect operation unit as seen from the rear. is there. It is the perspective view which looked at the second base unit of the second production operation unit from the front. (A) is an explanatory view of the second effect operation unit seen from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends with the main screen of the screen unit facing forward, and (b) shows the sub-screen of the screen unit. It is the explanatory view which looked at the 2nd production operation unit from the direction where the central axis of the operation button has extended in the state where it turned to the front. 74A is a sectional view taken along line JJ in FIG. 74A, and FIG. 74B is a sectional view taken along line KK in FIG. 74B. (A) is an attempt to hide the second effect operation unit with the first button decoration portion and button frame of the operation button in a view of the second effect operation unit viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends with the main screen facing forward. It is explanatory drawing which shows the site | part which is presenting, and (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the site | part which is about to be hidden by the 1st button decoration part of an operation button, a button frame, etc. in the cross-sectional view of the 2nd production | operation operation unit of the state of (a). Is. (A) is an attempt to hide the second effect operation unit with the first button decoration portion and button frame of the operation button in a view of the second effect operation unit viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends with the sub-screen facing forward. It is explanatory drawing which shows the site | part which is presenting, and (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the site | part which is about to be hidden by the 1st button decoration part of an operation button, a button frame, etc. in the cross-sectional view of the 2nd production | operation operation unit of the state of (a). Is. 48A is a front view of a third production operation unit different from the embodiment of the production operation unit and the second production operation unit of FIGS. 48 to 77, and FIG. 18B is a right side view of the third production operation unit. is there. It is a rear view of a third effect operation unit. (A) is a perspective view of the third effect operation unit as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the third effect operation unit as seen from the rear. It is the explanation view which saw the 3rd production operation unit from the direction where the central axis of the operation button has extended. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the LL line in FIG. 78 (a). It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the MM line in FIG.78 (b). It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the 3rd production operation unit for every main member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the 3rd production | operation operation unit for every main member, and was seen from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the third base unit of the third production operation unit from the front. (A) is a perspective view of the decorative rotating body unit of the third effect operation unit as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the decorative rotating body unit of the third effect operation unit as seen from the rear. (A) is a front view of the third effect operation unit showing the second decorative surface portion of the decorative rotating body unit in the front direction, and (b) is a direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends (a). It is explanatory drawing seen from. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows rotation of a 1st decorative surface part in the state which orient | assigned the 1st decorative surface part to the front in a 3rd production operation unit, (b) is a 2nd decorative surface part in a 3rd production operation unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows rotation of the 2nd decorative surface part in the state which turned to. It is explanatory drawing which shows the movement of the movable production | presentation which rotates a decoration rotary body unit in a 3rd production operation unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the movement of the movable production which rotates a decorative rotary body unit in the state which rotated the 1st decorative surface part and the 2nd decorative surface part in a 3rd production operation unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the air by rotation of the 2nd decorative surface part in a 3rd production operation unit. (A) is a front view of the door frame left side unit in a door frame, (b) is a perspective view which looked at the door frame left side unit from the front, (c) is a door frame left side unit seen from the back. FIG. It is a disassembled perspective view which looked at the door frame left side unit by disassembling it. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame left side unit and was seen from back. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the NN line in FIG. 93 (a). (A) is a front view of the door frame right side unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit as seen from the front, and (c) is a door frame right side unit as seen from the rear. FIG. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame right side unit and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame right side unit and was seen from back. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the OO line in FIG. 97 (a). 97A is a sectional view taken along the line PP in FIG. 97A, and FIG. 97B is a sectional view taken along the line QQ in FIG. 97A. (A) is a front view of the door frame top unit in a door frame, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame top unit from the front, (c) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame top unit from the back. Is. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame top unit and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame top unit and was seen from back. FIG. 103 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line RR in FIG. 102. It is the perspective view which looked at the body frame from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the body frame from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the main body frame for every main member and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the main body frame for every main member and was seen from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the payout unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the payout unit from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the payout unit for every main structure and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the payout unit for every main composition and was seen from back. (A) is a perspective view of the ball guiding unit of the dispensing unit as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the ball guiding unit as seen from the rear. It is an exploded perspective view of a ball guide unit. (A) is a perspective view of the dispensing device of the dispensing unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the dispensing device as viewed from the rear. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the delivery apparatus and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the delivery apparatus and was seen from back. (A) is a front view of the dispensing device, and (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line S-S in (a). (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the state which closed the ball removal passage by the ball removal movable piece in a dispensing apparatus, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the state which opened the ball removal passage by the ball removal movable piece. (A) is a perspective view of the upper full-ball path unit in the payout unit as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the upper full-ball path unit as seen from the rear. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the upper tank bulb path unit disassembled and seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the upper tank bulb path unit disassembled and seen from the rear. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the lower full ball path unit in a payout unit from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the lower full ball path unit from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the lower tank ball path unit and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the lower tank ball path unit and was seen from back. (A) is an explanatory view showing a state where a taxiway opening / closing door is closed in a lower tank ball path unit, and (b) is an explanatory view showing a state where the taxiway opening / closing door is opened. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the foul cover unit of a door frame, and a lower full ball path unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball in a payout unit. It is the front view of the game board which makes the panel board of the game panel opaque. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board of the state of FIG. 129 from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board of the state of FIG. 129 from the back. It is the exploded perspective view which disassembled the game board for every main composition, and was seen from the front. It is the exploded perspective view which disassembled the game board for every main composition, and was seen from the back. It is the front view which cut the front unit in the game board in approximately the center of the front and back direction inside the game territory. It is the front view of the game board which makes the panel board of the game panel transparent. (A) is a perspective view of a front component member and a game panel of the game board as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of (a) as seen from the rear. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the starting opening unit and side unit in the front unit of a game board from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at (a) from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the attacker unit in the front unit as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of (a) as seen from the rear. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow path of the game ball in an attacker unit by a cross section. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the center accessory in a front unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at (a) from the back. It is the perspective view which looked at the back unit in the game board from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the back unit in the game board from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the back upper movable production unit in a back unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the back upper movable production unit in a back unit from the back. It is the exploded perspective view which disassembled the back up and down unit of the back up movable production unit and was seen from the front together with the back up movable main body unit. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back up and down unit of the back up movable production unit and was seen from behind together with the back up movable main body unit. It is the exploded perspective view which disassembled the back upper movable main body unit of the back upper movable production unit, and was seen from the front. It is the exploded perspective view which disassembled the back upper movable main body unit of the back upper movable production unit, and was seen from the back. (A) is a front view of the back movable art unit which shows the back movable main body unit in a state of a normal rising position, and (b) is a back top which is shown in a lowered position where the back movable movable body unit is rotated. It is a front view of a movable effect unit. It is a front view of the back upper movable main body unit which shows rotation of the back upper first rotation decoration and revolution of the back upper second rotation decoration roughly. It is a front view of the back upper movable main unit which shows roughly the movement of a plurality of back top appearance decorations and LED of a back upper decoration board. It is explanatory drawing which shows the movement of the back upper 2nd rotation decoration body and the back upper retracting decoration body in a back upper movable main body unit according to the rotation angle of a back top 1st rotation decoration body. It is explanatory drawing which shows the movement of the back upper 2nd rotation decoration body and the movement of the back upper retracting decoration body following FIG. 152 according to the rotation angle of the back top 1st rotation decoration body. (A) is a front view of a back movable body unit shown together with LEDs of a back decorative board in a state where the back first rotating decorative body is rotated 45 degrees counterclockwise from a normal state, 8A is a cross-sectional view taken along line TT in FIG. It is a front view of a back rear left movable effect unit and a back rear right movable effect unit in the back unit. It is the perspective view which looked at the back rear left movable production unit and the back rear right movable production unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the back back left movable production unit and the back rear right production unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back rear left movable production unit and the back rear right movable production unit, and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back rear left movable production unit and the back rear right production unit, and was seen from the back. FIG. 9 is an exploded perspective view of the back-rear left rotating decorative body, the back-rear right rotating decorative body, and the rotary connecting mechanism of the back-rear left movable effect unit and the back-rear movable effect unit, which are disassembled from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the back rear left rotation decoration body and the back rear right rotation decoration body and the rotation connection mechanism of the back rear left movable production unit and the back rear right production unit from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the rotary connection mechanism in the assembled state, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the rotary connection mechanism. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the movable member of a back back left movable production unit from a left side surface, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the movable member of a back rear left movable production unit from a front surface. It is explanatory drawing which shows the movement of the back back left rotation decoration body in a back back left movable production unit. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the movable member of a back rear right movable production unit from a front surface, and (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the movable member of a back rear right movable production unit from a right side surface. It is explanatory drawing which shows the movement of the back rear right rotation decoration of a back rear right movable production unit. (A) is a front view which shows a back rear left rotation decoration body and a back rear right rotation decoration body in a back rear left movable production unit and a back rear right rotation production unit in a state of a usual first production position, and (b). FIG. 4C is a front view showing the back-rear left-handed rotating decorative body and the back-rear right-handed rotating decorative body in a state in which they are rotated to the second effect position, and FIG. It is a front view shown in a state of being rotated to three rendering positions. It is a front view of the game board shown in a state where the back upper first rotary decorative body and the back upper second rotating decorative body of the back upper movable effect unit in the back unit are moved to the lowered position. It is a block diagram which shows the control structure of a pachinko machine roughly.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
A pachinko machine 1 which is an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 10. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine that is an embodiment of the present invention. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a left side view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front right, FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front left, and FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the back. FIG. 8 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front with the door frame opened from the body frame and the body frame opened from the outer frame. FIG. 9 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame, and FIG. 10 is a front view of the pachinko machine, a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled and was seen from the back.

  The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) in a game hall, a door frame 3 that closes the front surface of the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable, and a door frame 3. A main body frame 4 which is openably and closably supported and is openably and closably attached to the outer frame 2, and is detachably attached to the main body frame 4 from the front side and is visible from the player side through the door frame 3 And a game board 5 having a game area 5a in which a game ball is hit by.

  As shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 includes an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member 20, which are vertically separated from each other and extend horizontally, and an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member. A left frame member 30 and a right frame member 40 that connect both ends of 20 and extend vertically are provided. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 are formed to have the same front and rear widths. Further, the left and right lengths of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 are longer than the left and right lengths of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, respectively.

  The outer frame 2 is attached to the curtain plate member 50 connecting the lower ends of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 to each other and attached to the front side of the lower frame member 20, and to the left end portion of the upper frame member 10 in front view. The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 attached to the left end side upper portion of the curtain plate member 50 in front view and the left frame member 30 are provided. The body frame 4 and the door frame 3 are attached to be openable and closable by the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2.

  The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 is a frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 having a through hole 111 that penetrates in the front and back in a rectangular shape in which the outer shape in a front view extends vertically, and the through hole of the door frame base unit 100. A handle unit 300 that is attached to the lower right corner of the front surface below 111 and is operable by the player to drive a game ball into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and a through hole 111 of the door frame base unit 100. The dish unit 320 which is attached to the lower part of the front surface on the lower side of the lower side, and the dish unit 320 which is attached to the center of the dish unit 320 and which is changed by the game ball being hit in the game area 5a An effect operation unit 400 capable of presenting a participatory effect, and an upper side of the plate unit 320, which is attached to the front left part on the left side of the through hole 111 in the door frame base unit 100. The door frame left side unit 540, the door frame right side unit 550 attached to the right side of the front side of the door frame base unit 100 on the right side of the through-hole 111 above the dish unit 320, and the door frame left side unit 540. And a door frame top unit 570 attached to the upper side of the front side of the door frame base unit 100 above the through hole 111 on the upper side of the door frame right side unit 550.

  The main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 has a frame-shaped main body frame base 600 that is partially insertable into the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the main body frame base 600. It is attached to the upper and lower ends on the left side in front view, and is rotatably attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2, and the door frame side upper hinge member 140 of the door frame 3 and the door frame. A main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and a main body frame side lower hinge member 640 to which the lower side hinge members 150 are respectively rotatably attached, a reinforcing frame 660 attached to a front side left surface of the main body frame base 600, and a main body frame base 600. A ball launching device 680 for driving a game ball into the game area 5a of the game board 5 attached to the lower part of the front surface of the game board 5, and an outer frame 2 and a main body frame attached to the right side surface of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front. 4, A locking unit 700 that locks between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and an inverted L-shape that is attached to the rear side along the upper side and the left side of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front and pays out the game ball to the player side. -Shaped payout unit 800, a board unit 900 attached to the lower portion of the rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and a game board 5 attached to the main body frame base 600 so as to be openable and closable on the rear side of the main body frame base 600. And a back cover 980 that covers the side.

  The payout unit 800 of the main body frame 4 is an inverted L-shaped payout unit base 801 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600, and is attached to the upper part of the payout unit base 801 and extends leftward and rightward. A ball tank 802 that stores game balls supplied from a box-shaped island facility (not shown), and a game ball inside the ball tank 802 that is attached to the payout unit base 801 below the ball tank 802 to the left when viewed from the front. A tank rail 803 that extends to the left and right to guide, a ball guide unit 820 that is attached to the rear surface of the upper left side of the payout unit base 801 when viewed from the front, and guides the game ball from the tank rail 803 downward in a meandering manner, and a ball guide unit 820. A game ball that is detachably attached from the payout unit base 801 on the lower side and is guided by the ball guiding unit 820. Based on an instruction from the payout control board 951 housed in the payout control board box 950, a payout device 830 for paying out one by one, and game balls paid out by the payout device 830 attached to the rear surface of the payout unit base 801 are moved downward. An upper full tank ball path unit 850 that guides and discharges the game ball from either the normal discharge port 850d or the full tank discharge port 850e according to the storage state of the game ball in the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320, and a payout unit. Attached to the lower end of the base 801 and guiding the game ball discharged from the normal discharge port 850d of the upper tank ball path unit 850 forward and guiding it from the front end to the through ball passage 273 of the door frame 3 and the full guide path 861. Guide the game ball discharged from the tank discharge port 850e to the front and guide it from the front end to the full tank reception port 274 of the door frame 3. A lower full sphere path unit 860 having a RuMitsurutan taxiway 862, and a.

  The board unit 900 of the body frame 4 includes a board unit base 910 attached to the rear side of the body frame base 600, and a bass speaker inside the body unit base 910 attached to the rear side of the body frame base 600 on the left side of the board unit base 910 when viewed from the front. A speaker unit 920 having 921, a power supply board box 930 which is mounted on the rear side of the board unit base 910 on the right side in front view and accommodates a power supply board inside, and a power supply board box 930 which is mounted on the rear side of the speaker unit 920. An interface control board box 940 in which the interface control board is housed, and a payout control board 951 which is mounted across the power supply board box 930 and the interface control board box 940 and which controls the payout of gaming balls are housed. And a payout control board box 950, .

  As shown in FIG. 9 and FIG. 10, the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a into which the game balls are driven and places the game balls emitted from the ball emitting device 680 at the upper part of the game area 5a. A front component member 1000 having an outer rail 1001 and an inner rail 1002 for guiding to, and a flat game panel 1100 attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000 and partitioning the rear end of the game area 5a. There is.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the player rotates the handle 302 while the game balls are stored in the upper plate 321, the game balls are moved by the ball launching device 680 with the strength according to the rotation angle of the handle 302. It is driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5. Then, when the game balls hit in the game area 5a are received in the winning openings, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 321 by the payout device 830 in accordance with the received winning openings. Since the player's interest can be enhanced by paying out the game balls, the game balls in the upper plate 321 can be driven into the game area 5a, and the player can enjoy the game.

[2. Overall structure of outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 to 16. 11 is a front view of the outer frame of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 12 is a right side view of the outer frame. 13 is a perspective view of the outer frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 14 is a perspective view of the outer frame as seen from the rear. FIG. 15 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame as disassembled and seen from the front. FIG. 16A is a perspective view of a portion of the outer frame side upper hinge member in the outer frame as viewed from below with the left frame member omitted, and FIG. It is a figure. The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) in which the pachinko machine 1 such as a game hall is installed.

  As shown in the figure, the outer frame 2 connects the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 that are vertically separated from each other and extends horizontally, and connects both ends of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 to each other. A left frame member 30 and a right frame member 40 extending in the direction. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 are formed to have the same front and rear widths. Further, the left and right lengths of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 are longer than the left and right lengths of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, respectively. Further, the outer frame 2 is assembled such that the left and right end surfaces of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 and the side surfaces of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 facing outward in the left-right direction are the same surface. Has been.

  The outer frame 2 includes an outer frame side upper hinge member 60 attached to the left end side of the upper frame member 10 when viewed from the front, and a lock member 66 attached to a lower surface of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60. An outer frame side lower hinge member 70 attached to the left end upper part of the curtain plate member 50 in front view and the left frame member 30 is provided. The outer frame-side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame-side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 allow the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 to be attached so as to be openable and closable.

  The outer frame 2 is attached to the rear side of the curtain plate member 50 and the curtain plate member 50 that connects the lower ends of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 to each other and is mounted to the front side of the lower frame member 20. A curtain plate reinforcing member 80 whose both ends are respectively attached to the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, a flat plate-like left sliding member 81 which is attached to a position on the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 to the left from the left-right center, and a curtain. A flat plate-shaped right sliding member 82 attached to a position near the right end on the upper surface of the plate member 50. The curtain plate reinforcing member 80 is formed of a solid member (for example, wood, plywood, etc.) and is attached to the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40.

  Further, the outer frame 2 includes an upper frame member 10 and a left frame member 30, an upper frame member 10 and a right frame member 40, a lower frame member 20 and a left frame member 30, and a lower frame member 20 and a right frame member 40, respectively. The connecting member 85 is connected. Further, the outer frame 2 includes an upper hook member 90 and a lower hook member 91 which are attached to the inside (left side surface side) of the right frame member 40 and to which an outer frame hook 703 of the locking unit 700 described later is locked. Is prepared.

[2-1. Upper frame member]
The upper frame member 10 of the outer frame 2 is formed of a solid (solid) material having a predetermined thickness (eg, wood, plywood, etc.). The upper frame member 10 is provided with engagement notches 11 that vertically penetrate and are recessed toward the center in the left-right direction at the center in the front-rear direction at the left and right ends. In the engagement notch 11, the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B of the connecting member 85, which will be described later, are attached. Further, the upper frame member 10 is provided with mounting step portions 12 that are recessed from the general surface on the upper surface and the front surface of the left end portion in front view. The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 is attached to the attachment step portion 12.

[2-2. Lower frame member]
The lower frame member 20 of the outer frame 2 is formed of a solid (solid) material having a predetermined thickness (for example, wood, plywood, etc.). The lower frame member 20 is formed such that the left and right lengths and the upper and lower thicknesses are the same as the left and right lengths and the upper and lower thicknesses of the upper frame member 10, and the front and rear widths thereof are the upper frame member 10. Is formed to be longer than the width in front of and behind. The lower frame member 20 is provided with engagement notches 21 that penetrate vertically and are recessed toward the center in the left-right direction at positions on the left and right ends that are closer to the rear side than the center in the front-rear direction. Inside the engagement cutout portion 21, a lower left fixing member 88C and a lower horizontal fixing portion 88 of the lower right connecting member 85D of the connecting member 85, which will be described later, are attached.

  Further, the lower frame member 20 includes front end cutouts 22 that are recessed rearward from the front surfaces of the left and right ends. In the lower frame member 20, the width in the front-rear direction from the rear end of the front end cutout 22 to the rear surface of the lower frame member 20 is formed to be the same as the width in the front-rear direction of the upper frame member 10. In the state where the lower frame member 20 is assembled to the outer frame 2, the portion between the left and right front end cutouts 22 is inserted into the curtain plate member 50.

[2-3. Left frame member and right frame member]
The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 extend vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and are formed by extruded shape members of metal such as aluminum alloy. The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are formed in a mutually symmetrical shape in a plan view. When assembled as the outer frame 2, the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are recessed inward from a position that is rearward with respect to the center in the front-rear direction to a position near the rear end on the side surface that is the outer side in the left-right direction. The recesses 31 and 41 and the protrusions 32 and 42 that bulge from the side surface on the opposite side of the recesses 31 and 41 and are hollow inside. The strength and rigidity of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are enhanced by the protrusions 32 and 42. Further, inside the protrusions 32 and 42, a lower lateral fixing portion 88 on the rear side of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B of the connecting member 85, which will be described later, is inserted and attached.

  The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 have a plurality of vertically extending grooves formed on their surfaces. With the plurality of grooves, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed or transported in an island facility such as a game hall, the pachinko machine 1 can be easily gripped by a worker's finger and the pachinko machine 1 can be easily held. The design of the appearance of the machine 1 can be improved.

[2-4. Curtain board member]
The curtain plate member 50 of the outer frame 2 is formed in a box shape having an open rear side. The curtain plate member 50 has a rearward extending portion 51 extending rearward in the shape of a flat plate near the left end in front view on the upper surface, and a U-shape having a size through which a game ball can pass from the left end of the rearward extending portion 51. A left discharge hole 52 which is cut out and penetrates vertically, and a right discharge hole 53 which penetrates vertically with a size allowing a game ball to pass on the right side of the left discharge hole 52 in the rear extension part 51, The standing wall portion 54 that extends upward in a flat plate shape from the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 including the rear end of the rearward extending portion 51, and the front surface that bulges forward from the vicinity of the upper end of the standing wall portion 54 so that the front surface is upward. And a return portion 55 that is inclined so as to be directed rearward.

  The curtain plate member 50 of the outer frame-side lower hinge member 70 is placed so that the outer frame-side lower hinge member 70 is placed on the front upper surface of the rear extending portion 51 and the upper surface of the rear extending portion 51. A horizontal portion 71 described later is attached. The left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50 is formed at a position corresponding to a discharge hole 74, which will be described later, of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 in a state of being assembled to the outer frame 2. Further, the right discharge hole 53 is formed at a position on the right side of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 in a state of being assembled to the outer frame 2. The right discharge hole 53 is formed larger than the left discharge hole 52.

  Further, the curtain plate member 50 is inclined such that the upper surface on the right side of the rear extending portion 51 is lower on the front end side. Further, the curtain plate member 50 has a left mounting portion 56 for mounting the left sliding member 81 on the right side of the rear extending portion 51 on the upper surface, and a right mounting portion for mounting the right sliding member 82 near the right end on the upper surface. And a part 57. On the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50, the lower surface of the main body frame 4 is placed via the left sliding member 81 and the right sliding member 82.

  As shown, the curtain plate member 50 has a shallow relief-like decoration formed on the front surface. Although not shown in the drawings, the curtain plate member 50 has a box-shaped interior partitioned by a plurality of ribs into a grid pattern, so that the strength and rigidity are enhanced. Further, the curtain plate member 50 is formed so that the front half of the curtain plate reinforcing member 80 can be housed inside.

[2-5. Outer frame side upper hinge member]
As shown in the drawing, the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 has a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped outer fixing portion 61 and a flat plate shape extending forward from the front end of the upper fixing portion 61. Of the front extension portion 62, a bearing groove 63 extending vertically from the right end of the front extension portion 62 to the center in the left and right of the front extension portion 62, and penetrating vertically. A plate-shaped lateral fixing portion 64 extending downward from the left side, and a lateral fixing portion extending downward from the end side of the front extending portion 62 around the left end to the front end to the portion where the bearing groove 63 is open. And a flat plate-shaped hanging portion 65 that is continuous with the portion 64 (see FIG. 16B and the like).

  In the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the upper fixing portion 61 is placed on the upper surface of the mounting step portion 12 of the upper frame member 10 in a state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, and is fixed by a screw (not shown). There is. Further, the front extending portion 62 extends forward of the front end of the upper frame member 10. The lateral fixing portion 64 is fixed to the left frame member 30 with a screw in a state of being inserted from the upper side into the recess 31 of the outer side surface of the left frame member 30.

  This outer frame side upper hinge member 60 cooperates with the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 to insert the body frame 4 into the bearing groove 63 by inserting the body frame upper hinge pin 622 of the body frame side upper hinge member 620. It can be opened and closed. The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 is formed by bending a metal plate by press molding.

[2-6. Lock member]
As shown in FIG. 16, the lock member 66 of the outer frame 2 includes a strip plate-shaped lock main body 66a extending left and right with a predetermined width in the front-rear direction, and an operation portion protruding rightward from the rear end of the lock main body 66a. 66b, an elastically deformable rod-shaped elastic portion 66c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock body 66a, and then extending diagonally left front, and a mounting hole vertically penetrating near the rear end of the lock body 66a. 66d. The lock member 66 is made of synthetic resin. The lock member 66 is rotatably attached to the lower surface of the front extension portion 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 by the attachment screw 67.

  The rear end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 is attached to a position rearward of the bearing groove 63 in the front extension portion 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 through the attachment hole 66d. Further, when the lock member 66 is attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the lock body 66a can block the bearing groove 63 in a plan view, and the right side surface near the front end is the outer frame side upper hinge member. It extends forward so that it can come into contact with the portion of the hanging portion 65 of the portion 60 that extends to the opening of the bearing groove 63 (see FIG. 18).

  Further, the tip of the elastic portion 66c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock body 66a is in contact with the inner peripheral surface of the hanging portion 65 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60. The lock member 66 is biased by the biasing force of the elastic portion 66c in a direction in which the front end rotates leftward about the mounting hole 66d. Therefore, in a normal state, the right side surface near the front end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 is in contact with the hanging portion 65 (see FIG. 18). In this state, a space for accommodating a main body frame upper hinge pin 622, which will be described later, of the main body frame upper hinge member 620 is formed in a portion of the bearing groove 63 on the front side of the lock main body 66a.

  The lock member 66 can rotate the lock body 66a against the biasing force of the elastic portion 66c by operating the operation portion 66b. Then, by operating the operating portion 66b to rotate the lock body 66a in the direction in which the front end thereof moves to the left, the lock body 66a can be retracted from the bearing groove 63 in plan view, and the bearing groove 63 Can be in the state of being fully threaded. As a result, the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 can be inserted into the bearing groove 63, and the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 can be removed from the bearing groove 63.

[2-7. Outer frame side lower hinge member]
As shown in the figure, the outer frame-side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 is a plate-shaped horizontal portion 71 that extends horizontally, and a left side of the horizontal portion 71 stands up from a portion rearward of the center in the front-rear direction. A rising flat plate-shaped rising portion 72, an outer frame lower hinge pin 73 projecting upward from the vicinity of the front end of the horizontal portion 71, and a horizontal portion 71 that vertically penetrates so that only one game ball can pass through. And a discharge hole 74 having a size. The outer frame-side lower hinge member 70 is formed by bending a metal plate by press molding.

  The horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed in a trapezoidal shape with the left side as the bottom side in a plan view. The outer frame lower hinge pin 73 has a columnar shape, and is formed in a truncated cone shape with an upper end narrowed at an upper portion with respect to a vertical center. The outer frame lower hinge pin 73 is attached to a position on the left side near the front end of the horizontal portion 71. The discharge hole 74 is formed in the horizontal portion 71 so as to be in contact with a central portion of the rising portion 72 in the front-rear direction and extend in an inverted U shape from the left side of the horizontal portion 71 to the right. The discharge hole 74 has substantially the same size as the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50.

  In the outer frame-side lower hinge member 70, the horizontal portion 71 is placed on the upper surface near the left end of the curtain plate member 50 and the rear extending portion 51 when the outer frame 2 is assembled. However, it is fixed to the curtain plate reinforcing member 80 by screws (not shown) that penetrate the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50. Further, in a state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, the rising portion 72 is attached to a portion of the inner side surface of the left frame member 30 on the front side of the projecting portion 32 by a screw (not shown). The outer frame-side lower hinge member 70 is configured such that the outer frame-side lower hinge pin 73 is inserted into a lower-body-frame-side lower hinge hole (not shown) in the main body frame-side lower hinge member 640 of the main body frame 4 so that the outer frame-side lower hinge member 73 is moved upward. The body frame 4 can be attached in an openable and closable manner in cooperation with the hinge member 60.

  Further, when the outer frame 2 is assembled, the discharge hole 74 is aligned with the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50. Thereby, the game ball on the horizontal portion 71 can be dropped (discharged) to the rear side of the curtain plate member 50 through the discharge hole 74 and the left discharge hole 52. More specifically, when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, a game ball dropped between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 is closed as the main body frame 4 is closed. Since the distance between and is gradually narrowed, rolling is performed to the rear side with a wide interval, and the balls can be discharged from the discharge hole 74. At this time, the discharge hole 74 is formed at a position substantially the same as the rear end of the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 in the state of being assembled to the pachinko machine 1. By ejecting the game ball dropped between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 from the discharge hole 74, it is possible to easily prevent the game ball from rolling rearward of the main body frame 4, and the outer frame side. It is possible to make it difficult for the game ball to stay in the lower hinge member 70.

[2-8. Connection member]
The connecting member 85 of the outer frame 2 includes an upper left connecting member 85A connecting the upper frame member 10 and the left frame member 30, an upper right connecting member 85B connecting the upper frame member 10 and the right frame member 40, and a lower frame member. There are a lower left connecting member 85C connecting the 20 and the left frame member 30, and a lower right connecting member 85D connecting the lower frame member 20 and the right frame member 40.

  The connecting member 85 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 86, a plate-like upper horizontal fixing portion 87 extending upward from either one of the left and right sides of the horizontal fixing portion 86, and a horizontal fixing portion. And a flat lower lateral fixing portion 88 extending downward from the same side as the upper lateral fixing portion 87 of 86. The connecting member 85 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

  In the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B, the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 extends upward from the center of the horizontal fixing portion 86 in the front-rear direction, and the lower horizontal fixing portion 88 extends from both front and rear sides of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87. It extends downward. That is, in the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B, two lower horizontal fixing portions 88 are provided in front and back with a space therebetween. The horizontal fixing portions 86 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are fixed to the upper frame member 10 while being in contact with the lower surface of the upper frame member 10. Further, the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B is inserted into the engaging notch 21 of the upper frame member 10 and fixed to the left and right ends of the upper frame member 10. The front lower lateral fixing portions 88 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are fixed to the inner side surfaces of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 on the front side of the projecting portions 32 and 42, respectively. Further, the lower lateral fixing portions 88 on the rear side of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are inserted into the protrusions 32 and 42 of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 and screwed from the outer side surface. Are fixed to the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, respectively.

  In the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D, the rear end of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 protrudes rearward more than the rear end of the horizontal fixing portion 86, and more than the horizontal fixing portion 86 of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87. A lower horizontal fixing portion 88 extends below the horizontal fixing portion 86 from the lower end of the portion protruding rearward. Further, the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D further include a bent portion 89 protruding from the rear end of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 to the same side as the horizontal fixing portion 86. The horizontal fixing portions 86 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D are fixed in contact with the upper surface of the lower frame member 20. Further, the upper lateral fixing portions 87 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D are fixed to the inner side surfaces of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 on the front side of the projecting portions 32 and 42, respectively. Furthermore, the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right fixing member 88 of the lower right connecting member 85D are inserted into the engaging notches 21 of the lower frame member 20 and fixed to the end surfaces of the lower frame member 20 in the left-right direction. It

[2-9. Outer frame side upper hinge member lock mechanism]
Next, in the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, FIGS. It will be described with reference to FIG. 17A is an enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the main body frame side upper hinge member of the main body frame is removed with respect to the outer frame side upper hinge member of the outer frame, and FIG. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the state in which the main body side upper hinge member is attached to the hinge member. FIG. 18 is an explanatory view showing the action of the lock member in the outer frame.

  In the state where the lock member 66 in the outer frame 2 is attached to the front extension portion 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 (normal state), the tip of the elastic portion 66c contacts the inner peripheral surface of the hanging portion 65. The lock body 66a closes a part of the bearing groove 63 bent in a V shape, and the tip portion of the lock body 66a does not close the deepest part of the bearing groove 63. A space into which the main frame upper hinge pin 622 of the main frame upper hinge member 620 of the main frame 4 can be inserted is formed in the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63.

  In the support mechanism of the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 using the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the lock member 66 in the present embodiment, the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 is inserted in the deepest part of the bearing groove 63, and the front end of the lock main body 66a. The right side surface of the lock body 66a is close to the right side hanging portion 65 (in this state, there is a slight gap between the right side surface of the front end of the lock body 66a and the right side hanging portion 65, and they are in contact with each other. In the normal shaft support state, the center of the hinge pin 622 on the body frame located at the deepest portion of the bent bearing groove 63 and the front end face of the lock body 66a are diagonally displaced and opposed to each other. It is in a state.

  In this normal axial support state, the main body frame upper hinge pin 622, which supports the heavy main body frame 4, is in contact with the front end portion of the bearing groove 63. Almost no load is applied from 622 to the front end surface of the lock body 66a. That is, no load is applied to the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66. Since the front end surface of the lock body 66a is formed in an arc shape, when the operating portion 66b is rotated to rotate the lock member 66, the lock member 66 smoothly rotates. There is. Further, in the figure, the arc center of the front end face of the lock body 66a is the center of the mounting hole 66d (the rotation center of the lock member 66).

  Therefore, when the acting force F is applied in the direction in which the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame is removed along the inclination of the bearing groove 63 formed in the V-shape and comes into contact with the arcuate front end face of the lock body 66a, the acting force is exerted. F is a component force F1 acting on the contact portion between the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 and the arcuate front end face (the normal direction of the arc of the front end face of the lock body 66a), the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 and the bearing groove 63. When the force is divided into the component force F2 acting on the contact surface with one inner surface of the one side, the direction of the component force F1 is directed to the center of the mounting hole 66d (mounting screw 67) (the rotation center of the lock member 66). A moment for rotating the front end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 in a direction away from the right hanging portion 65 does not work, and the body frame upper hinge pin 622 causes the front end portion of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 and one of the bearing grooves 63. Side Clamped state is maintained between the.

  Therefore, even when the lock member 66 is in the normal axial support state or the action of the hinge pin 622 on the main frame is applied to the lock member 66, the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66 is not always loaded and is integrally formed of synthetic resin. It is possible to prevent plastic deformation due to creep of the elastic portion 66c to be prevented, and to prevent the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame from coming off from the bearing groove 63 for a long period of time. Even if an unreasonable force is applied and the front end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 is rotated in the direction of moving to the right, the right side surface of the front end of the lock body 66a comes into contact with the hanging portion 65 and further Since it does not rotate, the lock member 66 does not protrude to the outside of the front extension 62.

  Even if the front end surface of the lock main body 66a is not arcuate, the lock member 66 is positioned such that the rotational moment is not generated by the action of the component force F1 or the front end portion of the lock member 66 faces the outside of the front extension portion 62. By locating the rotation center of the lock member 66 (the shaft fixed by the mounting screw 67) at a position where a rotation moment for rotating the lock member 66 is generated, the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66 is not always loaded. Even if the lock member 66 rotates, the right side surface of the front end of the lock body 66a only abuts on the hanging portion 65, so that the lock member 66 does not protrude to the outside of the front extension portion 62.

  When the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 is supported by the bearing groove 63 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the main body frame upper portion is inserted into the bearing groove 63 from the open side of the bearing groove 63. Insert the hinge pin 622. When the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 is inserted into the bearing groove 63, the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 comes into contact with the right side surface of the lock main body 66a of the lock member 66, and the front end of the lock main body 66a is resisted against the biasing force of the elastic portion 66c. The lock member 66 rotates about the mounting screw 67 so as to move to the left. As a result, the lock main body 66a that closed the bearing groove 63 retracts to open the bearing groove 63, and the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame can be moved to the deepest portion (front end) of the bearing groove 63.

  When the body frame upper hinge pin 622 is moved to the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63, the contact between the body frame upper hinge pin 622 and the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 is released, and the lock body 66a is biased by the elastic portion 66c. The lock member 66 rotates so that the front end of the lock member 66 moves to the right, and the lock member 66 returns to the normal state. As a result, the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 is accommodated in the space in the bearing groove 63 on the front side of the front end of the lock main body 66 a, and the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 is rotatable in the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63. It will be held (locked) in this state.

  When removing the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame from the inside of the bearing groove 63, the operating portion 66b of the lock member 66 is operated to rotate the lock member 66 so that the front end of the lock main body 66a moves to the left, and the elastic portion. The lock body 66a is retracted from the bearing groove 63 against the biasing force of 66c. As a result, the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63 and the opening are in communication with each other, and the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 can be removed from the bearing groove 63.

[2-10. Crime prevention mechanism and ball catching prevention mechanism at the outer frame side lower hinge member part]
Prevention of ball biting for preventing the game ball from being caught between the crime prevention mechanism in the outer frame 2 lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment. The mechanism will be described.

  In the assembled state of the outer frame 2, the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is attached to the left end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 in front view. The horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is attached in a state of being placed on the vicinity of the left end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 and the upper surface of the rear extending portion 51. The curtain plate member 50 includes a standing wall portion 54 that rises upward from the rear end of the upper surface. As a result, even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is allowed to enter the rear side of the body frame 4 (pachinko machine 1) through the gap between the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 and the body frame side lower hinge member 640. Since the tip of the illegal tool contacts the standing wall portion 54 extending upward from the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50, it is possible to prevent the illegal tool from being inserted further rearward. It is possible to prevent fraudulent acts from being performed through the outer frame side lower hinge member 70.

  Further, since the upper end of the standing wall portion 54 is provided with the barb portion 55 extending forward, when the illegal tool abutting the standing wall portion 54 is bent upward, the barb portion 55 causes the tip of the illegal tool to be bent. Since it can be folded back further forward, it is possible to prevent an unauthorized tool from entering the rear side of the main body frame 4, and a fraudulent act is performed through the portion of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70. Can be reliably prevented.

  By the way, when the standing wall portion 54 extending upward is provided at the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50, the game ball is on the outer frame side with the main body frame 4 opened with respect to the outer frame 2. When falling onto the lower hinge member 70 (horizontal portion 71), the game balls on the horizontal portion 71 are not discharged rearward from the rear end of the horizontal portion 71 due to the presence of the standing wall portion 54, so the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 There is a risk that it will be caught between and. On the other hand, in this embodiment, the horizontal hole 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 and the rearward extending portion 51 of the curtain plate member 50 have a discharge hole 74 through which a game ball can pass and a left discharge hole 52. , And the right discharge hole 53, the game ball on the horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 can be discharged downward from the discharge hole 74 and the like, and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 It is possible to reduce that the game ball is sandwiched between.

  Therefore, by sandwiching the game ball between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4, the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is damaged, and the main body frame 4 does not close in a normal state and the outer frame 2 It is possible to prevent a gap from being formed between the main body frame 4 and an illegal act using the gap.

[3. Overall structure of door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 to 30. 19 is a front view of the door frame in the pachinko machine, FIG. 20 is a right side view of the door frame, FIG. 21 is a left side view of the door frame, and FIG. 22 is a rear view of the door frame. 23 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front right, FIG. 24 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the left front, and FIG. 25 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the rear. 26 is a sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 19, FIG. 27 is a sectional view taken along line BB in FIG. 19, and FIG. 28 is a sectional view taken along line CC in FIG. It is a figure. 29 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled for each main member and seen from the front, and FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled for each main member and seen from the rear.

  As shown in FIG. 29, FIG. 30, etc., the door frame 3 is attached to a rectangular frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 whose outer shape in a front view extends vertically, and a lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100. Handle unit 300, a dish unit 320 attached to the lower front portion of the door frame base unit 100, a performance operation unit 400 attached to the center of the dish unit 320, and a door frame base unit above the dish unit 320. Door frame left side unit 540 attached to the front left part of 100, door frame right side unit 550 attached to the front right part of door frame base unit 100 above the dish unit 320, and door frame left side Door frame top mounted on the front upper part of the door frame base unit 100 above the unit 540 and the door frame right side unit 550 It is provided with a knit 570, a.

  The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3, which will be described in detail later, is a plate-shaped door frame base 110 having a through-hole 111 penetrating forward and backward in a rectangular shape (quadrangle) whose front view extends vertically. And a frame-shaped reinforcing unit 130 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110, and upper and lower ends on the left end side in front view of the reinforcing unit 130, which are hinge-rotatably attached to the body frame 4. An upper hinge member 140 on the door frame side and a lower hinge member 150 on the door frame side, a glass unit 190 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 to close the through hole 111, and a security cover 200 covering the lower rear surface of the glass unit 190, A door frame 3 and a body frame 4, and a body frame 4 and an outer frame 2, which are attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 so as to penetrate through the door frame base 110 and project forward, and which can be opened and closed. An open / close cylinder unit 210 for locking the space, a ball feeding unit 250 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110 for sending game balls to the ball launching device 680, and a ball attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110. A foul cover unit 270 that receives a game ball that has been launched by the launching device 680 and has not reached the game area 5a and discharges it to the lower plate 322 is provided.

  Although the handle unit 300 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail later, the player rotates the rotatable handle 302 so that the game balls stored in the upper tray 321 are moved according to the rotation angle of the handle 302. It can be driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5 with high strength.

  The dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail later, but is attached to a lower portion of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100, and the front surface bulges forward, The effect operation unit 400 is attached to the front end in the center in the left-right direction. The plate unit 320 stores an upper plate 321 that stores game balls to be driven into the game area 5a, and a game ball that is arranged below the upper plate 321 and is supplied from the upper plate 321 and the foul cover unit 270. Within the range of the lower plate 322 that can be stored, the upper plate ball removal button 327 for pulling out the game balls stored in the upper plate 321 to the lower plate 322, and the balance of the cash or the prepaid card inserted into the ball lending machine. A ball lending button 328 for lending a game ball to a player, a return button 329 for returning a cash or a prepaid card from which a game ball lent from a ball lending machine is returned, and a cash inserted in the ball lending machine. Ball return display unit 330 that displays the remaining number of prepaid cards, etc., a production selection left button 331 and a production selection right button 332 that can be operated by the player at the time of presentation, and a lower plate Game balls in 22 and lower tray ball vent button 333 for discharging downwardly the dish unit 320, and a.

  The effect operation unit 400 of the door frame 3 is attached to the front part of the plate unit 320 at the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, can be pressed by the player, and presents effect images to the player. Is something that can be done. The effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail later, but a large operation button 410 that can be operated by the player, and a door frame side effect that is arranged in the operation button 410 so as to be visible from the player side and capable of displaying an effect image. And a display device 460.

  Although the details of the door frame left side unit 540 of the door frame 3 will be described later, the door frame left side unit 540 is mounted on the left side of the front side on the left side of the through hole 111 in the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the dish unit 320, and the through hole 111 ( The left outer side of the game area 5a) is decorated. The door frame left side unit 540 includes a left unit decorative lens member (not shown) capable of light emission decoration.

  Although the details of the door frame right side unit 550 of the door frame 3 will be described later, the door frame right side unit 550 is attached to the right side of the front side on the right side of the through hole 111 in the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the dish unit 320, and the through hole 111 ( The outside right side of the game area 5a) is decorated. The door frame right side unit 550 is protruded forward more than the door frame left side unit 540, and is provided at the front end with the right unit left decorative member 554 and the right unit right decorative member 557 provided on both left and right sides. The right unit decoration lens member 561 is provided. The door frame right side unit 550 can make the right unit left decoration member 554, the right unit right decoration member 557, and the right unit decoration lens member 561 emit light.

  The door frame top unit 570 of the door frame 3 is attached to the upper side of the door frame left side unit 540 and the door frame right side unit 550 and to the upper side of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100. The upper part of the frame 3 is decorated. The door frame top unit 570, which will be described in detail later, has a pair of left and right upper speakers 573, a top middle decoration member 576 protruding forward at the center of the front surface, and a left and right side of the top middle decoration member 576. The decoration includes a top left decoration lens member 579 and a top right decoration lens member 580. In the door frame top unit 570, the top middle decoration member 576, the top left decoration lens member 579, and the top right decoration lens member 580 can be illuminated and decorated.

[3-1. Overall structure of door frame base unit]
The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. 31A is a perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 31B is a perspective view of the door frame base unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 32 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and seen from the front, and FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and seen from the rear. is there.

  The door frame base unit 100 is attached to the main body frame 4 such that the left side in front view closes the front surface of the main body frame 4 so that the door frame base unit 100 can be opened and closed (the hinge can be rotated). The door frame base unit 100 has a handle unit 300 in the lower front corner, a dish unit 320 to which the effect operation unit 400 is attached on the lower front surface of the through hole 111, and a door frame left side unit 540 on the left outer front surface of the through hole 111. The door frame right side unit 550 is attached to the outer right front surface of the through hole 111, and the door frame top unit 570 is attached to the upper outer front surface of the through hole 111.

  As shown in FIGS. 32 and 33 and the like, the door frame base unit 100 includes a plate-shaped door frame base 110 having a through hole 111 which is a rectangular shape whose outer shape in a front view extends vertically and which penetrates back and forth. The frame-shaped reinforcing unit 130 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 and the upper and lower ends of the reinforcing unit 130 on the left end side in a front view of the main frame 4 protruding forward from the door frame base 110. A door frame side upper hinge member 140 and a door frame side lower hinge member 150 rotatably attached to the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640, and a front surface of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110. The door frame left side decoration board 160 mounted on the left side in the view and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and the glass unit 19 rotatably mounted on the rear side of the door frame base 110. The glass unit mounting member 170 for mounting the detachably, and a.

  The door frame base unit 100 is attached to the front surface of the door frame base 110 at the lower right corner when viewed from the front and a cylindrical handle attachment member 180 for attaching the handle unit 300, and to the rear face of the door frame base 110. A glass unit 190 that closes the through hole 111, a security cover 200 that covers the lower rear surface of the glass unit 190, and an open / close cylinder unit that is attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 so as to penetrate the door frame base 110 and project forward. 210, a ball feeding unit 250 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110, and a foul cover unit 270 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110.

  Further, although not shown, the door frame base unit 100 includes various decorative substrates provided in the door frame 3, a ball feeding solenoid 255, a handle rotation detection sensor 307, a handle touch sensor 310, a one-shot button operation sensor 312, Ball lending button 328, return button 329, ball lending return display section 330, effect selection left button 331, effect selection right button 332, vibration motor 424, press detection sensor 440, door frame side effect display device 460 (liquid crystal display device 461) , The upper speaker 573, and the like, and a door body relay board for relaying the connection between the door frame relay board 911 of the board unit 900 in the body frame 4.

[3-1a. Door frame base]
The door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame base 110 is formed into a quadrangle (rectangle) whose outer shape in a front view extends vertically. The door frame base 110 has a through-hole 111 penetrating in the front-rear direction and having an inner peripheral shape in a front view that is formed in a substantially rectangular shape extending vertically. The through-hole 111 has upper and left and right sides forming an inner circumference approaching the outer periphery of the door frame base 110, respectively, and a lower side forming an inner circumference moves up and down from the lower end of the door frame base 110. It is located at a height of about 1/3 of the direction. Therefore, the door frame base 110 is formed in a frame shape as a whole by the through hole 111 penetrating in the front-rear direction. The door frame base 110 is integrally formed of synthetic resin.

  The door frame base 110 is formed at a lower right corner of the front surface when viewed from the front, and has a handle mounting seat surface 112 that is inclined so that the left end side slightly protrudes further forward than the right end side, the handle mounting seat surface 112, and the through hole 111. And a cylinder mounting portion 113 to which the cylinder mounting metal plate 213 of the opening / closing cylinder unit 210 is attached, which is recessed from the rear surface to the front end near the right end in front view, and the opening / closing cylinder unit 210 penetrates back and forth in the cylinder mounting portion 113. Cylinder insertion hole 114 through which the cylinder lock 211 is inserted, and the cylinder insertion hole 114 and the handle mounting seat surface 112 penetrate forward and backward on the left side in a front view, and the entrance 251a and the ball outlet 251b of the ball feeding unit 250 are moved forward. And a ball feeding opening 115 for facing the above.

  Further, the door frame base 110 penetrates to the left from the center of the door frame base 110 in the left-right direction and at the same height as the handle attachment seat surface 112, and faces the ball discharge port 276 of the foul cover unit 270 forward. The bottom plate passage opening 116 and the front end of the door frame base 110 are adjacent to the lower side of the through opening 111 near the left end of the front side of the door frame base 110 so that the penetration ball passage 273 of the foul cover unit 270 faces forward. The plate passage opening 117, the glass unit mounting portion 118 into which the glass frame 191 of the glass unit 190 is inserted, which is recessed from the rear surface toward the front along the inner periphery of the through hole 111, and the left and right upper sides of the door frame base 110. A speaker insertion opening 119 that penetrates in the front and rear at a corner and into which the rear end of the upper speaker 573 of the door frame top unit 570 is inserted.

[3-1b. Reinforcement unit]
The reinforcing unit 130 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 31 and 33 and the like. The reinforcing unit 130 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 to reinforce the door frame base 110 and increase the strength and rigidity of the door frame base 110 (door frame 3). The reinforcing unit 130 includes an upper reinforcing sheet metal 131 extending along the upper side on the rear surface of the door frame base 110 and extending left and right, and a middle reinforcing extending left and right attached on the lower side of the through hole 111 on the rear surface of the door frame base 110. A sheet metal 132, a left reinforcing sheet metal 133 that is attached along the left side in front view on the rear surface of the door frame base 110, and a right reinforcement that is attached vertically along the right side in front view on the rear surface of the door frame base 110. A sheet metal 134 and a locking engagement portion 135 attached to the rear surface of the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 and to which the door frame hook 702 of the locking unit 700 is engaged are provided.

  In the reinforcing unit 130, the left and right ends of the upper reinforcing sheet metal 131 are connected and fixed to the upper ends of the left reinforcing sheet metal 133 and the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 by screws, and the left end of the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 is connected to the left reinforcing sheet metal 133 by screws. It is fixed. The right end of the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 is connected and fixed to the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 via a cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 of the opening / closing cylinder unit 210 described later. Therefore, the reinforcing unit 130 is formed in a frame shape by the upper reinforcing sheet metal 131, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132, the left reinforcing sheet metal 133, the right reinforcing sheet metal 134, and the like.

  The upper reinforcing sheet metal 131, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132, the left reinforcing sheet metal 133, the right reinforcing sheet metal 134, and the locking engagement portion 135 of the reinforcing unit 130 are each formed by appropriately bending a metal plate. The middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 has a notch 132a penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the upper plate passage opening 117 of the door frame base 110.

  Although not shown in detail, the reinforcing unit 130 has a portion that is bent in the front-rear direction in each of the upper reinforcing sheet metal 131, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132, the left reinforcing sheet metal 133, and the right reinforcing sheet metal 134, The part enhances strength and rigidity, and also prevents unauthorized entry of external tools such as piano wires and flat-blade screwdrivers.

[3-1c. Door frame side upper hinge member]
The door frame side upper hinge member 140 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The door frame side upper hinge member 140 includes a door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141 having a pair of protruding pieces 141a that are attached to the door frame base 110 and are vertically spaced apart from each other, and a pair of door frame upper hinge shaft brackets 141 protruding. A columnar door frame upper hinge pin 142 that penetrates the piece 141a and has an upper end inserted into the upper hinge hole 623 for the door frame of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620, and a pair of projecting pieces 141a of the door frame upper hinge pin 142. The disk-shaped brim member 143 mounted at a position between the two, and is interposed between the brim member 143 and the lower projecting piece 141a of the pair of projecting pieces 141a and the hinge pin 142 on the door frame. And a lock spring 144 for urging the door frame upper hinge pin 142 upward.

  Although not shown, the door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141 has a flat plate-shaped mounting piece that connects the rear ends of the pair of projecting pieces 141a to each other. It is formed in a letter shape. In the door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141, a mounting piece connecting a pair of projecting pieces 141a is mounted to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 with a screw.

  A portion (upper end) of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 protruding above the upper protruding piece 141a is rotatably inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620. Although not shown in the drawings, the door frame upper hinge pin 142 is bent in the horizontal direction at a portion projecting below the lower projecting piece 141a. The bent portion abuts the lower surface of the lower protruding piece 141a, thereby restricting the upward movement of the door frame upper hinge pin 142.

  The collar member 143 is an E ring, and is inserted and retained in a groove formed on the outer periphery of the door frame upper hinge pin 142. The lock spring 144 is a coil spring through which the hinge pin 142 on the door frame can be inserted, and its upper end abuts on the flange member 143 and its lower end abuts on the lower protruding piece 141a. The lock spring 144 is interposed between the flange member 143 and the lower protruding piece 141a in a compressed state, and urges the door frame upper hinge pin 142 upward through the flange member 143. .

  The door frame upper hinge member 140 is in a state in which the door frame upper hinge pin 142 is biased upward by the lock spring 144, and the horizontally bent portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 projects downward. By contacting the lower surface of the piece 141a, further upward movement is restricted. In this state, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 projects a predetermined amount above the upper surface of the upper projecting piece 141a.

  The door frame side upper hinge member 140 is configured such that when a worker holds a horizontally bent portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 and pulls the portion downward against the biasing force of the lock spring 144, the door frame is closed. The upper hinge pin 142 can be moved downward as a whole, and the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 can be recessed below the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 141a. Therefore, the door frame side upper hinge member 140 inserts the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 from below or pulls it out. You can Accordingly, by inserting the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 of the door frame upper hinge member 140 into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main body frame upper hinge member 620, the front left upper end of the door frame 3 in front view. The hinge can be rotatably supported with respect to the main body frame 4.

  Further, in the door frame side upper hinge member 140, a portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 supported by the pair of projecting pieces 141a of the door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141 is a door frame of the door frame lower hinge member 150 described later. It is supported coaxially with the lower hinge pin 152. Thereby, the door frame 3 upper hinge member 140 and the door frame lower lower hinge member 150 can rotate the door frame 3 relative to the main body frame 4 in a good condition.

[3-1d. Door frame side lower hinge member]
The door frame side lower hinge member 150 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 and 32. The door frame lower hinge member 150 includes a door frame lower hinge shaft bracket 151 having a flat plate-shaped extending piece 151a that is attached to the door frame base 110 and extends forward, and a door frame lower hinge shaft bracket. A cylindrical door frame lower hinge pin 152 (see FIGS. 21 and 22) protruding downward from the vicinity of the front end portion of the extending piece 151a is provided.

  The door frame lower hinge shaft bracket 151 has a flat plate-shaped extending piece 151a extending horizontally from the rear end of the flat plate-like extending piece 151a (not shown), and has an overall shape in a side view. Are formed in a substantially L shape. The door frame lower hinge shaft bracket 151 has an attachment piece (not shown) attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 with a screw.

  The lower hinge pin 152 of the door frame is formed in a truncated cone shape with its lower end narrowing downward. The door frame lower hinge pin 152 is rotatably inserted from above into a door frame hinge hole 644 of a main body frame side lower hinge member 640 in the main body frame 4 described later. The door frame lower hinge pin 152 is arranged coaxially with the door frame upper hinge pin 142 of the door frame upper hinge member 140.

  The door frame lower hinge member 150 can hinge the door frame 3 relative to the main body frame 4 by inserting the door frame lower hinge pin 152 into the door frame hinge hole 644 of the main body frame side lower hinge member 640. Can be supported by.

[3-1e. Door frame left side decoration board]
The door frame left side decorative substrate 160 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 and 32. The door frame left side decoration substrate 160 is attached to the front side of the door frame base 110 on the left side of the through hole 111 in front view. The door frame left side decoration board 160 extends vertically from the height of a position lower than the speaker insertion opening 119 on the left side in front view of the door frame base 110 to the height near the vertical center of the through opening 111. The frame left side upper decorative substrate 161 and the door frame left side lower decorative extending vertically from the height of the lower position of the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 161 to approximately the same height as the lower end of the upper plate passage opening 117. And a substrate 162.

  The door frame left side upper decoration substrate 161 and the door frame left side lower decoration substrate 162 of the door frame left side decoration substrate 160 are provided with a plurality of LEDs 161a, 162a capable of irradiating light to the front side, respectively. These LEDs 161a and 162a are full-color LEDs.

  The door frame left side decorative substrate 160 is located behind the door frame left side unit 540, which will be described later, in a state where the door frame 3 is assembled, and includes a plurality of LEDs 161a and 162a provided (mounted) on the front surface. By appropriately emitting light, the left unit decoration lens member of the door frame left side unit 540 can be made to emit light.

[3-1f. Glass unit mounting member]
The glass unit mounting member 170 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The glass unit mounting member 170 is rotatably mounted on the rear side of the door frame base 110 and is for detachably mounting the glass unit 190. The glass unit mounting member 170 includes a disk-shaped base 171 that is mounted rotatably around an axis extending in the front-rear direction on the rear side of the door frame base 110, and protrudes from the base 171 in a rod shape in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis. And a projecting portion 172 that is open.

  The glass unit mounting member 170 is rotatably mounted on the rear surface of the door frame base 110, below the pair of speaker insertion openings 119, and on the outer side of the glass unit mounting portion 118.

  The glass unit mounting member 170 is rotated in such a manner that the projecting portion 172 projects upward from the base portion 171, so that the projecting portion 172 is located outside the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110 in a rear view. The glass unit 190 can be inserted into the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110, and the glass unit 190 can be removed from the glass unit mounting portion 118.

  When the glass unit 190 is inserted into the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110, the glass unit mounting member 170 is rotated so that the projecting portion 172 projects downward from the base 171. The glass unit 190 can be attached to the door frame base 110 by coming into contact with the rear side of the attachment piece 191a of the unit 190 and restricting the rearward movement of the upper portion of the glass unit 190.

  Since the protrusion 172 of the glass unit mounting member 170 is rotatably mounted on the door frame base 110, the center of gravity of the glass unit mounting member 170 is located inside the protrusion 172. . From this, in the state where the glass unit mounting member 170 can freely rotate, the protruding portion 172 becomes stable in a state of protruding downward from the base portion 171. In the glass unit mounting member 170, the protrusion 172 restricts the rearward movement of the glass unit 190 at the rotational position where the protrusion 172 protrudes downward from the base 171, so that the glass unit mounting member 170 is mounted. Even if vibration or the like is applied to the member 170, the entire protruding portion 172 does not rotate so as to project upward from the base portion 171, and the rearward movement restriction of the glass unit 190 is naturally released. Absent.

  When removing the glass unit 190 from the door frame base 110, the glass unit mounting member 170 is rotated so that the projecting portion 172 projects upward from the base portion 171, and the projecting portion 172 is attached to the mounting piece 191a of the glass unit 190. By moving the glass unit 190 further outward, the upper side of the glass unit 190 can be moved backward, and the glass unit 190 can be removed from the door frame base 110.

[3-1 g. Handle mounting member]
The handle mounting member 180 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The handle attachment member 180 is for attaching the handle unit 300 to the front surface of the door frame base 110. As shown in FIG. 32, FIG. 33, etc., the handle attaching member 180 includes a cylindrical tubular portion 181 extending in the front-rear direction, and a rear end of the tubular portion 181 outward in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the tubular portion 181. An annular flange portion 182 that extends and a plurality of protrusions that project into the tubular portion 181 and extend over the entire axial length of the tubular portion 181 and that are arranged at unequal intervals in the circumferential direction of the tubular portion 181 ( In this example, three protrusions 183 are provided, and a plurality of reinforcing ribs 184 that connect the outer peripheral surface of the tubular portion 181 and the front surface of the flange portion 182 and are arranged in the circumferential direction of the tubular portion 181 are provided. .

  The handle attachment member 180 is attached to the handle attachment seat surface 112 with a screw in a state where the rear surface of the flange portion 182 is in contact with the front surface of the handle attachment seat surface 112 of the door frame base 110.

  The inner diameter of the tubular portion 181 is formed to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of the base portion 301a of the handle base 301 of the handle unit 300. One of the three protrusions 183 is provided on the upper side of the tubular portion 181, and the other two are provided on the lower side of the tubular portion 181. These three protrusions 183 are formed at positions corresponding to the three groove portions 301c in the handle base 301. Therefore, the handle attachment member 180 can insert the base portion 301a of the handle base 301 into the tubular portion 181 only when the three protrusions 183 are aligned with the three groove portions 301c of the handle base 301. The rotation position of the handle base 301 (handle unit 300) with respect to the door frame base 110 can be restricted.

  Since the axis of the tubular portion 181 extends perpendicularly to the rear surface of the flange portion 182, the handle attaching member 180 is attached to the inclined handle attaching seat surface 112 of the door frame base 110, thereby The axis of 181 is inclined so as to extend to the front right, and the handle unit 300 can be attached to the door frame base 110 in the same inclined state.

[3-1h. Glass unit]
The glass unit 190 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The glass unit 190 closes the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 so that the rear can be visually recognized from the front. The glass unit 190 includes a frame-shaped glass frame 191 that is larger than the inner peripheral shape of the through-hole 111 of the door frame base 110 and that can be attached to the glass unit attachment portion 118, and the inside of the glass frame 191 is closed and the outer periphery is a glass frame. And two transparent glass plates 192 attached to 191. The two glass plates 192 are attached to the front end side and the rear end side of the glass frame 191, respectively, and are separated from each other in the front-rear direction so as to form a space therebetween (see FIG. 26 and the like).

  The glass frame 191 has a pair of mounting pieces 191a extending outward in a flat plate shape from positions below the left and right upper corners in a front view, and a band protruding downward from the lower end and extending along the lower side. And a plate-shaped locking piece 191b. The attachment piece 191a of the glass frame 191 can be brought into contact with the protrusion 172 of the glass unit attachment member 170. The locking piece 191b can be inserted into the space between the door frame base 110 and the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 of the reinforcing unit 130 (see FIG. 26).

  In this glass unit 190, the locking piece 191b of the glass frame 191 is inserted from the rear side of the door frame base 110 into the gap between the door frame base 110 and the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 of the reinforcing unit 130 from above. , The front end of the glass frame 191 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110, the glass unit mounting member 170 is rotated, and the projection 172 of the glass unit mounting member 170 is attached to the mounting piece 191a of the glass frame 191. It is attached to the door frame base 110 by bringing it into contact with the rear surface.

  When the glass unit 190 is removed from the door frame base 110, it can be removed in the reverse order of the above. Accordingly, the glass unit 190 can be attached to and detached from the door frame base 110.

[3-1i. Security cover]
The security cover 200 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The security cover 200 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 so as to cover the lower portion of the rear surface of the glass unit 190, and is made of a transparent synthetic resin. The security cover 200 includes a flat plate-shaped main body portion 201 having an outer periphery formed in a predetermined shape, a flat plate-shaped rear projecting piece 202 protruding rearward along the outer peripheral edge of the main body portion 201, and left and right spaced apart. And a pair of locking pieces 203 projecting forward of the main body 201 and capable of being locked to the rear side of the door frame base 110.

  The body 201 of the security cover 200 is formed such that the lower end thereof protrudes below the lower end of the glass unit 190 when attached to the door frame base 110. Further, the main body 201 is formed in a shape along the lower end of the game area 5a of the game board 5 in a state where the upper end is assembled to the pachinko machine 1. More specifically, the upper end of the main body 201 is formed in a shape along a part of an inner rail 1002, a part of the out guiding part 1003, a part of the lower right rail 1004, and a right rail 1005 of a front component 1000 described later. It is formed so as not to project into the game area 5a when assembled in the pachinko machine 1.

  The rear protrusion 202 is formed over substantially the entire outer peripheral edge of the main body 201. Therefore, the security cover 200 is formed in a shallow box shape that is opened rearward by the main body 201 and the rear protruding piece 202, and has high strength and rigidity. Further, as shown in FIG. 33, the rear protruding piece 202 also protrudes rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body portion 201, which is different from the outer peripheral edge of the main body portion 201. A rear protrusion 202 that protrudes rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 201 is formed along the part of the outer rail 1001 in the front component member 1000 of the game board 5 in the state assembled in the pachinko machine 1. ing.

  The rear protruding piece 202 is not formed at a portion of the game board 5 located between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 in the assembled state of the pachinko machine 1. As a result, the game ball passing between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 (the game ball shot by the ball launching device 680) does not come into contact with the rear protrusion 202 of the security cover 200, and within the game area 5a. It does not prevent the player from hitting the game ball.

  The pair of locking pieces 203 are elastically locked to the rear side of the door frame base 110. Thereby, the security cover 200 can be easily attached to and detached from the door frame base 110.

  In the security cover 200 assembled in the pachinko machine 1, the front surface of the main body portion 201 contacts the rear surface of the glass unit 190 (the rear end of the glass frame 191), and a portion protruding rearward from the lower side of the main body portion 201 is provided. The removed rear protruding piece 202 is in a state of being inserted into the crime prevention recess (not shown) of the front component 1000. Further, in the security cover 200, the rear protruding piece 202 protruding rearward from the lower side of the main body 201 is in a state of protruding rearward from the front surface of the front component member 1000 so as to contact the lower surface of the front component member 1000. . As a result, the gap between the security cover 200 and the game board 5 (the front component 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear projection 202 of the security cover 200 and the security recess of the front component 1000, and thus the game board. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is made to enter the game area 5a from below the front surface of 5 through the crime prevention cover 200 and the front component member 1000, it is obstructed by the rear projection 202 or the crime prevention recess, and the game is played. It is possible to prevent unauthorized tools from entering the area 5a.

[3-1j. Open / close cylinder unit]
The opening / closing cylinder unit 210 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The opening / closing cylinder unit 210 is attached from the rear side to the cylinder attachment portion 113 at a position between the through hole 111 and the handle attachment seat surface 112 near the right end of the door frame base 110 in a front view, and cooperates with a locking unit 700 described later. It works to open and close the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and to open and close the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4.

  The open / close cylinder unit 210 has a cylinder-shaped cylinder lock 211 having a keyhole 211a on the front surface and extending in the front-rear direction, and a lock unit attached to the rear end of the cylinder lock 211 for rotating a key inserted in the keyhole 211a. The rotation transmission member 212 that transmits the rotation to the key cylinder 710 of the 700, and the cylinder mounting plate 213 that mounts the cylinder lock 211 to the door frame base 110 (reinforcement unit 130) are provided.

  The cylinder lock 211 can rotate the key by inserting a corresponding key (not shown) into the key hole 211a. If the corresponding key is a clockwise key or a counterclockwise key when viewed from the front. It can be rotated by a predetermined angle in the direction of.

  The rotation transmitting member 212 is formed in a cylindrical shape with an open rear (specifically, a conical cylindrical shape whose diameter increases toward the rear), and extends from the rear end to the front at a position facing each other with the central axis interposed therebetween. It has a pair of notches 212a that are notched. The rotation transmitting member 212 is formed so that the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 in the main body frame 4 is inserted from the rear side, and the protrusion of the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 is inserted into the pair of notches 212a. By doing so, the rotation of the rotation transmission member 212 (the key inserted in the key hole 211a of the cylinder lock 211) can be transmitted to the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 to rotate the key cylinder 710.

  The cylinder mounting metal plate 213 is formed by bending a single metal plate, and is formed in a convex shape projecting forward in a plan view. More specifically, the cylinder mounting metal plate 213 includes a rectangular flat plate-shaped front plate portion 213a extending vertically in a front view and a pair of side plate portions 213b extending rearward from both right and left sides of the front plate portion 213a. And a pair of mounting plate portions 213c that extend in a plate shape in a direction away from each other from the rear sides of the pair of side plate portions 213b. The front plate portion 213a of the cylinder mounting metal plate 213 is penetrated by the cylinder lock 211 from the rear at a position substantially in the vertical direction, and the rear end of the cylinder lock 211 is attached to the rear surface of the front plate portion 213a. In the pair of mounting plate portions 213c of the cylinder mounting metal plate 213, the mounting plate portion 213c on the left side in front view is mounted on the right end part of the middle reinforcing metal plate 132 of the reinforcing unit 130, and the mounting plate part 213c on the right side in front view of the reinforcing unit 130. It is attached to the right reinforcing sheet metal 134. As a result, the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 connects the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 and the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 to the reinforcing unit 130.

  When the opening / closing cylinder unit 210 is assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the front end of the cylinder lock 211 protruding forward from the front plate portion 213a of the cylinder mounting metal plate 213 has a cylinder insertion hole from the rear side of the door frame base 110. The front plate portion 213a and the pair of side plate portions 213b of the cylinder mounting metal plate 213 are accommodated in the box-shaped cylinder mounting portion 113 which is inserted rearward and protrudes toward the front of the door frame base 110. ing.

[3-1k. Ball feeding unit]
The ball feeding unit 250 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 34 and 35. 34A is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 34B is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 35 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 35 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the rear case and the fraud prevention member removed. The ball feeding unit 250 can supply the game balls supplied from the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 to the ball launching device 680 one by one, and the game balls stored in the upper plate 321 can be supplied to the upper plate ball. By operating the pull-out button 327, the lower plate can be pulled out.

  In the ball feed unit 250, the game balls stored in the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 are supplied through the upper plate ball feed port 323d of the plate unit base 323 and the ball feed opening 115 of the door frame base 110 and penetrated in the front-rear direction. A box-shaped front cover 251 having an entrance 251a and a ball outlet 251b opening below the entrance 251a and having an open rear, and a box having a rear end closed and a front open. The rear cover 252 having a hitting ball supply port 252a for supplying the game ball entering from the entrance 251a of the front cover 251 penetrating in the front-rear direction to the ball launching device 680, the rear cover 252 and the front cover. A partition portion 253 that is rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between 251 and partitions between the entrance 251a and the ball outlet 251b on the rear side of the front cover 251. The ball removing member 253 and the game balls on the partition 253a of the ball removing member 253 are sent to the hitting ball supply port 252a of the rear cover 252 one by one, and vertically between the front cover 251 and the rear cover 252. A ball feeding member 254 rotatably supported around an extended axis and a ball feeding solenoid 255 for rotating the ball feeding member 254 are provided.

  In the ball feeding unit 250, as shown in the drawing, the ball feeding member 254 is arranged on the right side of the entrance 251a in a front view, and the ball removing member 253 is arranged on the left side of the ball feeding member 254 and the ball feeding member 254. Ball feeding solenoids 255 are arranged on the right side.

  The front cover 251 of the ball feeding unit 250 includes an arc-shaped slit 251c formed concentrically with respect to the rotation center of the ball removing member 253 on the left side of the ball removing port 251b in a front view. An operating rod 253c of a ball removing member 253, which will be described later, extends forward. In addition, the front cover 251 extends upward from the upper edge of the entrance 251a, and when the door frame 3 is assembled, the front cover 251 is upstream of the ball feed guide path 323e and the ball guide path 323f of the dish unit base 323. It is formed so as to close the portion open to the rear on the end side from the rear side.

  The ball removing member 253 is a partition below the entrance 251a, which divides the space between the entrance 251a and the ball removing opening 251b, and the upper surface of which is lowered toward the ball feeding member 254. It extends downward from the end opposite to the feed member 254, bends in a V shape from near the middle in the up-down direction toward the lower center of the ball outlet 251b, and the lower end rotates around an axis extending in the front-rear direction. A pivot rod 253b that is movably supported, a rod-shaped operating rod 253c that protrudes forward from the upper end of the pivot rod 253b, and a side below the operating rod 253c from the side of the pivot rod 253b. The partition portion 253a and a weight portion 253d protruding to the opposite side are provided. The operating rod 253c of the ball removing member 253 is formed so as to project forward through an arcuate slit 251c formed in the front cover 251 (see FIG. 34 (a)). The operating rod 253c comes into contact with the upper end of the operation transmitting portion 327a which is operated by pressing the upper dish ball removing button 327 of the dish unit 320 through the ball feeding opening 115 of the door frame base 110.

  The ball feeding member 254 includes a blocking portion 254a, which is fan-shaped in a plan view around a rotation axis extending in the up-down direction, facing the entrance 251a and the partition portion 253a of the ball-removing member 253, and a rear end of the blocking portion 254a. It has a sphere holding portion 254b which is recessed in an arc shape toward the center of the rotation axis, and a rod-shaped rod portion 254c which extends downward from the rear end of the sphere holding portion 254b. The blocking portion 254a and the ball holding portion 254b of the ball feeding member 254 are formed adjacent to each other within an angle range of about 180 ° about the axis of rotation. Further, the ball holding portion 254b of the ball feeding member 254 has a size capable of holding one game ball. The ball feeding member 254 is rotated around the axis of rotation by moving the rod portion 254c arranged at a position eccentric to the axis of rotation by the driving of the ball feeding solenoid 255, in the left-right direction.

  The ball feeding member 254 has a supply position in which the blocking section 254a faces the partition section 253a, and at the same time, the ball holding section 254b faces the ball hitting supply port 252a, and the ball holding section 254b faces the partition section 253a. It is adapted to rotate between a holding position facing toward. When the ball feeding member 254 is in the supply position, the game ball held in the ball holding portion 254b is supplied from the hitting ball supply port 252a to the ball launching device 680, and at the same time, the game ball has entered the partition 253a from the entrance 251a. However, the movement to the ball holding portion 254b (ball hitting supply port 252a) side is blocked by the blocking portion 254a, and the ball stays on the partition portion 253a. On the other hand, when the ball feeding member 254 is rotated to the holding position, the ball holding section 254b faces the partition section 253a, and the end of the ball holding section 254b on the rod section 254c side closes the hit ball supply port 252a. Only one game ball on the partition part 253a is held in the ball holding part 254b.

  Further, the ball feeding unit 250 is moved back and forth by the movement of the ball feeding solenoid 255, which causes the tip to swing vertically, and the movement of the tip of the ball feeding operating rod 256 which swings vertically. And a ball feed crank 257 for rotating the ball feed member 254 around an axis extending vertically. The ball feed crank 257 is provided with an engaging portion 257a that is engageable with the vertically moving tip of the ball feed operating rod 256 and extends in the left-right direction, and a side of the engaging portion 257a that engages with the ball feed operating rod 256. A shaft portion 257b that is disposed on the opposite side and is rotatably supported around a shaft that extends in the front-rear direction between the front cover 251 and the rear cover 252, and extends upward from the shaft portion 257b. A transmission portion 257c that engages with a rod-shaped rod portion 254c (see FIG. 35B) that protrudes downward from a position eccentric to the rotation center of the member 254 is provided.

  The ball feed unit 250 transmits the movement of the ball feed actuating rod 256 oscillated by the drive of the ball feed solenoid 255 moving forward and backward by the ball feed actuating rod 256 and the ball feed crank 257 to move the ball feeding member 254. It can be rotated. When the ball feeding solenoid 255 is not driven (normal time), the ball feeding operating rod 256 is separated from the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 255 and the tip is positioned downward. In this state, the ball feeding member 254 is at the supply position. It will be in the state of being located at. Further, when the ball feeding solenoid 255 is driven, the ball feeding actuating rod 256 is attracted to the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 255 and the tip is positioned upward, and the ball feeding member 254 rotates to the holding position. That is, when the ball feeding solenoid 255 is driven (ON state), the ball feeding member 254 receives one game ball, and when the ball feeding solenoid 255 is released from driving (OFF state), the ball feeding member 254. The game ball accepted by the player can be sent (supplied) to the ball launching device 680 side. The driving of the ball feeding solenoid 255 in the ball feeding unit 250 is controlled by a firing control section (not shown) of the payout control board 951 in synchronization with the drive control of the firing solenoid 682.

  In addition, the rotatably supported ball removing member 253 of the ball feeding unit 250 receives a moment to rotate counterclockwise as viewed from the front by the weight portion 253d, but projects forward. Since the operating rod 253c comes into contact with the upper end of the operation transmitting portion 327a which is operated by pressing the upper bowl ball removing button 327 of the dish unit 320, the rotation thereof is restricted, and therefore the ball removing member 253 is normally operated. The partition 253a divides between the entrance 251a and the ball outlet 251b, so that the game ball does not enter the ball outlet 251b side.

  Then, when the player presses the upper plate ball removing button 327 of the plate unit 320 downward, the upper plate ball removing slider 327b slides downward together with the operation transmitting portion 327a, and the operation transmitting portion 327a moves downward. Accordingly, the operating rod 253c also moves relatively downward. When the operating rod 253c moves downward together with the operation transmitting portion 327a, the ball removing member 253 rotates counterclockwise in a front view, and the partition between the entrance 251a and the ball outlet 251b by the partition 253a is released. To be done. As a result, the game ball that has entered from the entrance 251a is discharged from the ball outlet 251b to the ball removing guide path 323f of the plate unit 320, and is discharged (supplied) to the lower plate 322 via the lower plate ball supply port 323c. be able to.

  The upper dish ball pulling slider 327b having the operation transmitting portion 327a with which the operating rod 253c of the ball punching member 253 abuts is urged upward by the upper dish ball pulling spring 327c. Even if the game balls are vigorously supplied, the impact can be absorbed by the upper plate ball removing spring 327c via the operating rod 253c, and the ball removing member 253 and the like can be prevented from being damaged. The game ball can be prevented from bouncing off at the partition portion 253a.

  Further, the ball feeding unit 250 is provided with a rectangular mounting recess 252b (see FIG. 35B and the like) which is recessed forward rightward in the rear view of the hitting ball supply port 252a in the rear cover 252, and The fraud prevention member 260 is mounted in the mounting recess 252b. The fraud prevention member 260 of the ball feeding unit 250 is formed of a hard metal plate such as tool steel or stainless steel, and is detachably attached to the inside of the attachment recess 252b of the rear cover 252 from the rear side.

  The fraud prevention member 260 is formed in a rectangular shape whose outer shape in a front view extends to the left and right, and an upper piece portion 261 which is vertically separated at a substantially vertical center between a right side and a left side for a predetermined distance. A lower piece portion 262 and an inclined portion 263 each formed in a C-chamfered shape on the tip side (the right end side in front view) of the sides of the upper piece portion 261 and the lower piece portion 262 that face each other are provided. . The upper piece portion 261 of the fraud prevention member 260 is bent with respect to the general surface of the fraud prevention member 260 such that the right end in front view protrudes rearward. The lower piece portion 262 extends on the same plane as the general surface of the fraud prevention member 260. Thereby, in a plan view, the upper piece 261 and the lower piece 262 form a V-shaped groove that widens toward the right.

  The fraud prevention member 260 is mounted in the mounting recess 252b of the rear cover 252 so that the V-shaped groove formed by the upper piece 261 and the lower piece 262 is in communication with the inside of the hit ball supply port 252a. Become.

  According to this fraud prevention member 260, a fraudulent game ball attached with a string is driven into the game area 5a from the upper plate 321 via the ball feeding unit 250 by the ball launching device 680 and is attached to the fraudulent game ball. When an illegal act is performed by operating a string to move an illegal game ball into and out of the first starting opening 2002 and the like, it is illegal due to the momentum of the illegal game ball launched (struck) by the ball launching device 680. A string attached to a game ball is inserted between the upper piece 261 and the lower piece 262, and then the V-shape formed by the upper piece 261 and the lower piece 262 becomes narrower. It can be cut by a part, and it is possible to prevent an illegal act using an illegal game ball with a string attached.

[3-1l. Foul cover unit]
The foul cover unit 270 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 36 to 38. FIG. 36A is a perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 36B is a perspective view of the foul cover unit as seen from the rear. 37A is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit as seen from the front with the lid member removed, and FIG. 37B is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit as seen from the rear with the lid member removed. is there. Further, FIG. 38 is a front view of the foul cover unit with the lid member removed.

  As shown in the figure, the foul cover unit 270 includes a shallow box-shaped unit main body 271 that is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 and has an open front side, and a flat plate-shaped lid member attached to the front surface of the unit main body 271. And 272. The foul cover unit 270 penetrates forward and backward at the upper left corner of the front view, and a through ball that connects the normal guiding path 861 of the lower full ball path unit 860 of the body frame 4 and the upper plate ball supply port 323a of the plate unit 320. The passage 273 and a full-ball receiving port 274 that is open to the rear on the lower right side in a front view of the through-ball passage 273 and is capable of communicating with the lower full-ball guiding path 862 of the lower full-ball path unit 860 of the main body frame 4. And are equipped with.

  In addition, the foul cover unit 270 does not reach the inside of the game area 5a despite being launched by the ball launching device 680 of the main body frame 4 on the right side of the full tank receiving port 274 when viewed from the front side. A foul ball receiving port 275 for receiving a game ball (fal ball) and a game ball received in the full ball receiving port 274 and the foul ball receiving port 275 are opened forward in the vicinity of the lower right corner of the front view. And a ball discharge port 276 which is connected to the lower plate ball supply port 323c of the plate unit 320.

  Further, the foul cover unit 270 is formed by the unit main body 271 and the lid member 272 between the full ball receiving port 274, the foul ball receiving port 275, and the ball discharging port 276, and can store a predetermined amount of game balls. A storage passage 277 having a wide space, a flat plate-shaped movable piece 278 that constitutes a part of the inner wall of the storage passage 277 and has a lower end rotatably attached to the unit main body 271, and a movable piece. A full tank detection sensor 279 for detecting rotation of the 278 in a direction away from the storage passage 277, and a spring 280 for biasing the movable piece 278 toward the center of the storage passage 277 are provided.

  The foul cover unit 270 has a certain number in the storage passage 277 when the lower tray 322 of the tray unit 320 is filled with the game balls and the ball is not discharged from the ball discharge port 276 to the lower tray 322 side. The game balls can be stored. When a certain number of game balls are stored in the storage passage 277, the weight of the game balls causes the upper end of the movable piece 278 to move away from the storage passage 277 against the biasing force of the spring 280. The movable piece 278 rotates, and the rotation is detected by the full tank detection sensor 279. As a result, it is possible to determine that the lower plate 322 is full of game balls, so when the full tank detection sensor 279 detects a full tank, further payout of game balls is stopped, and It is possible to notify the player or a staff member of the game hall to that effect and urge the lower plate 322 to be completely filled.

  Further, the foul cover unit 270 is attached to the rear side of the unit main body 271 and below the through-ball passage 273, and the guide path opening / closing door of the lower full tank ball path unit 860 in the payout unit 800 of the main body frame 4 described later. A door opening / closing contact portion 281 with which the operating protrusion 863e of 863 can abut is provided (see FIG. 127). The door opening / closing contact portion 281 is inclined so that the rear surface moves downward as it goes downward. The door opening / closing abutment portion 281 is formed so that when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the operating projection 863e of the guideway opening / closing door 863 abuts. When the actuating protrusion 863e of the guideway opening / closing door 863 comes into contact with the door opening / closing contact portion 281, the guideway opening / closing door 863 rotates and the downstream ends of the normal guideway 861 and the full tank guideway 862 (front opening). ) Can be opened.

[3-2. Handle unit]
The handle unit 300 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 and 40. 39A is a front view of the handle unit in the door frame, FIG. 39B is a perspective view of the handle unit seen from the front, and FIG. 39B is a perspective view of the handle unit seen from the rear. Further, FIG. 40 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 40 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit disassembled and seen from the rear. The handle unit 300 is attached to the handle attachment member 180 of the door frame base unit 100, and is operated by the player so that the game ball in the upper plate 321 can be driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5. Is.

  The handle unit 300 covers the handle base 301 attached to the tubular portion 181 of the handle attachment member 180 of the door frame base unit 100, the handle 302 rotatably attached to the front end of the handle base 301, and the front end side of the handle 302. And a handle cover 303 attached to the handle base 301.

  Further, the handle unit 300 has an inner base 304 attached to the front side of the handle base 301 on the rear side of the handle 302, a handle 302 attached to the front end, and a rotatably attached inner base 304 and the handle base 301 to provide an outer periphery. A handle base 301 and an inner member having a shaft member 305 having a drive gear portion 305a, a transmission gear 306 meshing with the drive gear portion 305a of the shaft member 305, and a detection shaft 307a rotating integrally with the transmission gear 306. The handle rotation detection sensor 307 is sandwiched between the base and the base.

  Further, the handle unit 300 has one end attached to the handle base 301 and the other end attached to the handle 302 so as to return the handle 302 to an initial rotation position (a rotation end in a counterclockwise direction in a front view). The urging handle return spring 308 and one end side of which is attached to the inner base 304 and the other end side of which is attached to the transmission gear 306, and the detection shaft 307a of the handle rotation detection sensor 307 is rotated clockwise when viewed from the front via the transmission gear 306. The auxiliary spring 309 biasing in the direction, the handle touch sensor 310 attached to the handle base 301 behind the inner base 304, and the front end side of the front end outer peripheral surface of the handle base 301 from the left side in the front view to the outside. The handle is protruding and the base end is behind the inner base 304. A single-shot button 311 attached to the base 301 rotatably around an axis extending in the front-rear direction, and a single-shot button operation sensor 312 attached to the handle base 301 to detect a pressing operation of the single-shot button 311. There is.

  The handle base 301 of the handle unit 300 has a cylindrical base portion 301a extending in the front-rear direction, a disc-shaped front end portion 301b radially protruding from the front end of the base portion 301a, and a recess from the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical base portion 301a. And groove portions 301c that extend in the axial direction and are formed at three unequal intervals in the circumferential direction. The outer diameter of the base portion 301a of the handle base 301 is slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the tubular portion 181 of the handle mounting member 180. The three groove portions 301c are formed at positions corresponding to the three protrusions 183 of the tubular portion 181 of the handle mounting member 180. Therefore, the base 301a can be inserted into the tubular portion 181 of the handle mounting member 180 with the three grooves 301c aligned with the three protrusions 183, and the protrusions 183 are respectively inserted into the three grooves 301c. When the handle base 301 is inserted, the handle base 301 cannot rotate relative to the handle mounting member 180.

  The handle 302 has four rotating shafts (shaft members 305) and four first protrusions 302a, second protrusions 302b, third protrusions 302c, and fourth protrusions 302d protruding outward from the outer peripheral surface in the circumferential direction. Two slits 302e extending in a circular arc shape as a center and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and a rear end of the handle return spring 308 are locked so as to project rearward from a position inside the rotation center of the slit 302e. Locking projection 302f.

  The four first protrusions 302a, the second protrusions 302b, the third protrusions 302c, and the fourth protrusions 302d are sequentially provided in a clockwise direction in a front view. More specifically, the first protrusion 302a has a side surface in the clockwise direction in front view of the portion most protruding from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 302, which bulges outward so as to bulge outward. The side surface in the direction of is recessed (curved) so as to be curved inward. The second projection 302b is such that the most projecting portion from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 302 is separated from the most projecting portion of the first projection 302a in the clockwise direction by a rotation angle of about 85 degrees. It projects slightly lower. In the second protrusion 302b, the side surface in the clockwise direction in front view of the most projecting portion swells so as to bulge outward, and the side surface in the opposite direction around the opposite direction is curved inward. Thus, it is formed in a shape similar to the first protrusion 302a.

  The third protrusion 302c is such that the portion of the handle 302 that is most protruded from the outer peripheral surface is separated from the portion of the second protrusion 302b that is most protruded in the clockwise direction by a rotation angle of about 70 degrees. It projects at about half the height. The side surfaces of both sides of the third protrusion 302c are inclined substantially linearly, and the side surface in the clockwise direction is more gently inclined than the side surface in the counterclockwise direction which is the opposite side. The fourth projection 302d is such that the portion most protruding from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 302 is separated from the most protruding portion of the third projection 302c in the clockwise direction by a rotation angle of about 55 degrees, and It projects slightly higher. The side surfaces on both sides of the fourth protrusion 302d are inclined in a substantially straight line, and are formed in a substantially isosceles triangle.

  The handle cover 303 is provided with three mounting bosses 303a that are rounded at the center of the front surface and bulge forward and project rearward. The three attachment bosses 303a penetrate the slits 302e of the handle 302 from the front and are attached to the front surface of the handle base 301. Since the mounting boss 303a of the handle cover 303 penetrates the slit 302e of the handle 302, the mounting boss 303a comes into contact with the circumferential end of the slit 302e, thereby restricting the rotation angle of the handle 302. In this example, the handle 302 can be rotated within a rotation angle range of about 120 degrees.

  The handle unit 300 is attached to the handle attachment seat surface 112 of the door frame base 110 via a handle attachment member 180. The handle mounting seat surface 112 of the door frame base 110 is inclined so that the right end side is located rearward of the left end side in a plan view, and faces the outside (open side), so that the handle mounting member 180 is fixed. The handle unit 300 mounted via the above also inclines outward in a plan view (in other words, the tip end thereof inclines toward the outside of the pachinko machine 1 with respect to a line orthogonal to the front surface of the pachinko machine 1). And fixed to the door frame 3. As a result, the player can easily grip the handle 302 of the handle unit 300, and the player can perform the turning operation without feeling uncomfortable.

  The handle rotation detection sensor 307 of the handle unit 300 is a variable resistor, and when the handle 302 is rotated, the detection shaft 307a of the handle rotation detection sensor 307 rotates via the shaft member 305 and the transmission gear 306. The internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 307 changes according to the rotation angle of the detection shaft 307a, and the driving force of the firing solenoid 682 in the ball launching device 680 described later changes according to the internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 307. , A game ball is driven into the game area 5a with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 302.

  The outer peripheral surfaces of the handle 302 and the handle cover 303 are plated with conductive material, and when the player touches the handle 302 or the like, the handle touch sensor 310 detects the contact. Then, when the handle 302 is rotated while the handle touch sensor 310 detects the contact of the player, the detection of the handle rotation detection sensor 307 is accepted, and the firing solenoid is emitted with a strength according to the rotation angle of the handle 302. The drive of 682 is controlled so that a game ball can be hit. In other words, even if the player tries to hit the game ball into the game area 5a by rotating the handle 302 in some way without touching the handle 302, the firing solenoid 682 is not driven and the game ball can be hit. You can't. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from rotating the handle 302 by a method different from the original one and playing the game, and it is possible to reduce the load (load) on the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. .

  Further, in the handle unit 300, when the player presses the one-shot button 311 while rotating the handle 302, the one-shot button operation sensor 312 detects the operation of the one-shot button 311 and the firing control unit of the payout control board 951 (illustration). Is omitted), the rotational drive of the firing solenoid 682 is stopped. With this, the firing of the game ball can be temporarily stopped without returning the rotating operation of the handle 302, and the pressing operation of the one-shot button 311 is released, so that the driving before the one-shot button 311 is operated. With strength, the game ball can be driven again into the game area 5a.

  Further, the handle unit 300 is provided with four first protrusions 302a, second protrusions 302b, third protrusions 302c, and fourth protrusions 302d on the handle 302, and the handle 302 is rotated most clockwise in a front view. The position of the first protrusion 302a when the handle 302 is not rotated when the game ball is driven into the game area 5a most strongly (so-called "right hit") Since the positions are substantially the same, the handle 302 can be maintained in the "right-handed" position in a comfortable state for the player by changing the handle 302 by using the fourth protrusion 302d as the first protrusion 302a. It is possible to reduce a player's feeling of fatigue and suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

[3-3. Overall configuration of plate unit]
The dish unit 320 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 to 45. 41A is a perspective view of the tray unit of the door frame as seen from the front right, and FIG. 41B is a perspective view of the tray unit as seen from the front left. 42A is a perspective view of the dish unit as seen from the upper right rear side, and FIG. 42B is a perspective view of the dish unit as seen from the lower left rear side. FIG. 43 is an exploded perspective view of the dish unit disassembled into main members and seen from the front, and FIG. 44 is an exploded perspective view of the dish unit disassembled into main components and seen from behind. FIG. 45 is an explanatory view showing an enlarged part of the lower plate with the lower plate cover removed in the sectional view of FIG. 28. The dish unit 320 is attached to a lower portion of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100, and the front surface bulges forward. An effect operation unit 400, which will be described later, is attached to the front surface of the dish unit 320.

  The plate unit 320 stores an upper plate 321 that stores game balls to be driven into the game area 5a, and a game ball that is arranged below the upper plate 321 and that is supplied from the upper plate 321 and the foul cover unit 270. And a lower plate 322 that can be stored.

  The plate unit 320 is mounted on the plate-shaped plate unit base 323 that is attached to the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100, and is attached to the upper front portion of the plate unit base 323, and the left side from the center in the left and right bulges greatly forward. The upper plate body 324 forming the upper plate 321 and the lower plate body 325 attached to the left side of the left and right center at the lower front portion of the plate unit base 323 and bulging forward greatly to form the lower plate 322. And a plate unit cover 326 attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 323 so as to cover the front sides of the upper plate body 324 and the lower plate body 325.

  Further, the plate unit 320 includes an upper plate ball removing button 327 mounted on the upper surface of the plate unit cover 326 such that the upper plate 321 can be pressed from above in a front view right side, and a front view of the upper plate ball removing button 327. The ball lending button 328 attached to the upper surface of the dish unit cover 326 on the right side, the return button 329 attached to the upper surface of the dish unit cover 326 on the right side of the ball lending button 328, and the ball lending button 328. And a ball return / return display portion 330 attached to the upper surface of the dish unit cover 326 behind the return button 329, and a dish front upper decoration portion 326b on the front surface of the dish unit cover 326 in front of the upper tray 321. The production selection left button 331 and the production selection right button 332, and the front of the lower tray 322, and the front projection of the dish unit cover 326. And has and a, a lower tray ball vent button 333 which is mounted for pressing from the front.

[3-3a. Plate]
The upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 and 44 and the like. The upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 is formed by the plate unit base 323 and the upper plate body 324, and is formed in a container shape in which the left side of the center of the left and right when viewed from the front bulges more toward the front and opens upward. Has been done. The upper plate 321 (upper plate main body 324) is bulged to the front most about 1/3 of the width of the door frame 3 in the left-right direction from the left end to the right. The upper plate 321 has a front end retracted rearward from the most bulged portion toward the right in front view, and a guide passage portion 321a is formed whose depth in the front-rear direction is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball. There is. The upper plate 321 is inclined such that the entire bottom surface including the guide passage portion 321a is lower on the right end side, and the front end right end side of the guide passage portion 321a is the upper surface of the plate unit cover 326 (the upper plate ball removal button 327). ) Underneath (see FIG. 44).

  The upper plate 321 is assembled to the plate unit base 323, and the bottom surface of the plate unit base 323 is lower than the upper plate ball supply port 323a. Is inclined so as to be slightly lower than the outer diameter of the. As a result, the game ball discharged forward from the upper plate ball supply port 323a can be received and stored in the upper plate 321, and the received game ball can be stored from the right end side of the guide passage portion 321a to the upper plate. It can be supplied to the ball delivery port 323d.

  As described above, the upper plate 321 is formed such that the bottom surface thereof becomes lower downward in the guide passage portion 321a having a narrow depth in the front-rear direction. That is, a part of the upper plate 321 projects from above into the mounting space 326j of the plate unit cover 326 to which the later-described effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) is attached. Therefore, in the upper plate 321, it is possible to sufficiently secure the storage amount of the game balls. The upper plate 321 (upper plate body 324) projects into the mounting space 326j of the plate unit cover 326 so as not to come into contact with the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A).

  In addition, the guide passage portion 321a is provided with a metal grounding metal 321b that is electrically grounded (grounded) in the pachinko machine 1, and by contacting (rolling) the game ball, it becomes a game ball. The charged static electricity can be removed.

[3-3b. Lower plate]
The lower plate 322 of the plate unit 320 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 to 45 and the like. The lower plate 322 is arranged below the upper plate 321 and to the left of the center of the plate unit 320 (door frame 3) in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. The lower plate 322 is formed in a container shape capable of storing game balls, and is attached to the plate unit cover 326 and a lower plate ball removal hole 322a which vertically penetrates the bottom wall portion 325a and allows the game balls to be discharged. And a relief portion 322b for avoiding contact with the produced effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). The relief portion 322b of the lower plate 322 is formed such that the right front corner is recessed rearward in an arc shape.

  The lower tray 322 has a lower tray body 325 whose upper and rear sides are opened, a lower tray cover portion 326k that covers the lower tray body 325 from the left end side thereof, and an opening of the lower tray body 325. The tray unit base 323 is closed at the rear side, and the lower tray cover 340 covers the upper side of the portion of the lower tray main body 325 that projects into the performance operation unit mounting portion 326a. The cover 326 is exposed to the outside from the lower plate opening 326d. As shown in FIGS. 28 and 45, the lower plate 322 has a trapezoidal shape in which the outer peripheral shape in plan view is a quadrangle that extends to the left and right, and the front side of the quadrangle is the bottom side and the upper side shorter than the bottom side is arranged on the front side. Is formed in a shape similar to that of the above, and the left and right sides of the trapezoid extending obliquely are curved so as to be recessed rearward. The lower plate 322 is formed so that the width in the left-right direction increases from the front to the rear in a plan view.

  As shown in FIG. 43, FIG. 44, etc., the lower plate body 325 is formed in the shape of a container whose upper side and rear side are open. The lower dish body 325 has a flat bottom wall portion 325a, a main body standing wall portion 325b extending upward from the outer peripheral edge excluding the rear end side of the bottom wall portion 325a, and the game ball passes through the bottom wall portion 325a. And a lower dish ball removal hole 322a that penetrates vertically in a size as large as possible. The outer peripheral shape of the bottom wall portion 325a is a quadrangle that extends left and right, and a front side of the quadrangle is the bottom side, and an upper side that is shorter than the bottom side is arranged on the front side and the left and right sides that extend obliquely are curved backward. It is formed in a shape that is a combination of a trapezoid and a trapezoid. The bottom wall portion 325a (the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 325a) is inclined so as to decrease toward the lower dish ball removal hole 322a. The main body standing wall portion 325b rises upward from the bottom wall portion 325a at a height of 2 to 5 times the diameter of the game ball. The lower dish ball removal hole 322a is formed at a position to the right of the center of the lower dish body 325 (bottom wall portion 325a) in the left-right direction. In the lower plate main body 325, the curved portion of the front wall right front corner of the bottom wall portion 325a and the main body standing wall portion 325b corresponds to the relief portion 322b.

  The lower dish cover 340 is formed so as to cover approximately the right half above the lower dish body 325. As shown in FIG. 43 and FIG. 44, the lower dish cover 340 has a cover standing wall portion 340a that rises upward from the upper end of the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower tray body 325, and an upper end of the cover standing wall portion 340a. And a ceiling portion 340b extending horizontally. The cover standing wall portion 340a rises from a part from the front side portion of the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower plate body 325 to the rear end of the right side. When the lower dish cover 340 is assembled to the dish unit 320, the rear ends of the cover standing wall portion 340a and the ceiling portion 340b are in contact with the front surface of the dish unit base 323. Further, the front end (left end side of the front side) of the cover standing wall portion 340a is in contact with the right end side of the lower plate opening 326d of the plate unit cover 326. Further, the left end of the ceiling portion 340b is in contact with the right end of the lower tray cover portion 326k of the tray unit cover 326. In the lower plate cover 340, a curved surface portion of the cover standing wall portion 340a and a portion of the rear side wall extending obliquely between the cover standing wall portion 340a and the ceiling portion 340b correspond to the relief portion 322b. There is.

  The lower plate 322 is covered with the plate unit cover 326 (rendering operation unit 400) from the vicinity of the left end in front view of the portion extending to the left and right on the front end side, and more than half of the lower plate 322 is viewed in front view. It is located behind. That is, the lower plate 322 is formed so that the right half goes around behind the effect operation unit 400. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 45, the lower tray 322 includes a lower tray first area A1 (a cross hatch area in FIG. 45) located behind a lower tray opening 326d of a tray unit cover 326, which will be described later, and a lower tray. The lower plate second area A2 (hatched in FIG. 45) located behind the right side of the opening 326d (the effect operation unit 400, the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326, and the front end side of the lower plate cover 340). Area), and. In other words, the lower plate 322 has a half or more of a storage region (corresponding to a storage area in plan view, which is a region in which the lower plate first region A1 and the lower plate second region A2 are combined) capable of storing the game balls, It is located behind the effect operation unit 400. Note that, in FIG. 45, the hatched area is the remaining space (area) of the mounting space 326j in the dish unit cover 326.

  In the lower tray 322, a lower tray ball supply port 323c forming a rear wall of the tray unit base 323 opens to the right of the center of the rear wall in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. More specifically, the lower tray ball supply port 323c of the lower tray 322 includes the rendering operation unit 400, the rendering operation unit mounting portion 326a (on the right outside of the lower tray opening 326d) of the tray unit cover 326, and the front end of the lower tray cover 340. It is disposed in the lower plate second area A2 which is the rear side such as the side. As a result, when the door frame 3 is viewed from the front, the lower dish ball supply port 323c cannot be seen from the player side through the lower dish opening 326d (see FIG. 19 and the like). Therefore, the lower plate 322 is formed so as to be hollowed toward the rear of the effect operation unit 400 from the lower plate opening 326d on the left side surface of the plate unit 320 (the plate unit cover 326) that bulges forward. The storage volume of the game balls is formed to be larger than the area seen from the front. In other words, the lower plate 322 is formed so that the lower plate second area A2 is larger than the lower plate first area A1. Thereby, when the lower plate 322 is viewed from the outside (the player side), it is possible to store more game balls in the lower plate 322 than it looks.

  As for the lower tray 322, the right half of the lower tray main body 325 in the left-right direction (second tray second area A2) is, as shown in FIG. ) Inside, and the lower plate cover 340 covers the upper side of the part of the lower plate body 325 protruding into the performance operation unit mounting portion 326a. This lower plate cover 340 prevents the fingertip from touching the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) when the player inserts a finger into the lower plate 322 through the lower plate opening 326d. can do.

  The lower plate 322 is provided with a lower plate ball removal hole 322a penetrating vertically in front of the lower plate ball supply port 323c in the lower plate second area A2. The bottom surface of the lower plate 322 is inclined so as to become lower toward the lower plate ball removal hole 322a. The lower dish ball removal hole 322 a of the lower dish 322 is openably and closably closed by a lid member 334 that operates by pressing the lower dish ball removal button 333. In the lower plate 322, in a normal state, the lower plate ball removal hole 322a is closed by the lid member 334, and the game balls can be stored in the lower plate 322. Then, by pressing the lower plate ball removal button 333 to open the lid member 334, the game balls in the lower plate 322 can be discharged to the lower part of the plate unit 320 from the lower plate ball removal hole 322a.

  The lower dish ball removal hole 322a of the lower dish 322 is arranged in front of (in front of) the lower dish ball supply port 323c of the dish unit base 323 forming the rear wall of the lower dish 322. Therefore, in the state of being assembled to the door frame 3, the lower dish ball removal hole 322a is located on the right side of the lower dish opening 326d of the dish unit cover 326 and behind the frame unit 415 in the effect operation unit 400. It is not visible from the player (front) side.

  As described above, the lower plate 322 is formed such that the outer peripheral shape is a combination of a trapezoid in which the front side is narrowed on the front side of a quadrangle extending to the left and right, and the bottom surface is the lower plate ball removal hole 322a. It is inclined so that it becomes lower toward. Therefore, in the state where the lid member 334 is opened and the lower dish ball removal hole 322a is opened, the game ball supplied from the lower dish ball supply port 323c into the lower plate 322 is directly in front of the lower dish ball supply port 323c. It is immediately discharged downward from the opened lower dish ball removal hole 322a. Since the left end of the lower dish ball removal hole 322a is located slightly left of the left end of the lower dish ball supply port 323c, when the lower dish ball removal hole 322a is open, the lower dish ball supply The game ball supplied from the mouth 323c to the lower plate 322 does not flow directly to the region on the left side of the lower plate ball removal hole 322a in the lower plate 322, and is discharged from the lower plate ball removal hole 322a. Become.

  On the other hand, since the right end of the lower dish ball removal hole 322a is located to the left of the right end of the lower dish ball supply port 323c, the game supplied to the lower dish 322 from the vicinity of the right end of the lower dish ball supply port 323c. The ball comes into contact with the portion of the main body standing wall portion 325b that forms the right standing wall of the lower tray 322. The right wall of the lower plate 322 is curved obliquely with respect to the front-back direction so as to face the direction of the lower plate ball removal hole 322a, so the game ball supplied from the lower plate ball supply port 323c is When it comes into contact with the inclined portion, it is reflected in the direction of the lower dish ball removal hole 322a, and is discharged from the lower dish ball removal hole 322a without going to a region on the left side of the lower dish ball removal hole 322a. (See Figure 45).

  In this way, the lower plate 322 of the present embodiment is formed so as to guide the game balls supplied from the lower plate ball supply port 323c to the lower plate ball removal hole 322a, and thus the lower plate ball removal hole 322a. In the state where is opened, the game ball supplied from the lower dish ball supply port 323c does not enter the area on the left side of the lower dish ball removal hole 322a in the lower plate 322, and immediately from the lower dish ball removal hole 322a. It can be discharged downward (dollar box). As a result, when the lower plate ball removal hole 322a is left open, the player cannot see the game balls circulating on the lower plate 322, and thus the upper plate 321 and the payout device 830 are paid out. It is possible to give the illusion that a game ball or the like is directly discharged to the dollar box, and to make it difficult for the game ball to pass through the lower plate 322, thereby making it possible for the player to play the game (game ball driving operation). It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest by devoting itself to (or directing images).

  Further, since the lower tray 322 of this embodiment includes the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower tray body 325 and the lower tray covers 340 and 340A extending upward from the upper end of the main body standing wall portion 325b, the lower tray 322 is provided. Even if the game ball supplied inside jumps up in the lower plate 322, it is possible to prevent the game ball from entering the mounting space 326j from the lower plate 322, and the game ball in the lower plate 322 is It is possible to prevent contact with the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). Therefore, it is possible that the game balls supplied in the lower plate 322 and the game balls stored in the lower plate 322 come into contact with or press the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). It is possible to prevent the game ball from damaging the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A).

  Further, since the lower plate 322 has the lower plate ball removal hole 322a in front of the lower plate ball supply port 323c, when the lower plate ball removal hole 322a is open, the lower plate ball supply port 323c is discharged. Since the game ball thus made can be directly inserted into the lower dish ball removal hole 322a and discharged downward (dollar box), it is difficult for the game ball to reach the front end side of the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower dish body 325. You can Further, since the bottom wall portion 325a of the lower tray body 325 near the front end of the lower tray 322 is higher toward the front, the game ball toward the front end side of the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower tray body 325 is inclined. As it climbs the bottom surface, the moving speed of the game ball can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the impact when the game balls discharged from the lower plate ball supply port 323c into the lower plate 322 come into contact with the lower plate covers 340, 340A and the main body standing wall portion 325b, and damage them. Can be difficult.

  In the present embodiment, the lid member 334 closing the lower dish ball removal hole 322a may be interlocked with the upper dish ball removal button 327. Thereby, when the upper dish ball removal button 327 is operated, the lid member 334 also moves and the lower dish ball removal hole 322a opens, so that the game balls discharged from the upper dish 321 to the lower dish 322 are further removed from the lower dish ball. It is discharged from the hole 322a to the lower dollar box. That is, when the upper dish ball removal button 327 is operated to remove the game ball from the upper dish 321, the game ball of the upper dish 321 is discharged to the dollar box even though the lower dish ball removal button 333 is not operated. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a strong illusion that the game balls of the upper plate 321 are directly discharged into the dollar box, and it is possible to further exert the above-described operational effects. Simultaneous opening of the upper tray 321 and lower tray 322 for ball removal may be simultaneous opening by driving a drive source such as a motor or solenoid, or may be simultaneous opening by a mechanical link mechanism.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the lower plate main body 325 and the lower plate cover 340 that form the lower plate 322 are shown as separate parts that can be disassembled. It may be an impossible one. Further, an example is shown in which the cover standing wall portion 340a of the lower tray cover 340 rises from the upper end of the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower tray body 325. The cover standing wall portion 340a may stand up. Further, although an example in which the ceiling portion 340b of the lower tray cover 340 extends substantially horizontally from the upper end of the cover standing wall portion 340a is shown, the ceiling portion 340b of the lower tray cover 340 does not overlap the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower tray body 325. You may make it extend substantially horizontally from an upper end.

  Further, in the present embodiment, an example in which the lower plate 322 is provided with the relief portion 322b for avoiding contact with the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) is shown, but the escape portion 322b is not provided. It may be used as the lower plate 322.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the lower plate 322 (the lower plate body 325, the lower plate cover 340, etc.) has a uniform planar shape without a penetrating hole. It may have a hole. Specifically, at least a part of the bottom wall portion 325a, the main body standing wall portion 325b, the cover standing wall portion 340a, the ceiling portion 340b, etc. of the lower plate 322 is formed in a fence shape having a gap through which a game ball cannot pass. It may be formed into a net or a net. In addition, you may make it arrange | position the light-emitting body, such as LED, in the dish unit cover 326 (mounting space 326j), and illuminate the inside of the lower tray 322 through the fence-shaped or net-shaped clearance of the lower tray 322 (light emission decoration). ..

  In the present embodiment, the lower plate 322 is formed by the lower plate body 325, the lower plate cover 340, the plate unit base 323, and the plate unit cover 326 (lower plate cover portion 326k) that are separately formed. However, the lower plate 322 may be formed by combining these four members in an appropriate combination. Specifically, the lower plate cover 340 and the lower plate body 325 are integrated, the lower plate cover 340 and the plate unit cover 326 are integrated, and the lower plate body 325 and the plate unit cover 326 are Integrated plate, lower plate cover 340 and plate unit base 323 integrated, lower plate body 325 and plate unit base 323 integrated, plate unit base 323 and plate unit cover 326 Integrated with the lower plate body 325, the lower plate cover 340, and the plate unit base 323, and the lower plate body 325, the lower plate cover 340, and the plate unit cover 326. The lower plate cover 340, the plate unit base 323, and the plate unit cover 326 are integrated, the lower plate body 325, the plate unit base 323, and the plate unit. That the Tokaba 326 are integrated, that a lower tray body 325 and Shitasara cover 340 and tray unit base 323 and dish unit cover 326 is integrated, it may be like.

[3-3b-1. Sphere guiding part of lower plate]
In the lower plate 322 of the plate unit 320, an embodiment provided with a ball guiding portion 322c for guiding a game ball from the lower plate ball supply port 323c to the lower plate ball removal hole 322a will be described in detail with reference to FIG. . FIG. 46 (a) is an explanatory view schematically showing an example in which the lower plate is provided with a ball guiding portion, and FIG. 46 (b) is a schematic view showing an example in which the lower plate is provided with a ball guiding portion different from that in (a). It is a figure and (c) is an explanatory view showing roughly an example provided with a different ball guide part. In FIG. 46, the same components as those described above are designated by the same reference numerals.

  In the example of the lower plate 322 of FIG. 46 (a), the diameter of the lower plate ball-draining hole 322a is substantially the same as the diameter of the lower plate ball-draining hole 322a at the site between the lower plate ball supply port 323c and the lower plate ball-draining hole 322a on the bottom surface of the lower plate 322. It is provided with a pair of sphere guiding portions 322c which are spaced apart from each other on the right and left. The pair of ball guiding parts 322c are formed in a rail shape (protrusion) extending in the front-rear direction in a state of protruding from the bottom surface of the lower plate 322. Further, the bottom plate 322 is inclined so that the bottom surface thereof becomes lower toward the bottom plate ball removal hole 322a. Therefore, the game ball supplied into the lower plate 322 from the lower plate ball supply port 323c is guided to the lower plate ball removal hole 322a by the pair of ball guiding parts 322c without getting over the ball guiding part 322c, and the lower plate ball It is discharged downward (dollar box) from the hole 322a.

  Then, in the same manner as described above, the lower plate 322 of this example has a lower plate ball supply port 323c and a lower plate ball on the rear side (lower plate second area A2) on the right side of the lower plate opening 326d of the plate unit cover 326. The holes 322a are arranged linearly in the front-rear direction. Therefore, the lower dish ball supply port 323c and the lower dish ball removal hole 322a are positioned behind the covering wall such as the production operation unit 400, the production operation unit mounting portion 326a in the dish unit cover 326, and the front end side of the lower dish cover 340. It is invisible from the front.

  As described above, since the lower dish 322 of this example includes the pair of ball guiding portions 322c, the game balls supplied from the lower dish ball supply port 323c in the state where the lower dish ball removal hole 322a is opened. Can be immediately discharged downward (dollar box) from the lower dish ball removal hole 322a without entering the area on the left side of the lower dish ball removal hole 322a in the lower dish 322. And since the game balls circulating on the lower plate 322 cannot be seen from the player side, the illusion that the game balls and the like paid out from the upper plate 321 and the payout device 830 are directly discharged to the dollar box. By making it difficult for the player to feel the annoyance of the game ball passing through the lower plate 322, the player can concentrate on the game (game ball driving operation, effect image, etc.) and suppress a decrease in interest. You can

  In the example of FIG. 46 (a), a rail-shaped member is shown as the ball guiding portion 322c, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the game ball is lowered like a groove extending toward the lower dish ball removal hole 322a. Anything that can be guided to the countersunk hole 322a may be used.

  Next, in the example of the lower plate 322 of FIG. 46 (b), the game ball discharged right diagonally forward from the lower plate ball supply port 323c on the wall portion on the right side of the lower plate ball removal hole 322a in the lower plate 322. , Is formed in a shape that reflects in the direction of the lower dish ball removal hole 322a, and is provided with a buffer portion 322d at the portion where the game ball abuts. The buffer portion 322d is made of rubber or foam.

  In the lower plate 322 of this example, similarly to the above, the lower plate ball discharge hole 322a is arranged directly in front of the lower plate ball supply port 323c, and the bottom surface of the lower plate 322 is lowered toward the lower plate ball discharge hole 322a. Is inclined to become. Therefore. The game ball discharged straight forward from the lower plate ball supply port 323c is discharged downward (dollar box) from the lower plate ball removal hole 322a as it is. On the other hand, the game ball discharged from the lower dish ball supply port 323c to the front right is reflected in the direction of the lower dish ball removal hole 322a by the buffer portion 322d, and discharged downward (dollar box) from the lower dish ball removal hole 322a. To be done. At this time, the game ball abuts on the buffer 322d and is reflected, so that the collision sound at the time of reflection is reduced.

  Further, similarly to the above, the lower plate 322 of this example also has a rear side on the right side of the lower plate opening 326d of the plate unit cover 326 (the effect operation unit 400 in the lower plate second area A2 and the effect operation in the plate unit cover 326). The unit mounting portion 326a and the lower plate cover 340 are arranged on the front end side of the lower plate cover 340 and the like) and are not visible from the front.

  In this way, the lower plate 322 of this example is provided with the buffer portion 322d on the wall portion that reflects the game ball, so that even if the game ball is not discharged straight forward from the lower plate ball supply port 323c. The buffer portion 322d allows the sound to be reflected in the direction of the lower dish ball removal hole 322a without any sound and discharged downward (dollar box). Therefore, when the game balls and the like paid out from the upper plate 321 and the payout device 830 are discharged to the dollar box, the collision sound of the game balls cannot be heard from the lower plate 322, and it seems that the game balls are also directly discharged to the dollar box. Can be made to be an illusion, and by making it difficult for the player to feel the annoyance that the game ball passes through the lower plate 322, the player can concentrate on the game (game ball driving operation, effect image, etc.) and suppress a decrease in interest. Can be made.

  Subsequently, in the example of the lower plate 322 in FIG. 46 (c), the lower plate 322 has a bottom surface (bottom wall portion 325a) on the opposite side of the lower plate ball supply port 323c with the lower plate ball vent hole 322a interposed therebetween. It is provided with a return portion 322e that projects upward from and that reflects the game ball that has jumped over the lower dish ball removal hole 322a toward the lower dish ball removal hole 322a side. The return portion 322e may be made of the same material as the material forming the lower plate 322, or may be made of a cushioning material such as rubber or foam that reduces the collision noise at the time of reflection. In addition, the return portion 322e may not form the side wall of the lower plate 322, or may form a part of the side wall (main body standing wall part 325b) of the lower plate 322.

  In this lower plate 322, the lower plate ball supply port 323c, the lower plate ball removal hole 322a, and the return portion 322e are arranged in a straight line in order from the rear to the front, and the lower plate of the plate unit cover 326 is arranged. To the rear on the right side of the opening 326d (on the rear side of the cover operation wall 400 such as the lower plate second area A2, the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a in the plate unit cover 326, and the front end side of the lower plate cover 340). It is located and cannot be seen from the front. In this lower plate 322, even if a game ball flowing from the lower plate ball supply port 323c to the lower plate ball removal hole 322a jumps over the lower plate ball removal hole 322a, the return plate 322e causes the lower plate ball removal hole 322a side. And can be discharged downward (dollar box) from the lower dish ball removal hole 322a. Therefore, the same effect as the above can be obtained.

  In the present embodiment, the ball tray 322c and the buffer 322d may be appropriately combined with the lower plate 322. As a result, the same operational effects as described above can be obtained.

[3-3b-2. Another embodiment of lower plate]
Another embodiment of the lower plate 322 of the plate unit 320 will be described with reference to FIG. 47. FIG. 47 (a) is an explanatory view schematically showing a lower plate that can be divided, and FIG. 47 (b) schematically shows a state in which the storage area of the lower plate is expanded according to the size of the space behind the effect operation unit. It is an explanatory view shown, and (c) is an explanatory view showing a lower plate of (b) with a schematic perspective view. The lower plate 322 shown in FIG. 47 is configured such that the lower plate body 325 can be divided at a dividing line PL arranged in the lower plate second area A2 as a boundary. The area indicated by the dotted line hatch in FIG. 47 indicates the remaining space of the mounting space 326j.

  First, the lower plate body 325 (lower plate 322) shown in FIG. 47 (a) constitutes a part of the lower plate first area A1 and the lower plate second area A2 and has a lower plate ball removal hole 322a. The main body portion 325A and a first extension portion 325B attached to the right side of the main body portion 325A and constituting the remaining area of the lower tray second area A2 are provided. The first extension unit 325B is further more than the main body unit 325A, the remaining space of the installation space 326j in which the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) is housed (of the effect operation unit 400 and the second effect operation unit 400A). It projects into the rear space). As shown in the figure, the first extension section 325B is formed so that the width in the left-right direction increases from the front to the rear. Further, the first extension section 325B has a relief section 322b formed at the front right corner for avoiding contact with the second effect operation unit 400A.

  Next, in the example of FIG. 47 (b) and FIG. 47 (c), the rear end of the effect operation unit 400 does not project rearward from the front end of the lower plate 322, and thus the example of FIG. The space behind the effect operation unit 400 (the remaining space of the mounting space 326j) is wide. The lower plate body 325 (lower plate 322) constitutes a part of the lower plate first area A1 and the lower plate second area A2 and has a lower plate ball removal hole 322a, and a main body portion 325A. It is attached to the right side of the section 325A and constitutes the remaining area of the lower plate second area A2, and is provided with a second extension section 325C larger than the first extension section 325B. As shown in the figure, the second extension part 325C is formed with a constant width in the left-right direction from the front end to the rear end, and has a larger game ball storage area than the first extension part 325B. Further, a lower tray cover 340A having a shape corresponding to the shape of the second extension section 325C is attached to the lower tray 322 (see FIG. 47 (c)).

  In the example shown in FIG. 47, by attaching the first extension part 325B and the second extension part 325C to the main body part 325A, the storage areas of the respective game balls become continuous (communication), and the storage area of the game balls. Expands. Further, the boundary between the main body portion 325A and the first extension portion 325B or the second extension portion 325C is a dividing line PL. Further, the first additional portion 325B and the second additional portion 325C in the lower tray body 325 are in a predetermined gap (communication with the mounting space 326j) between the rear surface of the effect operation unit 400 and the second effect operation unit 400A. Space) is formed.

  As described above, in the above example, the lower plate body 325 (lower plate 322) is configured to be divisible, and at least one of the divided members is replaceable, so that the game balls in the lower plate 322 are The storage area can be increased or decreased as required. Further, since the lower plate main body 325 (lower plate 322) is configured to be dividable, the projection operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) attached to the plate unit cover 326 is projected rearward (in the mounting space 326j). An extension unit (first extension unit 325B or second extension unit 325C) having a size according to the amount can be attached.

  In the above embodiment, the dividing line PL is arranged in the lower plate second area A2 that is behind the effect operating unit 400 (the second effect operating unit 400A). It may be arranged on the boundary line between the plate first area A1 and the lower plate second area A2, or may be arranged in the lower plate first area A1.

  In the above embodiment, the lower tray body 325 (lower tray 322) is provided with the lower tray ball removal hole 322a in the main body portion 325A. The lower dish ball removal hole 322a may be provided.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the lower tray body 325 is shown with the first extension portion 325B and the second extension portion 325C attached to the right side of the main body portion 325A. A flat plate-shaped closing member having no storage area may be attached.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the lower tray body 325 of the lower tray 322 has been described, but the lower tray cover 340 can be divided in the same manner as the lower tray body 325, or the first extension unit 325B and the second extension unit. You may make it the shape according to the size of 325C.

[3-3c. Plate unit base]
The plate unit base 323 of the plate unit 320 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 to 44 and the like. The dish unit base 323 is attached to the front side of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 below the through hole 111, and extends in the left-right direction over the entire width of the door frame base 110 (the rear is open). It is formed in a shallow box shape.

  The dish unit base 323 penetrates forward and backward in the vicinity of the upper left corner when viewed from the front and also has an upper dish ball supply port 323a that extends cylindrically rearward, and penetrates forward and backward under the upper dish ball supply port 323a. A speaker slit 323b formed of a plurality of elongated holes extending vertically, and a lower dish ball supply port 323c penetrating forward and backward in the lower left part from the left-right center in front view and extending rearward in a tubular shape, An upper plate ball feed port 323d is provided, which penetrates the lower plate ball supply port 323c on the upper right side in a front view in the front-rear direction, extends vertically, and has an upper portion located at the right end of the upper plate body 324.

  Further, the dish unit base 323, a ball feed guide path 323e for guiding the game ball sent to the rear side of the plate unit base 323 through the upper plate ball feed port 323d to the entrance 251a of the ball feed unit 250, and a ball. After hanging down from the lower side of the feed guide path 323e, the lower dish ball supply port 323c extends in a substantially L-shape so as to become lower toward the right side surface of the cylindrical front view, and from the ball outlet 251b of the ball feed unit 250. A ball removal guide path 323f for guiding the discharged game ball to the lower dish ball supply port 323c, a left side of the ball feed guide path 323e in a front view, and a lower end of the ball feed guide path 323e and an upper end of the ball guide path 323f. An operation transmitting portion 327a that penetrates the front and rear at a height position between them and abuts on the operating rod 253c of the ball feeding unit 250 and is operated by the upper dish ball removing button 327 protrudes so as to face rearward. And it includes an opening 323 g, a. The downstream end of the ball removal guide path 323f opens into a cylindrical portion of the lower dish ball supply port 323c.

  Further, the dish unit base 323 penetrates forward and backward at the lower right corner when viewed from the front, and has a handle insertion opening 323h through which the tubular portion 181 of the handle mounting member 180 of the door frame base unit 100 is inserted, and a front and rear near the right corner when viewed from the front. And a cylinder insertion port 323i through which the cylinder lock 211 of the opening / closing cylinder unit 210 is inserted.

  The upper plate ball supply port 323a of the plate unit base 323, when assembled to the door frame 3, has a front end that opens to the rear wall of the upper plate 321 and a cylindrical rear end that is the upper plate passage port of the door frame base 110. 117 is penetrated from the front side and connected to the front end of the through ball passage 273 of the foul cover unit 270. Thereby, the game balls paid out from the payout unit 800 are supplied (paid) into the upper plate 321 through the upper plate ball supply port 323a.

  The lower dish ball supply port 323c, when assembled to the door frame 3, has a front end that opens to the rear wall of the lower plate 322 and a cylindrical rear end that penetrates the lower plate passage port 116 of the door frame base 110 from the front side. And is connected to the front end of the ball discharge port 276 of the foul cover unit 270. As a result, the game balls circulating in the storage passage 277 of the foul cover unit 270 are supplied into the lower plate 322 through the lower plate ball supply port 323c. The lower dish ball supply port 323c is arranged behind the effect operation unit 400, the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 (on the right outside of the lower plate opening 326d), the front end side of the lower plate cover 340, and the like. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is viewed from the front, it cannot be seen from the player side through the lower plate opening 326d.

[3-3d. Plate unit cover]
The plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 to 44 and the like. The dish unit cover 326 is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 323 so as to cover the front sides of the upper dish body 324 and the lower dish body 325. The dish unit cover 326 has a center portion in the left-right direction that is bulged forward, has a large opening forward in the center in the left-right direction, and a production operation unit mounting portion 326a to which the production operation unit 400 is attached, and on both left and right sides of the production operation unit mounting portion 326a. A plate front upper decoration portion 326b formed at substantially the same height as the upper plate 321 and a plate front lower decoration portion 326c formed below the left and right plate front upper decoration portions 326b respectively are provided. There is.

  The production operation unit mounting portion 326a is formed to have a size in the left-right direction of about 1/3 of the entire width of the plate unit 320 in the left-right direction, and the vertical direction is substantially the same as the height of the plate unit 320 in the vertical direction. Formed at height. Further, the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a is inclined so that the front end moves backward as it goes upward. Specifically, the front end of the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a is inclined at an angle of 27 degrees with respect to the vertical line.

  The front side of the plate front decorative portion 326b moves rearward from the center of the plate unit cover 326 in the left-right direction toward the left and right ends, and the end of the plate unit cover 326 on the center side in the left-right direction and the left and right ends. The intermediate portion is formed in a curved surface shape that is slightly bulged forward with respect to the plane connecting the end portions of the. Further, the plate front upper decorative portion 326b is inclined such that the lower end thereof moves upward from the center side of the plate unit cover 326 in the left-right direction toward the left and right ends, and the center side of the plate unit cover 326 in the left-right direction ( It is formed so that the vertical direction is narrowed from the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a side) toward both left and right ends. The plate unit cover 326 has an effect selection left button 331 and an effect selection right button 332 attached to the plate front upper decoration portion 326b on the left side in front view.

  The plate front lower decorative portion 326c has its front surface moved rearward from the center of the plate unit cover 326 in the left-right direction toward the left and right ends, and the end of the plate unit cover 326 on the center side in the left-right direction and the left and right ends. The curved surface is formed such that the intermediate portion is recessed rearward with respect to the plane connecting the end portions of the.

  A lower plate opening 326d penetrating in the front and rear direction is formed in the plate front lower decoration portion 326c on the left side in front view, and the lower plate 322 faces forward from the lower plate opening 326d. In the dish front lower decorative portion 326c on the left side in front view, the lower dish ball removal button 333 projects forward from the lower front surface of the lower dish opening 326d. Further, a lower speaker opening 326e made of punching metal is formed on the left side of the lower dish opening 326d in the dish front lower decorative portion 326c on the left side in front view. The lower speaker opening 326e is located in front of the speaker slit 323b of the dish unit base 323 when assembled in the dish unit 320.

  The dish front lower decorative portion 326c on the right side in front view has a handle insertion port 326f that penetrates the front and rear at the lower right corner in front view and into which the tubular portion 181 of the handle mounting member 180 of the door frame base unit 100 is inserted, and a front view. A cylinder insertion port 326g is formed in the vicinity of the right corner above the handle insertion port 326f and extends in the front-rear direction, and the cylinder lock 211 of the opening / closing cylinder unit 210 is inserted therethrough.

  The plate unit cover 326 has a plate-shaped top plate portion 326h extending from the upper end of the plate front upper decorative portion 326b on the right side in front view to the front end of the plate unit base 323. It covers the upper right side. An upper plate ball removal button 327, a ball lending button 328, a return button 329, and a ball lending display unit 330 are attached to the top plate portion 326h.

  The dish unit cover 326 includes a plate-shaped bottom plate portion 326i extending from the lower end of the dish front lower decoration portion 326c to the front surface of the dish unit base 323. The bottom plate portion 326i closes the lower side of the dish unit 320. The bottom plate portion 326i is formed in a stepped shape such that a portion located below the lower plate 322 is recessed from the lower side to the upper side, and a lower plate ball removing base 335 described later is attached to the portion. Further, the bottom plate portion 326i is formed with a vertically penetrating hole at a position corresponding to the lower plate ball removing hole 322a of the lower plate 322.

  The dish unit cover 326 is provided with a mounting space 326j that is opened forward at a portion of the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a and into which the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) is inserted (accommodated). The dish unit cover 326 extends rearward from the left side and the upper side of the lower dish opening 326d in a flat plate shape, and includes a lower dish cover 326k that covers the lower dish 322 (see FIG. 44). . The lower plate cover portion 326k is configured such that the left end is in contact with the upper end of the left side of the main body standing wall portion 325b in the lower plate body 325, and the right end is in contact with the left end of the ceiling portion 340b in the lower plate cover 340. There is.

[3-3e. Upper plate ball removal button]
The upper plate ball removing button 327 of the plate unit 320 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 to 44 and the like. The upper plate ball removing button 327 is attached to the top plate portion 326h of the plate unit cover 326 on the right side of the upper plate 321 when viewed from the front. By pressing the button, the game balls in the upper plate 321 are moved to the lower plate 322. It can be pulled out. Although not shown in detail, the upper dish ball removal button 327 has a ball removal button holder attached to the lower side of the top plate portion 326h of the dish unit cover 326, so that the rear end side is left and right below the top plate portion 326h. It is mounted rotatably around an axis extending to the. The upper plate ball removal button 327 is in contact with the lower surface of the front end thereof at the upper end of a vertically extending ball removal lever. The ball-draining lever is mounted below the upper plate ball-balling button 327 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction by a ball-draining base mounted on the front surface of the plate unit base 323.

  Then, the ball removing lever whose upper end is in contact with the lower surface of the front end of the upper plate ball removing button 327 is brought into contact with the upper part of the upper plate ball removing slider 327b slidably mounted by the plate unit base 323 from above. ing. This upper dish ball removing slider 327b is provided with an operation transmitting portion 327a that projects rearward from the rear surface, and when the door frame 3 is assembled, this operation transmitting portion 327a is inserted from the opening 323g in the dish unit base 323. It projects rearward so as to face it, and abuts from below on the operating rod 253c of the ball removing member 253 of the ball feeding unit 250. The upper plate ball removing slider 327b is biased upward by an upper plate ball removing spring 327c, and the upper plate ball removing spring 327c biases the upper plate ball removing slider 327b and the ball removing lever. The upper dish ball removal button 327 is located at the rising end.

  Therefore, when the upper bowl ball removing button 327 is pressed downward against the urging force of the upper bowl ball removing spring 327c, the operation transmitting portion 327a of the upper bowl removing slider 327b moves downward and the operation transmitting portion 327a moves. Since the operating rod 253c of the ball removing member 253 that is in contact with the upper end side also moves relatively downward, the ball removing member 253 rotates in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, and enters by the partition portion 253a. The partition between the mouth 251a and the ball outlet 251b is released, and they are in communication with each other. As a result, the game balls in the upper plate 321 are discharged from the ball discharge port 251b of the ball feeding unit 250 to the ball discharge guide path 323f of the plate unit 320, and discharged to the lower plate 322 via the lower plate ball supply port 323c. Can be (supplied).

  It should be noted that when the upper dish ball removal button 327 is operated, the lid member 334 closing the lower dish ball removal hole 322a may be interlocked and movable. Thereby, when the upper dish ball removal button 327 is operated, the lid member 334 also moves and the lower dish ball removal hole 322a opens, so that the game balls discharged from the upper dish 321 to the lower dish 322 are further removed from the lower dish ball. It is discharged from the hole 322a to the lower dollar box. That is, when the upper dish ball removal button 327 is operated to remove the game ball from the upper dish 321, the game ball of the upper dish 321 is discharged to the dollar box even though the lower dish ball removal button 333 is not operated. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a strong illusion that the game balls of the upper plate 321 are directly discharged to the dollar box, and it is difficult to make the player feel the annoyance of the game balls passing through the lower plate 322. It is possible to depress the player by devoting himself / herself to a game (game ball driving operation, effect image, etc.). Simultaneous opening of the upper tray 321 and lower tray 322 for ball removal may be simultaneous opening by driving a drive source such as a motor or solenoid, or may be simultaneous opening by a mechanical link mechanism.

[3-3f. Ball lending button, return button, and ball lending display section]
The ball lending button 328, the return button 329, and the ball lending / returning display section 330 of the plate unit 320 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 41. As illustrated, the ball lending button 328, the return button 329, and the ball lending display unit 330 are inside the circular decoration on the right side of the upper plate ball removing button 327 in the top plate portion 326h of the plate unit cover 326 when viewed from the front. Installed on.

  The ball lending button 328 inserts cash or a prepaid card into a ball lending machine (not shown) provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 and then presses it to dish a predetermined number of game balls. The unit 320 is rented out (dispensed) into the upper plate 321 of the unit 320. When the return button 329 is pressed while the cash or prepaid card inserted in the ball lending machine is inserted, the return of the cash or prepaid card is performed after subtracting the loaned game balls.

  Although illustration is omitted, the ball lending / returning display unit 330 has a 3-digit 7-segment LED arranged on the lower side of the transparent surface, and the remaining number of cash or prepaid card inserted into the ball lending machine, or The error code and the like when the ball lending machine breaks down is displayed.

[3-3 g. Production selection left button and production selection right button]
The effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 of the plate unit 320 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 41 and the like. As shown in the drawing, the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 are attached to the plate unit cover 326 near the right end of the plate front upper decorative portion 326b on the left side in front view, which is close to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a. The effect selection left button 331 is formed in a triangular shape with one vertex facing left. The effect selection right button 332 is formed in a triangular shape with one vertex facing rightward of the effect selection left button 331.

  The effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 are displayed to the player in the main effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 of the effect operation unit 400, which are arranged in the game area 5a in a front view. When the effect image prompting the selection is displayed, the pressing operation can be accepted, and the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 are operated within a predetermined time to select a desired option.

[3-3h. Lower plate ball removal button]
The lower dish ball removal button 333 of the dish unit 320 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 to 44 and the like. The lower dish ball removal button 333 projects forward from the lower end of the lower dish opening 326d of the dish unit cover 326, which is in front of the lower dish 322, from the lower front surface of the dish front lower decorative portion 326c on the left side in front view. By pressing this lower dish ball removal button 333, the lid member 334 closing the lower dish ball removal hole 322a of the lower dish 322 can be rotated, and the lid member 334 is rotated. The lower dish ball removal hole 322a is opened, and the game balls stored in the lower dish 322 can be discharged below the dish unit 320.

  The lower dish ball removing button 333 can be slid forward and backward by a lower dish ball removing base 335 (see FIG. 42 (b)) attached to the bottom plate portion 326i of the dish unit cover 326 below the lower dish body 325. Installed on. The lower dish ball removal button 333 is arranged to the left of the lower dish ball removal hole 322a of the lower plate 322 (see FIG. 28 and the like).

  The bottom plate ball removing base 335 has a bottom plate portion 326i of the plate unit cover 326, which is formed at a position below the bottom plate 322 so as to be housed in a stepped portion that is recessed upward from below. It is attached to the portion 326i. The lower tray ball punching base 335 is formed with a discharge port 335a which has a size equal to that of the lower tray ball punching hole 322a and which penetrates vertically in a position directly below the lower tray ball punching hole 322a. . Although not shown in detail, the lid member 334 is arranged between the lower dish main body 325 and the lower dish ball removing base 335. As a result, when the lid member 334 that closes the lower dish ball removal hole 322a of the lower dish 322 is opened, the discharge port 335a of the lower dish ball removal base 335 is also opened, and the lower dish ball removal hole 322a and the discharge port 335a. And are in communication with each other.

  Although not shown, the lid member 334 is rotatably attached to the lower dish ball removing base 335 about a position to the left of the lower dish ball removing button 333 in plan view. The lower plate ball removing button 333 is connected to a part between the part of the lid member 334 that closes the lower plate ball removing hole 322 a and the part that is rotatably attached by the lower plate ball removing base 335. Accordingly, when the lower dish ball removal button 333 is moved in the front-rear direction, the lid member 334 rotates about an axis extending vertically and the lower dish ball removal hole 322a (discharge port 335a) can be opened and closed.

  Although not shown in the drawings, the lower dish ball punching base 335 holds the lower dish ball punching button 333 when the lower dish ball punching button 333 is moved rearwardly, and a lower dish ball punching button. And a lower dish ball pulling spring that urges 333 forward. When the lower dish ball removal button 333 projects forward and the lower dish ball removal hole 322a is closed by the lid member 334, when the lower dish ball removal button 333 is pressed and moved rearward, the lid member 334 rotates. The lower dish ball removal hole 322a is opened and the lower dish ball removal button 333 is held by the holding device, and remains in the state of being moved rearward. In this state, even if the lower plate ball removing button 333 is released, the lower plate ball removing button 333 does not move forward, and the lower plate ball removing hole 322a is maintained in an open state. The game ball in 322 can be discharged below the plate unit 320 through the lower plate ball removal hole 322a and the discharge port 335a.

  Then, when the lower dish ball removal button 333 is held by the holding device and the lower dish ball removal hole 322a is opened, when the lower dish ball removal button 333 is pushed rearward, the holding by the holding device is released. In this state, when the lower plate ball removal button 333 is released, the lower plate ball removal button 333 moves forward due to the urging force of the lower plate ball removal spring, returns to the protruding state, and the lid member 334 rotates. As a result, the lower dish ball removal hole 322a (discharge port 335a) is closed. Thereby, the game balls can be stored in the lower plate 322.

  In addition to the pressing operation of the lower dish ball removal button 333, the lid member 334 that closes the lower dish ball removal hole 322a (discharge port 335a) also moves by pressing the upper dish ball removal button 327. The lower dish ball removal hole 322a may be opened. With this, when it is desired to discharge the game balls stored in the upper plate 321 to the dollar box arranged below the plate unit 320, only by operating the upper plate ball removing button 327, the lower box 322 can be used for the dollar box. It is possible to discharge the ball and to simplify the work for removing the ball. Simultaneous opening of the upper tray 321 and lower tray 322 for ball removal may be simultaneous opening by driving a drive source such as a motor or solenoid, or may be simultaneous opening by a mechanical link mechanism.

[3-4. Overall configuration of production operation unit]
The overall configuration of the effect operation unit 400 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 48 to 55 and the like. 48A is a front view of the effect operation unit in the door frame, and FIG. 48B is a right side view of the effect operation unit. Also, FIG. 49A is a perspective view of the effect operation unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 49B is a perspective view of the effect operation unit as seen from the rear. 50 is an explanatory view of the effect operation unit as viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. 51 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line DD in FIG. 48A, and FIG. 52 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line EE in FIG. FIG. 53A is a cross-sectional view taken along the line FF in FIG. 48B, and FIG. 53B is an enlarged view of part A in FIG. 54 is an exploded perspective view of the performance operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 55 is an exploded perspective view of the performance operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. The effect operation unit 400 is attached to the front part of the plate unit 320 at the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and can be pressed by the player and can present an effect image to the player. Is.

  The production operation unit 400 has a circular outer shape and is transparently formed on the center side excluding the outer peripheral edge, and the operation button 410 that can be pressed by the player, and the production operation unit of the dish unit cover 326 surrounding the outer periphery of the operation button 410. A frame-shaped frame unit 415 attached to the attachment portion 326a, a decorative substrate unit 420 arranged rearward of the operation button 410 and capable of illuminating and decorating the outer peripheral edge of the operation button 410 and the frame unit 415, and a frame. A base unit 430 attached to the rear side of the unit 415 and having operation buttons 410 and a decorative substrate unit 420 attached to the front surface, and a base unit 430 attached to the base unit 430 so as to be visible from the player side through the operation buttons 410. A door frame side effect display device 460 capable of displaying an image, Eteiru.

[3-4a. Manual operation button]
The operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 to 56 and the like. FIG. 56 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button seen from the front, and FIG. 56 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button seen from the back. The operation button 410 is formed in a circular shape having a diameter that is slightly smaller than the height of the dish unit 320 in the vertical direction, and the center side excluding the outer peripheral edge is formed transparent. The operation button 410 includes a transparent button lens 411 formed in a curved surface shape (partial shape of a spherical surface) so that the outer circumference is circular and the central side bulges forward, and the front side of the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411. An annular button frame 412 is attached, and a cylindrical button base 413 is attached to the rear side of the button frame 412 so as to sandwich the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411. The button frame 412 and the button base 413 are formed of a member that does not allow light to easily pass therethrough.

  The entire button lens 411 is formed to have a substantially constant thickness. In addition, the button lens 411 is formed in a smooth curved surface shape without unevenness on the front surface side. The button lens 411 extends a predetermined length toward the center side (inside) in a state of being recessed in a W-shaped cross section from the back surface at a position on the inner peripheral side of the button frame 412 and is arranged in a row in the circumferential direction. The one button decoration portion 411a and the first button decoration portion 411a extend on the axis line toward the center side in the state of being recessed in an arcuate cross-section from the back surface at a position on the outer peripheral side and line in the circumferential direction within a predetermined angle range. A plurality of (six) second button decoration portions 411b are provided.

  As shown in the figure, the first button decoration portion 411a of the button lens 411 extends from the inner periphery of the button frame 412 toward the center side when assembled to the operation button 410, and one group on both left and right sides is a group on both upper and lower sides. It extends longer than the center.

  The plurality of second button decoration parts 411b of the button lens 411 each extend in an arc shape on the same circumference, and three second button decoration parts 411b are formed on each of the left and right sides. The second button decoration portion 411b is formed so as to face the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412, and protrudes forward so that the front surface side is substantially flush with the front surface of the button frame 412.

  The button lens 411 exhibits a lens effect in which light is refracted by the unevenness of the W-shaped cross section and the arc-shaped cross section formed on the back surface in the portions of the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button decoration portion 411b. Therefore, the rear side is not clearly visible.

  The button frame 412 is formed in an annular shape, and is provided with a plurality (six) of frame opening portions 412a penetrating in the front-rear direction and extending in an arc shape with a predetermined length in the circumferential direction. The six frame openings 412a are provided on each of the left and right sides, three each, and correspond to the six second button decorations 411b of the button lens 411. The button frame 412 has a plated layer having metallic luster on the surface.

  The button base 413 includes a substantially cylindrical main body 413a extending in the front-rear direction, an annular flange 413b protruding outward from the front end of the main body 413a, and a main body 413a from the rear side of the flange 413b. A plurality of (four) guide boss portions 413c that are arranged in a cylindrical shape rearward along the outer periphery of the main body portion 413a at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction, and along the outer periphery of the main body portion 413a from the rear side of the flange portion 413b. A plurality of (three) detection pieces 413d that project rearward in a strip shape and are arranged in the circumferential direction, and penetrate the flange portion 413b forward and backward outside the main body portion 413a and have a predetermined length along the outer circumference. And a plurality of (six) base openings 413e formed in the circumferential direction, and a cylindrical shape extending from the front end of the main body 413a to the front and the front end side being the inner surface of the button lens 411. And a, an inner extending portion 413f are narrowed inward (central side) along.

  The outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411 and the button frame 412 are attached to the outer peripheral surface of the inner extending portion 413f of the button base 413 and the front surface of the flange portion 413b. The four guide boss portions 413c are respectively arranged at portions corresponding to the four corners of the upper, lower, left, and right with respect to the circumferential direction of the main body 413a. These four guide boss portions 413c are slidably inserted into the holding holes 431b of the unit base 431 of the base unit 430, respectively. The three detection pieces 413d are arranged at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction so that two detection pieces 413d are arranged on the upper side and one on the lower side with respect to the circumferential direction of the main body 413a. These three detection pieces 413d are detected by the pressing detection sensor 440 of the base unit 430 when the operation button 410 is pressed.

  The six base openings 413e are provided on each of the left and right sides, three each, and correspond to the second button decoration portion 411b of the button lens 411 and the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412. At the site of the base opening portion 413e of the button base 413, a part of the main body portion 413a and the inner extending portion 413f is recessed inward from the outer peripheral side. An inner diameter of a front end of the inner extending portion 413f that is narrowed inward is substantially equal to an inner diameter of the button frame 412.

  The operation button 410 has a front surface bulging forward in a curved surface shape (a part of a substantially spherical surface) and is transparently formed, and the door frame side effect display device 460 arranged on the rear side. The display screen of can be viewed from the front. In the operation button 410, the four guide boss portions 413c are slidably inserted into the holding holes 431b of the unit base 431 of the base unit 430, and the operation button springs 438 inserted into the holding holes 431b of the unit base 431. Is urged forward by. The forward movement of the operation button 410 is restricted by the biasing force of the operation button spring 438 of the base unit 430 so that the front side of the outer peripheral edge abuts on the frame unit 415, and the forward movement of the operation button 410 is restricted. By pressing against the rear end, the rear end moves rearward until it comes into contact with the front surface of the base unit 430. When the operation button 410 is pressed and moved rearward, at least one of the three detection pieces 413d is detected by the press detection sensor 440 of the base unit 430. The operation button 410 is operated by the detection of the detection piece 413d by the pressure detection sensor 440.

  Further, the operation button 410 is a first button decoration formed over the entire circumference so as to extend from the inner peripheral end of the button frame 412 in the transparent button lens 411 to the center side in the state where the effect operation unit 400 is assembled. By the portion 411a, the gap between the inner peripheral surface of the button base 413 and the operation button inner decoration member 432 of the base unit 430 can be made invisible to the player.

  Further, in the operation button 410, the front end opening of the cylindrical button base 413 is closed by the button lens 411 and the button frame 412, and the operation button is attached by the button frame 412 attached to the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411. With respect to the outer diameter of 410, a transparent portion whose rear can be visually recognized is formed so as to be narrowed inward from the outer circumference. The presence of the button frame 412 also makes it difficult for the player to see the gap between the inner peripheral surface of the button base 413 and the operation button inner decoration member 432 of the base unit 430.

  Further, in the state where the operation button 410 is assembled to the effect operation unit 400, the rear end of the tubular button base 413 (main body portion 413a) passes through the inner peripheral side of the decorative substrate unit 420 and is more than the front surface of the decorative substrate unit 420. It will be in a state of protruding backward. As a result, the light emitted to the front from the first LED 422a, 423a and the second LED 422b, 423b mounted on the operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 and the operation button right outer decoration substrate 423 of the decoration substrate unit 420 is changed. It is possible to prevent the base 413 from leaking from the outside to the inside, and at the same time, the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper decoration board 435, and the operation button lower part of the base unit 430 can be prevented. It is possible to prevent light emitted from the LEDs mounted on the decorative substrate 436 from the front from leaking from the inside to the outside of the button base 413. Therefore, the first LED 422a, 423a and the second LED 422b, 423b of the decoration board unit 420, the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper decoration board 435, and the operation button of the base unit 430. It is possible to prevent the LED mounted on the lower inner decoration substrate 436 from being illuminated with decoration other than the portion to be subjected to the light emission decoration, and to perform the light emission decoration with good appearance.

[3-4b. Frame unit]
The frame unit 415 of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 to 55 and the like. The frame unit 415 is attached from the front side to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320 so as to surround the outer periphery from the front side of the operation button 410, and decorates the outside of the operation button 410. The frame unit 415 is formed in a shape whose outer shape matches the front end side of the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a.

  The frame unit 415 is a frame-shaped frame main body 416 that has a circular central opening 416a that is attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326 in the tray unit 320, and frame main bodies 416 on the left and right sides of the central opening 416a. A pair of translucent frame side lenses 417 that are attached from the rear side, and a translucent frame top lens 418 that is attached to the frame main body 416 from the front side above the central opening 416a. There is.

  The frame main body 416 has a circular central opening 416a that has a smaller diameter than the outer diameter of the operation button 410 and penetrates forward and backward, and a central opening 416a that penetrates forward and backward on both left and right outer sides of the central opening 416a. A plurality of (six) outer peripheral openings 416b that extend in an arc shape along the peripheral edge of and are arranged in the circumferential direction, and a notch 416c that is notched with a predetermined width on the upper front surface of the central opening 416a. , Are provided. The central opening 416a is formed to have substantially the same size as the outer diameter of the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412 of the operation button 410. As a result, the front end side of the flange portion 413b of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 can come into contact with the rear side of the outer periphery of the frame opening 412a.

  The six outer peripheral openings 416b are provided on each of the left and right outer sides of the central opening 416a, three each, and are closed by the frame side lenses 417 from the rear side. The notch 416c also penetrates in the front-rear direction, and the frame top lens 418 is fitted from the front side.

  Further, the frame main body 416 is provided with a substantially tubular inner tubular portion 416d extending rearward from a position slightly outside the peripheral edge of the central opening 416a. The inner cylindrical portion 416d extends rearward from a position between the central opening 416a and the outer peripheral opening 416b, and a portion corresponding to the cutout portion 416c is cut out. In the state where the effect operation unit 400 is assembled, the inner tubular portion 416d includes the first LED 422a, 423a and the second LED 422b, 423b of the operation button left outer decoration board 422 and the operation button right outer decoration board 423 of the decoration board unit 420. Is located between the first LED 422a, 423a and the second LED 422b, 423b (see FIG. 52).

  Further, the frame main body 416 is provided with a pair of attachment portions 416e that extend outward at the left and right upper portions of the outer periphery and are attached to the performance operation unit attachment portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320. The frame main body 416 (production operation unit 400) is attached to the production operation unit installation portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320 at the left and right sides of the pair of attachment portions 416e and the cutout portion 416c.

  The frame body 416 has a metal on substantially the entire surface except for a portion having the same width as the cutout 416c on the side opposite to the cutout 416c side (the side where the frame top lens 418 is attached) with the central opening 416a in between. A plated layer having a luster is formed.

  The frame side lenses 417 close the outer peripheral openings 416b formed on the right and left sides of the frame main body 416, three at each side, from the rear side. The front side of the frame side lens 417 is formed into a smooth surface without any unevenness, and a plurality of unevenness is formed along the periphery of the central opening 416a on the rear side (see FIGS. 53 and 63). Light is refracted by the plurality of irregularities, so that the rear side of the frame side lens 417 cannot be seen.

  The frame top lens 418 has a substantially rectangular outer shape so that the frame top lens 418 is fitted into the cutout portion 416c of the frame body 416 from the front side. The front surface of the frame top lens 418 is formed smoothly. Further, in the frame top lens 418, a plurality of irregularities extending in a zigzag shape along the peripheral edge of the central opening 416a on the rear surface side are provided in a plurality of rows in the radial direction of the central opening 416a (see FIGS. 51 and 63). reference). The light is refracted by the plurality of irregularities, so that the rear side of the frame top lens 418 cannot be seen.

  In the frame unit 415, in the state where the effect operation unit 400 is assembled, the pair of frame side lenses 417 has the respective second LEDs 422b and 423b on the operation button left outside decoration substrate 422 and the operation button right outside decoration substrate 423 of the decoration substrate unit 420. And the frame top lens 418 is located in front of the frame top lens decoration substrate 437 of the base unit 430, and the second LEDs 422b and 423b mounted on the frame top lens 418 can perform light emission decoration. ..

[3-4c. Decorative board unit]
The decorative substrate unit 420 of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 to 57 and the like. FIG. 57 is an exploded perspective view of the decorative board unit of the production operation unit as disassembled and seen from the front. The decorative substrate unit 420 is attached to the front surface of the base unit 430 below the frame unit 415, and the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 can be illuminated and decorated. Vibration can be applied to the operation unit 400.

  The decorative substrate unit 420 includes a C-shaped substrate base 421 having an open upper side, an operation button left outside decorative substrate 422 and an operation button right outside decorative substrate 423 attached to the left and right front surfaces of the substrate base 421, respectively. A vibration motor 424 attached to the lower part of the front surface of the substrate base 421 and a motor cover 425 attached to the front surface of the substrate base 421 so as to cover the front side of the vibration motor 424 are provided.

  The substrate base 421 is formed such that the inner peripheral side thereof is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the cylindrical main body portion 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410, and the outer peripheral side thereof is larger than the outer diameter of the flange portion 413b of the button base 413. Moreover, it is formed smaller than the outer diameter of the frame unit 415.

  The operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 extends in an arc shape along the front surface of the substrate base 421. The operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 has a plurality of first LEDs 422a mounted along the inner periphery of the substrate base 421 on the front surface side and an inner periphery of the substrate base 421 radially outside the plurality of first LEDs 422a. And a plurality of second LEDs 422b mounted along the same. The operation button right outside decoration substrate 423 extends in an arc shape along the front surface of the substrate base 421. The operation button right outer decoration board 423 is provided on the front side with a plurality of first LEDs 423a mounted along the inner circumference of the board base 421, and on the inner circumference of the board base 421 radially outside the plurality of first LEDs 423a. And a plurality of second LEDs 423b mounted along the same. The front and rear surfaces of the operation button left outer decoration board 422 and the operation button right outer decoration board 423 are white.

  An eccentric weight 424a is attached to the rotation shaft of the vibration motor 424, and vibration can be generated by rotating the weight 424a.

  When the decorative substrate unit 420 is assembled to the effect operation unit 400, the rear end side of the tubular main body 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 is inserted inside the substrate base 421. Further, in the decorative board unit 420, the respective first LEDs 422a and 423a of the operation button left outer decoration board 422 and the operation button right outer decoration board 423 are located behind the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410, respectively. The second LEDs 422b and 423b are located behind the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415. Further, when assembled in the rendering operation unit 400, a frame is provided between the respective first LEDs 422a and 423a of the operation button left outer decoration board 422 and the operation button right outer decoration board 423 and the respective second LEDs 422b and 423b. The inner cylindrical portion 416d of the unit 415 is located (see FIG. 52).

  Therefore, the decoration board unit 420 causes only the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 to emit light by the light from the respective first LEDs 422a and 423a of the operation button left outer decoration board 422 and the operation button right outer decoration board 423. In addition, it is possible to make only the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 emit light by the light from the respective second LEDs 422b and 423b.

  Further, the decorative substrate unit 420 can generate vibration by rotating the weight 424a of the vibration motor 424 and vibrate the effect operation unit 400 as a whole.

[3-4d. Base unit]
The base unit 430 of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 58 to 60 and the like. 58A is a perspective view of the base unit of the effect operation unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 58B is a perspective view of the base unit of the effect operation unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 59 is an exploded perspective view of the base unit of the effect operation unit as disassembled and seen from the front. FIG. 60 is an exploded perspective view of the base unit of the effect operation unit that is disassembled and seen from the rear. The base unit 430 of the effect operation unit 400 is attached to the rear side of the frame unit 415 while the operation button 410 is attached so as to be able to move forward and backward.

  The base unit 430 includes four through holes 431a attached to the rear side of the frame unit 415 and penetrating in a substantially rectangular shape extending vertically in the central portion, and a blind hole opened to the front outside the through hole 431a. An annular unit base 431 having a holding hole 431b, a translucent operation button interior decoration member 432 attached to the front surface of the unit base 431 so as to cover the through hole 431a, and extending in the front and rear in a short tubular shape. The operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, and the operation button inner decoration member 432, which are attached to the left and right sides of the through hole 431a on the front surface of the unit base 431 behind the button inner decoration member 432. The operation that is attached to the upper and lower sides of the through hole 431a on the front surface of the unit base 431 at the rear side. A button on the decorative substrate 435 and the operation buttons under the decorative substrate 436, and a frame top lens decorative board 437 attached to the upper front portion of the unit base 431, a.

  Further, the base unit 430 includes four operation button springs 438 that are respectively inserted into the four holding holes 431b of the unit base 431, three sensor holders 439 attached to the front surface of the unit base 431, and each sensor holder. Three press detection sensors 440 that are respectively attached to 439 and detect the pressing operation of the operation button 410, a production operation unit relay board 441 that is attached to the rear side of the unit base 431, and a production operation unit relay board 441. And a relay board cover 442 attached to the rear side of the unit base 431 so as to cover the rear side.

  The unit base 431 has a substantially circular outer shape, and is formed to be slightly smaller than the outer shape of the frame unit 415. The unit base 431 penetrates in the front-rear direction at the center, and has a substantially rectangular through hole 431a extending vertically. The through hole 431a is sized to fit in the tubular main body 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410, and is sized to allow the display screen of the door frame side effect display device 460 to be inserted therethrough. The door frame side effect display device 460 is attached to the rear side of the unit base 431.

  The four holding holes 431b of the unit base 431 are formed at the upper, lower, left, and right four corners outside the through hole 431a at positions corresponding to the four guide boss portions 413c of the button base 413 of the operation button 410. The holding holes 431b have an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the guide boss portion 413c, and the guide boss portion 413c can be slidably inserted therein.

  More specifically, the upper left holding hole 431b of the four holding holes 431b is located at the center of the unit base 431 from the vertically extending center line passing through the center of the unit base 431 (center of the operation button 410). It is formed at a position rotated about 30 degrees counterclockwise. Further, the holding hole 431b on the upper right side of the four holding holes 431b is clockwise with respect to the center of the unit base 431 from a vertically extending center line passing through the center of the unit base 431 (center of the operation button 410). It is formed at a position rotated about 47 degrees in the direction of. On the other hand, the two holding holes 431b arranged on the lower side of the four holding holes 431b are respectively formed at positions opposite to the center of the unit base 431 with respect to the two upper holding holes 431b. .

  Further, the unit base 431 has a light blocking wall portion 431c that protrudes forward in a flat plate shape between a portion where the operation button upper decoration substrate 435 is attached and a portion where the frame top lens decoration substrate 437 is attached on the upper front surface. Is equipped with. With the light shielding wall portion 431c, the frame top lens 418 can be illuminated and decorated only by the frame top lens decoration substrate 437.

  The operation button inner decoration member 432 is formed in a curved surface shape so as to close the front end side of the substantially cylindrical peripheral wall portion 432a extending in the front-rear direction and the peripheral wall portion 432a and to project the center forward. A front plate portion 432b, a rectangular opening 432c that penetrates the front plate portion 432b in the front-rear direction and extends vertically, a flange portion 432d that extends outward from the rear end of the peripheral wall portion 432a, and a flange portion 432d. And a plurality of mounting bosses 432e protruding rearward from the mounting base 431 and mounted to the unit base 431.

  An outer diameter of the peripheral wall portion 432 a of the operation button inner decorative member 432 is formed to be substantially the same as the inner diameter of the button frame 412 of the operation button 410. The opening 432c penetrating the front plate 432b is formed to have substantially the same size as the display screen of the door frame side effect display device 460.

  In the operation button interior decoration member 432, the outer peripheral surface of the peripheral wall portion 432a and the front surface of the front plate portion 432b are formed into a smooth surface without irregularities.

  The operation button inner decoration member 432 is formed on the inner peripheral surface of the peripheral wall portion 432a, is recessed in an arc shape and extends in the front-rear direction, and a plurality of first button inner decoration portions 432f are provided in the circumferential direction. Is formed on the rear surface of the front plate portion 432b, bulges in an arc shape, extends in a modified octagonal shape centered on the center of the front plate portion 432b, and is concentric about the center of the front plate portion 432b. A plurality of second button inner decoration portions 432g (see FIG. 63). The second button inner decoration portion 432g is formed so as to have a portion extending in parallel with four inner peripheral portions of the opening portion 432c.

  The operation button interior decoration member 432 is formed of a transparent member. The operation button inner decoration member 432 is not clearly visible behind due to the lens effect of the first button inner decoration portion 432f of the peripheral wall portion 432a and the second button inner decoration portion 432g of the front plate portion 432b. .

  The operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper inner decoration board 435, and the operation button lower inner decoration board 436 each have a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front side. The operation button interior decoration member 432 can be made to emit light by emitting light. By illuminating and decorating the operation button interior decoration member 432, the interior of the operation button 410 and the outside of the door frame side effect display device 460 can be luminescently decorated.

  A plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface of the frame top lens decoration substrate 437, and by making these LEDs emit light, the frame top lens 418 in the frame unit 415 can be made to emit light.

  The LEDs mounted on the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper inner decoration board 435, the operation button lower inner decoration board 436, and the frame top lens decoration board 437 are full-color LEDs, respectively. It is said that. The front surface of the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper inner decoration board 435, the operation button lower inner decoration board 436, and the frame top lens decoration board 437 is white. .

  The operation button spring 438 is a coil spring and is inserted into the four holding holes 431b in the unit base 431 from the front. The operation button spring 438 has a rear end in contact with the bottom surface of the holding hole 431b and a front end protruding rearward from the main body portion 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 when assembled in the effect operation unit 400. It is in contact with the rear end of the portion 413c. These operation button springs 438 urge the operation button 410 forward.

  The three pressing detection sensors 440 are arranged at positions corresponding to the three detection pieces 413d of the button base 413 in the operation button 410. More specifically, the three pressing detection sensors 440 are, on the front surface of the unit base 431, one on the lower left side of the upper left holding hole 431b, another on the lower right side of the upper right holding hole 431b, and the other one on the lower left side. Are attached to the lower right side of the holding holes 431b via sensor holders 439, respectively. The three pressure detection sensors 440 are mounted at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction with the center of the unit base 431 as the center. These three pressure detection sensors 440 can detect the three detection pieces 413d of the operation button 410.

  The effect operation unit relay board 441 is attached to the left side of the through hole 431a (right side in front view) in rear view on the rear side of the unit base 431. The operation operation unit relay board 441 is an operation button left outer decoration board 422, an operation button right outer decoration board 423, a vibration motor 424, an operation button left inner decoration board 433, an operation button right inner decoration board 434, an operation button upper inner decoration board. 435, the interior decoration board 436 under the operation button, the frame top lens decoration board 437, the pressure detection sensor 440, and the door frame side effect display device 460, and the connection of the door body relay board (not shown) of the door frame base unit 100. It is for relaying.

  The relay board cover 442 extends from the lower end of the portion covering the rear side of the effect operation unit relay board 441 to the left in front view, and includes a leg portion 442a attached to the lower rear surface of the unit base 431. The leg portion 442a of the relay board cover 442 has a lower surface that extends substantially horizontally when assembled to the door frame 3, and is between the bottom plate portion 326i that forms the bottom surface of the plate unit cover 326 in the plate unit 320. To form a small gap (see FIG. 26). Accordingly, when the operation button 410 or the frame unit 415 is strongly pressed or tapped downward, until the lower surface of the leg portion 442a abuts the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i of the dish unit cover 326, The impact can be absorbed by bending the mounting portion 416e, the performance operation unit mounting portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326, and the like downward. After the lower surface of the leg portion 442a contacts the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i, the downward movement of the performance operation unit 400 is restricted, and the mounting portion 416e of the frame unit 415 and the performance operation unit mounting portion of the dish unit cover 326 are controlled. It is possible to prevent unreasonable force from acting on 326a and the like, and prevent them from being damaged.

[3-4e. Door frame side effect display device]
The door frame side effect display device 460 of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 54 and 55. The door frame side effect display device 460 is attached to the rear side of the unit base 431 so that the display screen faces the front from the opening 432c of the operation button inner decoration member 432 of the base unit 430, and the operation button 410 is transparent. The display screen can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through the central portion, and the effect image can be displayed on the display screen.

  The door frame side effect display device 460 is attached to the liquid crystal display device 461 having a square display screen on the front surface and the rear side of the liquid crystal display device 461, and is also attached to the rear side of the unit base 431 of the base unit 430. And a mounting bracket 462 having a bottomed rectangular tube shape. The liquid crystal display device 461 is a commercially available color liquid crystal display having an aspect ratio of 16: 9 and a diagonal length of about 4.3 inches. The outer periphery of the mounting bracket 462 is formed in the same shape as the outer periphery of the liquid crystal display device 461, and the mounting bracket 462 is attached so that the bottom portion of the bottomed tubular shape contacts the rear surface of the liquid crystal display device 461.

  In the state where the door frame side effect display device 460 is assembled to the effect operation unit 400, the liquid crystal display device 461 penetrates the through hole 431a of the unit base 431 from the rear side, and the inside of the operation button interior decoration member 432 in the peripheral wall portion 432a. (See FIG. 51). The front surface (display screen) of the liquid crystal display device 461 is located near the front end of the peripheral wall portion 432a of the operation button interior decoration member 432, and faces the front from the opening 432c penetrating the front plate portion 432b.

  The door frame side effect display device 460 can display a predetermined effect image on the liquid crystal display device 461 based on a control signal from the peripheral control board.

[3-4f. Effect of production operation unit]
The effect of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 61 to 63 and the like. 61 is an explanatory view showing a state where the operation button is pressed in the sectional view of the effect operation unit of FIG. 51. FIG. 62 (a) is a view of the effect operation unit viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends, and a part of the operation button is cut out to be hidden by the first button decoration portion or the button frame of the operation button. It is explanatory drawing which shows a site | part, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the site | part which is about to be hidden by the 1st button decoration part of an operation button, a button frame, etc. in the cross section of a production | operation operation unit. 63A is an explanatory diagram showing a perspective view of the appearance of the effect operation unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 63B is an explanatory diagram of the appearance of the effect operation unit as seen from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. Is.

  The effect operation unit 400 of the present embodiment can show an effect image to the player according to a game state that changes when a game ball is hit in the game area 5a of the game board 5, and the player can operate the operation image. It is possible to allow the player to participate in the effect presented to the player by operating the button 410 to entertain.

  The effect operation unit 400 is formed so that the entire height is substantially the same as the height of a portion of the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 below the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110. Further, the effect operation unit 400 is formed such that the overall width thereof is slightly larger than 1/3 of the overall width of the door frame 3. The effect operation unit 400 is arranged in the center in the left-right direction below the game area 5a (the through-hole 111 of the door frame base 110) when viewed from the front.

  In the effect operation unit 400, the upper part of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415 is attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320. When the effect operation unit 400 is attached to the dish unit 320, a gap is formed between the lower surface of the leg portion 442a of the relay substrate cover 442, which is the bottom surface, and the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i of the dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320. Are formed. In other words, the effect operation unit 400 is attached only to the top of the dish unit 320, and is attached in a suspended state.

  Further, in the effect operation unit 400, the front surface of the frame unit 415 (the surface formed by the inner circumference of the front end of the central opening 416a of the frame body 416) is parallel to the inclined surface of the front end opening of the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a. Is installed as. As a result, in the effect operation unit 400, the central axis line CL of the transparent operation button 410 bulging forward in a curved surface shape (a shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface) is at an angle of 63 degrees with respect to the vertical line. It is inclined so that it moves upward as it goes forward. Accordingly, when the player sits in front of the pachinko machine 1 to play a game using the pachinko machine 1, the head of the player is arranged above the dish unit 320 (production operation unit 400). Since it is located in front of the center of the game area 5a on the game board 5, the central axis line CL of the operation button 410 passes near the player's head. Therefore, when the player drops his line of sight from the game area 5a to the effect operation unit 400 (operation button 410), the operation button 410 is as close as possible to its front view (projection view from a direction parallel to the central axis CL). As a result, the operation button 410, the door frame side effect display device 460 in the operation button 410, and the like can be visually recognized in a good state.

  In the effect operation unit 400, the four guide boss portions 413c of the operation button 410 are slidably inserted into the four holding holes 431b of the base unit 430, respectively, and are urged forward by the operation button spring 438. In the normal operation state (a state in which the operation button 410 is not pressed), the effect operation unit 400 causes the front end of the flange portion 413b of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 to move to the frame unit 415 by the urging force of the operation button spring 438. The frame body 416 is in contact with a portion of the rear surface near the central opening 416a.

  In the normal state, the effect operation unit 400 has a center side (center axis CL side) from the inner periphery of the button frame 412 of the operation button 410 protruding forward from a center opening 416a of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415. There is. In other words, in the transparent button lens 411 that bulges forward in a curved surface shape (a shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface) of the operation button 410, a portion protruding forward from the inner circumference (inner side) of the button frame 412 is The main body 416 of the frame unit 415 projects forward from a central opening 416a (see FIG. 51 and the like).

  Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the diameter of the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415 is about 15 cm, and the button lens 411 (the front end thereof) is located in the frame unit in the central axis CL direction of the operation button 410. It projects about 4 cm forward from the front surface of 415.

  When the player presses the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 in the normal state, the operation button 410 moves rearward along the central axis CL against the biasing force of the operation button spring 438. When the rear end of the operation button 410 comes into contact with the front surface of the unit base 431 of the base unit 430, the rearward movement is restricted and the rearward movement of the operation button 410 is stopped. When the player presses the operation button 410, the button lens 411 bulging forward in a curved surface shape (a part of a substantially spherical surface) is pressed.

  Since the operation button 410 has a very large outer diameter as compared with the operation button for performance provided in the conventional pachinko machine, it is pressed near the peripheral edge away from the central portion of the button lens 411. Is likely to be. More specifically, the operation buttons for the effect in the conventional pachinko machine are attached so that the central axis thereof extends substantially parallel to the vertical line, whereas the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 of the present embodiment. Since the central axis line CL is attached so as to be inclined with respect to the vertical line, when the player presses the operation button 410 from above as in the conventional pachinko machine, as shown by an outlined arrow in FIG. 61, A portion of the operation button 410 away from the central axis line CL is pressed.

  By the way, since the operation button for performance in the conventional pachinko machine has a flat surface for the player to press, when the operation button is enlarged with the part to be pressed kept flat. , If you press a part of the operation button that is off the center, the pressing surface will tilt so that the pressed part will retract first, and the operation button will not be able to recede straightly. There is a possibility that the pressing operation may not be possible.

  On the other hand, in the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 of the present embodiment, the part (button lens 411) pressed by the player has a curved surface shape (a part of a substantially spherical surface) bulging forward. Therefore, when a position away from the center of the operation button 410 is pressed, the force is distributed to the entire operation button 410, the operation button 410 becomes difficult to tilt, and the operation button 410 moves straight rearward. You can Therefore, no matter which position on the front side of the operation button 410 is pressed, the operation button 410 can be smoothly retracted without tilting, so that the pressing operation can be reliably detected and the operation button 410 is pressed. It is possible to fully enjoy the performance to operate.

  Further, in the effect operation unit 400, the vibration motor 424 is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the board base 421 in the decorative board unit 420, and as described above, only the upper part is a plate so that the effect operation unit 400 can be hung. Since it is attached to the performance operation unit attachment portion 326a of the unit cover 326, when the vibration motor 424 rotates the weight 424a to generate vibration, the vibration is generated at a portion farthest from the attached portion. The entire production operation unit 400 can be vibrated greatly (strongly), and the vibration can be transmitted to the player touching the production operation unit 400. Further, since the vibration motor 424 is arranged immediately below the position where the player can relatively easily press the operation (the position of the white arrow in FIG. 61), the player who is pressing the operation button 410 can perform the operation. Strong vibrations can be transmitted to surprise the player and entertain the production.

  Furthermore, the effect operation unit 400 is attached to the dish unit cover 326 in a suspended state, and the lower surface of the leg portion 442a of the relay board cover 442 forming the lower surface and the bottom plate of the dish unit cover 326 are formed. Since a gap is formed between the upper surface of the portion 326i and the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i when the lower surface of the leg portion 442a abuts the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i when the operation button 410 is strongly pressed or hit downward. The impact can be absorbed by the mounting portion 416e of the unit 415, the performance operation unit mounting portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326, and the like bending downward. Further, after the lower surface of the leg portion 442a comes into contact with the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i, the downward movement of the effect operation unit 400 is restricted, and the attachment portion 416e of the frame unit 415 and the effect operation unit attachment of the dish unit cover 326 are attached. It is possible to prevent an unreasonable force from acting on the portion 326a and the like, and prevent damage to the performance operation unit 400 and the like. Accordingly, even when the player is presented with an effect of pressing the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400, even if the operation button 410 is pressed or struck by a strong force, the operation button 410 and the effect operation unit Since 400 or the like is not damaged, it is possible to avoid interruption of the game due to damage, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player, and to make the damage less likely to increase the burden on the game hall side. Can be suppressed.

  In addition, as described above, the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 that is pressed by the player is formed in a flat plate shape because it is formed in a curved surface shape (a part of a substantially spherical surface) protruding forward. Compared with the case, the strength and rigidity are higher, and even when hit hard, the impact can be dispersed to the entire button lens 411, which makes it less likely to be damaged.

  Also, in the effect operation unit 400, as shown in FIG. 63, since the button lens 411, the frame side lens 417, the frame top lens 418, and the operation button inner decoration member 432 are formed of transparent members, those The decoration by the unevenness such as the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, the first button inner decoration portion 432f, and the second button inner decoration portion 432g formed on the back surface is the front side (player side). ) Can be seen from. In addition, since the light is complicatedly refracted due to the change in the plate thickness in the portion where the uneven decoration is formed, it is difficult to visually recognize the rear side through the portion where the uneven decoration is formed. .

  Since the effect operation unit 400 includes the first button decoration portion 411a extending from the inner circumference of the button frame 412 in the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 toward the center side, the uneven decoration of the first button decoration portion 411a. With this, it is possible to make it difficult to see the rear part at the outer peripheral edge part of the part inside the button lens 411. Behind the portion where the first button decoration portion 411a is formed (rear in the central axis CL direction), the inner peripheral surface of the main body portion 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and the peripheral wall portion of the operation button inner decoration member 432. A gap is formed between the outer peripheral surface of 432a and the outer periphery of the operation button inner decoration member 432 from the front side (player side) by the first button decoration portion 411a located in front of the gap. It can be hard to see. As a result, even if the operation button 410 that can be pressed is provided with the operation button inner decoration member 432 whose position is fixed, it is possible to prevent the appearance of the operation button 410 from being deteriorated. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable, and it is possible to arrange the operation button inner decoration member 432 in the transparent operation button 410 without any problem, and to improve the appearance of the operation button 410.

  More specifically, in the effect operation unit 400, the outer periphery of the operation button inner decoration member 432 of the base unit 430 is defined by the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b of the button lens 411 of the operation button 410, and the button frame 412. A unit base 431, a decorative substrate unit 420, and the like on the rear side (back side) on the outer side are formed so as not to be seen from the player side through the transparent button lens 411. Specifically, in FIG. 62, the portion of the cross hatch surrounded by the alternate long and short dash line is hidden from the player side. As described above, since the operation button 410 includes the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, the button frame 412, and the like, the outer side or the inner side of the operation button inner decoration member 432 is difficult to see and hidden. Therefore, it is possible to improve the appearance of the operation button 410, and by extension, the effect operation unit 400 as a whole.

  Further, in the effect operation unit 400, the first button decoration portion 411a of the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 extends toward the central axis line CL of the operation button 410 and is arranged in the circumferential direction. Then, the second button inner decoration portion 432g formed on the front plate portion 432b of the operation button inner decoration member 432 arranged on the inner rear side of the operation button 410 extends in an octagonal shape centered on the central axis CL. 63 and the concentric circles are arranged in a row, the uneven line of the first button decoration portion 411a and the uneven line of the second button interior decoration portion 432g intersect, as shown in FIG. The decoration can be shown to the player.

  Further, in the effect operation unit 400, the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button interior decoration portion 432g are separated from each other in the front-rear direction (direction in which the central axis CL extends), so that the first button decoration portion 411a and the first button decoration portion 411a are separated from each other. With the second button interior decoration portion 432g, a geometric pattern having a three-dimensional feeling with a depth can be shown to the player, and the decoration including the inside of the operation button 410 can be enjoyed.

  Further, in the effect operation unit 400, since the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button interior decoration portion 432g are separated from each other in the front-rear direction, when the player's eyes move, the first button decoration portion 411a becomes uneven. Since the overlapping state of the line and the uneven line of the second button interior decoration portion 432g changes, the moving decoration can be shown to the player and the player can be entertained.

  Thus, the effect operation unit 400 provides the player with a three-dimensional decoration with movement by the first button decoration portion 411a of the operation button 410 and the second button decoration portion 432g of the operation button inner decoration member 432. Since the pachinko machine 1 can be shown, the player's interest can be strongly attracted and the pachinko machine 1 can be highly appealing.

  Further, in the effect operation unit 400, inside the operation button 410 (inside the button frame 412), behind the operation button inside decoration member 432, the operation button left inside decoration board 433, the operation button right inside decoration board 434, and the operation button. An upper inner decoration board 435 and an operation button lower inner decoration board 436 are arranged, and a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface thereof are caused to emit light, whereby the operation button inner decoration member 432 in the operation button 410 emits light. Can be decorated. That is, the inside of the operation button 410 can be illuminated by the operation button left inside decoration substrate 433, the operation button right inside decoration substrate 434, the operation button above inside decoration substrate 435, and the operation button below inside decoration substrate 436. The LEDs mounted on the front surfaces of the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper inner decoration board 435, and the operation button lower inner decoration board 436 are as shown in FIG. When viewed from the direction in which the central axis line CL extends, since it is arranged inside the tubular main body 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410, light from them does not leak to the outside of the main body 413a. Therefore, only the inside of the operation button 410 can be favorably illuminated.

  In addition, the effect operation unit 400 includes the operation button left outer decoration board 422 of the operation board unit 420 behind the second button decoration section 411b facing the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412 located near the outer circumference of the operation button 410. The first LED 422a and the first LED 423a of the operation button right outer decoration substrate 423 are arranged, and the six second button decoration portions 411b of the operation button 410 are illuminated and decorated by causing the first LEDs 422a and 423a to emit light. You can The first LED 422a of the operation button left outer decoration board 422 and the first LED 423a of the operation button right outer decoration board 423 are, as shown in FIG. 52, a cylindrical main body portion 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and a frame unit. It is located between the tubular inner tube portion 416d of the frame body 416 of the frame 415, and the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a does not leak to the inside of the body portion 413a or the outside of the inner tube portion 416d. Only the second button decoration portion 411b of the button 410 can be favorably illuminated and decorated.

  Further, in the rendering operation unit 400, the second LED 422b of the operation button left outer decoration board 422 and the operation button right outer decoration board are provided behind the frame side lens 417 facing the six outer peripheral openings 416b of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415. The second LED 423b of 423 is arranged, and the frame side lens 417 can be illuminated and decorated by causing the second LEDs 422b and 423b to emit light. The second LED 422b of the operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 and the second LED 423b of the operation button right outer decoration substrate 423 are provided between the inner cylindrical portion 416d of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415 and the outer periphery of the frame body 416. Since the light from the second LEDs 422b and 423b is not leaked to the inside of the inner cylindrical portion 416d or the outside of the frame main body 416, only the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 can be favorably illuminated and decorated. .

  Further, in the effect operation unit 400, the frame top lens decoration board 437 in the base unit 430 is arranged behind the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415, and a plurality of frame top lens decoration boards 437 are mounted on the front surface of the frame top lens decoration board 437. The frame top lens 418 can be made to emit light by making the LED of the above emit light. From the lower side of the unit base 431 of the unit base 430 where the frame top lens decoration substrate 437 is attached, a flat light shielding wall portion 431c projects forward to the vicinity of the rear lower end of the frame top lens 418, and Light from the LED of the top lens decoration substrate 437 does not leak to the operation button 410 or the frame side lens 417 side, and only the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415 can be excellently illuminated and decorated.

[3-4 g. Overall Configuration of Second Embodiment of Performance Operation Unit]
Next, a second effect operation unit 400A that is the second embodiment of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 64 to 71 and the like. 64A is a front view of a second effect operation unit different from the embodiment in the effect operation units of FIGS. 48 to 63, and FIG. 64B is a right side view of the second effect operation unit. 65A is a perspective view of the second effect operation unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 65B is a perspective view of the second effect operation unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 66 is an explanatory view of the second effect operation unit as seen from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. 67 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line GG in FIG. 64 (a). 68 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line HH in FIG. 64 (b). 69 (a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line I-I in FIG. 64 (b), and FIG. 69 (b) is an enlarged view of a portion A in (a). FIG. 70 is an exploded perspective view of the second effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 71 is an exploded perspective view of the second effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. It is a figure.

  The second effect operation unit 400A can be attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the dish unit 320 in place of the effect operation unit 400 described above. Similar to the effect operation unit 400, the second effect operation unit 400A can be pressed by the player and can present an effect image to the player. In the following, in the second effect operation unit 400A, the same components as those in the effect operation unit 400 will be described with the same reference numerals.

  The second effect operation unit 400A has an outer shape that is circular and has a transparent central part excluding the outer peripheral edge, and the operation button 410 that can be pressed by the player, and the operation of the outer periphery of the operation button 410 and the effect of the dish unit cover 326. A frame-shaped frame unit 415 attached to the operation unit attachment portion 326a, and a decorative substrate unit 420 arranged behind the operation button 410 and capable of performing light emission decoration on the outer peripheral edge of the operation button 410 and the frame unit 415. The second base unit 450 mounted on the rear side of the frame unit 415 and having the operation buttons 410 and the decorative substrate unit 420 mounted on the front surface, and the second base unit 450 visible through the operation buttons 410 from the player side. The second effect table attached to the door frame side that can display effect images And apparatus 460A, a buffer unit 510 which is attached to the lower surface of the second performance display device 460A door frame side, and a.

  In addition, the second effect operation unit 400A includes a second effect operation unit relay board 515 attached to the right side surface of the door frame side second effect display device 460A when viewed from the front, and a surface of the second effect operation unit relay board 515. The relay board cover 516 is attached to the right side surface of the door frame side second effect display device 460A so as to cover it when viewed from the front. The second effect operation unit relay board 515 and the relay board cover 516 are attached to the front view right side surface of the projector attachment member 505 in the door frame side second effect display device 460A.

  The second effect operation unit relay board 515 includes an operation button left outside decoration board 422, an operation button right outside decoration board 423, a vibration motor 424, a press detection sensor 454, a frame top lens decoration board 482, a switching drive motor 492, a projector 500, and the like. It is for relaying the connection between the rotation detection sensor 507 and the door body relay board of the door frame base unit 100.

[3-4g-1. Manual operation button]
The operation button 410 of the second effect operation unit 400A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 69 to 72 and the like. 72A is an exploded perspective view of the operation buttons of the second effect operation unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 72B is an exploded perspective view of the operation buttons of the second effect operation unit as seen from the rear. It is a figure. The operation button 410 of the second effect operation unit 400A is formed in a circular shape having a diameter slightly smaller than the height of the dish unit 320 in the vertical direction, and the center side excluding the outer peripheral edge is formed transparent. The operation button 410 includes a transparent button lens 411 formed in a curved surface shape (a shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface) such that the outer circumference is circular and the central side bulges forward, and an outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411. An annular button frame 412 attached to the front side and a cylindrical button base 413 attached to the rear side of the button frame 412 so as to sandwich the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411 are provided. It has substantially the same configuration as the operation button 410 of the operation unit 400.

  A specific difference is that the operation button 410 of the second effect operation unit 400A and the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 have the pattern of the first button decoration portion 411a of the button lens 411 and the guide boss of the button base 413. The shape of the part 413c is different.

  More specifically, as shown in the drawing, the first button decoration portion 411a of the operation button 410 in the second effect operation unit 400A has one apex on the center side of the button lens 411 at a portion in contact with the inner circumference of the button frame 412. A truss-shaped pattern in which a plurality of triangles facing each other and a triangle with one apex facing away from the center are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction over the entire circumference, and a button lens 411 in the truss-shaped pattern Right-angled triangular pattern composed of a bottom side facing the center side of the, a side extending from both ends of the bottom side to the center side of the button lens 411, and a hypotenuse extending from the tip of the side to the center of the bottom side. And a hypotenuse of the right triangle, a side extending from the center of the bottom of the truss triangle to the center of the button lens 411 longer than the right triangle, and from the tip of that side. And varying isosceles triangle pattern constituted by the side extending to the tip of the hypotenuse of each triangle-shaped pattern, in which is formed.

  That is, the first button decoration portion 411a is composed of a combination of a plurality of triangles. Although illustration is omitted, the triangles forming the first button decoration portion 411a are formed in a polyhedron shape with their respective faces facing different directions. As a result, the front surface side of the button lens 411 is formed in a smooth curved surface shape, while the back surface side is formed in a polyhedron shape at the portion of the first button decoration portion 411a, and thus the first button decoration portion 411a. In this part, the plate thickness of the button lens 411 changes intricately, and light passing through this part is irregularly refracted. Therefore, in the portion of the first button decoration portion 411a, the geometric pattern in which a plurality of triangles are combined can be shown to the player, and at the same time, the rear member can be made difficult to see due to the irregular refraction.

  The guide boss portion 413c of the button base 413 of the second effect operation unit 400A is formed in a cylindrical shape whose rear is open. The guide boss portion 413c is inserted into the holding hole 451d of the second base unit 450, and the button shaft 452 held in the holding hole 451d of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 inside the tubular shape. Is slidably inserted. In this example, the operation button 410 is attached so as to be able to move forward and backward by the button shaft 452 of the second base unit 450 that is inserted into the guide boss portion 413c from the rear side.

[3-4g-2. Frame unit]
The frame unit 415 of the second effect operation unit 400A will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 69 to 71. The frame unit 415 is attached from the front side to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320 so as to surround the outer periphery from the front side of the operation button 410, and decorates the outside of the operation button 410. The frame unit 415 is formed in a shape whose outer shape matches the front end side of the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a.

  The frame unit 415 of the second effect operation unit 400A has the same configuration as the frame unit 415 of the effect operation unit 400, and the same reference numerals are given and detailed description thereof is omitted.

[3-4g-3. Decorative board unit]
The decorative substrate unit 420 of the second effect operation unit 400A will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 57, 69 to 71, and the like. The decorative substrate unit 420 is attached to the front surface of the second base unit 450 below the frame unit 415, and the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 can be illuminated and decorated. The second effect operation unit 400A can be given vibration.

  The decorative substrate unit 420 includes a C-shaped substrate base 421 having an open upper side, an operation button left outside decorative substrate 422 and an operation button right outside decorative substrate 423 attached to the left and right front surfaces of the substrate base 421, respectively. A vibration motor 424 attached to the lower part of the front surface of the substrate base 421 and a motor cover 425 attached to the front surface of the substrate base 421 so as to cover the front side of the vibration motor 424 are provided.

  The decorative board unit 420 of the second effect operation unit 400A has the same configuration as the decorative board unit 420 of the effect operation unit 400, and the same reference numerals are given and detailed description thereof is omitted.

[3-4g-4. Second base unit]
The second base unit 450 of the second effect operation unit 400A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 73 and the like. FIG. 73 is a perspective view of the second base unit of the second effect operation unit as seen from the front. In the second base unit 450 of the second effect operation unit 400A, the operation button 410 is attached so as to be able to move forward and backward, the door frame side second effect display device 460A is attached, and it is attached to the rear side of the frame unit 415. It is what is done.

  The second base unit 450 includes a unit base 451 attached to the rear side of the frame unit 415, and a rear portion in the four cylindrical guide boss portions 413c of the button base 413 of the operation button 410, which projects from the front surface of the unit base 451. Four columnar button shafts 452 that are slidably inserted from each other, and an operation button spring that inserts each of the four button shafts 452 and urges the rear end of the guide boss portion 413c of the operation button 410 forward. (Not shown), and three pressing detection sensors 454 mounted on the front surface of the unit base 451 and respectively detecting three detection pieces 413d of the button base 413 in the operation button 410.

  The unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 includes an annular main body 451a, a cover 451b protruding rearward from the inner peripheral edge of the main body 451a in a hemispherical shape, and a vertical direction with respect to the front surface of the main body 451a. When viewed, a through hole 451c that extends in a substantially rectangular shape extending vertically and penetrates the cover portion 451b back and forth, four holding holes 451d that are recessed rearward from the front surface of the main body portion 451a, and the main body portion 451a. Bearing 451e that is recessed in a semicircular shape (U-shape) from the front surface to the rear portion in the upper part of the same and a semicircular shape that is coaxial with the upper bearing portion 451e from the front surface to the rear portion in the lower part of the main body portion 451a. The lower bearing portion 451f that is recessed in a (U shape) and the upper front surface of the main body portion 451a are formed on the left and right sides of the upper bearing portion 451e, and the screen unit 470 rotates. And a, a pair of rotation restricting portion 451g to regulate.

  The ring-shaped main body 451a of the unit base 451 has an inner circumference and an outer circumference that are substantially the same size as the board base 421 of the C-shaped decorative board unit 420. The decorative substrate unit 420 is attached to the front surface of the main body 451a. The cover portion 451b is formed in such a size that the cover portion 451b can be housed without coming into contact with the screen unit 470 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A that is rotatably attached by the upper bearing portion 451e and the lower bearing portion 451f. There is. The through hole 451c is formed in a size that allows the projector 500 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A to pass from the rear side.

  The four holding holes 451d of the unit base 451 are formed at the four corners of the front, bottom, left, and right of the front surface of the main body 451a at positions corresponding to the four guide bosses 413c of the button base 413 of the operation button 410. The holding holes 451d are formed such that the inner diameter thereof is larger than the outer diameter of the guide boss portion 413c, and the guide boss portion 413c can be inserted therein. A button shaft 452 is mounted coaxially with the central axis of the four holding holes 451d. The front end of the button shaft 452 attached to the holding hole 451d projects forward from the front surface of the main body 451a. The button shaft 452 attached to the holding hole 451d is inserted into the tubular guide boss portion 413c of the operation button 410, so that the operation button 410 is attached so as to be slidable in the front-rear direction via the guide boss portion 413c. You can

  The upper left holding hole 451d of the four holding holes 451d extends counterclockwise with respect to the center of the unit base 451 from a vertically extending center line passing through the center of the unit base 451 (center of the operation button 410). It is formed at a position rotated by about 30 degrees in the direction. Further, the holding hole 451d on the upper right side of the four holding holes 451d is clockwise with respect to the center of the unit base 451 from a vertically extending center line passing through the center of the unit base 451 (center of the operation button 410). It is formed at a position rotated about 47 degrees in the direction of. On the other hand, the two holding holes 451d arranged on the lower side of the four holding holes 451d are respectively formed at positions opposite to the center of the unit base 451 with respect to the two upper holding holes 451d. .

  In addition, operation button springs (not shown) are inserted into the four holding holes 451d, respectively, and the front ends of these operation button springs abut against the rear ends of the guide boss portions 413c, so that the operation button springs are operated via the guide boss portions 413c. 410 is biased forward.

  The upper bearing portion 451e and the lower bearing portion 451f of the unit base 451 are formed in a U-shape that is open at the front and extends rearward. In the upper bearing portion 451e and the lower bearing portion 451f, the centers of the portions that extend in a semicircular arc are located coaxially. In the upper bearing portion 451e and the lower bearing portion 451f, the upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft member 474A of the door frame side second effect display device 460A are inserted from the front, and the upper bearing member 480 and the lower bearing member 485 are inserted from the front side. By being attached to the front surface of the main body 451a, the screen unit 470 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A can be rotatably supported.

  The front surface of each of the pair of rotation restricting portions 451g of the unit base 451 passes through the central axis of a semicircular portion of the upper bearing portion 451e whose extension line (surface) is recessed rearward in a U shape. Are formed so as to be separated from each other in the circumferential direction by a predetermined angle about the central axis. The pair of rotation restricting portions 451g restrict the rotation range of the screen unit 470 by contacting the stopper 475b of the operation gear member 475 of the screen unit 470 in a state of being assembled to the second effect operation unit 400A. There is. In the present embodiment, the rotation range of the screen unit 470 is restricted to the angle range of 90 degrees by the pair of rotation restriction parts 451g.

  Although not shown in the drawings, magnets are embedded in the pair of rotation restricting portions 451g, and the magnets are magnetically attached to the iron plates attached to the stoppers 475b so as to contact the rotation restricting portions 451g. It is difficult for the stopper 475b that has been moved to be separated from the rotation restricting portion 451g. Therefore, in the screen unit 470, the main screen 471 is in the first position with the magnet in the rotation restricting portion 451g and the iron plate of the stopper 475b facing forward, or the second screen with the sub-screen 472 facing forward. The screen unit 470 can be held in any one of the position states, and the movement of the screen unit 470 about to rotate is suppressed by the pressing operation of the operation button 410 or the vibration of the vibration motor 424, etc. The effect image produced by the second effect display device 460A can be enjoyed in a good state.

  The three press detection sensors 454 are attached to the front surface of the main body 451a of the unit base 451 at positions corresponding to the three detection pieces 413d of the button base 413 of the operation button 410. More specifically, the three pressing detection sensors 454 remain on the front surface of the main body 451a of the unit base 451, one on the lower left side of the upper left holding hole 451d and the other on the lower right side of the upper right holding hole 451d. Are attached to the lower right side of the lower left holding hole 451d, respectively. The three pressing detection sensors 454 are attached at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction with the center of the unit base 451 as the center. These three press detection sensors 454 can detect the three detection pieces 413d of the operation button 410.

[3-4g-5. Door frame side second effect display device]
The door frame side second effect display device 460A of the second effect operation unit 400A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71. The door frame side second effect display device 460A is attached to the second base unit 450 and can show the effect image to the player through the transparent portion of the operation button 410. The door frame side second effect display device 460A includes a screen unit 470 mounted rotatably around an axis extending vertically by an upper bearing portion 451e and a lower bearing portion 451f of the second base unit 450, and a second base. An upper bearing member 480 attached to the upper front surface of the unit 450 and rotatably attached to the upper side of the screen unit 470 in cooperation with the second base unit 450, and an upper bearing member 480 attached to the lower front surface of the second base unit 450. And a lower bearing member 485 that rotatably mounts the lower side of the screen unit 470 in cooperation with the second base unit 450.

  In addition, the door frame side second effect display device 460A includes a rotary drive unit 490 mounted on the upper part of the second base unit 450 by rotating the screen unit 470, and a cover portion 451b of the second base unit 450. A projector 500 that is arranged and capable of projecting and displaying an effect image on the screen unit 470 from the rear, and the projector 500 is attached, and is attached to the rear surface of the unit base 451 so as to cover the cover portion 451b of the second base unit 450 from the rear side. And a box-shaped projector mounting member 505 whose front is open, and a rotary drive unit 490 in the upper part of the second base unit 450 mounted so as to cover the operation gear member 475 of the screen unit 470 from above in the front view. The upper cover 506 and the upper part And two rotation detecting sensor 507 for detecting the rotational position of the screen unit 470 is attached to the bar 506 (rotational position), and a.

[3-4g-5a. Screen unit]
The screen unit 470 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71. The screen unit 470 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A is rotatably attached to the second base unit 450 about an axis extending vertically, and by projecting an effect image from the projector 500, The effect image can be displayed (projection display) so as to be visually recognized by the player.

  The screen unit 470 is formed in a semi-cylindrical shape, has a milky white main screen 471, and a translucent main screen 471. A sub-screen 472 that is curved so as to bulge outward in the direction, has a milky white color, and has translucency, and protrudes in a column shape from the axial center of both ends of the main screen 471 outward in the direction perpendicular to the axis. The upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft member 474, the operating gear member 475 attached to the tip of the upper shaft member 473 and having gear teeth 475a formed over substantially half of the outer circumference, and the sub-screen 472. And a sub-screen decorative member 476 (see FIGS. 74 and 75, etc.) that is transparent and is formed in a relief shape imitating a predetermined character (skull), and a sub-screen. A sub-screen decorative substrate 477 (see FIG. 75, etc.), which is attached to the back surface side of 472 and has a plurality of LEDs 477a mounted on the surface facing the sub-screen 472, and a side opposite to the sub-screen 472 of the main screen 471. And a semicircular arc-shaped peripheral decoration member 478 that extends shortly from the end of the main screen 471 toward the central axis of the main screen 471.

  The semi-cylindrical main screen 471 of the screen unit 470 has a radius smaller than the inner diameter of the annular main body 451a of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450. The length of the main screen 471 in the axial direction is formed to be about 4/3 times the radius of the semi-cylindrical shape. Both ends in the axial direction of the main screen 471 are decorated so as to be framed by the peripheral decoration portion 472 a of the sub-screen 472 and the peripheral decoration member 478.

  The sub-screen 472 is formed in a circular shape whose outer shape matches the radius of the semi-cylindrical main screen 471 when viewed from the direction in which its central axis extends (see FIG. 74 (b)). . The sub-screen 472 is formed in an annular shape with a predetermined width from the outer circumference to the center side, and closes the inside of the peripheral decoration portion 472a in which a plurality of quadrangular pyramid-shaped irregularities are arranged in a row in the circumferential direction. And a curved general screen portion 472b. The peripheral decorative portion 472a of the sub-screen 472 is formed in a truncated cone shape so that the inner peripheral side thereof projects in a direction away from the main screen 471. The screen general portion 472b bulges in a spherical shape having a radius larger than the radius of the semi-cylindrical main screen 471 in the direction away from the main screen 471. A through hole is formed in the screen general portion 472b of the sub screen 472, and a sub screen decoration member 476 is attached so as to close the hole.

  The upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft member 474 are rotatably attached by being inserted from the front into the upper bearing portion 451e and the lower bearing portion 451f of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450, respectively.

  The actuating gear member 475 meshes with the second transmission gear 495 of the rotary drive unit 490 and is formed to extend outward from one of the gear teeth 475a formed over substantially a half circumference and one end of the gear teeth 475a in the circumferential direction. And a detection piece 475c protruding outward from the side opposite to the stopper 475b at the circumferential end of the gear tooth 475a. The stopper 475b of the operation gear member 475 is located in the recess 481a of the upper bearing member 480 that is recessed in an arc shape around the axis of the upper shaft member 473 in a state of being assembled to the second effect operation unit 400A. The rotation range of the screen unit 470 is regulated by coming into contact with the pair of rotation regulating portions 451g of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 located at both ends of the recess 481a.

  Although not shown in detail, an iron plate is attached to a portion of the stopper 475b that comes into contact with the rotation restricting portion 451g, and this iron plate can be magnetically attached to a magnet embedded in the rotation restricting portion 451g. It is like this.

  The screen unit 470 can rotate between a first position with the main screen 471 facing forward and a second position with the sub screen 472 facing forward. The detection piece 475c is detected by the rotation detection sensor 507 attached to the upper cover 506.

  The sub-screen decoration member 476 is attached to the screen general portion 472b of the sub-screen 472. The sub-screen decoration member 476 is formed of a transparent member in a relief shape imitating a skull. Since the plate thickness of the sub-screen decoration member 476 changes intricately, the transmitted light is complicatedly refracted and the rear side is visually recognized. It's getting harder. Although not shown in detail, the sub-screen decoration member 476 has a letter "PUSH" formed in a relief imitating a skull.

  The sub-screen decoration substrate 477 is attached to the back surface side of the sub-screen 472 so that a gap is formed between the sub-screen decoration substrate 477 and the plurality of LEDs 477a on the front surface side (the side facing the sub-screen 472). Has been implemented. The sub-screen decoration substrate 477 has an outer shape smaller than that of the sub-screen decoration member 476, and has a white surface. By making the LED 477a of the sub-screen decoration substrate 477 emit light, the sub-screen decoration member 476 and the sub-screen 472 can be made to emit light. More specifically, the sub-screen decorative substrate 477 can cause the LED 477a to emit light, thereby strongly emitting and decorating the "eye" portion and the "PUSH" portion of the skull.

  Further, since the sub-screen decoration substrate 477 is arranged relatively close to the sub-screen 472 and has no member for diffusing light between the sub-screen decoration substrate 477 and the sub-screen 472, the LED 477a emits light. , The player can recognize the point light source of the LED 477a. Further, the sub screen decoration substrate 477 can block light from the projector 500. Therefore, the projector 500 can project the shadow of the sub-screen decoration substrate 477 on the sub-screen 472.

  The peripheral decoration member 478 is formed in the same shape as a part of the peripheral decoration portion 472a of the sub-screen 472, and like the peripheral decoration portion 472a, quadrangular pyramidal concavities and convexities are arranged in a plurality of rows in the circumferential direction of the arc. .

  As described above, the screen unit 470 includes two different screens such as the main screen 471 and the sub screen 472. The main screen 471 is intended to display an effect image projected from the projector 500 over the entire surface of a semi-cylindrical shape and to be displayed to the player by the projection from the projector 500. On the other hand, in the sub-screen 472, the effect image from the projector 500 forms a narrow range (narrower than the main screen 471) forming the periphery of the central sub-screen decoration member 476 due to the presence of the sub-screen decoration substrate 477 in the back center. Area), and is intended to display an effect image that brightly colors the surroundings of the sub-screen decoration member 476, and at the same time, the player presses the operation button 410 by the light-emitting decoration of the sub-screen decoration member 476 using the LED 477a. The purpose is to encourage.

[3-4g-5b. Upper bearing member and lower bearing member]
The upper bearing member 480 and the lower bearing member 485 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71. The upper bearing member 480 and the lower bearing member 485 close the front side of the upper bearing portion 451e and the lower bearing portion 451f that are open to the front in the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 so as to close the main body portion of the unit base 451. It is attached to the front surface of 451a. The upper bearing member 480 and the lower bearing member 485 are in a state in which the upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft member 474 of the screen unit 470 are inserted into the upper bearing part 451e and the lower bearing part 451f of the unit base 451 from the front, respectively. By mounting on the front surface of the unit base 451, the upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft member 474 can be rotatably mounted on the second base unit 450.

  The upper bearing member 480 is a bearing member 481 attached to the upper portion of the main body 451a of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 so as to close the front side of the upper bearing section 451e whose front side is open. And a frame top lens decoration substrate 482 attached to the front surface of the upper portion of the frame 481. The bearing member 481 has a concave portion 481a that is recessed in an arc shape from the rear surface toward the front so that the center in the left-right direction becomes deepest. The recess 481a of the bearing member 481 in the upper bearing member 480 is recessed in an arc shape centered on the axis of the upper shaft member 473 of the screen unit 470 when assembled in the second rendering operation unit 400A, and has a screen inside. The stopper 475b of the operation gear member 475 in the unit 470 is inserted and arranged, and the pair of rotation restricting portions 451g of the unit base 451 are located at both ends of the arc of the recess 481a. The recessed portion 481a recessed in an arc shape allows the stopper 475b of the operation gear member 475 to rotate favorably between the pair of rotation restricting portions 451g.

  A plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface side of the frame top lens decoration substrate 482 of the upper bearing member 480, and the LED is mounted behind the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415 when assembled in the second effect operation unit 400A. ing. As a result, by making the LEDs of the frame top lens decorative substrate 482 emit light, the frame top lens 418 can be made to emit light.

  The lower bearing member 485 is formed in a substantially flat plate shape, and is attached to the front surface of the main body portion 451a of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 so as to close the front side of the lower bearing portion 451f. The lower shaft member 474 is attached to the front surface of the unit base 451 by inserting the lower shaft member 474 of the screen unit 470 into the lower bearing portion 451f of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450. Can be rotatably mounted.

[3-4g-5c. Rotation drive unit]
The rotation drive unit 490 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71. The rotation drive unit 490 is attached to the upper surface of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 and can rotate the screen unit 470. The rotary drive unit 490 includes a unit case 491 mounted on the upper surface of the unit base 451 and having a hollow inside, and a switching drive motor 492 mounted on the lower surface of the unit case 491 and having a rotation shaft protruding into the unit case 491. , A spur gear-shaped drive gear (not shown) fixed to the rotation shaft of the switching drive motor, and a spur gear-shaped first gear meshing with the drive gear and rotatably mounted in the unit case 491. A transmission gear (not shown) is meshed with the first transmission gear, is meshable with gear teeth 475a of the operating gear member 475 of the screen unit 470, and is rotatably mounted in the unit case 491. And a second transmission gear 495 in the form of a spur gear.

  In the rotary drive unit 490 assembled to the second effect operation unit 400A, the second transmission gear 495 meshes with the gear teeth 475a of the operation gear member 475 of the screen unit 470. The rotary drive unit 490 rotationally drives the switching drive motor 492 to rotate the screen unit 470 around the axis extending in the front-back direction via the drive gear, the first transmission gear, the second transmission gear 495, and the gear teeth 475a. It can be rotated.

[3-4g-5d. projector]
The projector 500 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71. The projector 500 is arranged in the hemispherical cover portion 451b of the unit base 451 in the second base unit 450, and is attached to the rear side of the unit base 451 via the projector attachment member 505. The projector 500 can project the effect image on the main screen 471 or the sub screen 472 by irradiating the effect image toward the main screen 471 or the sub screen 472 of the screen unit 470.

  The projector 500 includes a cube-shaped projector main body 501 mounted on the projector mounting member 505, and a lens unit 502 that projects forward from the projector main body 501 in a columnar shape and irradiates a production image forward from the front end.

  In this projector 500, the rear portion of the projector main body 501 is attached to the projector mounting member 505, and the lens portion 502 and the projector main body 501 are arranged inside the cover portion 451b through the through hole 451c of the unit base 451 from the rear side. Mounted as.

  The projector 500 can project the effect image over substantially the front surface of the main screen 471 and the sub screen 472 of the screen unit 470, and can project and display a still image or a moving image as the effect image. The projector 500 is a commercially available liquid crystal projector and has an autofocus function.

[3-4g-5e. Projector mounting member]
The projector mounting member 505 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71. The projector mounting member 505 is formed in the shape of a box with the front open, and has the projector 500 mounted inside and the rear side of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450. The projector mounting member 505 can be mounted on the rear side of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 to cover the cover portion 451b of the unit base 451 and the rear side of the projector 500.

  The projector mounting member 505 has a bottom wall extending in the horizontal direction and a rear wall extending in the vertical direction, and the projector 500 can be mounted in a state of being tilted so as to match the tilt of the operation button 410. . The rear wall of the projector mounting member 505 is formed with a plurality of slits 505a penetrating in the front-rear direction, and heat emitted from the projector 500 can be discharged to the outside through the slits 505a.

  A second effect operation unit relay board 515 and a relay board cover 516 are mounted on the right side surface of the projector mounting member 505 when viewed from the front.

[3-4g-5f. Top cover and rotation detection sensor]
The upper cover 506 and the rotation detection sensor 507 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71. The upper cover 506 is attached to the upper surface of the main body portion 451a of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 so as to cover the operation gear member 475 of the screen unit 470. The rotation detection sensor 507 is for detecting the rotation position of the screen unit 470, and two rotation detection sensors 507 are attached to the lower surface of the upper cover 506 so as to be separated from each other.

  Although not shown in detail, the two rotation detection sensors 507 are attached at positions that are separated from each other by a rotation angle of 90 degrees in the circumferential direction about the rotation axis of the screen unit 470, and are used as operating gears in the screen unit 470. The detection piece 475c of the member 475 can be detected. Specifically, the two rotation detection sensors 507 are a detection piece 475c when the main screen 471 of the screen unit 470 is in the first position where the main screen 471 faces the front, and a second position where the sub screen 472 faces the front. The detection piece 475c at the time can be detected respectively. The rotary drive of the switching drive motor 492 of the rotary drive unit 490 is controlled based on the detection signal of the detection piece 475c from these two rotation detection sensors 507.

[3-4g-6. Buffer unit]
The buffer unit 510 of the second effect operation unit 400A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71 and the like. The buffer unit 510 is attached to the lower surface of the door frame side second effect display device 460A, and absorbs the impact when the second effect operation unit 400A is hit from above, and the plate unit cover in the plate unit 320. This is transmitted to the bottom plate portion 326i of 326.

  The cushioning unit 510 is in contact with the lower surface of the cushioning member 511 and the elastically deformable flat plate-like cushioning member 511 whose upper surface is in contact with the lower surface of the projector mounting member 505 in the door frame side second effect display device 460A. The buffer base 512 is mounted so as to be relatively close to the lower surface of the projector mounting member 505.

  The cushioning base 512 of the cushioning unit 510 includes a flat plate-shaped main body portion 512a that abuts the lower surface of the cushioning member 511, and leg pieces that project downward from both left and right ends of the main body portion 512a in a front view and extend in the front-rear direction. And 512b. The leg pieces 512b of the cushioning base 512 are in contact with the upper surface of the bottom plate 326i of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 in the state assembled to the door frame 3.

  In this buffer unit 510, the projector mounting member 505 mounted on the base unit 430 compresses the buffer member 511 in the buffer unit 510 when the operation button 410 or the frame unit 415 is strongly pressed or hit downward. Move down to. The shock is absorbed by the cushioning member 511 being compressed. When the projector mounting member 505 moves further downward, the lower surface of the projector mounting member 505 comes into contact with the upper surface side of the main body portion 512a of the buffer base 512. Since a gap is formed between the body portion 512a and the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i of the dish unit cover 326 by the left and right leg pieces 512b, the projector mounting member that is in contact with the upper surface side of the body portion 512a. When 505 moves further downward, the flat plate-shaped main body 512a is bent, and the shock can be absorbed even by the bending of the main body 512a. Further, when the projector mounting member 505 moves downward, the lower surface of the main body portion 512a that is bent downward comes into contact with the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i of the dish unit cover 326, and further bending of the main body portion 512a is restricted. The impact is transmitted to the dish unit cover 326. In this way, when the operation button 410 or the frame unit 415 is strongly hit from above, the impact can be absorbed in multiple stages, and the attachment portion 416e of the frame unit 415 and the production operation unit attachment portion of the dish unit cover 326 can be absorbed. It is possible to prevent unreasonable force from acting on 326a and the like, and prevent them from being damaged.

[3-4g-7. Effect of the second effect operation unit]
The effects of the second effect operation unit 400A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 74 to 77 and the like. 74A is an explanatory view of the second effect operation unit viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends with the main screen of the screen unit facing forward, and FIG. 74B is a sub-view of the screen unit. It is explanatory drawing which looked at the 2nd production | operation operation unit from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button has extended with the screen facing forward. Further, FIG. 75 (a) is a sectional view taken along the line JJ in FIG. 74 (a), and FIG. 75 (b) is a sectional view taken along the line KK in FIG. 74 (b). FIG. 76 (a) is a view of the second effect operation unit viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends with the main screen facing forward, and is hidden by the first button decoration portion of the operation button or the button frame. It is explanatory drawing which shows the site | part which is going to do, and (b) shows the site | part which is going to be hidden by the 1st button decoration part of an operation button, a button frame, etc. in the sectional view of the 2nd production | operation operation unit of the state of (a). FIG. 77 (a) is a view of the second effect operation unit viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends with the sub-screen facing forward, and is hidden by the first button decoration portion of the operation button, the button frame, or the like. It is explanatory drawing which shows the site | part which is going to do, and (b) shows the site | part which is going to be hidden by the 1st button decoration part of an operation button, a button frame, etc. in the sectional view of the 2nd production | operation operation unit of the state of (a). FIG.

  The second effect operation unit 400A of the present embodiment changes the decoration in the operation button 410 or the operation button according to the game state that changes when the game ball is hit in the game area 5a of the game board 5. It is possible to entertain the player by displaying an effect image in 410, and to allow the player to operate the operation button 410 so that the player can participate in the effect presented to the player. is there.

  The second effect operation unit 400A is formed to have substantially the same height as the height of a portion of the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 below the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110. Further, the second effect operation unit 400A is formed such that the overall width thereof is slightly larger than 1/3 of the overall width of the door frame 3. The second effect operation unit 400A is disposed in the center in the left-right direction below the game area 5a (the through-hole 111 of the door frame base 110) when viewed from the front.

  In the second effect operation unit 400A, the upper part of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415 is attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320. The second effect operation unit 400A is attached to the dish unit 320, and is between the lower end of the leg piece portion 512b of the cushioning base 512 of the cushioning unit 510 and the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i of the dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320. There is a gap formed in. That is, the second effect operation unit 400A is attached only to the upper portion of the dish unit 320, and is attached in a suspended state.

  Further, in the second effect operation unit 400A, the front surface of the frame unit 415 (the surface formed by the inner circumference of the front end of the central opening 416a of the frame body 416) is parallel to the inclined surface of the front end opening of the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a. Is installed. As a result, in the second effect operation unit 400A, the central axis line CL (see FIG. 67) of the transparent operation button 410 bulging forward in a curved surface shape (a shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface) becomes a vertical line. On the other hand, it is inclined at an angle of 63 degrees so as to move upward as it goes forward. As a result, when the player sits in front of the pachinko machine 1 to play a game using the pachinko machine 1, the head of the player is placed above the dish unit 320 (second effect operation unit 400A). Since it is located in front of the center of the game area 5a on the game board 5, the central axis CL of the operation button 410 passes near the head of the player. Therefore, when the player drops his or her line of sight from the game area 5a to the second effect operation unit 400A (operation button 410), the operation button 410 is possible in its front view (projection view from a direction parallel to the central axis CL). Therefore, the operation button 410, the door frame side second effect display device 460A in the operation button 410, and the like can be visually recognized in a good state.

  In the second effect operation unit 400A, the button shafts 452 held in the four holding holes 451d of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 are slid on the four cylindrical guide boss portions 413c of the operation button 410, respectively. It is movably inserted and is urged forward by an operation button spring (not shown). In the normal state (state where the operation button 410 is not pressed), the second effect operation unit 400A causes the front end of the flange portion 413b of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 to move to the frame unit 415 due to the urging force of the operation button spring. The frame main body 416 is in contact with a portion of the rear surface of the frame main body 416 near the central opening 416a.

  In the normal state, in the second effect operation unit 400A, the center side (center axis CL side) from the vicinity of the inner circumference of the button frame 412 of the operation button 410 is forward from the center opening 416a of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415. It is protruding. In other words, in the transparent button lens 411 that bulges forward in a curved surface shape (a shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface) of the operation button 410, a portion protruding forward from the inner circumference (inner side) of the button frame 412 is It projects forward from the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415 (see FIG. 67 and the like).

  Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the diameter of the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415 is about 15 cm, and the button lens 411 (the front end thereof) is located in the frame unit in the central axis CL direction of the operation button 410. It projects about 4 cm forward from the front surface of 415.

  When the player presses the operation button 410 of the second effect operation unit 400A in the normal state, the operation button 410 moves rearward along the central axis CL against the biasing force of the operation button spring. When the rear end of the operation button 410 comes into contact with the front surface of the main body portion 451a of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450, the backward movement is restricted and the backward movement of the operation button 410 is stopped. When the player presses the operation button 410, the button lens 411 bulging forward in a curved surface shape (a part of a substantially spherical surface) is pressed.

  Since the operation button 410 has a very large outer diameter as compared with the operation button for performance provided in the conventional pachinko machine, it is pressed near the peripheral edge away from the central portion of the button lens 411. Is likely to be. More specifically, the operation buttons for the effect in the conventional pachinko machine are attached so that the central axis thereof extends substantially parallel to the vertical line, while the operation of the second effect operation unit 400A of the present embodiment. Since the central axis CL of the button 410 is inclined with respect to the vertical line, when the player presses the operation button 410 from above as in the conventional pachinko machine, the button 410 is separated from the central axis CL of the operation button 410. The part will be pressed (see FIG. 61).

  By the way, since the operation button for performance in the conventional pachinko machine has a flat surface for the player to press, when the operation button is enlarged with the part to be pressed kept flat. , If you press a part of the operation button that is off the center, the pressing surface will tilt so that the pressed part will retract first, and the operation button will not be able to recede straightly. There is a possibility that the pressing operation may not be possible.

  On the other hand, in the operation button 410 of the second effect operation unit 400A of the present embodiment, the portion (button lens 411) pressed by the player has a curved surface shape (a part of a substantially spherical surface) bulged forward. Therefore, when a position away from the center of the operation button 410 is pressed, the force is distributed to the entire operation button 410 and the operation button 410 becomes difficult to tilt, and the operation button 410 moves straight rearward. can do. Therefore, no matter which position on the front side of the operation button 410 is pressed, the operation button 410 can be smoothly retracted without tilting, so that the pressing operation can be reliably detected and the operation button 410 is pressed. It is possible to fully enjoy the performance to operate.

  Further, in the second effect operation unit 400A, the vibration motor 424 is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the board base 421 in the decorative board unit 420, and as described above, the second effect operation unit 400A is hung. Since only the upper part is attached to the performance operation unit attachment portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326, when the vibration motor 424 rotates the weight 424a to generate vibration, the vibration is generated at the portion farthest from the attached portion. Since it occurs, the entire second effect operation unit 400A can be vibrated largely (strongly), and the vibration can be transmitted to the player touching the second effect operation unit 400A. Further, since the vibration motor 424 is arranged immediately below the position (near the upper portion of the operation button 410) which is relatively easy for the player to perform the pressing operation, strong vibration is exerted on the player who is pressing the operation button 410. Can be transmitted, which can surprise the player and entertain the production.

  Further, the second effect operation unit 400A is attached to the plate unit cover 326 in a suspended state, and the projector mounting member 505 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A and the bottom plate of the plate unit cover 326 are attached. The buffer unit 510 is arranged between the upper surface of the portion 326i and the upper surface. The cushioning unit 510 includes a cushioning member 511 that is elastically deformable, and forms a gap between the main body portion 512a where the cushioning member 511 is in contact with the upper surface and the bottom plate portion 326i of the dish unit cover 326. Therefore, when the operation button 410 or the frame unit 415 is strongly pressed or tapped downward, the impact is multistaged by elastic deformation (compression) of the cushioning member 511, bending of the main body portion 512a of the cushioning base 512, or the like. It is possible to absorb, it is possible to avoid applying an unreasonable force to the mounting portion 416e of the frame unit 415, the production operation unit attachment portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326, etc., and damage to the second production operation unit 400A, etc. Can be prevented. Therefore, when the player is presented with an effect of pressing the operation button 410 of the second effect operation unit 400A, even if the operation button 410 or the frame unit 415 is pressed or tapped with a strong force, the operation is performed. Since the button 410, the second effect operation unit 400A, and the like are not damaged, it is possible to avoid interruption of the game due to damage, suppress a decrease in the interest of the player, and prevent damage. It is possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the game hall side.

  Since the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 that is pressed by the player is formed in a curved surface shape (a shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface) projecting forward, as compared with the case of a flat plate shape. The strength and rigidity are high, and even when hit hard, the impact can be dispersed to the entire button lens 411, which makes it less likely to be damaged.

  Further, in the second effect operation unit 400A, since the button lens 411, the frame side lens 417, and the frame top lens 418 are made of transparent members, the first button decoration portion formed on the back surface side thereof. 411a, the decoration by the unevenness of the second button decoration portion 411b and the like can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) (see FIG. 63). In addition, since the light is complicatedly refracted due to the change in the plate thickness in the portion where the uneven decoration is formed, it is difficult to visually recognize the rear side through the portion where the uneven decoration is formed. .

  Since the second effect operation unit 400A includes the first button decoration portion 411a extending from the inner circumference of the button frame 412 in the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 toward the center side, a plurality of the first button decoration portions 411a are provided. It is possible to make it difficult to see the rear part at the outer peripheral part of the part inside the button lens 411 by the decoration of the concavo-convex in which the triangles are combined. Behind the portion where the first button decoration portion 411a is formed (rear in the direction of the central axis CL), the inner peripheral surface of the main body portion 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and the door frame side second effect display device. A gap is formed between the screen unit 470 and the outer periphery of the screen unit 470. However, the first button decoration portion 411a located in front of the gap allows the outside or rear side of the screen unit 470 from the front side (player side). The member of can be made invisible. Thereby, even if the door frame side second effect display device 460A is provided in the operation button 410 that can be pressed, deterioration of the appearance of the operation button 410 can be prevented, and the player who sees the operation button 410 can It is possible to prevent discomfort, and the door frame side second effect display device 460A can be arranged in the transparent operation button 410 without any problem, and the operation button 410 can be made to look good.

  More specifically, the second effect operation unit 400A uses the first button decoration part 411a, the second button decoration part 411b of the button lens 411 of the operation button 410, and the button frame 412 in the door frame side second effect display device 460A. The second base unit 450, the upper shaft member 473, the lower shaft member 474, etc. on the rear side (back side) outside the outer circumference of the main screen 471, the sub-screen 472, etc., from the player side through the transparent button lens 411. It is formed so that it cannot be seen. Specifically, when the main screen 471 of the screen unit 470 is in the first position with the main screen 471 facing forward, the upper and lower outer sides of the main screen 471, the left outer side of the peripheral decoration portion 472 a of the sub-screen 472, and the right peripheral decoration member 478. The outer part (the part of the cross hatch surrounded by the one-dot chain line in FIG. 76) is made invisible to the player.

  On the other hand, in the state of the second position in which the sub-screen 472 of the screen unit 470 is directed to the front, a portion outside the annular peripheral decoration portion 472a of the sub-screen 472 (a cross-hatched portion surrounded by a dashed line in FIG. 76). ), But not to be seen from the player side. As described above, since the operation button 410 includes the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, the button frame 412, and the like, it is difficult to see the outer side and the inner side of the main screen 471 and the sub screen 472. It can be hidden, and the appearance of the operation button 410 and by extension, the entire second effect operation unit 400A can be improved.

  Further, when the main screen 471 is in the first position in which the main screen 471 faces forward, the screen general portion of the sub-screen 472 is formed by the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b of the button lens 411, the button frame 412, and the like. The 472b and the sub-screen decoration member 476, and the upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft member 474 are difficult to see (see FIG. 76). This makes it difficult for the player to notice the presence of the sub-screen 472, the rotation of the main screen 471, and the like. Therefore, when the screen unit 470 is rotated to switch from the main screen 471 to the sub-screen 472, the operation is performed. The movement that exceeds the expectation of the player in the button 410 can give a strong impact to the player, which can entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, when the sub-screen 472 is in the second position with the front facing forward, the upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft are driven by the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b of the button lens 411, the button frame 412, and the like. The member 474 is difficult to see (see FIG. 77). This makes it difficult for the player to notice that the sub-screen 472 (sub-screen decoration member 476) is rotatable, so that it is possible to increase the impact when the sub-screen 472 (screen unit 470) is rotated. It can entertain the player.

  In addition, the second effect operation unit 400A, in the button lens 411 that can visually recognize the door frame side second effect display device 460A arranged on the rear side of the operation button 410, from the inner periphery of the button frame 412 to the center side. To the second frame display on the door frame side, which is provided with a polyhedral first button decoration portion 411a in which a plurality of triangular surfaces are combined, within the range of a predetermined width, and which is arranged inside and behind the operation button 410 The device 460A is provided with a peripheral decoration portion 472a of a sub-screen 472 in which a plurality of square pyramids are arranged in an array, and a peripheral decoration member 478. As a result, the triangular decoration (first button decoration portion 411a) arranged on the front side and the rectangular decoration (peripheral decoration portion 472a and peripheral decoration member 478) arranged on the rear side are overlapped so as to intersect with each other. This makes it possible to show a complicated geometric pattern to the player, improve the appearance and prevent the player's interest from decreasing.

  Further, as described above, the first button decoration part 411a mainly composed of the triangle and the peripheral decoration part 472a and the peripheral decoration member 478 mainly composed of the quadrangle are separated from each other in the front-rear direction, and thus the eyes of the player. When the positions move, the overlapping degree of them changes, so that the geometric patterns that appear to overlap change and the moving decoration can be shown to the player, and at the same time, the decoration with a three-dimensional feeling with depth can be displayed. Can be shown to entertain the player.

  Further, in the door frame side second effect display device 460A arranged inside and behind the operation button 410, the switching drive motor 492 drives the screen unit 470 to rotate so that the main screen 471 is directed forward or the sub screen. The 472 can be turned forward, and the decoration made of a plurality of squares can be changed. More specifically, in the state where the main screen 471 is directed forward, as shown in FIG. 74 (a), the peripheral decoration portion 472a and the peripheral decoration member 478 are in a state in which they are vertically spaced apart and extend vertically, A decoration with a geometric pattern in which a decoration composed of a plurality of square pyramids arranged in a row crosses a decoration composed of a plurality of triangles arranged in an annular shape of the first button decoration portion 411a of the button lens 411. It can be shown to the player. On the other hand, when the sub-screen 472 is directed forward, as shown in FIG. 74 (b), the peripheral decoration portion 472a is in a state of extending in an annular shape, and the decoration is made up of a plurality of square pyramids arranged in an annular shape. However, it is possible for the player to see the geometric pattern decoration overlapping the decoration formed of a plurality of triangles arranged in an annular shape on the first button decoration portion 411a of the button lens 411. Therefore, since the decoration (physical decoration) of the operation button 410 can be changed by rotating the screen unit 470, the change in the decoration attracts the player's attention to the operation button 410, or changes the decoration. The change can be made to suggest the arrival of a chance to the player, which can entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, the second effect operation unit 400A has a screen having a switchable screen (main screen 471 and sub screen 472) on the door frame side second effect display device 460A provided in the operation button 410. Since the unit 470 and the projector 500 for projecting and displaying the effect image on the screen unit 470 are provided, it is possible to display an effect image which is completely different from the display of the effect image by the liquid crystal display device, which has a strong impact on the player. Can be given to entertain. More specifically, the screen unit 470 includes a semi-cylindrical main screen 471 and a disc-shaped sub-screen 472 having a relief-shaped sub-screen decoration member 476 in the center, the center of the upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft member 474. It is provided so as to be spaced apart in the circumferential direction by a rotation angle of 90 degrees about the axis.

  Then, in the door frame side second effect display device 460A, in the state of the first position with the main screen 471 of the screen unit 470 facing forward, the central axis of the semi-cylindrical shape is positioned so as to extend in the left-right direction, When viewed from the front, it looks like a quadrangle (rectangle) extending vertically (see FIG. 74 (a)). When the effect image is radiated forward from the projector 500 arranged behind the main screen 471, the effect image is projected on the rear surface of the main screen 471 (see FIG. 75 (a)), and the translucent milky white. Through the main screen 471, the effect image projected from the front side can be visually recognized. Since the main screen 471 is formed in a semi-cylindrical shape with a smooth surface, the effect image is also curved in a semi-cylindrical shape on the display screen. As a result, the display screen of the general liquid crystal display device is flat, whereas the display screen of the main screen 471 is curved in a semi-cylindrical shape. It is possible to make the player recognize that it is different from the above, and it is possible to surprise the player and also to let the player pay attention to the main screen 471 and entertain the effect image projected and displayed on the main screen 471. be able to.

  On the other hand, when the sub-screen 472 of the screen unit 470 is in the second position with the sub-screen 472 facing forward, the disk-shaped central axis substantially coincides with the central axis of the operation button 410, and when viewed from the front, the circular operation button 410 has a circular shape. It seems that the sub-screen decoration member 476 imitating a skull is positioned in the center (see FIG. 74 (b)). In this state, when the effect image is emitted forward from the projector 500 arranged at the rear, the effect image is projected on the rear surface of the sub screen 472. By the way, since a flat plate-shaped non-translucent sub-screen decoration substrate 477 is attached to the rear side of the sub-screen 472, an effect image (light) emitted from the projector 500 at this sub-screen decoration substrate 477. Thus, the shadow of the sub-screen decoration substrate 477 is projected on the central portion of the rear surface of the sub-screen 472 (see FIG. 75 (b)). Therefore, on the sub-screen 472, the effect image from the projector 500 is projected and displayed on the outer peripheral portion excluding the central portion where the shadow of the sub-screen decoration substrate 477 is projected. At this time, when the LED 477a mounted on the front surface of the sub-screen decoration substrate 477 is made to emit light, the central portion of the sub-screen 472 can be made to emit light by the light, and the sub-screen provided at the center of the sub-screen 472 can be illuminated. The screen decoration member 476 can be illuminated. Further, by causing the LED 477a of the sub-screen decoration substrate 477 to emit light, the shadow of the sub-screen decoration substrate 477 projected on the rear surface of the sub-screen 472 by the light from the projector 500 can be made difficult to see, and the front surface of the sub-screen 472 can be made invisible. The entire side can be brightly illuminated and decorated.

  This door frame side second effect display device 460A causes the LED 477a of the sub-screen decoration substrate 477 to emit light in the state where the sub-screen 472 of the screen unit 470 is directed to the front, and an effect image (video) from the projector 500 to the front. When illuminated, the effect image is displayed on the part of the subscreen 472 where the shadow of the subscreen decoration substrate 477 is not projected, that is, on the part outside the subscreen decoration member 476 which is a decoration imitating a skull. The sub-screen decoration member 476, which is the inside of the sub-screen, is illuminated and decorated by the LED 477a of the sub-screen decoration substrate 477. In this state, the outer side of the light emitting decoration of the fixed sub-screen decoration member 476 is decorated with the effect image (moving image), and the decoration effect is completely different from the light emitting decoration of the decoration member in the past pachinko machines. It can be shown to the player, a strong impact can be given to the player, and the player can be strongly focused on the sub-screen 472. Further, in this state, since the light of the LED 477a shines brighter (higher in brightness) than the brightness of the effect image inside the effect image, a partially high effect image which cannot be achieved by the conventional liquid crystal display device. Can be displayed, the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and an effect image that can further entertain the player can be displayed.

  Further, in the door frame side second effect display device 460A, in the state where the effect image is radiated forward from the projector 500, the screen facing forward is rotated in an appropriate direction to change from the main screen 471 to the sub screen 472. If the main screen 471 and the sub screen 472 are rotated, the main screen 471 and the sub screen 472 are located in the projection range of the projector 500 while the main screen 471 and the sub screen 472 are rotating. The effect image is projected and displayed. That is, the effect image is displayed across the main screen 471 and the sub screen 472. Therefore, when the main screen 471 is slowly changed to the sub screen 472, a mysterious visual effect such that the peripheral decoration portion 472a and the sub screen decoration member 476 are rotationally moved on the effect image projected from the projector 500. It can be shown to the player and entertaining the player.

  As described above, the second effect operation unit 400A includes the first button decoration portion 411a of the operation button 410 and the decoration (the peripheral decoration portion 472a and the peripheral decoration member 478) of the screen unit 470 in the door frame side second effect display device 460A. With this, since the player can see the decoration with movement and a three-dimensional effect, the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and the pachinko machine 1 with high appeal can be obtained.

  Further, the second effect operation unit 400A can irradiate light such as effect images to the sub-screen decorative substrate 477 having the LED 477a mounted on the front side in the rear of the operation button 410 (inside the button frame 412) or to the front side. The door frame side second effect display device 460A having the projector 500 is provided, and the interior of the operation button 410 can be favorably illuminated and decorated by the door frame side second effect display device 460A.

  In addition, the operation button left outside decoration board 422 in the decoration board unit 420 is behind the second button decoration portion 411b facing the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412 located near the outer periphery of the second effect operation unit 400A and the operation button 410. The first LED 422a and the first LED 423a of the operation button right outside decoration substrate 423 are arranged, and the six second button decoration portions 411b of the operation button 410 are light-emitted and decorated by causing the first LEDs 422a and 423a to emit light. be able to. As shown in FIG. 68, the first LED 422a of the operation button left outer decoration board 422 and the first LED 423a of the operation button right outer decoration board 423 are the cylindrical main body 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and the frame unit. It is located between the cylindrical inner cylinder portion 416d of the frame body 416 of the frame 415, and the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a does not leak to the inside of the body portion 413a or the outside of the inner cylinder portion 416d. Only the second button decoration portion 411b of the button 410 can be favorably illuminated and decorated.

  Further, the second effect operation unit 400A includes the second LED 422b of the operation button left outside decoration substrate 422 and the operation button right outside of the frame side lens 417 that faces the six outer peripheral openings 416b of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415. The second LED 423b of the decorative substrate 423 is arranged, and the frame side lens 417 can be illuminated and decorated by causing the second LEDs 422b and 423b to emit light. The second LED 422b of the operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 and the second LED 423b of the operation button right outer decoration substrate 423 are provided between the inner cylindrical portion 416d of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415 and the outer periphery of the frame body 416. Since the light from the second LEDs 422b and 423b is not leaked to the inside of the inner cylindrical portion 416d or the outside of the frame main body 416, only the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 can be favorably illuminated and decorated. .

  Further, in the second effect operation unit 400A, the frame top lens decorative substrate 482 of the upper bearing member 480 in the door frame side second effect display device 460A is arranged behind the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415, By making a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the top lens decoration substrate 482 emit light, the frame top lens 418 can be favorably made to emit light.

  In addition, the second effect operation unit 400A has display screens having different forms by rotating the screen unit 470 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A arranged inside and behind the operation button 410. The effect image can be displayed by switching to the main screen 471 or the sub-screen 472, and the player can be presented with an effect that the shape of the display screen changes (switches), which is not possible with conventional pachinko machines. , Can give the player a great impact and entertaining.

[3-4h. Overall Configuration of Third Embodiment of Performance Operation Unit]
Next, a third effect operation unit 400B that is the third embodiment of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 78 to 85 and the like. FIG. 78 (a) is a front view of a third production operation unit different from the embodiment of the production operation unit and the second production operation unit of FIGS. 48 to 77, and (b) is a right side surface of the third production operation unit. It is a figure. FIG. 79 is a rear view of the third effect operation unit. 80A is a perspective view of the third effect operation unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 80B is a perspective view of the third effect operation unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 81 is an explanatory view of the third effect operation unit as seen from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. 82 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line LL in FIG. 79 (a). 83 is a sectional view taken along line MM in FIG. 78 (b). FIG. 84 is an exploded perspective view of the third rendering operation unit disassembled into main components and seen from the front, and FIG. 85 is an exploded perspective view of the third rendering operation unit disassembled into main components and seen from the rear. It is a figure.

  The third effect operation unit 400B can be attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the dish unit 320 instead of the effect operation unit 400 and the second effect operation unit 400A. Like the effect operation unit 400, the third effect operation unit 400B can be pressed by the player. Hereinafter, in the third effect operation unit 400B, the same components as those in the effect operation unit 400 will be described with the same reference numerals.

  The third effect operation unit 400B has a circular outer shape and is transparent on the center side excluding the outer peripheral edge, and the operation button 410 that can be pressed by the player, and the effect of the dish unit cover 326 surrounding the outer periphery of the operation button 410. A frame-shaped frame unit 415 attached to the operation unit attachment portion 326a, and a decoration substrate unit 420 arranged behind the operation button 410 and capable of performing light emission decoration on the outer peripheral edge of the operation button 410 and the frame unit 415. , A third base unit 520 attached to the rear side of the frame unit 415 and having the operation button 410 and the decorative substrate unit 420 attached to the front surface, and the third base unit 520 visible from the player side through the operation button 410. And a decorative rotary unit 530 attached to the That.

[3-4h-1. Manual operation button]
The operation button 410 of the third effect operation unit 400B will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 84 and 85 and the like. The operation button 410 of the third effect operation unit 400B is formed in a circular shape having a diameter slightly smaller than the height of the dish unit 320 in the vertical direction, and the center side except the outer peripheral edge is formed transparent. The operation button 410 includes a transparent button lens 411 formed in a curved surface shape (a shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface) such that the outer circumference is circular and the central side bulges forward, and an outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411. An annular button frame 412 attached to the front side and a cylindrical button base 413 attached to the rear side of the button frame 412 so as to sandwich the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411 are provided.

  The operation button 410 of the third effect operation unit 400B has the same configuration as the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400, and the same reference numerals are given and detailed description thereof is omitted.

[3-4h-2. Frame unit]
The frame unit 415 of the third effect operation unit 400B will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 84 and 85 and the like. The frame unit 415 is attached from the front side to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320 so as to surround the outer periphery from the front side of the operation button 410, and decorates the outside of the operation button 410. The frame unit 415 is formed in a shape whose outer shape matches the front end side of the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a.

  The frame unit 415 has a circular central opening 416a, a plurality of outer peripheral openings 416b arranged in a row along the peripheral edge of the central opening 416a, and a notch cut at a predetermined width on the upper front surface of the central opening 416a. A frame-shaped frame main body 416 that has a portion 416c and is attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326 in the dish unit 320, and is attached from the rear side to the frame main body 416 so as to close the outer peripheral opening 416b. A pair of translucent frame side lenses 417 and a translucent frame top lens 418 attached to the frame main body 416 from the front side so as to close the notch 416c are provided.

  The frame unit 415 of the third effect operation unit 400B has the same configuration as the frame unit 415 of the effect operation unit 400, and the same reference numerals are given and detailed description thereof is omitted.

[3-4h-3. Decorative board unit]
The decorative substrate unit 420 of the third effect operation unit 400B will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 84 and 85 and the like. The decorative substrate unit 420 is attached to the front surface of the third base unit 520 below the frame unit 415, and the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 can be illuminated and decorated. The third effect operation unit 400B can be vibrated.

  The decorative substrate unit 420 includes a C-shaped substrate base 421 having an open upper side, an operation button left outside decorative substrate 422 and an operation button right outside decorative substrate 423 attached to the left and right front surfaces of the substrate base 421, respectively. A vibration motor 424 attached to the lower part of the front surface of the substrate base 421 and a motor cover 425 attached to the front surface of the substrate base 421 so as to cover the front side of the vibration motor 424 are provided.

  The operation button left outside decoration substrate 422 and the operation button right outside decoration substrate 423 are the first LED 422a and the first LED 423a capable of making only the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 emit light, and the frame side of the frame unit 415. The second LED 422b and the second LED 423b capable of making only the lens 417 emit light are provided.

  The decorative board unit 420 of the third effect operation unit 400B has the same configuration as the decorative board unit 420 of the effect operation unit 400, and the same reference numerals are given and detailed description thereof is omitted.

[3-4h-4. Third base unit]
Third base unit 520 of third effect operation unit 400B will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 86 and the like. FIG. 86 is a perspective view of the third base unit of the third effect operation unit as seen from the front. The third base unit 520 of the third effect operation unit 400B has the operation button 410 attached so as to be able to move forward and backward, the decorative rotating body unit 530 is attached, and is attached to the rear side of the frame unit 415. .

  The third base unit 520 includes a housing wall portion 521a that is attached to the rear side of the frame unit 415 and is recessed rearward in a hemispherical shape in the central portion, and a blind hole that is open to the front outside the housing wall portion 521a. An annular unit base 521 having one holding hole 521b, a frame top lens decoration substrate 522 attached to the front upper part of the unit base 521, and four holding holes 521b of the unit base 521, respectively. An operation button spring 523, three sensor holders 524 attached to the front surface of the unit base 521, three pressure detection sensors 525 attached to each sensor holder 524 to detect the pressing operation of the operation button 410, and a unit. In the third performance operation unit attached to the rear side of the base 521 A substrate 526, and a third staging operation unit relay board cover 527 attached to the rear side of the unit base 521 so as to cover the rear side of the relay board 526, a.

  The third base unit 520 is a spur gear attached to the rotary shaft of the effect operation unit first drive motor 528 attached to the left side surface of the unit base 521 and the effect operation unit first drive motor 528. A first drive gear (not shown) and a spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 529 that meshes with the first drive gear and is rotatably attached to the unit base 521 are provided. The first transmission gear 529 meshes with a rotary body gear 531a of the decorative rotary body unit 530, which will be described later.

  The unit base 521 has a substantially circular outer shape, and is formed to be slightly smaller than the outer shape of the frame unit 415. The unit base 521 includes, in addition to the accommodation wall portion 521a and the holding hole 521b, a light shielding wall portion 521c that protrudes forward in a flat plate shape from a lower side of a portion to which the frame top lens decoration substrate 437 is attached in the upper front portion, and an accommodation portion. A plurality of ventilation openings 521d penetrating the wall portion 521a, a left protruding portion 521e protruding forward from the left outer side of the accommodation wall portion 521a and substantially the center in the up-down direction, and accommodation so as to face the left protruding portion 521e. A right protruding portion 521f protruding forward from the right center of the wall portion 521a and a substantially vertical center, a left shaft portion 521g extending rightward from the left protruding portion 521e in a cylindrical shape, and an extension of the left shaft portion 521g. The right bearing portion 521h is provided coaxially with the axis (first axis CL1) and penetrates the right protrusion 521f.

  The accommodation wall portion 521a that is recessed in a hemispherical shape toward the rear of the unit base 521 is formed so that approximately half of the rear side of the decorative rotating body unit 530 can be accommodated in the recessed front surface side without contact.

  The four holding holes 521b of the unit base 521 are formed at the four corners on the upper, lower, left, and right outside the housing wall 521a at positions corresponding to the four guide bosses 413c of the button base 413 of the operation button 410. These holding holes 521b are formed such that the inner diameter thereof is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the guide boss portion 413c, and the guide boss portion 413c can be slidably inserted therein.

  More specifically, of the four holding holes 521b, the holding hole 521b on the upper left side is located with respect to the center of the unit base 521 from the center line extending vertically through the center of the unit base 521 (the center of the operation button 410). It is formed at a position rotated about 30 degrees counterclockwise. Further, the holding hole 521b on the upper right side of the four holding holes 521b is clockwise with respect to the center of the unit base 521 from a vertically extending center line passing through the center of the unit base 521 (the center of the operation button 410). It is formed at a position rotated about 47 degrees in the direction of. On the other hand, the two holding holes 521b arranged on the lower side of the four holding holes 521b are respectively formed at positions opposite to the center of the unit base 521 with respect to the two upper holding holes 521b. .

  The light-blocking wall portion 521c of the unit base 521 can prevent light from the frame top lens decoration substrate 522 from leaking downward so that the frame top lens 418 can be illuminated and decorated only by the frame top lens decoration substrate 522. It is for doing.

  The left shaft portion 521g of the unit base 521 has a horizontally extending left end fixed to the left protruding portion 521e, and the right side thereof is rotatably inserted into the rotating body side left bearing portion 531b of the decorative rotating body unit 530. It is a thing. Further, the right bearing portion 521h of the unit base 521 has the cylindrical right side rotor shaft portion 531c of the decorative rotor unit 530 rotatably inserted therein. The left shaft portion 521g and the right bearing portion 521h are arranged coaxially with the first axis line CL1 (see FIG. 83) extending in the horizontal direction. By the left shaft portion 521g and the right bearing portion 521h of the unit base 521, the decorative rotating body unit 530 can be attached rotatably around the first axis CL1 extending in the horizontal direction.

  A plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface of the frame top lens decoration substrate 522, and by making these LEDs emit light, the frame top lens 418 in the frame unit 415 can be illuminated. The front surface of the Rametop lens decorative substrate 522 is white, and the mounted LEDs are full-color LEDs.

  The operation button spring 523 is a coil spring, and is inserted into the four holding holes 521b of the unit base 521 from the front. In the state where the operation button spring 523 is assembled to the third effect operation unit 400B, the rear end is in contact with the bottom surface of the holding hole 521b, and the front end projects rearward from the main body portion 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410. It is in contact with the rear end of the guide boss portion 413c. The operation button 410 is biased forward by these operation button springs 523.

  The three press detection sensors 525 are arranged at positions corresponding to the three detection pieces 413d of the button base 413 in the operation button 410. More specifically, three pressing detection sensors 525 are provided on the front surface of the unit base 521, one on the lower left side of the upper left holding hole 521b, the other on the lower right side of the upper right holding hole 521b, and the other one on the lower left side. Are attached to the lower right side of the holding holes 521b via sensor holders 524, respectively. The three pressing detection sensors 525 are attached at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction with the center of the unit base 521 as the center. These three pressure detection sensors 525 can detect the three detection pieces 413d of the operation button 410.

  The third effect operation unit relay board 526 is attached to the rear side of the unit base 521 on the left outside (right side in front view) of the housing wall portion 521a in rear view. The third effect operation unit relay board 526 includes an operation button left outside decoration board 422, an operation button right outside decoration board 423, a vibration motor 424, a frame top lens decoration board 522, a press detection sensor 525, and an effect operation unit first drive motor 528. , A rendering operation unit second drive motor 534 of the decorative rotator unit 530, a first decorative surface decorative board 535, and a second decorative surface decorative board 536, and a door body relay board (not shown) of the door frame base unit 100. It is for relaying the connection of.

  The relay board cover 527 extends from the lower end of the portion that covers the rear side of the third effect operation unit relay board 526 to the left in front view, and includes leg portions 527a that are attached to the lower rear surface of the unit base 521. The leg portion 527a of the relay board cover 527 has a lower surface that extends substantially horizontally when assembled to the door frame 3, and is between the bottom plate portion 326i that forms the bottom surface of the plate unit cover 326 in the plate unit 320. To form a small gap (see FIG. 26). Thus, when the operation button 410 or the frame unit 415 is strongly pressed or tapped downward, the frame unit 415 of the frame unit 415 does not contact until the lower surface of the leg portion 527a abuts the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i of the dish unit cover 326. The impact can be absorbed by bending the mounting portion 416e, the performance operation unit mounting portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326, and the like downward. After the lower surface of the leg portion 527a abuts on the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i, the downward movement of the third rendering operation unit 400B is restricted, and the mounting portion 416e of the frame unit 415 and the rendering operation unit of the dish unit cover 326 are regulated. It is possible to prevent an unreasonable force from acting on the mounting portion 326a and the like, and prevent them from being damaged.

  The effect operation unit first drive motor 528 is attached to the left side surface of the unit base 521, and via the first drive gear (not shown) and the first transmission gear 529, the left shaft portion 521g of the unit base 521 and The decorative rotating body unit 530 rotatably attached by the right bearing portion 521h can be rotated around the first axis CL1 extending in the horizontal direction.

[3-4h-5. Decorative rotating body unit]
The decorative rotating body unit 530 of the third effect operation unit 400B will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 82 to 85 and 87. FIG. 87 (a) is a perspective view of the decorative rotary body unit of the third effect operation unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 87 (b) is a perspective view of the decorative rotary body unit of the third effect operation unit as seen from the rear. The decorative rotating body unit 530 is attached to the third base unit 520, and is capable of showing a movable effect to the player through the transparent portion of the operation button 410. As shown in the figure, the decorative rotating body unit 530 has an outer surface formed into a substantially spherical shape.

  The decorative rotating body unit 530 is rotatably attached to the unit base 521 of the third base unit 520, and has one of the disk-shaped rotating body base unit 531 and the disk-shaped rotating body base unit 531. The first decorative surface portion 532 rotatably attached outside the surface, and the first decorative surface portion 532 rotatably attached outside the surface of the rotating body base unit 531 opposite to the first decorative surface portion 532. A second decorative surface portion 533, which is different in decoration from 532, and a rotary operation base unit 531 that is attached to the rotary operation base unit 531 and rotates the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533. (See FIG. 83).

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 82 and 83, the decorative rotating body unit 530 includes a plurality of LEDs that are attached to one surface of the rotating body base unit 531 and can emit light toward the first decorative surface portion 532. The mounted first decorative surface portion decorative substrate 535 and the surface of the rotating body base unit 531 opposite to the first decorative surface portion decorative substrate 535 are attached, and light can be emitted toward the second decorative surface portion 533. A second decorative surface portion decorative substrate 536 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted.

  The rotary body base unit 531 has a disk shape having a predetermined thickness, and has a hollow interior. The rotating body base unit 531 is mounted at a predetermined position on the outer peripheral surface and penetrates the center of the rotating body gear 531a, and a spur gear-shaped rotating body gear 531a that meshes with the first transmission gear 529 of the third base unit 520. The left shaft portion 521g is inserted into the left bearing portion 531b so that the left shaft portion 521g is relatively rotatably inserted into the right bearing portion 521h. The rotary body side right shaft portion 531c to be inserted and a stopper 531d protruding outward on the base end side of the rotary body side right shaft portion 531c are provided.

  The rotary body gear 531a, the rotary body side left bearing portion 531b, and the rotary body side right shaft portion 531c are orthogonal to the second axis CL2 passing through the disk-shaped center of the rotary body base unit 531 and passing through the axial center of the outer peripheral surface. It is arranged coaxially with the uniaxial line CL1. The stopper 531d is formed so as to contact the front surface of the unit base 521 in the third base unit 520. The stopper 531d regulates the rotation range around the first axis CL1 extending in the horizontal direction of the decorative rotary body unit 530 with respect to the third base unit 520 to a predetermined angular range (here, 180 degrees).

  In addition, the rotating body base unit 531 includes a bearing cylindrical portion 531e that extends in a cylindrical shape concentric with the second axis CL2 that passes through the center of the disk shape, and a plurality of peripheral surface decoration portions 531f that decorate the outer peripheral surface. , Are provided. The shaft member 532d protruding from the first decorative surface portion 532 is inserted into the bearing tubular portion 531e, and the shaft member 532d can be rotatably attached by the bushes attached at both ends. The peripheral surface decoration portion 531f penetrates the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body base unit 531 to allow the heat in the rotating body base unit 531 to be released to the outside and also to decorate the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body base unit 531. You can improve the appearance.

  Although not shown in the drawing, the decorative rotary unit 530 is mounted in the rotary base unit 531 and the peripheral surface on which a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting light toward the peripheral decorative section 531f are mounted. A decorative portion decorative substrate may be provided. By appropriately causing the LEDs of the peripheral surface decoration portion decoration substrate to emit light, the peripheral surface decoration portion 531f of the rotating body base unit 531 can be made to emit light.

  The first decorative surface portion 532 is formed in a substantially hemispherical shape as a whole. The first decorative surface portion 532 has a logo decoration portion 532a formed of a predetermined character provided at the center of the bulged surface and a light-transmitting first portion that is radially formed around the logo decoration portion 532a. A non-translucent first sub-decoration, which is formed so as to fill the outer peripheries of the one main decorative portion 532b and the first main decorative portion 532b and whose outer peripheral edge forms the circular outer peripheral edge of the first decorative surface portion 532. A portion 532c and a shaft member 532d protruding from the back surface along the center in a cylindrical shape are provided.

  The logo decoration portion 532a and the first main decoration portion 532b are illuminated and decorated by the light from the LEDs mounted on the first decoration surface portion decoration substrate 535. The shaft member 532d is rotatably inserted into the bearing tubular portion 531e via a bush. The shaft member 532d is formed in such a length that it penetrates the bearing tubular portion 531e of the rotary body base unit 531 and extends to the opposite side when assembled to the decorative rotary body unit 530, and the central axis thereof is the first axis line. The state coincides with the second axis CL2 orthogonal to CL1.

  The shaft member 532d is attached to the bearing tubular portion 531e of the rotating body base unit 531 so that the first decorative surface portion 532 can be entirely rotated around the second axis CL2.

  The second decorative surface portion 533 is arranged between the rotary decorative portion 533a attached to the tip of the shaft member 532d of the first decorative surface portion 532, the rotary decorative portion 533a and the rotary body base unit 531, and also the rotary body base unit. And a fixed decorative portion 533b attached to 531. Since the rotation decoration portion 533a is attached to the shaft member 532d, it can rotate together with the first decoration surface portion 532 via the shaft member 532d, and can rotate around the second axis CL2. On the other hand, since the fixed decorative portion 533b is attached to the rotating body base unit 531, it does not rotate together with the first decorative surface portion 532 via the shaft member 532d, and does not rotate around the second axis.

  The rotary decoration portion 533a is formed in a decorative shape including a plurality of fins (blades) in the circumferential direction, and has a plurality of decorations extending concentrically in the circumferential direction. The rotating decoration portion 533a can generate wind by rotating. The fixed decorative portion 533b is formed with a decoration having a plurality of radially extending lines. The rotating decoration portion 533a and the fixed decoration portion 533b partially have a light-transmitting property, and are light-emitted and decorated by light from the LEDs mounted on the second decoration surface portion decoration substrate 536.

  As shown in FIG. 83, the effect operation unit second drive motor 534 is mounted in the rotating body base unit 531 so that the rotation shaft thereof projects rearward. A spur gear-shaped second drive gear 534a is attached to the rotary shaft of the effect operation unit second drive motor 534. The second drive gear 534a meshes with a spur gear-shaped decorative surface portion gear 534b fixed in the middle of the shaft member 532d. Therefore, the first operation surface unit 532 and the second operation surface unit 533 (rotational operation unit 533a) are moved by the effect operation unit second drive motor 534 through the second drive gear 534a, the decoration surface unit gear 534b, and the shaft member 532d. Can be rotated together.

  The front surface of the first decorative surface portion decorative substrate 535 and the second decorative surface portion decorative substrate 536 is white, and the mounted LEDs are full-color LEDs.

  In the decorative rotating body unit 530 of the present embodiment, a first decorative surface portion 532 and a second decorative surface portion 533 having different decorations are arranged in a row in the circumferential direction around the second axis CL2. Specifically, the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 are provided 180 degrees apart in the circumferential direction.

[3-4h-6. Effect of the third production operation unit]
Next, the effect of the third effect operation unit 400B will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 78, 81, 88, and the like. FIG. 88 (a) is a front view of the third effect operation unit showing the second decorative surface portion of the decorative rotating body unit in the front direction, and FIG. 88 (b) shows the central axis of the operation button in FIG. It is explanatory drawing seen from the direction. FIG. 89 (a) is an explanatory diagram showing the rotation of the first decorative surface portion with the first decorative surface portion facing forward in the third effect operation unit, and FIG. 89 (b) is a second decorative surface portion in the third effect operation unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows rotation of the 2nd decorative surface part in the state which turned to front.

  The third effect operation unit 400B of the present embodiment can show an effect image to the player according to the game state that changes when a game ball is hit in the game area 5a of the game board 5, and the player It is possible to entertain and entertain the player in the player participation type presentation presented to the player by operating the operation button 410.

  Although not shown, the third effect operation unit 400B is formed to have a total height substantially the same as the height of a portion of the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 below the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110. ing. Further, the third effect operation unit 400B is formed such that the overall width thereof is slightly larger than 1/3 of the overall width of the door frame 3. The third effect operation unit 400B is arranged in the center in the left-right direction below the game area 5a (the through-hole 111 of the door frame base 110) when viewed from the front.

  In the third effect operation unit 400B, the upper part of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415 is attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320. In the state where the third effect operation unit 400B is attached to the dish unit 320, the lower surface of the leg portion 527a of the relay substrate cover 527 which is the bottom surface is between the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i of the dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320. , A gap is formed. That is, the third effect operation unit 400B is attached only to the upper portion of the dish unit 320, and is attached in a suspended state.

  Further, in the third effect operation unit 400B, the front surface of the frame unit 415 (the surface formed by the inner circumference of the front end of the central opening 416a of the frame body 416) is parallel to the inclined surface of the front end opening of the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a. Is installed. As a result, in the third effect operation unit 400B, the central axis line CL (see FIG. 82) of the transparent operation button 410 bulging forward in a curved surface shape (a part of the substantially spherical surface) becomes a vertical line. On the other hand, it is inclined at an angle of 63 degrees so as to move upward as it goes forward. Accordingly, when the player sits in front of the pachinko machine 1 to play a game using the pachinko machine 1, the head of the player is placed above the dish unit 320 (third effect operation unit 400B). Since it is located in front of the center of the game area 5a on the game board 5, the central axis CL of the operation button 410 passes near the head of the player. Therefore, when the player drops the line of sight from the game area 5a to the third effect operation unit 400B (the operation button 410), the operation button 410 is possible in its front view (projection view from the direction parallel to the central axis CL). Thus, the operation button 410, the decorative rotary unit 530 in the operation button 410, and the like can be visually recognized in a good state.

  In the third effect operation unit 400B, the four guide boss portions 413c of the operation button 410 are slidably inserted into the four holding holes 521b of the third base unit 520, respectively, and the operation button spring 523 urges the forward direction. Has been done. In the normal state (the state in which the operation button 410 is not pressed), the third effect operation unit 400B is operated by the urging force of the operation button spring 523, similarly to the effect operation unit 400 and the second effect operation unit 400A. The front end of the flange portion 413b of the button base 413 of 410 abuts on the rear surface of the frame main body 416 of the frame unit 415 near the central opening 416a.

  In the normal state, in the third effect operation unit 400B, the center side (center axis CL side) from the vicinity of the inner circumference of the button frame 412 of the operation button 410 is forward from the center opening 416a of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415. It is protruding. In other words, in the transparent button lens 411 that bulges forward in a curved surface shape (a part of a substantially spherical surface) of the operation button 410, a portion that protrudes forward from the inner circumference (inner side) of the button frame 412 is The main body 416 of the frame unit 415 projects forward from the central opening 416a (see FIG. 82 and the like).

  Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the diameter of the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415 is about 15 cm, and the button lens 411 (the front end thereof) is located in the frame unit in the central axis CL direction of the operation button 410. It projects about 4 cm forward from the front surface of 415.

  When the player presses the operation button 410 of the third effect operation unit 400B in the normal state, the operation button 410 moves backward along the central axis line CL against the biasing force of the operation button spring 523. When the rear end of the operation button 410 comes into contact with the front surface of the unit base 521 of the third base unit 520, the rearward movement is restricted and the rearward movement of the operation button 410 is stopped. When the player presses the operation button 410, the button lens 411 bulging forward in a curved surface shape (a part of a substantially spherical surface) is pressed.

  Since the operation button 410 has a very large outer diameter as compared with the operation button for performance provided in the conventional pachinko machine, it is pressed near the peripheral edge away from the central portion of the button lens 411. Is likely to be. More specifically, the operation buttons for the effect in the conventional pachinko machine are attached so that the central axis thereof extends substantially parallel to the vertical line, whereas the operation of the third effect operation unit 400B of the present embodiment. The button 410 has the central axis line CL inclined with respect to the vertical line, like the production operation unit 400 and the second production operation unit 400A, so that the player operates the operation button from above as in the conventional pachinko machine. When 410 is pressed, as shown by the white arrow in FIG. 61, the part of the operation button 410 away from the central axis CL is pressed.

  By the way, since the operation button for performance in the conventional pachinko machine has a flat surface for the player to press, when the operation button is enlarged with the part to be pressed kept flat. , If you press a part of the operation button that is off the center, the pressing surface will tilt so that the pressed part will retract first, and the operation button will not be able to recede straightly. There is a possibility that the pressing operation may not be possible.

  On the other hand, in the operation button 410 of the third effect operation unit 400B of the present embodiment, the portion (button lens 411) pressed by the player has a curved surface shape (a part of a substantially spherical surface) bulged forward. Therefore, when a position away from the center of the operation button 410 is pressed, the force is distributed to the entire operation button 410, making it difficult for the operation button 410 to tilt, and the operation button 410 moves straight rearward. can do. Therefore, no matter which position on the front side of the operation button 410 is pressed, the operation button 410 can be smoothly retracted without tilting, so that the pressing operation can be reliably detected and the operation button 410 is pressed. It is possible to fully enjoy the performance to operate.

  Further, in the third effect operation unit 400B, the vibration motor 424 is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the board base 421 in the decorative board unit 420, and as described above, the third effect operation unit 400B is hung. Since only the upper part is attached to the performance operation unit attachment portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326, when the vibration motor 424 rotates the weight 424a to generate vibration, the vibration is generated at the portion farthest from the attached portion. Since it occurs, the entire third effect operation unit 400B can be vibrated largely (strongly), and the vibration can be transmitted to the player who is touching the third effect operation unit 400B. Further, since the vibration motor 424 is arranged immediately below the position where the player can relatively easily press, it is possible to transmit a strong vibration to the player who is pressing the operation button 410. It can surprise people and entertain the production.

  Furthermore, the third effect operation unit 400B is attached to the plate unit cover 326 in a suspended state, and the lower surface of the leg portion 527a of the relay board cover 527 and the plate unit cover 326 that form the lower surface. Since a gap is formed between the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i and the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i, when the operation button 410 is strongly pressed or hit down, the lower surface of the leg portion 527a contacts the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i. The impact can be absorbed by bending the mounting portion 416e of the frame unit 415, the production operation unit mounting portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326, and the like downward. Further, after the lower surface of the leg portion 527a abuts on the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i, the downward movement of the third rendering operation unit 400B is restricted, and the rendering operation of the mounting portion 416e of the frame unit 415 and the dish unit cover 326 is performed. It is possible to avoid applying an unreasonable force to the unit mounting portion 326a and the like, and prevent damage to the third effect operation unit 400B and the like. Therefore, when the player is presented with an effect of pressing the operation button 410 of the third effect operation unit 400B, even if the operation button 410 is pressed or struck with a strong force, the operation button 410 or the Since the three-stage production operation unit 400B and the like are not damaged, it is possible to avoid interruption of the game due to damage, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest and at the same time to prevent damage to the game hall side. An increase in burden can be suppressed.

  In addition, as described above, the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 that is pressed by the player is formed in a flat plate shape because it is formed in a curved surface shape (a part of a substantially spherical surface) protruding forward. Compared with the case, the strength and rigidity are higher, and even when hit hard, the impact can be dispersed to the entire button lens 411, which makes it less likely to be damaged.

  Further, since the third effect operation unit 400B includes the first button decoration portion 411a extending from the inner circumference of the button frame 412 in the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 toward the center side, the first button decoration portion 411a. By the decoration of the unevenness, it is possible to make it difficult to see the rear part at the outer peripheral part of the part inside the button lens 411. Behind the portion where the first button decoration portion 411a is formed (rear in the central axis CL direction), the inner peripheral surface of the main body portion 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and the outer peripheral surface of the decorative rotating body unit 530 are provided. Although there is a gap between them, the first button decoration portion 411a located in front of the gap can make it difficult to see the gap on the outer periphery of the decorative rotating body unit 530 from the front side (player side). . As a result, even if the rotating ornamental rotor unit 530 is provided in the operation button 410 that can be pressed, it is possible to prevent the appearance of the operation button 410 from deteriorating and the player who sees the operation button 410 feels uncomfortable. It is possible to prevent the operator from hugging and to arrange the decorative rotating body unit 530 in the transparent operation button 410 without any problem, so that the appearance of the operation button 410 and the decorative rotating body unit 530, and eventually the pachinko machine 1 can be improved. You can get better.

  Further, in the third effect operation unit 400B, the decorative rotating body unit 530 arranged in the operation button 410 (inside the button frame 412) is provided with the first decorative surface portion decorative substrate 535 and the second decorative surface portion decorative substrate 536. By illuminating a plurality of LEDs mounted on them, the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 can be illuminated and decorated in the operation button 410. Then, the interior of the operation button 410 can be illuminated and decorated by causing the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 to be illuminated. At this time, since the button base 413 of the operation button 410 is provided with the cylindrical main body 413a surrounding the outer periphery of the decorative rotary body unit 530, the light from the decorative rotary body unit 530 is directed to the outside of the main body 413a. There is no leakage, and only the inside of the operation button 410 can be favorably illuminated and decorated.

  In addition, the third effect operation unit 400B is located behind the second button decoration portion 411b facing the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412 located near the outer periphery of the operation button 410, and the operation button left outside decoration board of the decoration board unit 420. The first LED 422a of 422 and the first LED 423a of the operation button right outer decoration substrate 423 are arranged, and the six second button decoration parts 411b of the operation button 410 are illuminated by illuminating the first LEDs 422a and 423a. Can be made. The first LED 422a of the operation button left outer decoration board 422 and the first LED 423a of the operation button right outer decoration board 423 are a cylinder body 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and a cylinder of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415. It is located between the inner cylindrical portion 416d (see FIG. 52, FIG. 83, etc.), and the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a is inside the main body portion 413a (on the decorative rotating body unit 530 side) or the inner cylinder. There is no leakage to the outside of the portion 416d, and only the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 can be favorably illuminated and decorated.

  Further, in the third effect operation unit 400B, the second LED 422b of the operation button left outside decoration substrate 422 and the operation button right outside are provided behind the frame side lens 417 facing the six outer peripheral openings 416b of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415. The second LED 423b of the decorative substrate 423 is arranged, and the frame side lens 417 can be illuminated and decorated by causing the second LEDs 422b and 423b to emit light. The second LED 422b of the operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 and the second LED 423b of the operation button right outer decoration substrate 423 are provided between the inner cylindrical portion 416d of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415 and the outer periphery of the frame body 416. Since the light from the second LEDs 422b and 423b is not leaked to the inside of the inner cylindrical portion 416d or the outside of the frame main body 416, only the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 can be favorably illuminated and decorated. .

  Further, in the third effect operation unit 400B, the frame top lens decoration substrate 522 of the third base unit 520 is arranged behind the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415, and is mounted on the front surface of the frame top lens decoration substrate 522. The frame top lens 418 can be illuminated and decorated by causing the plurality of LEDs to emit light. From the lower side of the unit base 521 of the third base unit 520 where the frame top lens decoration substrate 522 is attached, a flat light blocking wall portion 521c projects forward to the vicinity of the lower rear of the frame top lens 418. Light from the LEDs of the frame top lens decoration substrate 522 does not leak to the operation button 410 or the frame side lens 417 side, and only the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415 can be excellently illuminated and decorated.

  The third effect operation unit 400B of the present embodiment can visually recognize the decorative rotating body unit 530 arranged on the rear side from the front through the transparent button lens 411 of the operation button 410. In the normal state, the third effect operation unit 400B is in a state in which the first decorative surface portion 532 of the decorative rotating body unit 530 is directed forward, as shown in FIGS. 78 and 80. In this state, the central axis of the shaft member 532d (second axial line CL2) of the first decorative surface portion 532 is substantially coincident with the central axis CL of the operation button 410 (see FIG. 82). Further, in the normal state, the rotational position around the second axis CL2 of the first decorative surface portion 532 is such that the logo decoration portion 532a having directionality is rotated and stopped in a state of being oriented in the correct direction.

  Further, in a normal state, the stopper 531d of the rotary body base unit 531 of the decorative rotary body unit 530 is in contact with the front surface of the third base unit 520 above the right bearing portion 521h of the unit base 521. That is, in the normal state, the rotation of the decorative rotary body unit 530 is restricted by the stopper 531d in the direction in which the upper portion moves rearward with respect to the horizontally extending first axis CL1.

  In this normal state, the rotary body gear 531a of the decorative rotary body unit 530 is passed through the first drive gear (not shown) and the first transmission gear 529 by the production operation unit first drive motor 528 in the third base unit 520. When is rotated in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the right side, the decorative rotator unit 530 rotates around the first axis CL1 so that the upper portion moves forward. Then, when the decorative rotary body unit 530 rotates 180 degrees around the first axis CL1 from the normal state, the stopper 531d abuts on the front surface of the unit base 521 below the right bearing portion 521h and rotates further. Is regulated, and the rotational drive by the effect operation unit first drive motor 528 is stopped.

  Although illustration is omitted, the third base unit 520 is provided with a rotation detection sensor that detects the rotational position of the decorative rotating body unit 530, and based on the detection by the rotation detecting sensor, The rotational position is controlled.

  When the decorative rotating body unit 530 is rotated 180 degrees around the first axis CL1 from the normal state, the second decorative surface portion 533 is in a state of facing the front, as shown in FIG. 88. Therefore, the second decorative surface portion 533 can be satisfactorily visually recognized through the transparent button lens 411 of the operation button 410. In this state, the second axis CL2 of the second decorative surface portion 533 is substantially coincident with the central axis CL of the operation button 410.

  Further, the third effect operation unit 400B extends coaxially with the second axis CL2 by the effect operation unit second drive motor 534 in the decorative rotary body unit 530, via the second drive gear 534a and the decorative surface portion gear 534b. When the shaft member 532d is rotated, the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 attached to both ends of the shaft member 532d can be simultaneously rotated (see FIG. 89). In other words, the effect operation unit second drive motor 534 causes the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 to rotate around the second axis CL2 orthogonal to the horizontally extending first axis CL1. You can

  Although not shown, the decorative rotating body unit 530 includes a rotation detecting sensor that detects the rotational positions of the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533. The decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 can be stopped at any rotation position. Therefore, even if the logo decoration portion 532a having directionality is provided like the first decoration surface portion 532, the rotation of the first decoration surface portion 532 can be stopped at a position according to the direction, so that the decoration of the first decoration surface portion 532 is impaired. Therefore, the decorativeness can be surely exhibited.

  In addition, the third effect operation unit 400B, by the first decorative surface portion decorative substrate 535 and the second decorative surface portion decorative substrate 536 provided in the decorative rotating body unit 530, the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533, Each can be illuminated. The light emission decoration of the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 by the first decorative surface portion decorative substrate 535 and the second decorative surface portion decorative substrate 536 is rotated around the first axis CL1 in which the decorative rotating body unit 530 extends horizontally. Or while the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 are rotating around the second axis CL2 orthogonal to the first axis CL1.

  The second decorative surface portion 533 is provided with the rotating decorative portion 533a that rotates and the fixed decorative portion 533b that does not rotate. When a plurality of LEDs are emitted, a part of the light radiated forward through the fixed decorative portion 533b is periodically generated by the non-translucent portion or the colored portion of the rotating rotating decorative portion 533a. The flicker light emission decoration can be shown to the player, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted.

[3-4h-7. Movable production in the third production operation unit]
Next, the movable effect in the third effect operation unit 400B will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 90 and 91. FIG. 90 is an explanatory view showing the movement of the movable effect of rotating the decorative rotating body unit in the third effect operation unit. FIG. 91 is an explanatory view showing the movement of the movable effect of rotating the decorative rotating body unit in the third effect operation unit while rotating the first decorative surface portion and the second decorative surface portion. First, with reference to FIG. 90 and the like, a movable effect of the decorative rotating body unit 530 using only the effect operation unit first drive motor 528 will be described. In a normal state, as shown in FIG. 90A, etc., the first decorative surface portion 532 having the logo decoration portion 532a is directed forward.

  As an example of a movable effect that is rotated only around the horizontally extending first axis CL1, from the normal state (the state of FIG. 90 (a)), the effect operation unit first drive motor 528 causes the first drive gear (not shown). (Omitted) Through the first transmission gear 529 and the rotary body gear 531a, the decorative rotary body unit 530 is rotated counterclockwise in right side view 180 degrees at a stroke without stopping halfway, and the first decorative The second decorative surface portion 533 arranged on the opposite side of the surface portion 532 is in a state of facing forward (see FIG. 90 (d)). As a result, the player can be shown a moving effect in which the first decorative surface portion 532 rotates so as to move downward and the second decorative surface portion 533 moves and appears from above. Therefore, it is possible to give the player the impression that the first decorative surface portion 532 is suddenly switched to the second decorative surface portion 533 having a different decoration, which can surprise the player and change the decoration. It is possible to make the player think that there is something good, and it is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the game and suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition, as a movable effect different from the above, from the normal state, the decorative rotating body unit 530 reciprocates in the counterclockwise direction in the right side view within the angle range of 0 to 60 degrees, the effect operation unit. The first drive motor 528 is normally / reversely rotated a plurality of times. Accordingly, when the first decorative surface portion 532 is rotated so as to face downward, a part of the second decorative surface portion 533 is slightly visible with the plurality of peripheral surface decorative portions 531f interposed between the first decorative surface portion 532. As a result (see FIG. 90 (b)), it is possible to strongly attract the player's interest to the second decorative surface portion 533 that is visible and hidden by the reciprocating rotation of the decorative rotating body unit 530. It is possible to increase the player's expectation for the arrival of a chance depending on whether or not the second decorative surface portion 533 faces forward. After that, by returning the decorative rotator unit 530 to the original state (state of FIG. 90 (a)), it is possible to suggest to the player that the chance does not come. On the other hand, by further rotating the decorative rotator unit 530 so that the second decorative surface portion 533 is directed forward (the state of FIG. 90 (d)), it is possible to suggest that a chance is coming, and the game is played. It is possible to entertain people and suppress a decline in interest.

  Further, as a movable effect different from the above, from the normal state, the decorative rotating body unit 530 is rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise in the right side view so that the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body base unit 531 is directed forward. (See FIG. 90 (c)). As a result, with the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body base unit 531 facing forward, the first decorative surface portion 532 faces downward and the second decorative surface portion 533 faces upward. Since the decorations of the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 are unclear, the plurality of peripheral surfaces provided on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body base unit 531 are relatively disposed. The decoration of the surface decoration portion 531f can be clearly shown, and the decoration of the peripheral surface decoration portion 531f can be enjoyed. In addition, the decorative rotating body unit 530 can stop the rotation of the plurality of peripheral surface decoration portions 531f at an intermediate position toward the front, thereby making it possible for the player to feel the change in the game situation, and thus the player's game. You can increase your expectations for. After that, the decorative rotator unit 530 is rotated in a predetermined direction so that the first decorative surface portion 532 faces forward like the base, or the second decorative surface portion 533 faces forward. The same effects as the above can be obtained.

  Furthermore, in a state in which the decorative rotating body unit 530 is rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise in the right side view from the normal state (see FIG. 90 (c)), a predetermined angle about the rotation angle is set. The effect operation unit first drive motor 528 is rotated forward / reversely a plurality of times so as to reciprocate within the range. As a result, the first base surface 532 side can be seen more and the second base surface portion 533 side can be seen more with the rotating body base unit 531 (a plurality of peripheral surface decoration portions 531f) being sandwiched. Depending on whether the first decorative surface portion 532 faces the front or the second decorative surface portion 533 faces the front, it is possible to excite and excite, and it is possible to entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest. After that, the decorative rotator unit 530 is rotated in a predetermined direction so that the first decorative surface portion 532 is directed forward or the second decorative surface portion 533 is directed forward, similar to the above. It is possible to exert the effect of.

  In addition, as a movable effect different from the above, from the normal state, the decorative rotating body unit 530 is rotated 180 degrees so that the second decorative surface portion 533 is directed forward (see FIG. 90 (d)). Based on the state, it is possible to perform a movable effect in which the operation opposite to the above is performed, and the same effect as the above can be obtained. In this case, the second decorative surface portion 533 that faces the front rotates so as to move upward, and the first decorative surface portion 532 appears from below, so that the player feels a rising momentum. It is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the game, and the second decorative surface portion 533 is rotated upward to direct the player's line of sight to the game area 5a above the third effect operation unit 400B. Therefore, it is possible to entertain the game and effects in the game area 5a and suppress a decrease in interest.

  When performing the above-described movable effect, the plurality of LEDs respectively mounted on the first decorative surface portion decorative substrate 535 and the second decorative surface portion decorative substrate 536 are caused to emit light as appropriate, and the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 532 are provided. The decorative surface portion 533 is appropriately illuminated. This makes it easier to see the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 that can be seen through the transparent button lens 411 of the operation button 410, so that the player can clearly recognize the difference in those decorations. In addition, it is possible to fully exert a premium feeling due to the difference in decoration, to entertain those decorations, and to prevent the player from having less interest in the game. In addition, since the player's interest can be directed to the operation button 410 by illuminating the first decoration surface portion 532 and the second decoration surface portion 533, execution of the player participation type effect in which the operation button 410 is pressed. At the same time, the player can be prompted to press the operation button 410, and the player can be allowed to participate in and entertain the player participation type effect.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 91 and the like, a movable effect of the decorative rotating body unit 530 using the effect operation unit first drive motor 528 and the effect operation unit second drive motor 534 will be described. In the initial state, as shown in FIG. 91 (a), the first decorative surface portion 532 having the logo decorative portion 532a is directed forward, and the first decorative surface portion 532 causes the effect operation unit second drive motor. By 534, it is rotated around a second axis CL2 (here, a clockwise direction) extending so as to coincide with the central axis CL of the operation button 410. In this state, since the first decorative surface portion 532 rotates around the second axis CL2, it is difficult for the player to recognize the logo of the directional logo decorative portion 532a.

  As an example of the movable production performed while the first operation surface unit 532 and the second operation surface unit 533 are rotated by the operation operation unit second drive motor 534, the first operation operation surface unit 532 (the second operation operation surface unit 533) is set to the second axis. While rotating around CL2, the effect operation unit first drive motor 528 causes the decorative rotating body unit 530 to rotate 180 degrees in a counterclockwise direction in right side view without stopping halfway, and The second decorative surface portion 533, which is rotating on the opposite side of the one decorative surface portion 532, is turned to the front side (see FIG. 91 (d)). As a result, the first decorative surface portion 532 that has been rotating clockwise is suddenly switched to the second decorative surface portion 533 having a different decoration, and the second decorative surface portion 533 (rotating decorative portion 533a) becomes the first decorative surface portion 532. Is rotating in the opposite counterclockwise direction, which can give a strong impact to the player, attract more attention of the player, and give something to the player. It is possible to think that there is something good, and it is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the game and suppress the decline in interest.

  Further, as a movable effect different from the above, the decorative rotating body unit 530 in a state where the first operation surface unit 532 and the second operation surface unit 533 are still rotated around the second axis CL2 by the operation operation unit second drive motor 534. However, the production operation unit first drive motor 528 is rotated forward / reverse a plurality of times so as to reciprocate in the angle range of 0 ° to 60 ° in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the right side. As a result, when the first decorative surface portion 532 rotating around the second axis CL2 rotates around the first axis CL1 so as to face downward, the first decorative surface portion 532 rotates around the second axis CL2 on the upper side of the first decorative surface portion 532. A plurality of peripheral surface decoration portions 531f that are not formed are visible, and a part of the second decorative surface portion 533 that rotates around the second axis CL2 is slightly visible above the plurality of peripheral surface decoration portions 531f. (See FIG. 91 (b)). Therefore, the decorative rotating body unit 530 can reciprocally rotate around the first axis CL1 to strongly attract the player's interest to the visible and hidden second decorative surface portion 533, and the second decorative surface portion. It is possible to increase the player's expectation for the arrival of a chance depending on whether or not 533 faces forward. After that, the decorative rotator unit 530 is rotated in a predetermined direction around the first axis CL1 to direct the first decorative surface portion 532 to the front (the state of FIG. 91 (a)), or the second decorative surface. When the face portion 533 is turned to the front (the state of FIG. 91 (b)) and the player desires it, it is possible to convince the player of the opportunity, and to entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest. Can be made. Note that the rotation may be stopped so that the logo decoration portion 532a of the first decoration surface portion 532 is in the correct direction after the first decoration surface portion 532 rotating around the second axis CL2 is directed forward. As a result, the player can clearly recognize the logo decoration portion 532a of the first decoration surface portion 532, so that the arrival of a chance can be suggested and the player's expectation for the game can be increased. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

  Further, as a movable effect different from the above, from the state where the first operation surface unit 532 and the second operation surface unit 533 are still rotated around the second axis CL2 by the operation operation unit second drive motor 534, the decoration rotating unit 530 is used. Is rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise in the right side view with respect to the first axis CL1 so that the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body base unit 531 is directed forward (see FIG. 91 (c)). . As a result, with the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body base unit 531 facing forward, the first decorative surface portion 532 faces downward and the second decorative surface portion 533 faces upward. In this state, the decorations of the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 are indistinct because they are respectively located and are moving so as to move in the same direction. Therefore, the plurality of peripheral surface decoration portions 531f on the outer peripheral surface of the stationary rotary body base unit 531 sandwiched between them can be clearly seen. Therefore, in the operation button 410, the stationary peripheral surface decoration portion 531f can be made conspicuous, and the peripheral surface decoration portion 531f can be strongly attracted by the player to entertain the decoration. After that, the decorative rotator unit 530 is rotated in a predetermined direction so that the first decorative surface portion 532 faces forward like the base, or the second decorative surface portion 533 faces forward. The same effects as the above can be obtained.

  Further, while rotating the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 around the second axis CL2, the decorative rotating body unit 530 is rotated around the first axis CL1 to move the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body base unit 531 forward. In the state directed to (see FIG. 91 (c)), the effect operation unit first drive motor 528 is moved a plurality of times so as to reciprocate within the predetermined angle range around the first axis line CL around the state. Forward and reverse. As a result, the rotary base unit 531 (the plurality of peripheral surface decoration portions 531f) is sandwiched between the first decoration surface portion 532 side and the second decoration surface portion 533 side that are rotating around the second axis CL2 and the second decoration surface portion 533 side. Therefore, it is possible to excite and excite the player depending on whether the first decorative surface portion 532 faces the front or the second decorative surface portion 533 faces the front, so that the player is entertained and a decrease in the entertainment level is suppressed. Can be made. After that, the decoration rotator unit 530 is rotated in a predetermined direction about the first axis CL1 to direct the first decoration surface portion 532 to the front (the state of FIG. 91 (a)), or the second decoration. By setting the surface portion 533 to face forward (the state of FIG. 91 (b)), the same operational effect as described above can be obtained.

  In addition, as a movable effect different from the above, after rotating the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 from the normal state around the second axis CL2, the decorative rotating body unit 530 is moved around the first axis CL. By rotating 180 degrees, the rotating second decorative surface portion 533 is directed forward, or from the normal state, the decorative rotating body unit 530 is rotated 180 degrees around the first axis CL to perform the second decorative operation. After the surface portion 533 is turned to the front, the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 are rotated around the second axis CL2, and based on this state (see FIG. 91 (d)), It is also possible to perform a movable effect of performing the opposite operation, and it is possible to achieve the same effect as the above. In this case, the rotating second decorative surface portion 533, which is facing forward, rotates around the first axis CL1 so as to move upward, and is opposite to the second decorative surface portion 533 around the second axis CL2. Since the first decorative surface portion 532 rotating in the direction appears from below, the player can feel the rising momentum, the expectation for the game can be increased, and the second axis line can be increased. By the upward movement of the second decorative surface portion 533 rotating around CL2, the player's line of sight can be directed to the inside of the game area 5a above the third effect operation unit 400B, and within the game area 5a. It is possible to entertain games and productions and to prevent a decrease in interest.

  When executing the above-described movable effect, the rotation of the first operation surface unit 532 and the second operation surface unit 533 about the second axis CL2 by the operation operation unit second drive motor 534 may be reversed in the middle. Alternatively, it may be reciprocally rotated within a predetermined angle range. Further, the rotation speed of the decorative rotary unit 530 around the first axis CL1 by the effect operation unit first drive motor 528 and the second speed of the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 by the effect operation unit second drive motor 534. The rotation speed around the axis CL2 may be the same as or different from the rotation speed. By appropriately combining these, it is possible to increase the number of patterns of movable effects by the third effect operation unit 400B, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired and suppress a decrease in interest due to a wide variety of movable effects. it can.

  Further, when executing the above-mentioned movable effect, the plurality of LEDs mounted on the first decorative surface portion decorative substrate 535 and the second decorative surface portion decorative substrate 536 are caused to emit light as appropriate and rotated around the second axis CL2. The first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 which are open are appropriately light-emitted and decorated. Accordingly, when the first decorative surface portion 532 rotating around the second axis CL2 is directed forward, the entire transparent button lens 411 of the operation button 410 can be illuminated and decorated with uniform light. On the other hand, in a state where the second decorative surface portion 533 rotating around the second axis CL2 is directed to the front, the transparent button lens 411 blinks with blinking due to periodic light blocking by the rotating decorative portion 533a. It can be illuminated by light. In this way, since the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 can be decorated in various colors, the player's interest can be directed to the operation button 410, and the player participation type effect of pressing the operation button 410 can be performed. It becomes possible to urge the player to press the operation button 410 at the time of executing, and it is possible to entertain and entertain the player in the player participation type effect.

[3-4h-8. Exhaust heat action of the third production operation unit]
Next, the heat exhausting action of the third effect operation unit 400B will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 92 and the like. FIG. 92 is an explanatory view showing the flow of air due to the rotation of the second decorative surface portion in the third effect operation unit. In the third effect operation unit 400B of the present embodiment, the decorative rotating body unit 530 arranged on the rear side of the operation button 410 includes the operation button 410 and the unit base 521 (accommodation wall portion 521a) of the third base unit 520. Are arranged in the button inner space AS whose front and rear are closed (see FIG. 92). A plurality of ventilation openings 521d penetrating in the front-rear direction are formed in a housing wall portion 521a that forms the rear portion of the button inner space AS and covers the rear side of the decorative rotating body unit 530. Therefore, the button inner space AS communicates with the inside of the attachment space 326j of the dish unit cover 326 to which the third effect operation unit 400B is attached, through the plurality of ventilation openings 521d. Although not shown, the mounting space 326j communicates with the outside of the pachinko machine 1 through an exhaust port formed in the bottom plate portion 326i and the lower plate cover 340.

  Further, in the third effect operation unit 400B, in the decorative rotary body unit 530, one shaft member 532d rotatably mounted on the bearing tubular portion 531e of the rotary body base unit 531 coaxially with the second axis CL. A first decorative surface portion 532 and a second decorative surface portion 533 having different decorations are attached to both ends, respectively, so that the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 can rotate together. The effect operation unit second drive motor 534 for rotating the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 is attached inside the hollow rotating body base unit 531. On the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body base unit 531 are formed a plurality of peripheral surface decoration portions 531f formed by penetrating hole-shaped decorations. Are in communication with each other.

  Of the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 rotatably attached around the second axis CL in the decorative rotating body unit 530, the second decorative surface portion 533 rotates about the second axis CL. The decorative portion 533a is formed in a shape capable of generating wind when rotated.

  In the third effect operation unit 400B configured as described above, the first decorative surface section 532 and the second decorative surface section 533 are changed to the effect operation unit first with the first decorative surface section 532 of the decorative rotating body unit 530 facing forward. When the second drive motor 534 rotates in a predetermined direction about the second axis CL, the wind generated by the rotation of the rotating decoration portion 533a in the second decoration surface portion 533 causes a plurality of winds in the housing wall portion 521a covering the rear side. Through the ventilation port 521d, it comes out to the rear side of the accommodation wall portion 521a (see FIG. 92 (a)). Due to this flow of air, the air in the button internal space AS in which the decorative rotating body unit 530 is housed can be forcibly discharged to the outside for ventilation. Since the button inner space AS and the inside of the rotating body base unit 531 communicate with each other through the plurality of peripheral surface decoration portions 531f, the heat emitted from the performance operation unit second drive motor 534 is transmitted to the plurality of peripheral surfaces. It can be discharged to the rear of the third effect operation unit 400B (in the mounting space 326j of the dish unit 320) through the surface decoration portion 531f, the button inner space AS, and the ventilation port 521d. As a result, it is possible to prevent the temperature inside the decorative rotator unit 530 and the operation button 410 from rising abnormally, and prevent problems due to heat from occurring.

  Further, in the third effect operation unit 400B of the present embodiment, the first decorative surface section 532 and the second decorative surface section 533 are moved to the effect operation unit first with the second decorative surface section 533 of the decorative rotating body unit 530 facing forward. When the second drive motor 534 rotates in a predetermined direction about the second axis CL, the wind generated by the rotation of the rotating decoration portion 533a in the second decoration surface portion 533 guides backward along the inner surface of the operation button 410. Then, it passes through the plurality of ventilation openings 521d of the housing wall portion 521a covering the rear of the decorative rotating body unit 530 and comes out rearward of the housing wall portion 521a (see FIG. 92 (b)). Due to this air flow, the air in the button internal space AS in which the decorative rotary unit 530 is housed can be forcibly discharged to the outside and ventilated, so that it is mounted inside the rotary base unit 531. The heat emitted from the second effect operation unit second drive motor 534 is passed through the plurality of peripheral surface decoration portions 531f, the button inner space AS, and the ventilation opening 521d to the rear of the third effect operation unit 400B (the attachment space 326j of the dish unit 320). Inside). As a result, it is possible to prevent the temperature inside the decorative rotator unit 530 and the operation button 410 from rising abnormally, and prevent problems due to heat from occurring.

  Note that the exhaust heat discharged into the mounting space 326j through the plurality of ventilation openings 521d of the housing wall 521a in the unit base 521 is passed through the exhaust openings (not shown) formed in the bottom plate 326i and the lower tray cover 340 to the pachinko machine 1 Is discharged to the outside.

[3-5. Door frame left side unit]
The door frame left side unit 540 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 93 to 96. 93A is a front view of the door frame left side unit in the door frame, FIG. 93B is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 93C is a rear view of the door frame left side unit. It is the perspective view seen from. FIG. 94 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 95 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit as seen from the rear. 96 is a cross-sectional view taken along line NN in FIG. 93 (a). The door frame left side unit 540 covers the front side of the door frame left side upper decoration board 161 and the door frame left side lower decoration board 162 (door frame left side decoration board 160) on the upper side of the dish unit 320. It is attached to the front left part on the left side of the through hole 111 in 100. The door frame left side unit 540 is for decorating the left side of the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 in front view.

  The door frame left side unit 540 includes a vertically extending strip-shaped left unit base 541 attached to the front side of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 on the left side in front view of the through hole 111, and a left unit base 541. A transparent band plate-shaped left unit diffusing lens member 542 attached to the front surface, and a translucent member arranged in front of the left unit diffusing lens member 542 and having a polyhedral decoration at the front end. A left unit decorative lens member (not shown) and a left unit decorative lens member that is attached to the front upper portion of the left unit base 541 from the front side of the left unit decorative lens member and protrudes forward in a tubular frame shape and extends vertically The decoration base 544 and the left unit decoration lens member are attached to the lower part of the front surface of the left unit base 541 from the front side. The left unit lower decoration base 545, which is shorter than the decoration base 544 and protrudes forward in a frame shape, covers the front end side of the left unit decoration lens member from the front side of the left unit upper decoration base 544 and the left unit lower decoration base 545. A transparent left unit decorative cover 546 mounted on the front side of the left unit base 541 and a plurality of decorative members 547 mounted on the front side of the left unit decorative cover 546 are provided.

  The left unit base 541 of the door frame left side unit 540 is formed in a shallow box shape with an open rear side, and has a plurality of openings 541a penetrating in the front-rear direction on the front surface. As shown, the plurality of openings 541a have circular holes and vertically extending rectangular holes. In the left unit base 541, the LEDs 161a and 162a mounted on the front surface of the door frame left side decoration board 160 (the door frame left side upper decoration board 161 and the door frame left side lower decoration board 162) are inserted from the plurality of openings 541a. It is attached to the front left side of the door frame base 110 so as to face forward. Each opening 541a of the left unit base 541 is formed so that each LED 161a, 162a of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160 is located at the substantially vertical center when assembled to the door frame 3. The left unit base 541 is formed of a non-translucent member.

  The left unit diffusion lens member 542 is formed of a transparent member and is vertically divided into an upper diffusion lens member 542A and a lower diffusion lens member 542B. The left unit diffusion lens member 542 includes a circular lens portion 542a having a circular shape in front view corresponding to the circular opening portion 541a in the left unit base 541 and a square lens having a square shape in front view corresponding to the square opening portion 541a. And a lens portion 542b. When the door frame left side unit 540 is assembled to the door frame 3, the LEDs 161a and 162a of the door frame left side decoration board 160 are positioned immediately after the centers of the circular lens portion 542a and the rectangular lens portion 542b. Has been formed.

  The circular lens portion 542a of the left unit diffusion lens member 542 is formed in a convex lens shape with smooth front and rear surfaces. With this circular lens portion 542a, it is possible to irradiate the light from the LEDs 161a and 162a arranged rearward to the front in a dot-like manner. The circular decoration portion of the left unit decoration lens member can be illuminated and decorated by the light emitted forward from the circular lens portion 542a.

  The rectangular lens portion 542b of the left unit diffusion lens member 542 includes a central diffusion reflection portion 542c which is recessed conically rearward at the center of the front surface, and a front diffusion lens portion 542d formed outside the central diffusion reflection portion 542c on the front surface. , An input lens portion 542e that bulges backward in a curved surface shape at the center of the rear surface (immediately after the central diffuse reflection portion 542c), and forward as the distance from the input lens portion 542e increases as a whole outside the input lens portion 542e on the rear surface. And a front reflector 542f that is inclined so as to move.

  The front diffusion lens portion 542d of the rectangular lens portion 542b is formed by a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves that are divided in the circumferential direction by lines extending radially around the central diffuse reflection portion 542c. More specifically, in the front diffusion lens portion 542d, the groove portion is recessed rearward in an arc shape in the cross-sectional shape when cut along the radial direction, and the mountain portion between the grooves is forward. It bulges in an arc shape, and the front surface is formed in a smooth wavy shape. In addition, the front diffusion lens portion 542d is formed such that the groove portions and the mountain portions are alternately located in the circumferential direction with the radially extending lines that are divided in the circumferential direction as boundaries.

  The front reflecting portion 542f of the prismatic lens portion 542b is formed by a plurality of concentric arcuate grooves that are circumferentially divided by a line extending radially around the input lens portion 542e. The plurality of grooves are recessed in a V shape from the rear to the front, and the deepest part is formed in an arc shape. The cross-sectional shape of the front reflecting portion 542f when cut along the radial direction is formed in a sawtooth shape in which a mountain portion between the grooves is formed in a triangular shape having a rearward sharp point. The front reflection portion 542f is formed so that the groove and the mountain portion move forward as the distance from the center increases. Further, the front reflecting portion 542f is formed such that the groove portions and the mountain portions are alternately located in the circumferential direction with the radially extending line dividing the circumferential direction as a boundary. The radially extending lines that are divided in the circumferential direction coincide with the radially extending dividing lines in the front diffusion lens portion 542d.

  In the rectangular lens portion 542b assembled to the door frame 3, the LEDs 161a and 162a corresponding to the door frame left side decorative substrate 160 are located immediately after the input lens portion 542e.

  Light emitted from the LEDs 161a and 162a to the front of the rectangular lens portion 542b is input into the rectangular lens portion 542b from the input lens portion 542e. Since the input lens portion 542e bulges backward in the shape of a curved surface (convex lens shape), the light that spreads forward from the LEDs 161a and 162a is refracted so as to travel forward in parallel and the input light Almost all can be guided to the conical central diffuse reflection portion 542c. Then, the light guided to the central diffuse reflection section 542c is in a direction perpendicular to the axis extending in the front and rear direction (parallel to the front surface of the door frame left side decoration board 160) due to the inclined conical surface of the central diffuse reflection section 542c. It is reflected so as to be diffused in various directions), and travels in the rectangular lens portion 542b from the center side to the outside along the front surface thereof. Further, the light reflected by the central diffuse reflection section 542c travels from the center side to the outside (the direction away from the center line of the central diffuse reflection section 542c) over the entire thickness of the rectangular lens section 542b in the front-rear direction.

  When the light reflected from the center to the outside in the prismatic lens portion 542b in a direction substantially parallel to the front surface of the door frame left side decoration substrate 160 reaches the saw-shaped front reflecting portion 542f, the light is reflected by the surface of the front reflecting portion 542f. Reflect to the side. At this time, since the front reflecting portion 542f is inclined so that the rear surface thereof moves forward as the distance from the central diffuse reflecting portion 542c increases, the thickness of the rectangular lens portion 542b in the front-rear direction becomes thinner as the distance from the center increases. (See FIG. 96). Thus, the light that is reflected outward in the central diffuse reflection portion 542c over the entire thickness of the rectangular lens portion 542b in the front-rear direction is sequentially moved forward by the front reflection portion 542f from the center side toward the outer side. Can be reflected.

  Then, the light reflected forward by the front reflecting portion 542f passes through the front diffusion lens portion 542d and is emitted forward from the rectangular lens portion 542b. At this time, since the front diffusion lens portion 542d has a wavy cross section, the light reflected forward by the front reflection portion 542f can be diffused in various directions, and the square lens portion 542b can be diffused. It is possible to irradiate the front surface (the rear surface of the left unit decorative lens member) substantially uniformly from the front surface of the.

  In the prismatic lens portion 542b, in the front diffusion lens portion 542d and the front reflecting portion 542f, a plurality of concentric circular grooves are divided by a plurality of radially extending lines, and a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves are separated by the dividing lines. Are shifted in the radial direction so that concentric arcuate grooves are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction. Therefore, the light emitted from the front surface of the rectangular lens portion 542b to the front side has a concentric circular stripe pattern. It is possible to prevent the light from becoming light, and it is possible to irradiate light with more uniform light and shade to the front. Accordingly, the front surface of the polygonal lens portion 542b of the left unit decoration lens member can be substantially uniformly illuminated and decorated.

  The left unit decorative lens member (not shown) is formed along the front surface of the left unit decorative cover 546. The left unit decorative lens member is located in front of the circular decorative portion 542b of the left unit diffusing lens member 542 and the circular decorative portion formed in the portion in front of the circular lens portion 542a of the left unit diffusing lens member 542. And a multifaceted decorative portion formed on the portion. The circular ornamental portion is formed in a shape in which a plurality of triangular ribs are provided in the circumferential direction on the outer periphery of a cylindrical portion whose front surface extends shortly before and after the depression. In the polyhedral decoration, a plurality of quadrangular pyramid-shaped parts are vertically arranged on the front surface of a vertically extending rectangular parallelepiped, and a plurality of triangular polyhedrons are vertically arranged on both left and right sides of the rectangular parallelepiped part. It is formed in the shape as described above. The circular decoration portion and the multifaceted decoration portion are formed in the same shape as the circular decoration portion 561a and the multifaceted decoration portion 561b of the right unit decoration lens member 561 in the door frame right side unit 550.

  The left unit decorative lens member can be viewed from the front side (player side) through the transparent left unit decorative cover 546. In the left unit decorative lens member, the multi-faceted decorative portion is forward from the rectangular lens portion 542b of the left unit diffusing lens member 542 by the light that is emitted forward from the circular lens portion 542a of the left unit diffusing lens member 542. The light radiated to each of them causes a light emission decoration.

  The left unit upper decorative base 544 is a quadrangle that extends vertically in a front view, and is formed in a rectangular tube shape that extends in the front-rear direction. The left unit upper decorative base 544 is inclined such that a portion forming a lower surface on the outer periphery thereof projects downward as going from the front end side to the rear end side, and the lower portion of the portion penetrates back and forth. The left unit upper decoration base 544 is formed of a non-translucent member.

  The left unit lower decorative base 545 is formed in a U-shape that is open upward when viewed from the front. The left unit lower decorative base 545 is inclined to the rear end so that the upper side from the substantially center in the vertical direction at the front end moves backward as it goes upward. The left unit lower decorative base 545 is formed of a non-translucent member.

  The left unit decorative cover 546 extends vertically over the entire height of the door frame left side unit 540. The left unit decorative cover 546 is bent so that an intermediate portion in the up-down direction is recessed rearward, and a lower portion is bent rearward along the front end of the left unit upper decorative base 544, and a left-shaped portion. The upper part is bent backward so as to follow the front end of the unit lower decorative base 545, and the lower part of the upper dogleg part and the upper end of the lower dogleg part are connected. And a linear portion.

  The upper and lower ends of the left unit decorative cover 546 are attached to the front surface of the left unit upper decorative base 544 and the front surface of the left unit lower decorative base 545, respectively. The left unit decorative cover 546 is formed of a transparent member, and the left unit decorative lens member arranged on the rear side can be viewed from the front side.

  The decoration member 547 extends vertically short and is attached to the front surface of the left unit decoration cover 546 at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction. The decoration member 547 is formed of a non-translucent member.

[3-6. Door frame right side unit]
The door frame right side unit 550 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 97 to 101 and the like. 97A is a front view of the door frame right side unit in the door frame, FIG. 97B is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 97C is a door frame right side unit in the rear. It is the perspective view seen from. FIG. 98 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 99 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and seen from the rear. FIG. 100 is a sectional view taken along line OO in FIG. 97 (a). 101 (a) is a sectional view taken along the line P-P in FIG. 97 (a), and FIG. 101 (b) is a sectional view taken along the line Q-Q in FIG. 97 (a). The door frame right side unit 550 is attached to the right side of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 above the dish unit 320.

  The door frame right side unit 550 includes a vertically extending box-shaped right unit base 551 attached to the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 on the right side of the through hole 111 in front view, and a front surface of the right unit base 551. The door frame right side decoration board 552 mounted on the front side of the door frame right side decoration board 552 is attached to the front side of the right unit base 551 to the left of the front center of the front surface of the right unit base 551 and extends in the vertical direction and the front-back direction. A transparent plate-shaped right unit left diffusing lens member 553, a sheet-like right unit left decorative member 554 attached to the left side surface of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553, and a right unit left decorative member A transparent plate-shaped right unit left cover attached to the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 so as to cover the left side of the 554. Includes a over 555, the.

  Further, the door frame right side unit 550 includes a front side of the door frame right side decoration substrate 552 and a right side of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 in front view and a right side of the front view center and a right unit left diffusing lens in front of the right unit base 551. The right unit right diffusing lens member 556 which is attached to the member 553 and extends in the up-down direction and the front-rear direction, and which is attached to the right side surface of the right unit right diffusing lens member 556 and is decorated. A sheet-shaped right unit right decoration member 557, and a transparent plate-shaped right unit right cover and 558 attached to the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 so as to cover the right side of the right unit right decoration member 557. There is.

  Further, the door frame right side unit 550 is disposed between the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusing lens member 556, and extends in the vertical direction and the front-back direction with the front and right sides opened, and is shallow. A box-shaped non-translucent right unit left light-shielding member 559 and a right unit right diffusion lens member 556 are attached to the left side so as to close the open right side of the right unit left light-shielding member 559. The right unit right light blocking member 560, which is a flat plate-shaped unit, is provided.

  Further, the door frame right side unit 550 is attached to the front ends of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusing lens member 556, and has a translucent right with a polyhedral decoration at the front end. It is attached to the front surface of the right unit base 551 so as to cover the unit decoration lens member 561, the right and left sides of the right unit decoration lens member 561, and the front end sides of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. A frame-shaped right unit decoration base 562 penetrating in the front-rear direction, a transparent right unit cover 563 attached to the front side of the right unit decoration base 562 so as to close the front end opening of the right unit decoration base 562, and a right unit cover. And a plurality of decorative members 564 attached to the front side of 563. Although illustration is omitted, the door frame right side unit 550 is attached so as to vertically penetrate the right unit base 551, and the door body relay board of the door frame base unit 100 and the door frame of the door frame top unit 570. A connection cable for connecting to the top unit relay board 589 is provided.

  The right unit base 551 of the door frame right side unit 550 is a quadrangle that is long in the vertical direction when viewed from the front, and extends in a short rectangular tube shape in the front-rear direction, and is formed in a box shape in which the vicinity of the center in the front-rear direction is closed. Has been done. The right unit base 551 is formed of a non-translucent member.

  The door frame right side decorative substrate 552 is formed in a vertically extending strip plate shape. The door frame right side decoration board 552 is a left LED 552a mounted on the left side of the center in the left-right direction on the front side, a right LED 552b mounted on the right side of the center in the left-right direction on the front side, and mounted on the center in the left-right direction on the front side. A plurality of middle LEDs 552c are provided. The left LED 552a of the door frame right side decoration substrate 552 is for allowing the right unit left decoration member 554 to emit light through the right unit left diffusion lens member 553. The right LED 552b is for allowing the right unit right decoration member 557 to emit light through the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The middle LED 552c is for allowing the right unit decoration lens member 561 to emit light.

  The front and rear surfaces of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 are formed in white. The door frame right side decorative board 552 is vertically divided into an upper door frame right side upper decorative board 552A and a lower door frame right side lower decorative board 552B. Although illustration is omitted, the door frame right side lower decorative board 552B is connected to the door body relay board of the door frame base unit 100, and the door frame right side upper decorative board 552A is the door frame right side lower decorative board 552B. It is connected to the.

  The right unit left diffusing lens member 553 includes a flat plate-shaped main body portion 553a extending in the up-down direction and the front-rear direction, and a rear wall portion 553b protruding from the rear side of the main body portion 553a to the right side in front view in a short flat plate shape. A cutout portion 553c that is cut out in a quadrangular shape from the right end side in front view of the rear wall portion 553b to the left side and is formed in plural at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and a right unit left decorative member on the left side in front view of the main body portion 553a. A storage recess 553d that is shallowly recessed to accommodate 554, an input lens portion 553e that is provided rearward from the rear end surface of the main body portion 553a, and is provided in plurality in the vertical direction, on the right side of the main body portion 553a when viewed from the front. The input lens portion 553e is provided with a plurality of side surface reflection portions 553f arranged in the vertical direction so as to be at the center in the vertical direction.

  The main body 553a of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 has a shape in a side view in which the upper corner of the front end side of a vertically extending quadrangle is notched obliquely in a C-chamfered manner, and the lower side is upward as it goes forward. It is formed in a shape that is inclined so as to move to. In addition, as shown in FIG. 101, the main body portion 553a is entirely moved with respect to a vertical line on the front surface of the door frame right side decorative board 552 so as to move to the right in front view from the rear end side toward the front. It is slightly inclined. The front end of the main body portion 553a projects forward more than the front end of the door frame left side unit 540 when assembled to the door frame 3.

  The rear wall portion 553b is assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, and the right end of the rear wall portion 553b extends substantially to the center of the right unit base 551 in the left-right direction. The right end of the rear wall portion 553b is in contact with the left end of the rear wall portion 556b of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556.

  The plurality of cutout portions 553c are formed in the vertical direction at predetermined intervals, and a part thereof corresponds to the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decoration board 552. When assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decoration substrate 552 faces forward from the plurality of cutouts 553c, and the plurality of middle LEDs 552c satisfactorily emit the right unit decoration lens member 561. Can be decorated.

  The housing recess 553d has a flat bottom surface, and the outer peripheral shape thereof substantially matches the outer shape of the right unit left decoration member 554. Thereby, the right unit left decoration member 554 can be accommodated.

  The plurality of input lens portions 553e project rearward at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction from the rear end surface of the main body portion 553a. Specifically, the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 is formed at approximately the center in the vertical direction when the right diffusion lens member 553 is divided into six equal parts in the vertical direction. Although not shown in detail, the input lens portion 553e is a rectangular parallelepiped portion in which a vertically extending quadrilateral protrudes rearward, and is recessed forward from the rear surface of the rectangular parallelepiped portion so as to be curved in a spherical shape. And a part. These input lens portions 553e are respectively positioned immediately before the left LED 552a of the door frame right side decoration board 552 in a state of being assembled to the door frame right side unit 550. Thereby, the light from the left LED 552a can be input so as to be widely diffused in the main body portion 553a.

  A plurality of (six) side reflection parts 553f are provided in the vertical direction. Each side reflection part 553f is formed by a plurality of concentric arcuate grooves divided in the circumferential direction by a line extending radially around the input lens part 553e. In each of the plurality of concentric arcuate grooves, the surface on the side closer to the input lens portion 553e is inclined with respect to the surface of the main body portion 553a and the surface on the side far from the input lens portion 553e is formed on the main body portion. It extends perpendicularly to the surface of 553a, and the deepest part is formed in an arc shape. The side-face reflecting portion 553f is formed in a pointed triangular shape such that a mountain portion between the grooves is directed to the center side when the input lens portion 553e is cut in the radial direction. , The whole is formed in a saw shape. Further, the side surface reflection portion 553f is formed such that the groove portions and the mountain portions are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction with the radial line dividing the plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves in the circumferential direction as a boundary. ing.

  In the right unit left diffusing lens member 553, the light emitted from the left LED 552a of the door frame right side decoration substrate 552 to the front proceeds from the rear surface of the input lens unit 553e into the main unit 553a of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553. It is incident. Since the rear end of the input lens portion 553e is curved forward, the curved surface refracts the light from the left LED 552a so as to spread it, and the input lens portion 553e in the main body portion 553a. It will be spread radially toward the front centering around.

  The main body portion 553a is slightly inclined with respect to the line extending vertically from the front surface of the door frame right side decoration board 552 so that the entire main body portion 553a moves to the right when viewed from the front as it moves toward the front. The light emitted from the left LED 552a mounted on the front surface of the right side decorative substrate 552 and entering the main body portion 553a from the input lens portion 553e hits the flat left surface inside the main body portion 553a. However, the direct light from the left LED 552a is not emitted to the outside from the left surface of the main body portion 553a due to the angle of incidence with respect to the left surface of the main body portion 553a, and is reflected to the side surface reflection portion 553f side at the inner surface of the left surface. Becomes

  Then, the light incident forward from the input lens portion 553e into the main body portion 553a is reflected leftward in front view by hitting the sawtooth side surface reflection portion 553f, and outward from the left surface of the main body portion 553a. It will be irradiated. Note that light is emitted outward (to the right in front view) from the right surface (side surface reflecting portion 553f) of the body portion 553a, but the right unit left light shielding member 559 arranged on the right side of the body portion 553a is white. Since it is a member, the left surface of the right unit left light shielding member 559 is illuminated brightly, and the indirect light reflected by the right unit left light shielding member 559 is emitted to the left side through the main body portion 553a. . Therefore, from the left surface of the main body portion 553a, the light reflected to the left by the side surface reflection portion 553f in the main body portion 553a and the light that is emitted from the side surface reflection portion 553f to the right and is left on the left surface of the right unit left light shielding member 559. The light that is reflected toward one side and passed through the main body portion 553a is emitted to the left, so that the right unit left decorative member 554 attached to the left side of the main body portion 553a can be illuminated and decorated with good brightness. it can.

  In the side surface reflection portion 553f, the concentric circular grooves are divided by a plurality of radially extending lines, and the concentric arc-shaped grooves are shifted in the radial direction with the dividing line as a boundary to form the concentric arc-shaped grooves. Are arranged alternately in the circumferential direction, so that the light radiated outward (leftward) from the left surface of the main body portion 553a is prevented from becoming light having a concentric circular stripe pattern. It is possible to illuminate the left side with more uniform light and shade. As a result, the right unit left decoration member 554 housed in the housing recess 553d on the left side of the main body 553a can be light-emitted and decorated substantially uniformly.

  Since the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 is formed of a transparent member, the side surface reflection formed on the opposite side from the front view left side of the main body 553a (the side on which the housing recess 553d is formed). A pattern made up of a plurality of concentric arcuate grooves of the portion 553f and radially extending lines can be visually recognized. Therefore, when the transparent portion is formed in the right unit left decoration member 554, the pattern of the side surface reflection portion 553f of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 can be visually recognized through the transparent portion, and the transparent portion in the right unit left decoration member 554 is transparent. Such a portion can be decorated by the side surface reflection portion 553f.

  The right unit left decoration member 554 is formed in a thin sheet shape, and the decoration such as the manufacturer's logo of the pachinko machine 1 or the logo according to the concept of the effect presented to the player on the game board 5 is translucent. Has been applied. The right unit left cover 555 protects the outer surface of the right unit left decorative member 554 when assembled to the door frame right side unit 550.

  The right unit right diffusion lens member 556 is formed substantially symmetrically with the right unit left diffusion lens member 553, and has the same configuration. More specifically, the right unit right diffusing lens member 556 includes a flat plate-shaped main body portion 556a extending in the up-down direction and the front-rear direction, and a rear wall projecting from the rear side of the main body portion 556a to the left side in front view in a short flat plate shape. The portion 556b, the rear wall portion 556b are cut out in a rectangular shape from the left end side in the front view to the right side, and a plurality of cutout portions 556c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction. A housing recess 556d that is shallowly recessed so as to house the unit right decorative member 557, an input lens portion 556e that is provided rearward from the rear end surface of the main body portion 556a, and is provided in plurality in the vertical direction, and a front view of the main body portion 556a. On the left surface side, a plurality of side surface reflecting portions 556f are provided, each input lens portion 556e being arranged in the up-down direction so as to be the center in the up-down direction.

  The main body portion 556a of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 has a shape in a side view in which the upper corner of the front end side of a vertically extending quadrangle is notched obliquely in a C-chamfered manner, and the lower side is upward as it goes forward. The right unit left diffusing lens member 553 has an outer shape that is substantially the same as the main body 553a of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553. Further, as shown in FIG. 101, the main body portion 556a is entirely moved with respect to the vertical line on the front surface of the door frame right side decorative board 552 so as to move leftward in front view as it goes from the rear end side to the front side. It is slightly inclined. The front end of the main body portion 556a, when assembled to the door frame 3, projects forward more than the front end of the door frame left side unit 540.

  The rear wall portion 556b, when assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, has its left end extending substantially to the center of the right unit base 551 in the left-right direction. The right end of the rear wall portion 553b of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 is in contact with the left end of the rear wall portion 556b.

  The plurality of cutouts 556c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and a part of the cutouts 556c corresponds to the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decoration board 552. The plurality of cutouts 556c are formed at positions corresponding to the plurality of cutouts 553c of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553. Therefore, in a state where the door frame right side unit 550 is assembled, a rectangular opening portion penetrating in the front-rear direction is formed by the cutout portion 553c of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the cutout portion 556c of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. Is formed, the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decoration substrate 552 faces forward from the opening, and the right unit decoration lens member 561 can be favorably illuminated and decorated by the plurality of middle LEDs 552c.

  The housing recess 556d has a flat bottom surface, and the outer peripheral shape thereof substantially matches the outer shape of the right unit right decorative member 557. Thereby, the right unit right decoration member 557 can be accommodated.

  The plurality of input lens portions 556e project rearward at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction from the rear end surface of the main body portion 556a. Specifically, the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 is formed at approximately the center in the vertical direction when the right diffusion lens member 556 is divided into six equal parts in the vertical direction. Although not shown in detail, the input lens portion 556e is a rectangular parallelepiped portion in which a vertically extending quadrangle is projected rearward, and is recessed forward from the rear surface of the rectangular parallelepiped portion so as to be curved in a spherical shape. And a part. These input lens portions 556e are respectively positioned immediately before the right LED 552b of the door frame right side decoration substrate 552 in a state of being assembled to the door frame right side unit 550. This allows the light from the right LED 552b to be input so as to be widely diffused within the main body 556a.

  The side surface reflecting portion 556f is provided in plurality (six) in the vertical direction. Each of the side surface reflection portions 556f is formed by a plurality of concentric arcuate grooves that are divided in the circumferential direction by a line that extends radially around the input lens portion 556e. In each of the plurality of concentric arcuate grooves, the surface on the side closer to the input lens portion 556e in each groove is inclined with respect to the surface of the main body portion 556a, and the surface on the side far from the input lens portion 556e is the main body portion. It extends perpendicularly to the surface of 556a, and the deepest part is formed in an arc shape. The side surface reflecting portion 556f is formed in a pointed triangular shape such that the mountain portion between the grooves is directed toward the center side when cut in the radial direction around the input lens portion 556e. , The whole is formed in a saw shape. Further, the side surface reflection portion 556f is formed such that groove portions and mountain portions are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction with a radial line dividing the plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves in the circumferential direction as a boundary. ing.

  In the right unit right diffusion lens member 556, the light emitted from the right LED 552b of the door frame right side decoration substrate 552 to the front proceeds from the rear surface of the input lens portion 556e into the main body portion 556a of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. It is incident. Since the rear end of the input lens portion 556e is curved forward, the curved surface refracts the light from the right LED 552b so as to spread it out, and the input lens portion 556e in the main body portion 556a. It will be spread radially toward the front centering around.

  The main body portion 556a is slightly inclined with respect to a line extending vertically from the front surface of the door frame right side decoration board 552 so that the entire main body portion 556a moves to the left as viewed from the front as it moves toward the front. The light emitted from the right LED 552b mounted on the front surface of the right side decoration substrate 552 and incident on the main body portion 556a from the input lens portion 556e strikes the flat right surface inside the main body portion 556a. However, the direct light from the right LED 552b is not emitted to the outside from the left surface of the main body 556a due to the angle of incidence with respect to the right surface of the main body 556a, and is reflected to the side surface reflection portion 556f side at the inner surface of the right surface. Becomes

  Then, the light incident forward from the input lens portion 556e into the main body portion 556a is reflected to the right in a front view by hitting the sawtooth side surface reflecting portion 556f, and outward from the right surface of the main body portion 556a. It will be irradiated. Although light is emitted outward (left in front view) from the right surface (side surface reflection portion 556f) of the main body 556a, the right unit right light shielding member 560 arranged on the left side of the main body 556a is white. Since it is a member, the right surface of the right unit right light blocking member 560 is illuminated brightly, and the indirect light reflected by the right unit right light blocking member 560 is emitted to the right side through the main body 556a. . Therefore, from the right surface of the main body portion 556a, the light reflected to the right by the side surface reflection portion 556f in the main body portion 556a and the light reflected to the left from the side surface reflection portion 556f to the right surface of the right unit right light shielding member 560 The light that is reflected toward one side and passed through the main body 556a is emitted to the right, so that the right unit right decorative member 557 attached to the right side of the main body 556a can be illuminated and decorated with good brightness. it can.

  Further, in the side surface reflecting portion 556f, the concentric circular grooves are divided by a plurality of radially extending lines, and the concentric arc-shaped grooves are shifted in the radial direction with the dividing line as a boundary to form the concentric arc-shaped grooves. Are arranged alternately in the circumferential direction, so that the light emitted from the right surface of the main body portion 556a to the outside (to the right) is prevented from being light having a shade of a concentric stripe pattern. Therefore, it is possible to irradiate the light with more uniform light and shade to the right. As a result, the right unit right decoration member 557 housed in the housing recess 556d on the right side of the main body 556a can be light-emitted and decorated substantially uniformly.

  Since the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 is formed of a transparent member, the side surface reflection formed on the opposite side from the front side right side of the main body 556a (the side on which the housing recess 556d is formed). A pattern made up of a plurality of concentric arcuate grooves of the portion 556f and radially extending lines can be visually recognized. Therefore, when the transparent portion is formed in the right unit right decoration member 557, the pattern of the side surface reflection portion 556f of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 can be visually recognized through the transparent portion, and the transparent portion in the right unit right decoration member 557 is transparent. This portion can be decorated by the side surface reflection portion 556f.

  The right unit right decoration member 557 is formed in a thin sheet shape, and the decoration such as the manufacturer's logo of the pachinko machine 1 or the logo according to the concept of the presentation presented to the player on the game board 5 is translucent. Has been applied. The right unit right cover 558 protects the outer surface of the right unit right decoration member 557 when assembled to the door frame right side unit 550. The right unit right decoration member 557 and the right unit right cover 558 are formed substantially symmetrically with the right unit left decoration member 554 and the right unit left cover 555. The decorations applied to the right unit left decoration member 554 and the right unit right decoration member 557 may be the same or different decorations.

  The right unit left light shielding member 559 is formed to have a side view shape that is substantially the same as the side unit shapes of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The right unit left light shielding member 559 is formed in a shallow box shape with the front and right sides thereof open. The right unit left light-shielding member 559 includes a flat plate-shaped main body portion 559a extending in the vertical direction and the front-back direction, a rear wall portion 559b protruding from the rear side of the main body portion 559a to the right side in front view in a short flat plate shape, and the rear portion. The wall portion 559b is cut out in a quadrangular shape from the right end side in a front view to the left side, and a plurality of notch portions 559c are formed at predetermined intervals in the up-down direction. A plurality of flat plate-shaped reinforcing portions 559d extending from the wall portion 559b to the front end of the main body portion 559a are provided.

  The main body portion 559a of the right unit left light-shielding member 559 has a shape in a side view in which the upper corner of the front end side of a vertically extending quadrangle is notched diagonally in a C-chamfered manner, and the lower side is upward as it goes forward. The main unit 553a and 556a of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusing lens member 556 are formed to have substantially the same outer shape.

  The rear wall portion 559b, when assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, has its left end extending to the right of the right unit base 551 substantially in the left-right direction. The left surface of the right unit right light shielding member 560 is in contact with the right end of the rear wall portion 559b.

  The plurality of cutouts 559c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and a part thereof corresponds to the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decoration board 552. The plurality of cutout portions 559c are formed at positions corresponding to the plurality of cutout portions 553c and 556c of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. Therefore, in the state in which the door frame right side unit 550 is assembled, the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decoration substrate 552 faces forward from the plurality of notches 559c, and the plurality of middle LEDs 552c satisfactorily emit the right unit decoration lens member 561. Can be decorated.

  The plurality of reinforcing portions 559d are provided in three sets, each pair including a pair of reinforcing portions 559d vertically spaced apart from each other at a height substantially the same as the left and right widths thereof and vertically spaced apart from each other by a predetermined distance. The reinforcing portion 559d of each set is formed at a position behind the decoration member 564 attached to the right unit cover 563. The strength and rigidity of the entire door frame right side unit 550 are increased by the plurality of reinforcing portions 559d.

  The right unit right light blocking member 560 has a shape in a side view in which the upper corner of the front end side of a vertically extending quadrangle is notched obliquely in a C-chamfered manner, and the lower side moves upward as it goes forward. The right unit left light shielding member 559 is formed to have an inclined shape, and has substantially the same shape as the main body portion 559a of the right unit left light shielding member 559. The right unit right light blocking member 560 closes the right side opening of the right unit left light blocking member 559, which is formed in a shallow box shape, to the right when assembled to the door frame right side unit 550.

  The right unit left light blocking member 559 and the right unit right light blocking member 560 are each formed of a white member. The right unit left light blocking member 559 and the right unit right light blocking member 560 are assembled to the door frame right side unit 550 as shown in FIG. The left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 are arranged so as to be close to the main body portions 553a and 556a. As a result, the main body portion 559a of the right unit left light blocking member 559 and the right unit right light blocking member 560 are separated from each other in the left-right direction, forming a space extending in the up-down direction and the front-back direction with a predetermined width in the left-right direction. . The light radiated forward from the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decoration substrate 552 passes through the space formed between the main body portion 559a of the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 to the right unit decoration. The rear side of the lens member 561 is irradiated.

  Further, the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are formed of a non-translucent member, and irradiate forward from the left LED 552a, the middle LED 552c, and the right LED 552b on the door frame right side decoration substrate 552, respectively. The left light 552a, the right LED 552b, and the right unit left decoration member 554, the right unit right decoration member 557, and the right unit decoration lens member 561 respectively corresponding to the left LED 552a, the right LED 552b, and It can be illuminated and decorated only by the middle LED 552c.

  Further, the right unit left light-shielding member 559 and the right unit right light-shielding member 560 are arranged on the rear side of the respective divided spaces because the internal space is divided into four vertically by the three sets of reinforcing portions 559d. By the LED 552c in the door frame right side decoration substrate 552, it is possible to prevent light from interfering with each other, so that the portion of the right unit decoration lens member 561 located in front of each space can be prevented. , Each can be independently illuminated. That is, on the front end side of the door frame right side unit 550, it is possible to vertically divide into a plurality of (four) regions and individually light-embellish them.

  The right unit decorative lens member 561 is formed in a shape along the front end shapes of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The right unit decorative lens member 561 includes a circular decorative portion 561a formed in a circular shape in a front view, and a polyhedral decorative portion 561b extending vertically and formed with a plurality of polyhedrons. The circular decorative portion 561a is formed in a shape in which a plurality of triangular ribs are provided in the circumferential direction on the outer circumference of a cylindrical portion whose front surface is recessed and extends shortly before and after the depression. In the multifaceted decorative portion 561b, a plurality of quadrangular pyramid-shaped portions are vertically arranged on the front surface of a vertically extending rectangular parallelepiped, and a plurality of triangular polyhedrons are vertically arranged on both left and right sides of the rectangular parallelepiped portion. It is formed in the shape that it was installed.

  More specifically, in the right unit decorative lens member 561, a plurality of circular decorative portions 561a and a multifaceted decorative portion 561b are divided into four by three sets of reinforcing portions 559d in the right unit left light shielding member 559. In the three parts from the top among the parts located in the front, the multi-faced decoration parts 561b are arranged one on each of the upper and lower sides of the circular decoration part 561a arranged at the center in the vertical direction, and the bottommost part is the multi-faced decoration part 561a. It is formed so that only the portion 561b is arranged.

  The right unit decorative lens member 561 is attached to the front ends of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The right unit decorative lens member 561 can be viewed from the front side (player side) through the transparent right unit cover 563. The right unit decorative lens member 561 is illuminated and decorated by the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 arranged rearward.

  The right unit decoration base 562 is formed in a tubular frame shape that penetrates in the front-rear direction. The right unit decoration base 562 is formed in a shape that conforms to the shapes of the front end and the upper end of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The right unit decoration base 562 is formed so as to cover both the left and right outer sides near the front end of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556, and the left and right sides of the right unit decoration lens member 561. The front end of the right unit decorative lens member 561 slightly projects forward from the front end of the right unit decorative base 562 when assembled in the door frame right side unit 550. The right unit decoration base 562 is formed of a non-translucent member.

  The right unit cover 563 is formed so as to be able to close the front end opening of the right unit decoration base 562. The right unit cover 563 is formed of a transparent member, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 arranged on the rear side can be viewed from the front side.

  The decorative member 564 extends vertically short and is attached to the front surface of the right unit cover 563 at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction. The decoration member 564 is formed of a non-translucent member. The three decoration members 564 divide the right unit cover 563 (right unit decoration lens member 561) into four parts in the vertical direction.

  The door frame right side unit 550, in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3, protrudes forward in a plate shape larger than the door frame left side unit 540, and protrudes slightly forward from the front end of the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320. There is. The door frame right side unit 550 includes a right unit left decorative member 554 and a right unit right decorative member 557, which are provided on both of the protruding left and right sides, and a right unit decorative lens member 561, which is provided at the front end, independently of each other. It can be decorated with light.

  Since the door frame right side unit 550 is plate-like and protrudes largely to the front, when this pachinko machine 1 is installed in the island facility of the game hall, the door frame right side unit 550 is adjacent to the pachinko machine on the right side. It is possible to exert an effect like a partition between the spaces. As a result, the player playing on the pachinko machine 1 can be made to feel as if he / she is playing in a private room, and other surrounding players can play in a relaxed atmosphere without hesitation. You can

  Further, since the door frame right side unit 550 is largely projected forward, in the game hall where the pachinko machines 1 are arranged side by side, even if the pachinko machines 1 are not located in front of the pachinko machines 1, the island equipment The pachinko machine 1 can be visually recognized even from the lateral direction along the line, and the pachinko machine 1 can be made conspicuous in a game hall where a large number of pachinko machines are arranged. Therefore, when the right unit left decorative member 554 and the right unit right decorative member 557 on both the left and right sides of the door frame right side unit 550 are decorated with light emission, the book is viewed from a distance even if it is not located near the front of the pachinko machine 1. The presence of the pachinko machine 1 can be notified, and the pachinko machine 1 can be highly appealing to the player.

  Further, in the door frame right side unit 550, when a problem such as a ball clogging or an error occurs in the pachinko machine 1, the right unit left decorative member 554, the right unit right decorative member 557, and the right unit decorative lens on both left and right sides. By illuminating the members 561 and the like in a unique manner, it is possible to immediately notify the attendant of the game hall of the occurrence of the defect and quickly respond to the defect. Therefore, the interruption of the game of the player can be resolved at an early stage, and the player can be less irritated and the interest in the game can be prevented from decreasing.

[3-7. Door frame top unit]
The door frame top unit 570 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 102 to 105 and the like. 102A is a front view of the door frame top unit in the door frame, FIG. 102B is a perspective view of the door frame top unit seen from the front, and FIG. 102C is a view of the door frame top unit seen from the rear. It is a perspective view. FIG. 103 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 104 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit disassembled and seen from the rear. 105 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line RR in FIG. The door frame top unit 570 is attached to the upper side of the door frame left side unit 540 and the door frame right side unit 550 and to the upper side of the through hole 111 in the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100.

  The door frame top unit 570 is mounted on the front side of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 above the through hole 111 at the center in the left-right direction and at the left and right sides of the center base 571. A pair of side bases 572 attached to the front surface of the door frame base 110, a pair of upper speakers 573 attached to the front surfaces of the pair of side bases 572, and extending leftward and rightward, with the center in the left-right direction protruding forward. A pair of openings 574a penetrating forward and backward at the front position of the pair of upper speakers 573 with a box-like rear open, and from a position closer to the center in the left-right direction than the pair of openings 574a. Plural (three on each left and right) slips, each extending and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and separated vertically. A unit main body 574 having a central base 571 and a pair of side bases 572 and having a central base 571 and a pair of upper speakers 573 are arranged in front of each other so as to close a pair of openings 574a. And a speaker cover 575 made of punching metal attached to the rear side of the unit main body 574.

  The door frame top unit 570 is mounted on the front surface of the unit main body 574 at the center in the left-right direction and has a translucent top middle decoration member 576 and is mounted on the rear side of the top middle decoration member 576. A door frame top middle decoration board 577 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface, and a plurality of slits 574b respectively attached to the front surface of the unit main body 574 and closed, and left and right ends of the top middle decoration member 576. A plurality of transparent plate-shaped light guide members 578 (three in each of the left and right) extending in the vicinity from the vicinity to the vicinity of the left and right ends of the unit main body 574 across the opening 574a and the top middle decoration member 576 on the front surface of the unit main body 574. The top left decorative lens member 579 and the top left decorative lens member 579 attached to the left and right sides respectively and covering the front faces of the plurality (three) of light guide members 578 and The top right decoration lens member 580, the top left decoration lens member 579, and the top right decoration lens member 580 are attached to the front surface of the unit main body 574 from the front side, respectively. A top middle left decorative member 581 and a top middle right decorative member 582 respectively extending to the vicinity of the center side end part of the.

  Further, the door frame top unit 570 is mounted inside the left and right side surfaces of the unit main body 574, respectively, and the LEDs are mounted on the portions of the plurality (three) of the light guide members 578 facing the left and right outer ends, respectively. The door frame top left decorative substrate 583 and the door frame top right decorative substrate 584, and a plurality of (three) slits 574b formed respectively on the left and right sides of the center of the rear side of the unit main body 574 in the left-right direction penetrate therethrough. A pair of substrate bases 585 attached to the respective parts, and a door in which a plurality of LEDs 586a and 587a are mounted at positions behind the slits 574b of the unit main body 574, which are attached to the front surfaces of the pair of substrate bases 585, respectively. Frame top middle left decoration board 586, door frame top middle right decoration board 587, door frame top middle left decoration board 586, and door frame top middle left decoration board 586 And a, a pair of light blocking members 588 which are respectively attached to the rear side of the unit body 574 at the front side of the door frame top right in decorative substrate 587.

  In addition, the door frame top unit 570 is provided on the central base 571 so as to cover the door frame top unit relay board 589 attached to the front surface of the central base 571 in the unit main body 574 and the front surface of the door frame top unit relay board 589. The relay board cover 590 attached, the upper cover 591 attached to the unit body 574 so as to close the upper opening 574c of the unit body 574, and the unit lower unit 574d so as to close the lower opening 574d of the unit body 574. And a lower cover 592 attached to the main body 574.

  The center base 571 of the door frame top unit 570 is formed in a quadrangle extending in the left and right direction in a front view. The central base 571 is formed in a box shape that is opened rearward, and has a plurality of irregularities on the front surface. The pair of side bases 572 are attached to the left and right ends of the center base 571, respectively. The pair of upper speakers 573 are attached to the front surfaces of the side bases 572, respectively. The pair of upper speakers 573 are obliquely attached such that the front surface of each of the upper speakers 573 assembled to the door frame top unit 570 is rearward so that the side closer to the center of the door frame top unit 570 in the left-right direction moves rearward. The pair of upper speakers 573 are full-range cone-type speakers capable of outputting sound in a wide frequency band.

  The unit main body 574 is formed in such a shape that the lower portion near the left and right ends of a quadrangle extending left and right bulges downward as viewed from the front. In other words, the unit main body 574 is formed such that the shape of the unit main body 574 in a front view is a rectangular shape that extends laterally and is cut out in a trapezoidal shape that is narrowed upward from the lower end side. The unit main body 574 has a quadrangle extending in the left-right direction in plan view, and a portion having a half width of the quadrangle (left-right direction length) centered on the center in the left-right direction on the front end side of the quadrangle as the bottom. Is formed in a shape that is a combination of a trapezoid that protrudes forward and a square that protrudes forward with the front end side of the trapezoid as a long side. Therefore, in the unit main body 574, the both sides of the portion projecting forward at the center in the left-right direction on the front face connect the left-right direction end portion of the unit main body 574 with the left-right direction end portion of the front end projecting portion. It is located behind (recessed).

  In the unit main body 574, openings 574a penetrating in the front-rear direction are formed in portions on both sides in the front surface in the left-right direction to positions outside the portions protruding forward. In addition, the unit main body 574 has a plurality of slits that extend laterally at a predetermined height in the vertical direction and penetrate in the front-rear direction in a portion that extends obliquely to the frontwardly protruding trapezoidal portion. 574b is formed. The plurality of slits 574b extend from the vicinity of the front end of the portion of the front surface of the unit main body 574 that extends obliquely forward to the left and right to the vicinity of the opening 574a. Further, the plurality of slits 574b are formed on both sides of the center of the unit main body 574 in the left-right direction, and three slits 574b are vertically spaced apart from each other.

  Further, the unit main body 574 has an upper opening 574c that is cut out in a square shape from the rear end toward the front in the center of the upper surface in the left-right direction, and a lower opening 574d that is cut away from the rear end toward the front in the left-right direction on the lower surface. , Are provided. The upper opening 574c of the unit body 574 is closed by the upper cover 591. The lower opening 574d is closed by the lower cover 592.

  Further, the unit main body 574 includes a top left decoration portion 574e and a top right decoration portion 574f that extend vertically at the left and right ends. The front surface of the top left decorative portion 574e is formed at a position in which the front-rear direction is substantially the same as the front surface of the portion where the opening 574a is formed. The top right decorative portion 574f is formed such that its front surface is located in front of the front surface of the portion where the opening 574a is formed. The unit main body 574 is formed of a non-translucent member.

  The top middle decoration member 576 is attached to the front end of the portion of the front surface of the unit main body 574 that projects forward at the center in the left-right direction. The decoration member 576 in the top has a shape of a front view that is bent so that the central portion of the lower side of the substantially square is positioned downward, and extends from the upper ends of the right and left sides of the variable pentagon to the outer side in the left-right direction. It is formed in a shape like a combination of a substantially right-angled triangle connecting the tip of each side and the lower ends of the right and left sides of the side pentagon. The decoration member 576 in the top is inclined so that the variable pentagonal portion on the front surface moves backward as it goes downward. The top middle decoration member 576 is formed in a three-dimensional shape as a whole and has a light-transmitting property.

  The door frame top middle decoration board 577 is rearwardly of the top middle decoration member 576 in a state in which the front surface is inclined so as to move backward as it goes downward along the front surface of the pentagonal part of the top middle decoration member 576. Mounted on the side. A plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface of the door frame top middle decoration board 577, and the top middle decoration member 576 can be made to emit light by making these LEDs emit light.

  The light guide member 578 is formed of a transparent member. The light guide member 578 is formed in a shape along the left and right outer sides of the front end of the front portion of the unit main body 574 that protrudes forward. The side close to both ends in the left-right direction of the unit main body 574 will be described as the end side, and the side close to the center will be described as the center side. 578a, and an arc portion 578b extending in an arc shape having a large radius so as to move forward from the end portion side on the center side of the straight portion 578a toward the center side. The light guide member 578 is formed such that the depth in the front-rear direction is smaller than the height in the up-down direction in the straight portion 578a, and the depth in the front-rear direction is formed in the arc portion 578b is larger than the height in the up-down direction. Further, the light guide member 578 is formed such that the height in the vertical direction is constant in the straight portion 578a, and the height in the vertical direction is reduced in the arc portion 578b toward the center side. In the state where the light guide member 578 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the straight portion 578a is located immediately in front of the opening 574a of the unit body 574, and the arc portion 578b closes the slit 574b of the unit body 574 from the front. There is.

  The light guide member 578 includes a diffusive reflection portion 578c formed on the rear surface of the straight portion 578a and having a saw-tooth shape, and a diffusion input portion 578d formed on the rear surface side of the arc portion 578b and formed of a plurality of projections and depressions. Is equipped with.

  In the state where the light guide member 578 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the left and right outer ends face the LEDs 583a and 584a of the door frame top left decoration board 583 or the door frame top right decoration board 584. At the same time, the diffusion input unit 578d faces the LEDs 586a and 587a of the door frame top middle left decoration substrate 586 or the door frame top middle right decoration substrate 587. When the light from the LEDs 583a and 584a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 or the door frame top right decorative substrate 584 is incident on the light guide member 578 from the left and right outer ends, the light is transmitted to the straight portion 578a. While advancing inside, the diffuse reflection portion 578c formed on the rear surface of the straight portion 578a sequentially reflects the light forward from the end portion side, and the entire front surface of the straight portion 578a emits light forward. A top left decorative lens member 579 or a top right decorative lens member 580 is arranged in front of the light guide member 578, and a portion of these in front of the straight portion 578a is decorated with light emission.

  Further, the light guide member 578 receives light from the LEDs 586a and 587a of the door frame top middle left decoration substrate 586 or the door frame top middle right decoration substrate 587 from the diffusion input portion 578d formed on the rear surface of the arc portion 578b. Then, the light is widely diffused into the arc portion 578b by the unevenness of the diffusion input portion 578d, and the light is emitted forward from the entire front surface of the arc portion 578b. As a result, the portion of the top left decorative lens member 579 or the top right decorative lens member 580 located in front of the arc portion 578b can be illuminated and decorated.

  As described above, the light guide member 578 includes the LEDs 583a and 586a of the door frame top left decoration board 583 and the door frame top middle left decoration board 586, or the door frame top right decoration board 584 and the door frame top middle right decoration board 587. Light from the LEDs 584a, 587a can be guided to light-emit the entire top left decorative lens member 579 or top right decorative lens member 580 arranged in the front in a good (uniform) state.

  The top left decoration lens member 579 is attached to the front surface of the unit main body 574 so as to cover the front of the three light guide members 578 arranged on the left side of the center of the front surface of the unit main body 574 in the left-right direction. The top left decorative lens member 579 has three decorative lens portions 579a that individually accommodate the three light guide members 578 from the front. The decorative lens portion 579a of the top left decorative lens member 579 is formed in a shape following the light guide member 578, and covers the front surface and the upper and lower surfaces of the light guide member 578. On the front surface of each decorative lens portion 579a, projections and depressions of a square truncated pyramid are provided in a row on the left and right.

  The top left decoration lens member 579 extends from the left end of the top middle decoration member 576 in the door frame top unit 570 to the right end of the top left decoration portion 574e of the unit body 574. That is, the top left decorative lens member 579 decorates substantially the entire left side of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570. The top left decorative lens member 579 is illuminated and decorated by the LEDs 583a and 586a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 and the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 via the three light guide members 578.

  The top right decoration lens member 580 is attached to the front surface of the unit main body 574 so as to cover the front of the three light guide members 578 arranged on the right side of the center of the front surface of the unit main body 574 in the left-right direction. The top right decorative lens member 580 has three decorative lens portions 580a that individually accommodate the three light guide members 578 from the front. The decorative lens portion 580a of the top right decorative lens member 580 is formed in a shape following the light guide member 578, and covers the front surface and the upper and lower surfaces of the light guide member 578. On the front surface of each decorative lens portion 580a, the protrusions and recesses of a square pyramid base that protrude forward are arranged in a row on the left and right.

  The top right decoration lens member 580 extends from the right end of the top middle decoration member 576 of the door frame top unit 570 to the left end of the top right decoration portion 574f of the unit body 574. That is, the top right decorative lens member 580 decorates substantially the entire right side of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570. The top right decorative lens member 580 is illuminated and decorated by the LEDs 584a and 587a of the door frame top right decorative substrate 584 and the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 through the three light guide members 578.

  The top middle left decoration member 581 is attached to the front surface of the unit main body 574 from the front of the top left decoration lens member 579 between the left opening 574a on the front surface of the unit main body 574 and the top middle decoration member 576. The top middle left decoration member 581 is attached to the top left decoration lens member 579 so as to fill up the space between the three decoration lens portions 579a in the state where the top middle left decoration member 581 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570. The decorative lens member 579 projects forward from the front surface. The top middle left decoration member 581 is formed of a non-translucent member.

  The top middle right decoration member 582 is attached to the front surface of the unit body 574 from the front of the top right decoration lens member 580 between the right opening 574a on the front surface of the unit body 574 and the top middle decoration member 576. The top middle right decoration member 582 is attached to the door frame top unit 570 so as to fill up the space between the three decoration lens portions 580a of the top right decoration lens member 580 in the state of being assembled to the door frame top unit 570. The decoration lens member 580 projects forward from the front surface. The top middle right decoration member 582 is formed of a non-translucent member.

  The door frame top left decorative substrate 583 is attached inside the left side surface (top left decorative portion 574e) in the unit main body 574 with the surface on which the LED 583a is mounted facing rightward. On the door frame top left decorative substrate 583, an LED 583a is mounted at a position facing the left end faces of the three light guide members 578 mounted on the front surface on the left side of the center of the unit body 574 in the left-right direction (see FIG. 105). ). The three LEDs 583a can each independently emit light. By the LED 583a of the door frame top left decoration substrate 583, a portion of the top left decoration lens member 579 located in front of the opening 574a on the left side of the unit main body 574 is inserted through the straight portions 578a of the three light guide members 578. Can be decorated with luminous.

  The door frame top right decoration board 584 is attached inside the right side surface (top right decoration portion 574f) in the unit main body 574 with the surface on which the LED 584a is mounted facing left. On the door frame top right decorative substrate 584, an LED 584a is mounted at a position facing the right end faces of three light guide members 578 attached to the front surface on the right side of the center of the unit body 574 in the left-right direction (see FIG. 105). ). The three LEDs 584a can each independently emit light. The LED 584a of the door frame top right decorative substrate 584 allows the portion of the top right decorative lens member 580 located in front of the opening 574a on the right side of the unit main body 574 to be located via the straight portions 578a of the three light guide members 578. Can be decorated with luminous.

  The pair of substrate bases 585 are attached to the rear side of the unit main body 574 where the plurality of slits 574b are formed. The pair of substrate bases 585 are formed substantially symmetrically with each other. The substrate base 585 includes side walls that are substantially square in a side view and have sides that extend in the vertical and front and rear directions, a rear wall in a front view that extends outward in the left-right direction at right angles from the rear side of the side wall, and a front end of the upper side of the side wall. A line that connects the upper side of the side wall up to the middle is used as a hypotenuse and connects the upper side of the side wall and the upper side of the rear wall. And a lower wall of a right-angled triangle, and is formed into a triangular columnar box shape with an opening between upper and lower hypotenuses. The substrate base 585 is attached to the unit body 574 so that the open portion is closed by the unit body 574. To the board base 585, the door frame top middle left decoration board 586 or the door frame top middle right decoration board 587 is attached so that the open portion is closed.

  The door frame top middle left decoration substrate 586 is attached to the substrate base 585 so that the box-shaped open portion is closed from the front in the substrate base 585 attached to the left side of the left and right center of the unit main body 574. To be The door frame top middle left decoration board 586 is attached to the front surface of the board base 585, so that the front surface moves to the left and right so that the front surface moves forward toward the center of the unit body 574 in the left-right direction. It will be tilted. Accordingly, the door frame top middle left decoration substrate 586 is a surface of a portion where the three slits 574b on the left side of the left-right center of the unit main body 574 are formed when the door frame top unit 570 is assembled. Is almost parallel to.

  A plurality of LEDs 586a are mounted on the door frame top middle left decoration substrate 586 at positions corresponding to the three slits 574b of the unit body 574. As a result, the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 is in a state of being assembled to the door frame top unit 570, so that the plurality of LEDs 586a face forward from the three slits 574b on the left side of the center of the unit main body 574. The door frame top middle left decoration substrate 586 causes a plurality of LEDs 586a to emit light, thereby causing the area near the top middle decoration member 576 of the top left decoration lens member 579 to emit light through the arc portion 578b of the light guide member 578. be able to.

  The door frame top middle right decoration board 587 is attached to the board base 585 so as to close the box-shaped open portion from the front in the board base 585 that is attached to the right rear side from the left-right center of the unit main body 574. To be The door frame top middle right decoration board 587 is attached to the front surface of the board base 585, so that the front surface moves to the left and right so that the front surface moves forward toward the center of the unit body 574 in the left-right direction. It will be tilted. Accordingly, the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 is a surface of a portion where the three slits 574b on the right side of the left-right center of the unit main body 574 are formed in a state where the door frame top unit 570 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570. Is almost parallel to.

  A plurality of LEDs 587a are mounted on the door frame top middle right decoration board 587 at positions corresponding to the three slits 574b of the unit body 574. Accordingly, the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 is in a state of being assembled to the door frame top unit 570, so that the plurality of LEDs 587a face forward from the three slits 574b on the right side of the center of the unit main body 574. The door frame top middle-right decoration substrate 587 causes a plurality of LEDs 587a to emit light, thereby causing the portion of the top-right decoration lens member 580 near the top-middle decoration member 576 to emit light through the arc portion 578b of the light guide member 578. be able to.

  The pair of light shielding members 588 are attached to the front rear side of the unit main body 574 at a position between the door frame top middle left decoration substrate 586 and the door frame top middle right decoration substrate 587 and the unit main body 574. The pair of light blocking members 588 are made of a non-translucent member and are formed substantially symmetrically with each other. The light blocking member 588 is provided between the upper and lower LEDs 586a and 587a of the door frame top middle left decoration board 586 and the door frame top middle right decoration board 587 which are arranged in a row corresponding to the three slits 574b in the unit main body 574. It is partitioned. With this light-shielding member 588, light can be guided forward by the LEDs 586a and 587a located immediately after each light guide member 578, and the top left decoration lens member 579 and the top right decoration are provided. The decorative lens portions 579a and 580a of the lens member 580 can be favorably illuminated and decorated in a state where they are independent of each other.

  The door frame top unit relay board 589 is attached to the front surface of the central base 571. The door frame top unit relay board 589 includes a pair of upper speakers 573, a door frame top middle decoration board 577, a door frame top left decoration board 583, a door frame top right decoration board 584, a door frame top middle left decoration board 586, and a door. The connection between the right decoration board 587 at the top of the frame and the door body relay board of the door frame base unit 100 is relayed. The door frame top unit relay board 589 is connected to the door body relay board via a connection cable (not shown) provided in the door frame right side unit 550. The front side of the door frame top unit relay board 589 is covered with a relay board cover 590.

  The door frame top unit 570 is provided with a top middle decoration member 576 that projects forward at the center in the left-right direction, and the front surfaces on the left and right sides of the top middle decoration member 576 are curved so as to be hollowed back. Therefore, it is possible to make the player illusion that only the top middle decoration member 576 is largely projected forward, and it is possible to strongly attract the player's interest to the pachinko machine 1.

  In addition, the door frame top unit 570 includes a top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decorative lens member 580, which decorate the left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576 arranged in the center, and the left and right top middle decorative members 576. It is formed so as to extend from both sides to the top left decorative portion 574e and the top right decorative portion 574f formed at both left and right ends of the unit main body 574. Thereby, the upper part of the front surface of the door frame 3 can be entirely decorated by the door frame top unit 570.

  At this time, in the door frame top unit 570, the front surface is protected by the speaker cover 575 made of punching metal behind the left and right ends near where the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 are arranged. Since the speaker cover 575 faces the front from between the three decorative lens portions 579a and 580a that are vertically separated from each other, the upper left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 are provided. The sound output from the left and right upper speakers 573 can be heard by the player in a good state, and a good stereo sound can be enjoyed.

  Further, the door frame top unit 570 includes the door frame top left decoration substrate 583, the door frame top right decoration by the plurality of light guide members 578 provided on the rear side of the top left decoration lens member 579 and the top right decoration lens member 580. Light from the substrate 584, the door frame top middle left decoration substrate 586, and the door frame top middle right decoration substrate 587 can be guided to the top left decoration lens member 579 and the top right decoration lens member 580. 579 and the entire front surface of the top right decorative lens member 580 can be favorably illuminated and decorated. Therefore, the door frame top unit 570 can light and decorate the entire front surface of the upper part of the door frame 3 including the front of the left and right upper speakers 573.

[3-8. Effect of door frame]
The function and effect of the door frame 3 will be described. In the door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, a through-hole 111 penetrating the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 in the front and back is made larger in the vertical and horizontal directions than the conventional pachinko machine. The heights of the dish unit 320 and the door frame top unit 570 in the vertical direction are reduced according to the enlargement of the through-hole 111, and the widths of the door frame left side unit 540 and the door frame right side unit 550 in the left and right direction. Is small. This allows the front surface of the game board 5 (game area 5a) attached to the main body frame 4 to be viewed as broadly as possible by the player (front) through the through hole 111 (glass unit 190). The game board 5 has a large game area 5a.

  The door frame 3 has an effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) that has a large hemispherical operation button 410 in the center of the plate unit 320 that bulges forward in the left-right direction below the through-hole 111. The front surface of the lower halves (the portion below the upper plate 321) on the left and right sides of the effect operation unit 400 (the front surface of the plate front lower decorative portion 326c) is recessed so as to be hollowed back (the plate unit It is formed in a concave shape so that the front surfaces on the left and right sides of the performance operation unit 400 are located rearward rather than the straight line connecting the front ends of the left and right ends of 320 and the front ends of the left and right ends of the performance operation unit 400). ing. As a result, the effect operation unit 400 attached to the front surface at the center of the plate unit 320 in the left-right direction appears to project significantly forward, and thus the effect operation unit 400 is conspicuously highlighted to the player. Therefore, the effect operation unit 400 can be strongly focused.

  In the door frame 3, the effect operation unit 400 arranged on the front surface of the dish unit 320 below the through-hole 111 is tilted so that the large hemispherical transparent operation button 410 faces diagonally upward and forward. Since the player is attached in a state, when the player sits in front of the pachinko machine 1, the operation button 410 faces the player's head (face), and the player drops his or her line of sight to direct the effect operation unit 400. When viewed, the operation button 410 can be seen in a state close to the front, and the large and round operation button 410 can be visually recognized intensely, and the sense of expectation for the effect using the operation button 410 can be increased. At the same time, the effect image displayed on the door frame side effect display device 460 arranged in the transparent operation button 410 can be visually recognized in a good state, and the effect image is sufficiently comfortable. Maseru can be.

  Further, since the door frame 3 is provided with the operation button 410 having a large diameter which is substantially the same as the overall height of the dish unit 320 and bulging forward in a round shape, when operating the operation button 410, it is possible to move the hand by a short distance. Since any part of the operation button 410 can be touched, “fast pressing” of the operation button 410 can be performed relatively easily. In addition, since the operation button 410, which has a large diameter and bulges toward the front, is attached in a tilted state, not only can it be pressed from above like the operation button of a conventional pachinko machine, but it can also be pushed to the left or right. On the other hand, the operation can be favorably performed even from the front or from the front side, and the effect using the operation button 410 can be more enjoyed by the operation button 410 having good operability.

  Further, the door frame 3 is mounted with the rendering operation unit 400 by the dish unit 320 in a suspended state, and is provided with the vibration motor 424 for generating vibration in the lower portion of the rendering operation unit 400, so that the game is played. When the vibration motor 424 is rotated in accordance with the state to generate vibration, a strong vibration can be transmitted to the player's hand touching the upper portion of the operation button 410, which makes the player surprised. It is possible to make the production using 410 even more enjoyable.

  Furthermore, since the door frame 3 is provided with a large operation button 410 (rendering operation unit 400) over the entire height of the plate unit 320 in the center of the front surface of the plate unit 320, the upper plate 321 is larger than the conventional pachinko machine. Since the lower plate 322 underneath becomes inconspicuous, it is possible to make it easier for a player who is accustomed to the conventional pachinko machine to recognize that it is clearly different, and to appeal to the player. The pachinko machine 1 having high strength can be provided.

  In addition, the door frame 3 is formed so that the lower plate 322 wraps around the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 with respect to the lower plate opening 326d that is open on the left side of the effect operation unit 400 on the front surface of the plate unit 320. Therefore, the volume of the lower plate 322 can be increased with respect to the size of the lower plate opening 326d, and a sufficient number of game balls stored in the lower plate 322 can be secured. Further, since the rear part of the lower plate 322 wraps around to the rear side of the effect operation unit 400, when the player puts his left hand in the lower plate 322 or puts his finger on the lower plate opening 326d. Since it is difficult for the fingertips to touch the wall behind the lower plate 322, it is possible to make the player less likely to feel uncomfortable, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game, and to increase the size of the lower plate opening 326d. It can be recognized by touch that the lower tray 322 has a larger volume than that.

  Further, the door frame 3 has a lower plate ball supply port 323c through which the game balls from the upper plate 321 are discharged to the lower plate 322 and a lower plate for pulling out the game balls of the lower plate 322 to a dollar box or the like below the plate unit 320. The countersunk hole 322a is linearly arranged in the front-rear direction, and is arranged on the right outer side of the lower plate opening 326d (right side of the left end of the frame unit 415 of the effect operation unit 400) in a front view. That is, the lower dish ball supply port 323c and the lower dish ball removal hole 322a are connected to the effect operation unit 400, the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a (the right outer side of the lower plate opening 326d) in the plate unit cover 326, and the front end of the lower plate cover 340. Since it is arranged on the rear side such as the side, etc., the lower plate ball supply port 323c and the lower plate ball removal hole 322a cannot be seen from the player side, and the external appearance of the plate unit 320 (pachinko machine 1) can be refreshed, The appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved.

  Further, since the door frame 3 has the lower dish ball removal hole 322a in the lower dish 322 below (in front of) the lower dish ball supply port 323c, the lower plate bowl removal hole 322a is opened. Then, the game balls discharged from the upper plate 321 or the like to the lower plate 322 are immediately discharged from the lower plate ball removal hole 322a to the lower dollar box or the like as soon as they enter the lower plate 322. At this time, since the player side cannot see the lower dish ball supply port 323c and the lower dish ball removal hole 322a, the flow of the game balls discharged from the upper dish 321 and the like through the lower dish 322 to the dollar box is also possible. I can't see. As a result, it is possible to give the player the illusion that the game balls of the upper plate 321 and the game balls etc. paid out from the payout device 830 when the upper plate 321 is full are directly discharged to the dollar box. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel the annoyance of the game ball passing through the lower plate 322, and to depress the player from devoting his / her attention to the game (game ball driving operation, effect image, etc.). it can.

  In addition, the door frame 3 has a lower dish ball removal hole 322a at a position closer to the front left of the lower dish ball supply port 323c in the lower dish 322, and the lower plate 322 on the right side of the lower dish ball removal hole 322a is raised. Since the raised wall portion is obliquely curved so as to face the direction of the lower dish ball removal hole 322a, the game ball supplied to the lower dish 322 from the lower dish ball supply port 323c is directly changed to the lower dish ball. It can be guided to the hole 322a, or can be indirectly guided to the lower dish ball hole 322a by being reflected by the wall portion on the right side. As a result, in a state where the lower dish ball removal hole 322a is left open, the game balls supplied to the lower dish 322 from the lower dish ball supply port 323c are areas on the left side of the lower dish ball removal hole 322a in the lower dish 322. Since it can be discharged downward from the lower plate ball removal hole 322a without entering the (lower plate first area A1), the lower plate 322 of the lower plate 322 can be seen without showing the game balls circulating in the lower plate 322 to the player. The game ball can be discharged downward (dollar box), and the same effect as the above can be obtained.

  Further, the door frame 3 includes a lower plate opening 326d of the plate unit cover 326, which the lower plate 322 faces forward, between the effect operation unit attachment 326a (effect operation unit 400) and the lower speaker opening 326e. Therefore, even if the player puts his / her hand on the lower plate opening 326d or puts his / her hand on the lower plate 322, the front of the lower speaker opening 326e is not blocked by the player's hand, so the main body frame 4 The sound from the speaker 921 of the board unit 900 can be favorably output to the front, and the sound of the pachinko machine 1 can be enjoyed. Further, when the player puts his / her hand into or comes close to the lower plate 322, the player can tactilely feel the vibration due to the deep bass sound from the speaker 921 outputted forward from the lower speaker port 326e. It is possible to entertain people and suppress a decline in interest.

  Further, since the door frame 3 is provided with a door frame right side unit 550 that is largely plate-shaped and protrudes forward from the right side of the through-hole 111, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the island facility of the game hall, the door Since the frame right side unit 550 can exert an effect like a partition between the pachinko machine adjacent to the right side, the player playing the pachinko machine 1 can play in a private room. It is possible to make the player feel as if he / she is playing, and to let the other players around play the game in a relaxed atmosphere.

  Further, the door frame 3 is a plate-like, and the front end and both left and right sides of the door frame right side unit 550, which largely projects to the front, can be light-embellished, so that the pachinko machine 1 is installed in a lined gaming hall. Even if the pachinko machine 1 is not located in front of the pachinko machine 1, the presence of the pachinko machine 1 can be notified even from a distance such as a lateral direction along the island facility, and the pachinko machine has a high appealing power to the player. It can be machine 1.

  Further, the door frame 3 includes a top middle decoration member 576 that projects forward at the center in the left-right direction in the door frame top unit 570 on the upper side of the through hole 111, and the front surfaces on both left and right sides of the top middle decoration member 576 are A shape that is recessed so as to be hollowed backward (a middle middle decoration member in the door frame top unit 570 is more than a straight line connecting the front ends of the left and right ends of the door frame top unit 570 and the front ends of the left and right ends of the top middle decoration member 576. The front surface on both left and right sides of 576 is formed in a concave shape so that it is located rearward. As a result, since only the top middle decoration member 576 of the door frame top unit 570 seems to be largely projected forward, the top middle decoration member 576 can be conspicuously emphasized to the player, The middle decoration member 576 can be strongly noticed.

  By the way, a pair of upper speakers spaced apart from each other on the left and right are provided on the upper part of the door frame in the conventional pachinko machine, and two upper speakers are conspicuous. On the other hand, in the door frame 3 of the present embodiment, in the door frame top unit 570 attached to the upper side of the through-hole 111, a pair of upper parts whose front surfaces are protected by speaker covers 575 made of punching metal at both left and right ends. In addition to the speaker 573, a top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decorative lens member 580 that extend from the left and right sides of the central top middle decorative member 576 to the both ends in the left and right direction in front of the speaker cover 575 are provided. The entire front surface of the left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 can be decorated with light emission. As a result, the upper part of the front surface of the door frame 3 can be entirely decorated, so that the pair of upper speakers 573 are inconspicuous in the upper part of the door frame 3, and the decoration distinct from the conventional pachinko machine is applied. It is possible to make the player recognize at a glance that the pachinko machine 1 is highly appealing to the player, and the pair of upper speakers 573 allows the player to enjoy high-quality stereo sound. it can.

  As described above, in the door frame 3 of the present embodiment, the effect operation unit 400 attached to the dish unit 320 and the top middle decoration member 576 of the door frame top unit 570 are provided below and above the through hole 111. , Each of which has a large protrusion to the front at the center in the left-right direction, so that it is possible to show the player a uniform decoration on the top and bottom where a virtual line passing through the center of the left-right direction is conspicuous, and with a sophisticated decoration The pachinko machine 1 can be made more prominent than other pachinko machines and has a high appeal.

  Moreover, since the door frame 3 projects the front middle decoration member 576 and the effect operation unit 400 of the door frame top unit 570 arranged vertically at the center in the left-right direction, the middle middle decoration member 576. When the effect operation unit 400 is decorated with light, the player can see a light emitting line extending vertically in the center of the front surface of the door frame 3 in the left-right direction, and the player's line of sight is arranged in the center of the left-right direction. It can be guided to the operation button 410 or the like of the effect operation unit 400.

[4. Overall structure of main frame]
The main body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 106 to 109. FIG. 106 is a perspective view of the main body frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 107 is a perspective view of the main body frame as seen from the rear. FIG. 108 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main member and seen from the front, and FIG. 109 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main member and seen from the rear. As shown in the figure, the main body frame 4 of the present embodiment is formed in a box shape whose front is open, and the game board 5 is detachably accommodated inside. The main body frame 4 is openably and closably attached to the frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island facility of the game hall above and below the front end on the left side of the front side, and the door frame 3 is closed so that the opened front side is closed. It can be opened and closed.

  The main body frame 4 of the present embodiment has a frame-shaped main body frame base 600, a part of which can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the main body frame base 600. It is attached to both the upper and lower ends on the left side in front view, and is rotatably attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2, and the door frame side upper hinge member 140 of the door frame 3 and the door frame. The main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 to which the lower side hinge members 150 are respectively rotatably attached are provided, and the reinforcement frame 660 attached to the front side left side surface of the main body frame base 600. .

  Further, the main body frame 4 is attached to the lower front surface of the main body frame base 600, and a ball launching device 680 for driving a game ball into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and a right side surface of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front. And a locking unit 700 for locking the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4, and between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and the main frame base 600 mounted on the rear side along the upper side and the left side in a front view. An inverted L-shaped payout unit 800 for paying out game balls to the player side, a substrate unit 900 attached to the lower rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and an openable / closable rear end of the main body frame base 600. A back cover 980 that covers the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame base 600 is provided.

[4-1. Body frame base]
The main body frame base 600 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment is formed in a vertically extending rectangular shape in a front view, as shown in FIGS. 106 to 109. This main body frame base 600 penetrates in the front and rear in a range of a height of about 3/4 from the position slightly lower than the upper end, and the game board insertion port 601 into which the game board 5 is inserted from the front side, and the game. The game board placing portion 602 which forms the lower side of the board insertion opening 601 and on which the game board 5 is placed, and the left and right ends of the lower end of the game board 5 which protrude upward from the center in the left-right direction of the game board placing portion 602. And a game board restriction unit 603 that restricts the backward movement.

  Further, the main body frame base 600 is a launching device mounting portion 604 for mounting the ball launching device 680 formed on the lower right side of the game board mounting portion 602 in a front view, and a right side of the launching device mounting portion 604 in a front view. A cylinder insertion opening 605 that penetrates the front and rear and through which the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 is inserted, and a front and rear penetrating front and rear from the left and right center of the game board mounting portion 602 in the front view. A connection opening 606 for facing the frame relay board 911 forward, and a circular shape penetrating forward and backward on the lower left side in a front view of the game board placing portion 602 so as to face the speaker unit 920 in the board unit 900 forward. And a speaker opening 607.

  Furthermore, the main body frame base 600 extends rearward in a plate shape from the right side of the game board insertion opening 601 in front view, the locking unit 700 is attached to the right side surface, and the back cover 980 is rotatable at the rear end. A rear extension 608 is attached. Further, the main body frame base 600 of the main body frame 4 is formed in the vicinity of the upper and lower end portions on the rear surface at the left end in front view, and is attached to the upper hinge for attaching the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640. A portion 609 and a lower hinge attachment portion 610 are provided.

  Further, the main body frame base 600 is rotatably attached to an opening cover 615 that closes the connection opening 606 so as to be openable and closable, and a position slightly lower than the left and right center of the game board mounting portion 602 in a front view. , A game board lock member 616 capable of restricting forward movement of the game board 5 inserted through the game board insertion port 601.

[4-2. Body frame upper hinge member and body frame lower hinge member]
The main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 106 to 109. The main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 are attached to the upper hinge mounting portion 609 and the lower hinge mounting portion 610 of the main body frame base 600.

  The main body frame side upper hinge member 620 includes an upper hinge main body 621 in which a rear portion of a horizontally extending flat plate member is bent downward in an L shape, and a columnar shape protruding upward from a front end of the upper hinge main body 621. A main frame upper hinge pin 622 pivotally supported by the cage outer frame upper hinge member 60, and a main frame upper hinge pin 622 penetrates the upper hinge main body 621 on the left side in a front view to pivotally support the door frame upper hinge member 140. And an upper hinge hole 623 for the door frame for. The body frame side upper hinge member 620 is attached to the upper hinge attachment portion 609 of the body frame base 600 at a portion of the upper hinge body 621 that is bent downward.

  The main body frame side lower hinge member 640 penetrates vertically at a front end of the lower hinge first main body 641 and a lower hinge first main body 641 in which a rear portion of a horizontally extending flat plate member is bent upward in an L shape. An outer frame lower hinge hole (not shown) axially supported by the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 and a horizontally extending flat plate disposed above the lower hinge first main body 641. Hinge second main body 643 in which the rear portion of the plate-like plate member is bent upward in an L shape, and a lower hinge member 150 of the door frame 3 that penetrates vertically at the front end of the lower hinge second main body 643. The door frame hinge hole 644 for pivotally supporting the door frame and the door frame hinge hole 644 in the horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge second main body 643 extend upward from the left end at the rear side. A restriction piece 645 for restricting the rotation range of the .

  The lower hinge second main body 643 has a horizontally extended portion with a certain distance above the horizontally extended portion of the lower hinge first main body 641 and a portion bent upward is a lower hinge first body. The main body 641 is in contact with the front surface of the upwardly bent portion. The main body frame side lower hinge member 640 is attached to the lower hinge attaching portion 610 of the main body frame base 600 at a portion where the lower hinge first main body 641 and the lower hinge second main body 643 are bent upward.

[4-3. Reinforcement frame]
The reinforcing frame 660 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 106 to 109. The reinforcing frame 660 is attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base 600. The reinforcing frame 660 has a U-shaped cross-section in a plan view whose right side is open, and extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape. Further, in the reinforcing frame 660, on the rear side of the portion extending to the right from the front end, the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion opening 601 of the main body frame base 600 is restricted from moving forward and vertically. A pair of left positioning members 661 are attached vertically separated from each other.

  The reinforcement frame 660 can reinforce the hinge side (left side in front view) of the main body frame base 600, and the inside of the main body frame 4 (game board 5) is passed from the left side between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. It is possible to prevent unauthorized insertion of tools.

[4-4. Ball launcher]
The ball launching device 680 of the main body frame 4 in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 106, 108 and 109. The ball launching device 680 is a device for driving the game balls stored in the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 into the game area 5a of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4. In this ball launching device 680, the driving strength of the game ball changes according to the turning angle of the handle 302 of the handle unit 300 at the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3.

  The ball launching device 680 is attached to the launching device mounting portion 604 of the main body frame base 600, and a flat plate-shaped launching base 681. A firing solenoid 682 consisting of a rotary solenoid penetrating and extending forward, a batting mallet 683 having a base end attached to a rotating shaft of the firing solenoid 682, and a diagonally upward leftward extension from the vicinity of the tip of the batting mallet 683. It is equipped with a launch rail 684 which is attached to the front surface of the launch base 681 and on which a game ball can roll.

  In this ball launching device 680, game balls are supplied from the ball feeding unit 250 of the door frame 3 to the upper right end of the launch rail 684, and the game balls are supplied to the upper right end of the launch rail 684. Then, when the handle 302 is rotated, the firing solenoid 682 is driven with a strength according to the rotation operation angle, and the game ball is hit by the hitting mallet 683. Then, the game ball hit by the hitting mallet 683 is guided into the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 through the launch rail 684 and is driven into the game area 5a.

  In addition, when the hit game ball does not reach within the game area 5a due to the hitting strength of the game ball or the like, between the launch rail 684 and the game board 5 (the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002). Then, it falls to the foul ball receiving port 275 of the foul cover unit 270 below, passes through the foul cover unit 270, and is discharged to the lower tray 322.

[4-5. Locking unit]
The locking unit 700 of the main body frame 4 in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 106 to 109. The locking unit 700 of this embodiment is attached to the main body frame base 600 of the main body frame 4, and can lock the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3, and the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2. The locking unit 700 is attached to the right side surface of the rearward extension portion 608 of the main body frame base 600 and extends vertically, and a plurality of unit bases 701 projecting forward from the unit base 701 and capable of engaging with the door frame 3. A door frame hook 702, a plurality of outer frame hooks 703 projecting rearward from the unit base 701 and capable of engaging with the outer frame 2, and a columnar shape protruding forward from the lower portion of the unit base 701, A protrusion protrudes from the front end portion in the direction perpendicular to the axis, and the rotation of the cylinder lock 211 is transmitted by engaging with the rotation transmission member 212 of the opening / closing cylinder unit 210 of the door frame 3, and the door is rotated according to the rotation direction of the key. A key cylinder 710 for unlocking the lock of either the frame hook 702 or the outer frame hook 703.

[4-6. Dispensing unit]
The payout unit 800 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 110 to 128. FIG. 110 is a perspective view of the payout unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 111 is a perspective view of the payout unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 112 is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and seen from the front, and FIG. 113 is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and seen from the back. Further, FIG. 114A is a perspective view of the ball guiding unit of the payout unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 114B is a perspective view of the ball guiding unit as seen from the rear. Further, FIG. 115 is an exploded perspective view of the ball guiding unit. FIG. 116 (a) is a perspective view of the dispensing device of the dispensing unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 116 (b) is a perspective view of the dispensing device as seen from the rear. Further, FIG. 117 is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing device as disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 118 is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing device as disassembled and seen from the rear. Further, FIG. 119 (a) is a front view of the dispensing device, and FIG. 119 (b) is a sectional view taken along line S-S in FIG. FIG. 120 (a) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the ball removing passage is closed by the ball removing movable piece in the dispensing device, and FIG. 120 (b) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the ball removing passage is opened by the ball removing movable piece. Is.

  Further, FIG. 121 (a) is a perspective view of the upper full-ball path unit in the payout unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 121 (b) is a perspective view of the upper full-ball path unit as seen from the rear. Also, FIG. 122 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the upper tank bulb path unit disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 122 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the upper tank bulb path unit disassembled and seen from the rear. is there. Further, FIG. 123 (a) is a perspective view of the lower full-ball path unit in the payout unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 123 (b) is a perspective view of the lower full-ball path unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 124 is an exploded perspective view of the lower full-ball-ball path unit disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 125 is an exploded perspective view of the lower full-ball path unit disassembled and seen from the rear. Further, FIG. 126 (a) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the taxiway opening / closing door is closed in the lower tank ball path unit, and FIG. 126 (b) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the taxiway opening / closing door is open. . Further, FIG. 127 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the foul cover unit of the door frame and the lower full ball path unit. FIG. 128 is an explanatory diagram showing a flow of gaming balls in the payout unit.

  As shown in FIG. 110, FIG. 111, etc., the payout unit 800 of the present embodiment is attached to an upper portion of the payout unit base 801 and an inverted L-shaped payout unit base 801 that is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600. It is attached to the payout unit base 801 below the ball tank 802, which stores game balls supplied from an island facility in a game hall (not shown) that extends to the left and right and is opened upward. It is provided with a tank rail 803 extending left and right for guiding the game ball in the cage ball tank 802 to the left when viewed from the front. In the tank rail 803, while guiding the game balls to the left, they are aligned in two rows in the front and rear by the ball leveling member 804 (see FIG. 128) that is swingably suspended from above.

  Further, the payout unit 800 is attached to the rear surface of the upper left side in the front view of the payout unit base 801, and guides the game ball from the tank rail 803 downward in a meandering manner, and below the ball guide unit 820. The payout device 830 that is detachably attached from the payout unit base 801 and pays out the game balls guided by the ball guiding unit 820 one by one based on an instruction from the payout control board 951 housed in the payout control board box 950. And are equipped with. From the tank rail 803 to the payout device 830, the game balls are distributed in two rows, and from the payout device 830, the game balls are paid out one by one.

  Further, the payout unit 800 is attached to the rear surface of the payout unit base 801, guides the game balls paid out by the payout device 830 downward, and according to the stored state of the game balls in the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320. Is discharged from either the normal discharge port 850d or the full tank discharge port 850e, and the normal discharge port 850d of the upper full tank ball route unit 850 attached to the lower end of the dispensing unit base 801. Ordinary guide path 861 that guides the game ball forward to the through ball passage 273 of the door frame 3 from the front end, and guides the game ball discharged from the full tank discharge port 850e to the front side of the door frame 3 The front end openings of the full tank guide path 862 and the normal guide path 861 and the full tank guide path 862 that guide the tank guide port 274 to the main body frame And a, a lower full sphere path unit 860 having a taxiway door 863 to be opened or closed in response to opening and closing of the door frame 3 against.

[4-6a. Sphere guidance unit]
The ball guiding unit 820 of the payout unit 800 in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 114 and 115. The ball guiding unit 820 includes a box-shaped front case 821 that extends vertically and has an open rear side, a box-shaped rear case 822 that is attached to the rear side of the front case 821, and has a front side open. 821 and the rear case 822, which are mounted between the front case 821 and the rear case 822, and partition the front case 821 and the rear case 822, and a partition plate 823 that penetrates through the partition plate 823 and has both front and rear ends in the front case 821 and the rear case 822. An attached rod-shaped shaft member 824, and a pair of movable piece member front 825 and movable piece member rear rotatably attached by the shaft member 824 and arranged in the front case 821 and the rear case 822, respectively. 826 and a out-of-ball detection sensor 827 mounted in the front case 821 and capable of detecting the rotational positions of the pair of movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826. To have.

  The front case 821 has a ball guide inlet 821a that allows the game balls to pass through at the upper portion of the right side surface, and a ball guide outlet that allows the game balls to pass through at a position to the right of the center of the bottom surface in the left-right direction. 821b, a ball guide inlet 821a and a ball guide outlet 821b are connected to each other, and a guide passage 821c through which a game ball can flow is provided. The guide passage 821c extends obliquely from the ball guide inlet 821a to the vicinity of the left end at a small angle with respect to the horizontal, and a center of the height from the guide portion 821d along the left side of the front case 821. It is composed of a detection portion 821e that extends straight downward to the vicinity and a meandering portion 821f that extends in a meandering shape from the detection portion 821e in the left and right widths of the front case 821. Further, the front case 821 is provided with a cutout portion 821g on the wall on the right side in front view of the detection portion 821e in the guide passage 821c.

  The rear case 822 has a ball guide entrance 822a that is open to allow the game balls to pass through in the upper portion of the right side surface, and a ball guide exit that is open to allow the game balls to pass at a position to the right of the center of the bottom surface in the left-right direction. 822b, a ball guide inlet 822a and a ball guide outlet 822b are connected to each other, and a guide passage 822c through which a game ball can flow is provided. The guiding passage 822c extends obliquely from the ball guiding inlet 822a to the vicinity of the left end at a small angle with respect to the horizontal, and a center of the height from the guiding portion 822d along the left side of the rear case 822. It is composed of a detecting portion 822e that extends straight downward to the vicinity, and a meandering portion 822f that extends in a meandering shape from the detecting portion 822e to the left and right widths of the rear case 822. Further, the rear case 822 is provided with a cutout portion 822g on the wall on the right side in front view of the detection portion 822e in the guide passage 822c.

  The rear case 822 is formed substantially symmetrically to the left and right with respect to the front case 821, and is formed so that the guide passage 821c and the guide passage 822c are aligned in the front-rear direction when assembled in the ball guide unit 820. There is.

  The shaft member 824 has front and rear ends attached to positions below the upper ends of the cutouts 821g and 822g in the front case 821 and the rear case 822 and outside the guide passages 821c and 822c.

  The movable piece member front 825 includes a vertically movable flat plate-shaped movable piece 825a, a shaft hole 825b which penetrates the front and rear at the upper end of the right side surface of the movable piece 825a, and through which the shaft member 824 is inserted, and the movable piece 825a. An extending portion 825c extending rightward from the upper end of the movable piece 825a at a right angle to the right surface of the movable piece 825a, connecting the extending portion 825c and the movable piece 825a, and extending in a fan shape around the shaft hole 825b. The connecting portion 825d, the weight attaching portion 825e having a through hole that protrudes outward from the upper portion of the extending portion 825c and the vicinity of the center of the outer periphery of the connecting portion 825d, and has a through hole that penetrates back and forth, and the extending portion 825c. It extends outward from the right end in a flat plate shape and extends outward from a position near the movable piece 825a on the outer periphery of the connecting portion 825d and the detection piece 825f that can be detected by the out-of-ball detection sensor 827. Is provided with a stopper piece 825g, the.

  When the shaft member 824 is passed through the shaft hole 825b, the movable piece member front 825 is rotated by its own weight so that the weight attaching portion 825e protruding from the outer periphery of the connecting portion 825d is positioned immediately below the shaft hole 825b. Then, the movable piece 825a extends obliquely downward from the portion of the shaft hole 825b. Therefore, in a state where the ball guiding unit 820 is assembled, the connecting portion 825d is inserted into the notch portion 821g of the front case 821, the lower end of the movable piece 825a is projected into the guiding passage 821c, and the stopper piece 825g is The outer wall of the guide passage 821c (detection unit 821e) is in contact with the outer wall. The stopper piece 825g comes into contact with the outer wall of the guide passage 821c, so that the lower end of the movable piece 825a is restricted from further rotating in the direction protruding into the guide passage 821c (left direction in front view). Further, when the lower end of the movable piece 825a is rotated in the direction of approaching the wall of the guide passage 821c (right direction in front view), the movable piece member front 825 causes the left side surface of the movable piece 825a to move toward the guide passage 821c. It matches the inside. In this state, the detection piece 825f in front of the movable piece member 825 is in a non-detection state with respect to the out-of-ball detection sensor 827. That is, when there is a game ball in the guide passage 821c, the out-of-ball detection sensor 827 becomes non-detection.

  The movable piece member rear 826 includes a vertically movable flat plate-shaped movable piece 826a, a shaft hole 826b through which the shaft member 824 is inserted and which penetrates forward and backward at the upper end of the right side surface of the movable piece 826a, and the movable piece 826a. An extending portion 826c extending rightward from the upper end of the movable piece 826a at right angles to the right surface of the movable piece 826a, the extending portion 826c and the movable piece 826a are connected to each other, and extends in a fan shape around the shaft hole 826b. The connecting portion 826d, the weight attaching portion 826e having a through hole that protrudes outward from the upper part of the extending portion 826c and the vicinity of the center of the outer periphery of the connecting portion 826d, and has a through hole penetrating forward and backward, and the extending portion 826c. It extends outward from the right end in a flat plate shape and extends outward in a flat plate shape from a detection piece 826f that can be detected by the out-of-ball detection sensor 827 and a position near the movable piece 826a on the outer periphery of the connecting portion 826d. Is provided with a stopper piece 826g, the.

  When the shaft member 824 is passed through the shaft hole 826b, the movable piece member rear 826 is rotated by its own weight so that the weight attaching portion 826e protruding from the outer periphery of the connecting portion 826d is located immediately below the shaft hole 826b. Then, the movable piece 826a extends obliquely downward from the portion of the shaft hole 826b. Therefore, in the state where the ball guiding unit 820 is assembled, the connecting portion 826d is inserted into the notch portion 822g of the rear case 822, the lower end of the movable piece 826a is projected into the guiding passage 822c, and the stopper piece 826g is The state is in contact with the outer wall of the guide passage 822c (detection unit 822e). The stopper piece 826g comes into contact with the outer wall of the guide passage 822c, so that the lower end of the movable piece 826a is restricted from further rotating in the direction of protruding into the guide passage 822c (left direction in front view). In addition, when the lower end of the movable piece 826a is rotated in the direction of approaching the wall of the guide passage 822c (right direction in front view), the movable piece member rear 826 causes the left side surface of the movable piece 826a to move to the guide passage 822c. It matches the inside. In this state, the detection piece 826f of the movable piece member rear 826 is not detected by the out-of-ball detection sensor 827. That is, when there is a game ball in the guide passage 822c, the out-of-ball detection sensor 827 becomes non-detection.

  The ball guiding unit 820 of the present embodiment is supplied in a state where a plurality of game balls are lined up in a row by the tank rail 803, and a plurality of game balls are lined up in a row. By 822, it is possible to guide the dispensing device 830 below in a two-row state (see FIG. 128). At this time, since the front case 821 and the rear case 822 are partitioned by the partition plate 823, the game balls flowing through the respective guide passages 821c and 822c do not interfere with each other and can flow well. You can

  Further, when the game sphere flows through the guide passages 821c and 822c of the ball guiding unit 820, the game sphere abuts the movable pieces 825a and 826a of the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826, and the movable pieces 825a and 826a are formed. The front movable piece member 825 and the rear movable piece member 826 rotate in a direction coinciding with the wall surfaces of the guide passages 821c and 822c. As a result, the detection pieces 825f and 826f of the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826 are in a non-detection state with respect to the out-of-ball detection sensor 827, and it is understood that there is a game ball in the guide passages 821c and 822c.

  When the payout device 830 on the downstream side of the ball guiding unit 820 pays out the game balls or the like, the game balls in the guide passages 821c and 822c will flow downstream. When the game ball flows through the guide passages 821c and 822c, the momentum of the game ball flowing through the introduction parts 821d and 822d becomes strong, and the game ball flowing through the introduction parts 821d and 822d is a movable piece above the detection parts 821e and 822e. It bounces back to the side of 825a, 826a and comes into contact with the movable pieces 825a, 826a. Since the movable pieces 825a and 826a vibrate due to the abutment of the game ball, the vibration sandwiches or intrudes between the movable pieces 825a and 826a and the cutouts 821g and 822g of the guide passages 821c and 822c. Dirt, dust, and the like that have accumulated can be removed, and the movable pieces 825a and 826a can satisfactorily rotate due to their own weight and the like.

  Further, the ball guiding unit 820 is configured to detect the game balls circulating in the respective guiding passages 821c and 822c by the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826, respectively, and the movable piece member front 825 and Since each of the detection pieces 825f and 826f of the movable piece member rear 826 is detected by the single out-of-ball detection sensor 827, when there is no game ball in any of the guide passages 821c and 822c, the movable piece member front The movable pieces 825a and 826a of 825 or the movable piece member rear 826 rotate so as to project into the guide passages 821c and 822c, and the detection pieces 825f and 826f on the side where the game ball has disappeared are detected by the out-of-ball detection sensor 827. It Therefore, it is possible to detect the running out of the game ball early, so that the game ball can be quickly replenished, and by shortening the time when the game is interrupted as much as possible, the interest of the player is reduced. Can be suppressed.

  Further, by screwing metal screws as weights to the weight attaching portions 825e and 826e of the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826, the weights of the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826 and the weight of the weight are set. With the above, the lower ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a can be easily rotated in the directions projecting into the guide passages 821c and 822c. Further, since the upper ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a are rotatably attached outside the guide passages 821c and 822c so that the lower ends thereof project into the guide passages 821c and 822c, the dust inside the guide passages 821c and 822c is reduced. No dust or the like adheres to the upper and lower ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a. Therefore, even if the movable pieces 825a, 826a rotate toward the walls of the guide passages 821c, 822c, dust, dust, etc. do not get caught between the lower ends of the movable pieces 825a, 826a and the walls, and therefore the self-weight etc. With this, it is possible to satisfactorily rotate, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a problem in which the movable pieces 825a and 826a do not rotate.

  As described above, the ball guiding unit 820 of the present embodiment has movable ends 825a and 826a of the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826 whose lower end side projects into the guide passages 821c and 822c through which the game balls flow due to their own weight. By attaching a weight made of a metal screw to the weight attaching portions 825e and 826e on the opposite side of the surface contacting the game ball, the movable piece is moved by the weight of the weight and the weight of the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826. The lower ends of the 825a and 826a can be easily rotated (projected) into the guide passages 821c and 822c. Further, since the upper ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a are rotatably attached outside the guide passages 821c and 822c so that the lower ends thereof project into the guide passages 821c and 822c, the dust inside the guide passages 821c and 822c is reduced. No dust or the like adheres to the upper and lower ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a. Therefore, even if the movable pieces 825a, 826a rotate toward the walls of the guide passages 821c, 822c, dust, dust, etc. do not get caught between the lower ends of the movable pieces 825a, 826a and the walls, and therefore the self-weight etc. This allows the movable pieces 825a and 826a (the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826) to be prevented from rotating.

  Further, since the metal screw as the weight is screwed into the weight attaching portions 825e and 826e formed as the through holes to be attached, even if the front movable piece member 825 and the movable piece member rear 826 are frequently rotated, the weight is The movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826 (weight attachment portions 825e, 826e) do not come off, and the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826 can be maintained in a good state for a long period of time. . In addition, the weight can be easily attached to the front movable piece member 825 and the rear movable piece member 826 by simply screwing the metal screw into the weight attachment portions 825e and 826e, thus simplifying the attachment work of the weight. Therefore, the cost for assembling the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

  Further, in the guide passages 821c and 822c, since the movable pieces 825a and 826a are provided with the introduction portions 821d and 822d for guiding the game ball toward the movable pieces 825a and 826a, on the upstream side of the site where the movable pieces 825a and 826a project inside. Since the game ball abuts the movable pieces 825a and 826a by flowing the game balls in the guide passages 821c and 822c, the movable pieces 825a and 826a can be vibrated by the contact of the game balls. Therefore, the vibrations of the movable pieces 825a and 826a can remove dust, dust, and the like that are sandwiched between the movable pieces 825a and 826a and the walls of the guide passages 821c and 822c, and that are invaded. The front one piece member 825 and the rear one piece member 826 can be rotated favorably.

  Therefore, since the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826 can be rotated favorably, the state (presence or absence) of the game ball in the guide passages 821c and 822c can be reliably detected, and the game ball It is possible to suppress the occurrence of defects due to erroneous detection and the like. In addition, even if the game ball supplied to the payout device 830 disappears from the guide passages 821c and 822c, the presence or absence of the guide passages 821c and 822c can be reliably detected through the movable pieces 825a and 826a, so that it can be promptly detected. The game balls can be replenished to the player, and the time when the game is interrupted can be shortened as much as possible, so that the interest of the player can be prevented from decreasing.

[4-6b. Dispensing device]
The payout device 830 of the payout unit 800 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 116 to 120. The payout device 830 has a box-like shape with an open rear side, and a payout opening 831a in which a game ball can pass in the center of the upper surface in the left-right direction and a game ball in the bottom surface that allows the game ball to pass near the left end in front view. A payout exit 831b, a ball removal exit 831c in which a game ball is open in the vicinity of the right end in a front view on the bottom surface, and a payout passage 831d that connects the payout entrance 831a and the payout exit 831b and allows the game ball to flow. , And a front box 831 that branches from the middle of the payout passage 831d and communicates with the ball outlet 831c and has a ball passage 831e through which game balls can flow, and is attached to the rear side of the front box 831. In the box shape with the front side open, the payout opening 832a in which the game ball is opened in the left-right center on the upper surface so that the game ball can pass, and the game ball is near the left end in front view on the bottom surface. The payout outlet 832b that is openable excessively, the ball removal outlet 832c that is open to allow the game balls to pass near the right end in front view on the bottom surface, and the payout inlet 832a and the payout outlet 832b are in communication with each other and the game balls are distributed. The rear box 832 is provided with a possible payout passage 832d and a payout passage 832d that branches from the middle of the payout passage 832d and communicates with the ball outlet 832c and has a ball passage 832e through which a game ball can flow.

  Further, the dispensing device 830 is attached to the front side of the front box 831 and has a shallow box-shaped front cover 833 whose rear side is open, and the rotation shaft which is attached to the front box 831 and penetrates the front box 831. And a drive gear 835 attached to the rotation shaft of the delivery motor 834, and the drive gear 835 meshes with each other so that the front box 831 and the front cover 833 can rotate. A spur gear-shaped intermediate gear 836 attached to the intermediate gear 836, a driven gear 837 meshing with the intermediate gear 836, and a driven gear 837 rotatably passing therethrough, the front end of which is attached to the front cover 833 and A shaft member 838 having an end penetrating the front box 831 and attached to the rear box 832, and a shaft member 838 penetrating the shaft member 838 and rotatably attached, and the front box 831 and the rear box 832 A payout blade 839 disposed in the passages 831d and 832d and rotating integrally with the driven gear 837, and a blade rotation detection sensor 840 mounted between the front box 831 and the rear box 832 to detect the rotation of the payout blade 839. And are equipped with.

  Further, the dispensing device 830 is mounted between the front box 831 and the rear box 832, and has a flat partition plate 841 for partitioning the dispensing passage 831d of the front box 831 and the dispensing passage 832d of the rear box 832, and the front box 831. And a rear box 832, which is attached between the payout vane 839 and the payout detection sensor 842 for detecting a game ball discharged from the payout exits 831b and 832b, and the payout passages 831d and 832d and the ball removal passage. 831e and 832e are rotatably attached by a front box 831 and a rear box 832 at a branching point, and a ball removing movable piece 843 that can close the ball removing passages 831e and 832e and the front box 831 and the rear box 831. A ball-removing lever 844, which is mounted on the upper right side surface of the box 832 so as to be slidable up and down, and which makes the ball-removing movable piece 843 rotatable or non-rotatable. It is equipped with a.

  The payout passage 831d of the front box 831 extends obliquely to the lower right in a front view from the payout entrance 831a toward the ball exit 831c, and is downward at a height of about ⅓ of the total height of the front box 831. Bends so as to extend vertically, and bends so as to extend substantially horizontally to the left near the center of the overall height, and then extends vertically downward again at about 1/3 of the left and right widths of the front box 831 from the left end. As described above, it is bent in a crank shape so as to be located immediately above the dispensing outlet 831b at a height about 1/4 of the bottom of the front box 831 and extends vertically to the dispensing outlet 831b. The payout vane 839 is arranged at a portion bent in a crank shape in the payout passage 831d.

  On the other hand, the ball-out passage 831e is a form in which the portion of the payout passage 831d that extends obliquely from the payout entrance 831a to the lower right is further extended, and the height from the upper surface is about 1/3 of the total height of the front box 831. It branches up to the height near the center.

  Further, the front box 831 is formed in an upper part on the right side surface in front view, and a guide shelf 831f projecting rearward as it goes downward in a portion vertically extending toward the payout outlet 831b in the payout passage 831d. And a lever mounting portion 831g for mounting the ball removing lever 844 slidably up and down.

  The payout passage 832d of the rear box 832 extends obliquely to the lower right in a front view from the payout entrance 832a toward the ball outlet 832c, and is downward at a height about 1/3 of the total height of the rear box 832. Bends so as to extend vertically, and bends so as to extend substantially horizontally to the left near the center of the overall height, and then extends vertically downward again at about 1/3 of the left and right widths of the rear box 832. As described above, it is bent in a crank shape so as to be located right above the dispensing outlet 832b at a height about 1/4 of the bottom of the rear box 832 and extends vertically to the dispensing outlet 832b. The payout vane 839 is arranged at a portion bent in a crank shape in the payout passage 832d.

  On the other hand, the ball removal passage 832e is a form in which the portion of the delivery passage 832d that extends obliquely to the lower right from the delivery inlet 832a is further extended, and the height from the upper surface is about 1/3 of the total height of the rear box 832. It branches up to the height near the center.

  Further, the rear box 832 is formed at a portion vertically extending toward the payout outlet 832b in the payout passage 832d, and a guide shelf 832f projecting forward as it goes downward, and an upper part of the right side surface in front view. And a lever mounting portion 832g for mounting the ball removing lever 844 slidably up and down.

  The payout passages 831d and 832d and the ball removal passages 831e and 832e of the front box 831 and the rear box 832 are formed in the same shape. The dispensing passages 831d and 832d are partitioned by a partition plate 841 up to the upstream side of the portion where the dispensing blade 839 is arranged. Further, a payout detection sensor 842 is attached between the guide shelves 831f and 832f and the payout outlets 831b and 832b. In other words, the game ball that has flowed through the payout passage 831d of the front box 831 and the game ball that has flowed through the payout passage 832d of the rear box 832 are located before and after the front box 831 and the rear box 832 by the respective guide shelves 831f and 832f. The payout detection sensor 842 is brought near the boundary and detected by one payout detection sensor 842.

  The driven gear 837 radially protrudes from the rear surface of the gear portion 837a at an interval of 60 degrees from the rear surface of the gear portion 837a and can be detected by the blade rotation detection sensor 840. A plurality of detection pieces 837b and a connecting portion 837c that is cylindrically projected rearward from the center of the gear portion 837a and that has irregularities formed on the peripheral surface at the rear end and is connectable to the payout blade 839 are provided. .

  The payout vane 839 extends in the front-rear cylindrical shape, and a base cylinder portion 839a through which the shaft member 838 is inserted, and protrudes in the direction perpendicular to the axis of the base cylinder portion 839a at a constant interval in the circumferential direction from the front end of the base cylinder portion 839a. A plurality of (three) front blades 839b and a plurality of front blades 839b projecting in the direction orthogonal to the axis of the base tubular portion 839a at regular intervals in the circumferential direction so that the front blade 839b is staggered from the rear end. 3) The rear blade 839c and the connected portion that is formed in a tubular shape from the front end of the base tubular portion 839a to the front and has an unevenness that is connectable to the connecting portion 837c of the driven gear 837 on the peripheral surface of the front end. 839d.

  Each of the front blade 839b and the rear blade 839c of the payout blade 839 is provided with three at intervals of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction, and the rear blade 839c and the rear blade 839c are arranged so as to be staggered with respect to each other. It is offset at an angle of 60 degrees in the direction and extends outward. In the payout blade 839 of the present embodiment, the three front blades 839b (rear blades 839c) are connected by an arc depressed toward the center side, and the diameter of the arc is the same as or slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball. Thereby, between the front blades 839b (rear blades 839c), a ball storage portion 839e capable of storing only one game ball is formed.

  Further, the three front blades 839b and the rear blade 839c are formed such that their outer diameters D1 around the axis of the base tubular portion 839a are 1 to 1.4 times the outer diameter of the game ball. Further, a diameter D2 around the axis of the base tubular portion 839a up to the portion closest to the axis of the base tubular portion 839a in the arcuate portion (sphere housing portion 839e) between the front blades 839b (rear blades 839c). Is formed to be about 0.3 to 0.4 times the outer diameter of the game ball. That is, the depth [(diameter D1−diameter D2) / 2] from the outer periphery of the front blade 839b and the rear blade 839c to the most recessed portion of the ball housing portion 839e is 0.1 to 0. It is quadrupled.

  Therefore, about 3/10 (between 1/4 and 1/3) of the outer circumference of the game ball can be held by the arc-shaped portion (ball housing portion 839e) between the front blades 839b (rear blade 839c). it can. In other words, it is possible to accommodate a depth of about 1/5 (1/7 to 1/4) of the outer diameter of the game ball. This allows the game balls in the payout passages 831d and 832d to be quickly accommodated between the front blades 839b (rear blades 839c) (ball accommodating portion 839e).

  In the dispensing blade 839 of the present embodiment, the front blade 839b is located in the dispensing passage 831d of the front box 831 and the trailing blade 839c is located in the dispensing passage 832d of the rear box 832 in a state where the dispensing device 830 is assembled. The game balls in the payout passages 831d and 832d can be paid out, respectively. Further, the payout blade 839 is arranged in the payout passages 831d and 832d at a portion which is bent in a crank shape below the center of the entire height of the front box 831 and the rear box 832. Specifically, in the payout passages 831d and 832d, the center of rotation of the payout vane 839 is located immediately below the portion vertically extending downward from the vicinity of the center of the total height of the front box 831 and the rear box 832. Then, in the crank-shaped portions of the dispensing passages 831d and 832d, the wall (inner wall) on the side far from the dispensing blade 839 is centered on the rotation center of the dispensing blade 839, and from the outer periphery of the front blade 839b and the rear blade 839c. It is formed in an arc shape separated by a distance S smaller than the outer diameter of the game ball. In this embodiment, the distance S is set to 0.7 to 0.9 times the outer diameter of the game ball. In other words, the distance from the most recessed portion of the ball storage portion 839e to the arc-shaped portion of the payout passages 831d and 832d is 1.03 to 1.1 times the outer diameter of the game ball. .

  Thereby, the payout device 830, when the game ball flowing down onto the payout blade 839 comes into contact with the outer circumferences of the front blade 839b and the rear blade 839c, passes through the cranked portions of the payout passages 831d and 832d. Therefore, it cannot be discharged downward from the payout outlets 831b and 832b. On the other hand, when the game ball is housed in the ball housing portion 839e, it moves with the rotation of the payout blade 839 and can pass through the crank-shaped bent parts of the payout passages 831d and 832d, and from the payout exits 831b and 832b. It is released downward.

  Further, in the payout device 830, the diameter D1 of the front blade 839b and the rear blade 839c is set to about 1.2 to 1.4 times the outer diameter of the game ball, and the outer diameter of the game ball is set to 1 by the ball housing portion 839e. Since a depth of / 7 to 1/4 is accommodated, it is possible to shorten the time required for accommodating the game balls while reducing the outer diameter of the payout blade 839 as much as possible. Thereby, even if the payout vane 839 is rotated rapidly, the game ball can be stored in the ball storage portion 839e and sent to the payout outlets 831b and 832b. Therefore, the number of payouts of the game ball per unit time can be increased as compared with the conventional case, and the time taken to pay out the game ball can be shortened.

  The ball-removable movable piece 843 extends vertically and forward and backward in a plate shape, and a lower portion is bent to form a body shape 843a in a front view, and an upper end of the main body portion 843a extends forward and backward in a tubular shape. A shaft cylinder portion 843b, both ends of which are rotatably attached to the front box 831 and the rear box 832, a projecting portion 843c projecting from the upper portion of the outer surface of the main body portion 843a, which is bent in a V shape, and a main body portion 843a. And a weight mounting portion 843d (see FIG. 120) formed of a through hole penetrating forward and backward in a lower portion bent in a V shape.

  In the state where the dispensing device 830 is assembled, the ball-removing movable piece 843 is oriented such that the lower portion of the main body portion 843a extends obliquely to the lower left when viewed from the front, and the shaft cylinder portion 843b at the upper end is configured to dispense the front box 831 and the rear box 832. In the passages 831d and 832d, it is possible to rotate at a portion obliquely extending from the payout entrances 831a and 832a to the lower right in the front view, and at a position outside the wall on the right side in the front view, which is slightly above the portion that bends downward. Installed on.

  In the normal state, the dispensing device 830 of the present embodiment is in a state in which the ball-pulling lever 844 is slid downward, and the lower part of the ball-pulling lever 844 hits the protrusion 843c of the ball-pulling movable piece 843 from the right side in a front view. Touching. As a result, the ball-removable movable piece 843 is restricted from rotating counterclockwise in a front view (see FIG. 120 (a)).

  In this normal state, in the body portion 843a of the ball-moving movable piece 843 that is bent in a V shape, the upper side of the bent portion extends vertically, and the lower side of the bent portion is diagonally lower left in front view. Extending to. The lower end of the main body portion 843a is located in the vicinity of the portion where the payout passages 831d and 832d and the ball passage passages 831e and 832e branch. Therefore, the ball-removing movable piece 843 (main body 843a) closes the ball-removing passages 831e and 832e, and the left-side surface of the main body 843a forms part of the walls of the payout passages 831d and 832d. is doing.

  In a normal state, the ball-moving movable piece 843 of the present embodiment is formed such that the center of gravity of the ball-moving movable piece 843 is located on the left side in a front view of a vertical line that passes through the center of the shaft tube portion 843b, Due to the force acting to rotate counterclockwise as viewed from the front, the normal state is maintained because the ball-pulling lever 844 restricts the counterclockwise rotation.

  When the ball removing lever 844 is slid upward from the normal state, the lower part of the ball removing lever 844 is separated from the protruding portion 843c of the ball removing movable piece 843, and the ball removing movable piece 843 is rotated counterclockwise in a front view. Movement restrictions are lifted. Therefore, the ball-removing movable piece 843 is rotated counterclockwise by its own weight so that the center of gravity is located immediately below the shaft tube portion 843b. It should be noted that the ball-moving movable piece 843 should be rotated counterclockwise until the right side surface of the lower portion of the main body 843a comes into contact with the left surfaces of the members forming the right side surfaces of the front box 831 and the rear box 832. (See FIG. 120 (b)). Thereby, the ball removal passages 831e and 832e are opened, and the game balls that have entered from the payout openings 831a and 832a come into contact with the main body portion 843a of the ball removal movable piece 843 in the middle of the payout passages 831d and 832d. The ball removing movable piece 843 is rotated counterclockwise as viewed from the front to open the ball removing passages 831e and 832e, flows through the opened ball removing passages 831e and 832e, and is discharged downward from the ball removing outlets 831c and 832c. The Rukoto.

  In the present embodiment, since the ball-moving movable piece 843 is provided with the weight mounting portion 843d, the weight of the metal screw is screwed into the weight mounting portion 843d to mount the ball-removing lever 844 upward. When the regulation of counterclockwise rotation in front view is released, the lower end of the ball-removing movable piece 843 is projected into the ball-removing passages 831e, 832e by the weight of the ball-removing movable piece 843 and the weight of the weight. Direction (counterclockwise as viewed from the front) can be easily rotated.

  Further, in a normal state in which the ball removing lever 844 is slid downward to close the ball removing passages 831e, 832e, the game balls entering from the payout ports 831a, 832a enter the main body 843a of the ball removing movable piece 843. Since they are in contact with each other, the ball-removing movable piece 843 can be vibrated by the contact of the game ball. Therefore, dust or dirt that is sandwiched between the lower end of the ball-removing movable piece 843 and the inner surfaces of the ball-removing passages 831e and 832e can be removed by the vibration of the ball-removing movable piece 843, and the dust can be removed. It is possible to prevent the ball-removing movable piece 843 from being unable to rotate due to biting of dust or the like.

  Further, since the metal screw as the weight can be screwed and attached to the weight attachment portion 843d formed as the through hole, even if the ball removing movable piece 843 is frequently rotated, the weight is removed by the ball removing movable piece 843. The ball-removing movable piece 843 can be maintained in a good state for a long period of time without coming off from the (weight attachment portion 843d). Further, since the weight can be easily attached to the ball-removing movable piece 843 simply by screwing a metal screw into the weight attaching portion 843d, the labor for attaching the weight can be simplified and the pachinko machine 1 can be assembled. The cost related to can be reduced.

  By the way, if the ball removing passages 831e and 832e are closed for a long period of time by the ball removing movable piece 843, fine dust may be attached to the rotary shaft of the ball removing movable piece 843 or the rotary shaft may be rusted. The removal movable piece 843 may be difficult to rotate. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the game balls that have entered from the payout ports 831a and 832a come into contact with the main body portion 843a of the ball removing movable piece 843. Therefore, the ball removing passage 831e causes the ball removing passage 831e. , 832e from the closed state, when the ball pulling lever 844 for releasing the closing is slid upward and unlocked, the game ball comes into contact with the ball removing movable piece 843. The ball-removing movable piece 843 can be rotated, and the ball-removing passages 831e and 832e can be reliably opened.

  Therefore, when the ball removal lever 844 is operated to open the ball removal passages 831e and 832e, the ball removal movable piece 843 can be favorably rotated, so that the game ball removal operation can be reliably performed. It is possible to improve workability in maintenance and the like.

[4-6c. Upper full ball path unit]
The upper tank ball path unit 850 of the payout unit 800 in the present embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 121 and 122. The upper tank bulb path unit 850 is attached to the position below the payout device 830 in the payout unit base 801. This upper full tank path unit 850 is attached to the payout unit base 801 and has a box-shaped upper full tank base 851 whose rear side is open, and is attached to the rear side of the upper full tank base 851 and its front side is open. A box-shaped upper full tank cover 852 and a dispensing device pressing member 853 rotatably attached to the rear side of the upper full cover 852 and capable of pressing the dispensing device 830 upward are provided.

  Further, the upper tank ball path unit 850 is an upper payout ball receiving port 850a that is open upward so that a game ball can pass in a left side portion from the left-right center in the front view on the upper surface, and a right side from the center in the front view on the upper surface. The upper ball removal inlet 850b, which is open upward so that the game balls can pass in the area, and is formed between the upper full tank base 851 and the upper full tank cover 852, and received by the upper payout ball receiving opening 850a. An upper sphere storage passage 850c of a predetermined size in which game balls circulate, a normal discharge opening 850d that opens downward at a position immediately below the upper payout sphere receiving opening 850a at the lower end of the upper sphere storage passage 850c, and the upper sphere storage A full tank discharge port 850e that opens downward at a portion excluding the normal discharge port 850d at the lower end of the passage 850c, a normal discharge port 850d, and a full tank discharge port 850e. And a, and a partition piece 850f, which partitions the lower portion to the left and right in the upper sphere reservoir passage 850c protrudes upward from between.

  In addition, the upper full ball passage unit 850, the upper ball removal passage 850g for guiding the game ball that has entered from the upper ball removal inlet 850b downward, and the upper portion that opens downward at the lower end of the upper ball removal passage 850g. And a ball removal outlet 850h. This upper tank full ball path unit 850 has a normal outlet 850d, a tank outlet 850e, and an upper ball outlet 850h arranged in order from the left side in a front view, and opens downward. The upper tank full ball path unit 850 includes a back cover mounting portion 854 for mounting the back cover 980 on the right end of the upper tank base 851.

  In the upper full-ball path unit 850 assembled to the payout unit 800, the upper payout ball receiving port 850a is located immediately below the payout outlets 831b and 832b of the payout device 830, and the upper ball extracting entrance 850b. Is located immediately below the ball outlets 831c and 832c of the dispensing device 830. Further, in the state where the upper full-ball path unit 850 is assembled to the payout unit 800, the normal discharge port 850d, the full-tank discharge port 850e, and the upper ball discharge port 850h are the normal guideways of the lower full-ball path unit 860. Each of the 861, the full tank guiding path 862, and the lower ball removing guiding path 865 has an opening right above the rear end opening (see FIG. 128).

  In the upper tank ball path unit 850, the game balls that are paid out by the payout device 830 and discharged downward from the payout outlets 831b and 832b enter the upper ball storage passage 850c from the upper payout ball receiving port 850a. In a state where the normal discharge port 850d at the lower end of the upper ball storage passage 850c is not closed, the game ball that has entered the upper ball storage passage 850c from the upper payout ball receiving port 850a is opened immediately below the upper payout ball receiving port 850a. It is discharged from the normal discharge port 850d.

  When the upper plate 321 of the door frame 3 is filled with game balls and the game balls cannot be stored, and further, the normal guiding path 861 of the lower tank ball path unit 860 is filled with the game balls, it is normally released. The outlet 850d is closed. When the game ball enters the upper ball storage passage 850c in this state, it is stored above the normal discharge port 850d. Then, when the amount of game balls stored above the normal discharge port 850d becomes higher than the partition 850f, the game ball newly entering the upper ball storage passage 850c gets over the partition 850f and becomes full. It will be discharged downward from the tank discharge port 850e, and will be sent to the lower plate 322 through the full tank guide path 862 of the lower full tank ball path unit 860.

  In this way, the upper tank ball path unit 850 automatically lowers the game balls paid out from the payout device 830 from the upper plate 321 according to the amount of the game balls stored in the upper plate 321 of the door frame 3. It can be distributed to the dish 322.

[4-6d. Lower full ball path unit]
The lower tank full ball path unit 860 of the payout unit 800 in the present embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 123 to 127. The lower tank full ball path unit 860 is attached to the lower side of the upper tank ball path unit 850 in the payout unit base 801. The lower tank ball path unit 860 is a normal guide path 861 for guiding the game ball discharged from the normal discharge port 850d of the upper tank ball path unit 850 to the front and guiding it from the front end to the through ball passage 273 of the door frame 3. And, a full tank guide path 862 that guides the game balls emitted from the full tank discharge port 850e of the upper full tank path unit 850 to the front and guides the game balls from the front end to the full tank receiver port 274 of the door frame 3, and normally. A guideway opening / closing door 863 that opens / closes front end openings of the guideway 861 and the full tank guideway 862 in accordance with opening / closing of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4, and a guideway opening / closing door 863 that is a normal guideway 861 and a full tank guideway 862. And a closing spring 864 that biases the front end opening in a direction to close the opening.

  In addition, the lower tank full ball path unit 860 guides the game ball discharged from the upper ball exit port 850h of the upper tank ball path unit 850 to the front side, and from the center right end in the front-rear direction on the board unit base 910 of the board unit 900. A lower ball guide path 865 for discharging to

  In the lower tank full ball path unit 860, a normal guide path 861, a full tank guide path 862, and a lower ball guide path 865 are arranged in order from the left side to the right side in a front view. The normal guide path 861, the full tank guide path 862, and the lower ball removal guide path 865 have rear ends open upward. Further, the normal guide path 861 and the full guide path 862 have a width in which a plurality of game balls are arranged side by side, and extend forward to the vicinity of the front end of the main body frame 4 so that the front end side becomes low. Further, the full tank guideway 862 extends forward at a position lower than the normal guideway 861. As shown in the drawing, the normal guide path 861, the full tank guide path 862, and the lower ball guide path 865 are formed by an upper case 866 and a lower case 867 that are vertically separable.

  The guide path opening / closing door 863 is rotatably attached to the front end of the lower case 867 between the normal guide path 861 and the full tank guide path 862, and is rotated clockwise in a front view by a closing spring 864. Being energized. More specifically, at the front end of the lower tank ball path unit 860, the full tank guide path 862 opening to the right of the front end opening of the normal guide path 861 in front view is one game with respect to the normal guide path 861. It is placed at a position lower by the height of the ball. The guideway opening / closing door 863 is attached to the lower side of the normal guideway 861 and on the left side of the full tank guideway 862 so as to be rotatable about an axis extending in the front-rear direction.

  The taxiway opening / closing door 863 includes a disk-shaped base portion 863a that is rotatably attached, and a first door plate portion 863b that extends in a flat plate shape from the base portion 863a to the diagonally upper left side and is capable of closing the front end opening of the taxiway path 861. , A second door plate portion 863c extending from the base portion 863a to the right side in a flat plate shape and capable of closing the front end opening of the full tank guideway 862, and an extension portion 863d extending from the base portion 863a to the lower left side in a flat plate shape. , And an operating protrusion 863e which is protruded forward from the front surface of the front end of the extending portion 863d and can be brought into contact with the door opening / closing contact portion 281 of the foul cover unit 270 in the door frame 3.

  Here, closing the front end openings of the normal guide path 861 and the full tank guide path 862 does not need to seal the openings, and it suffices that the game ball cannot pass through. The operating projection 863e is formed in a short arc shape centering on the base 863a when viewed from the front, and the front end surface is inclined so as to project forward as it approaches the end side in the counterclockwise direction. is doing.

  The guide path opening / closing door 863 is urged in a clockwise direction when viewed from the front by a closing spring 864, and the second door plate portion 863c is provided below the front end opening of the full tank guide path 862 at the front end of the lower case 867. By abutting on the boss portion 867a protruding forward, the clockwise rotation is restricted.

  In the lower full ball path unit 860 of the present embodiment, the front end of the lower full ball path unit 860 in the assembled state of the pachinko machine 1 has a through ball passage 273, a full ball receptacle 274, and a door opening / closing member in the foul cover unit 270 of the door frame 3. It is attached at a position facing the contact portion 281 (see FIG. 127). The guideway opening / closing door 863 has no contact with the operating protrusion 863e when the door frame 3 is open with respect to the main body frame 4, so that the guideway opening / closing door 863 is biased by the closing spring 864. Is rotated in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front, and stops in a state where the second door plate portion 863c is in contact with the boss portion 867a of the lower case 867. In this state, the first door plate portion 863b and the second door plate portion 863c are located in front of the front end openings of the normal guide path 861 and the full tank guide path 862 and close the front end openings (FIG. 126). (See (a)). Therefore, in this state, the game ball in the normal guideway 861 and the full tank guideway 862 cannot move forward from the front end opening, and even if the door frame 3 is opened, the normal guideway 861 and the full tank guide The game ball does not spill out of the path 862.

  Then, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the door opening / closing contact portion 281 of the foul cover unit 270 in the door frame 3 comes into contact with the front end surface of the operation protrusion 863e of the guideway opening / closing door 863, and the operation is performed. Due to the inclination of the front end surface of the protrusion 863e, a force acts against the biasing force of the closing spring 864 to rotate the guideway opening / closing door 863 in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front. As a result, the first door plate portion 863b and the second door plate portion 863c that have closed the front end openings of the normal guide path 861 and the full guide path 862 rotate in the direction away from the front end opening, and the normal guide path 861. Also, the front end opening of the full tank guide path 862 is opened (see FIG. 126 (b)). In this state, as shown in the drawing, the first door plate portion 863b is located below the front end opening of the normal guideway 861 and the second door plate portion 863c is located above the front end opening of the full tank guideway 862. .

  When the front end openings of the normal guide path 861 and the full tank guide path 862 are opened, the door frame 3 is completely closed with respect to the main body frame 4, and the normal guide path 861 and the full tank path are full. The through ball passage 273 and the full tank receiving port 274 of the foul cover unit 270 in the door frame 3 are located on the front side of the front end opening of the guide path 862. The game ball can be delivered to the ball passage 273 and the full tank receiving port 274 side.

  In this way, the front end openings of the normal guide path 861 and the full guide path 862 are changed in the vertical direction, and the front end openings of the normal guide path 861 and the full guide path 862 are opened by rotating the guide path opening / closing door 863. Since it is opened and closed, the operating range of the guideway opening / closing door 863 can be narrowed as much as possible, and the opening / closing mechanism for the normal guideway 861 and the full guideway 862 can be downsized. Therefore, the space for other members can be relatively widened, and the internal space of the pachinko machine 1 can be used more effectively.

  In the payout unit 800 of the present embodiment, the upper plate 321 of the door frame 3 is filled with the game balls, and the game balls cannot be discharged to the upper plate 321. When is paid out, the game balls can be stored until the inside of the normal guideway 861 of the lower full tank path unit 860 is filled with the game balls. Then, when the game ball is further paid out from the payout device 830 in a state where the normal guide path 861 is filled with the game ball, the game ball is normally released in the upper ball storage passage 850c of the upper tank ball path unit 850. If it stays above the outlet 850d and exceeds the partition 850f, it will flow to the full tank discharge port 850e side, and from the full tank discharge port 850e, the full tank guide path 862 of the lower full tank ball path unit 860, The payout of gaming balls is automatically switched to the lower plate 322 through the foul cover unit 270. After that, when the game balls are further paid out from the payout device 830, and the lower plate 322 in addition to the upper plate 321 is filled with the game balls, and it becomes impossible to supply the game balls to the lower plate 322, the foul cover unit 270. The game balls are stored in the storage passage 277. When the movable balls 278 are rotated by the game balls being stored in the storage passage 277 and detected by the full tank detection sensor 279, the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 are full of game balls. Is notified, and the payout of the game balls by the payout device 830 is temporarily stopped until the detection of the movable piece 278 by the full tank detection sensor 279 is released.

  The stop of the payout of the game ball by the payout device 830 in response to the detection of the movable piece 278 by the full tank detection sensor 279, for example, the game ball is stored until the movable piece 278 is detected in the storage passage 277 of the foul cover unit 270. In the state in which it is kept, the number that can fill the storage passage 277 on the upstream side, the full tank guiding passage 862 of the lower full tank ball passage unit 860, and the upper spherical storage passage 850c of the upper full ball passage unit 850. When the game ball is paid out, the payout of the game ball by the payout device 830 may be stopped. As a result, it is possible to store more game balls than conventional pachinko machines, so in the gaming state where a large number of game balls are paid out, such as during a big hit game, the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 are paid out by the game balls. It is possible to reduce the need to worry about being full of game balls, and allow the player to concentrate on the big hit game and entertain.

[4-7. Board unit]
The board unit 900 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 106 to 109. The board unit 900 of the body frame 4 includes a board unit base 910 attached to the rear side of the body frame base 600, and a bass speaker inside the body unit base 910 attached to the rear side of the body frame base 600 on the left side of the board unit base 910 when viewed from the front. A speaker unit 920 having 921, a power supply board box 930 which is mounted on the rear side of the board unit base 910 on the right side in front view and accommodates a power supply board inside, and a power supply board box 930 which is mounted on the rear side of the speaker unit 920. An interface control board box 940 in which the interface control board is housed, and a payout control board 951 which is mounted across the power supply board box 930 and the interface control board box 940 and which controls the payout of gaming balls are housed. And a payout control board box 950, .

  The board unit 900 includes a door frame relay board 911 mounted on the front surface of the board unit base 910 so as to face forward from the connection opening 606 of the main body frame base 600. The door frame relay board 911 is for relaying the connection between the payout control board 951, the main control board, and the peripheral control board and the door body relay board mounted on the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3. It is a thing. The payout control board 951 housed in the payout control board box 950 controls the payout device 830.

[5. Overall structure of game board]
Next, the overall configuration of the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 129 to 135. FIG. 129 is a front view of the game board in which the panel plate of the game panel is in an opaque state. 130 is a perspective view of the game board in the state of FIG. 129 seen from the front, and FIG. 131 is a perspective view of the game board in the state of FIG. 129 seen from the back. Further, FIG. 132 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main configuration and seen from the front, and FIG. 133 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main configuration and seen from the rear. Further, FIG. 134 is a front view in which the front unit of the game board is cut at the approximate center in the front-rear direction within the game area. Further, FIG. 135 is a front view of the game board in which the panel plate of the game panel is in a transparent state.

  The game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 has a game area 5a in which a game ball is hit by the player operating the handle 302 of the handle unit 300. Further, the game board 5 is attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000 and the front component member 1000, which defines the outer periphery of the game region 5a and has an outer shape of a substantially square shape in front view, and the rear end of the game region 5a. It is provided with a plate-shaped game panel 1100 for partitioning. A plurality of obstacle nails that come into contact with the game balls are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in a portion on the front surface of the game panel 1100 that is inside the game area 5a (not shown). In addition, the game board 5 is mounted on the lower rear portion of the game panel 1100, and the game contents that are mounted on the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 by hitting a game ball into the game area 5a. A main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 (see FIG. 169) for controlling the.

  In addition, the game board 5 displays a game status based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a function display unit 1400 visibly attached to the player side in the lower left corner of the front component member 1000, and a game panel. A peripheral control unit 1500 arranged on the rear side of 1100, a main effect display device 1600 arranged in the center of the game area 5a in a front view and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and attached to the front surface of the game panel 1100. The front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100 are further provided. The main effect display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000, and the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of the main effect display device 1600.

  The game panel 1100 is formed so that the outer periphery thereof is slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component member 1000 and holds the transparent flat plate-shaped panel plate 1110 and the outer periphery of the panel plate 1110, and the front component member 1000. A frame-shaped panel holder 1120 is attached to the rear side and the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface.

  The table unit 2000 has a plurality of (four in this case) general winning openings 2001 that are always open so as to accept the game balls that have been driven into the playing area 5a, and the plurality of general winning openings 2001 are the playing area 5a. A first starting opening 2002 which is always open to receive a game ball at a different position in the inside, a gate portion 2003 which is attached at a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects passage of the game ball, and a game ball By the second starting opening 2004 that allows the acceptance of the game balls according to the result of the ordinary drawing that is drawn by passing through the gate portion 2003, and the acceptance of the game balls into the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004 Depending on the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery, the prize winning opening 2005 in which the game balls can be accepted and the game balls accepted in the prize winning hole 2005 are distributed. A receiving space 2006 of a predetermined size, and a first receiving port 2007 and the second receiving port 2008 for receiving the game ball receiving space 2006 either, a.

  Further, the table unit 2000 is mounted right above the lower end of the game area 5a at the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction, and has a first start opening 2002 and a start opening unit 2100 having one general winning opening 2001. The side unit 2200, which has two general winning openings 2001 and is attached along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the starting opening unit 2100 when viewed from the front, and the starting position which is the lower right corner when viewed from the front in the game area 5a. One general winning opening 2001, a gate section 2003, a second starting opening 2004, a special winning opening 2005, a receiving space 2006, a first receiving opening 2007, and a second receiving opening, which are attached to the right side of the mouth unit 2100 when viewed from the front. Above the attacker unit 2400 having the 2008, the starting opening unit 2100 and the side unit 2200, the game area 5a It includes the frame-shaped center won game 2500 is attached to the front view substantially central slightly above closer, the.

  The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and has a box-like shape having an open front, and a back box 3010 having a square opening 3010a in the rear wall, and the back unit 3010. A lock mechanism 3020 for detachably attaching the effect display device 1600, a panel relay board 3031 attached to the left end in rear view below the opening 3010a in the rear surface of the back box 3010, and a rear surface of the back box 3010. A first effect drive board 3032 attached to the rear view right side of the panel relay board 3031, and a second effect drive board 3033 attached to the rear view right side of the first effect drive board 3032 on the rear surface of the back box 3010, Is equipped with.

  Further, the back unit 3000 includes a back front decoration unit 3100 attached to the front end of the back box 3010, and a back top movable effect unit 3200 attached to the rear side of the back front decoration unit 3100 and above the opening. , A rear-rear central movable effect unit 3300 attached to the front side of the rear wall in the rear box 3010 on the rear side of the upper-rear movable effect unit 3200, and a rear-rear left-movable object attached to the rear-rear central movable effect unit 3300. An effect unit 3400 and a rear right movable effect unit 3500 are provided.

[5-1. Previous component]
Next, the front component 1000 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 136. FIG. 136 (a) is a perspective view of the front component member and the game panel of the game board seen from the front, and FIG. 136 (b) is a perspective view of the game panel seen from the back. The front component 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, has an inner shape that penetrates in a substantially circular shape in the front-rear direction, and defines the outer circumference of the game area 5a by the inner circumference of the inner shape. The front constituent member 1000 has an outer rail 1001 extending in a circular arc shape from a lower end on the left side to a left side in a center view in a front view, and extending in an arc shape along a circumferential direction in a clockwise direction. An inner rail 1002 that is arranged inside the front component member 1000 substantially along the outer rail 1001 and extends in an arc shape from a lower center in the left-right direction in a front view to an obliquely upper left portion in a front view, and a lower end of the inner rail 1002 on the right side in a front view. The out guide portion 1003 is formed at the lowest position in the region 5a and is inclined so as to become lower toward the rear.

  Further, the front component member 1000 has a lower right rail 1004 and a lower right rail 1004 which are linearly inclined so that the right end side is slightly higher from the right end of the out guiding portion 1003 in front view to the vicinity of the right side of the front component member 1000. From the right end of the front component 1000 to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001 along the right side of the front component 1000, and the upper part is curved inward of the front component 1000, and the upper end of the right rail 1005 and the outer rail. The upper end of 1001 is connected, and the stop part 1006 with which the game ball that has rolled along the outer rail 1001 abuts is provided.

  Further, the front component 1000 is rotatably supported by the upper end of the inner rail 1002 and extends upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close the space between the inner rail 1002 and the front rail and the front view timepiece. A backflow preventing member that is rotated by a spring (not shown) so as to be rotatable only between an open position in which the outer rail 1001 and the outer rail 1001 are opened and to return to the closed position side. 1007 is provided.

  Further, the front constituent member 1000 is provided with an out port 1008 penetrating forward and backward at the rear end of the out guiding portion 1003 at the lower center in the left-right direction in a front view in the frame. The game ball guided rearward by the out guide portion 1003 is discharged to the rear of the front component member 1000 (game panel 1100) through the out port 1008.

  In addition, the front component 1000 includes the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 that extend substantially vertically from the lower ends of the outer portion, the outer portion of the out guiding portion 1003 and the lower right rail 1004, and the outer portion of the right rail 1005. Each of the parts is provided with a security recess 1009 recessed rearward from the front end. When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the crime prevention recess 1009 has a rear protrusion 202 protruding rearward of the crime prevention cover 200 in the door frame 3. It will be inserted. As a result, the space between the crime prevention cover 200 and the game board 5 (front component 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear projection 202 of the crime prevention cover 200 and the crime prevention recess 1009 of the front component 1000, so that the game is played. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is made to enter the game area 5a from below the front surface of the board 5 through the crime prevention cover 200 and the front component member 1000, it will be blocked by the rear protrusion 202 and the crime prevention recess 1009. , It is possible to prevent unauthorized tools from entering the game area 5a.

  Although not shown, the front component 1000 includes a plurality of positioning protrusions that project rearward from the rear end of the inner rail 1002. By inserting these positioning protrusions into the inner rail fixing holes formed in the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, the inner rail 1002 can be positioned and fixed to the front surface of the panel plate 1110.

  Further, although not shown, the front component 1000 includes a plurality of mounting bosses that project rearward from the rear surface. The plurality of mounting bosses can be positioned between the panel holder (gaming panel 1100) by being inserted into the mounting holes (not shown) of the panel holder 1120 in the gaming panel 1100.

  The front component 1000 also includes a notch 1011 that is notched upward from the lower end at the lower left corner when viewed from the front. The notch portion 1011 matches the notch portion 1123 of the panel holder in the game panel 1100, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the notch portion 1011 penetrates the notch portion 1011 and the lower full tank ball path unit 860. The front end openings of the normal guideway 861 and the full guideway 862 face forward.

[5-2. Game panel]
Next, the game panel 1100 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 136. The game panel 1100 has a flat panel plate 1110 formed of a transparent synthetic resin and having an outer periphery slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component member 1000, and holds the outer periphery of the panel plate 1110. And a frame-shaped panel holder 1120, which is attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000 and to which the back unit 3000 is attached on the rear surface.

  The panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is formed of a synthetic resin plate such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, polyarylate resin, or methacrylic resin, or an inorganic plate such as glass or metal. The panel plate 1110 is thinner than the panel holder 1120, and is the minimum necessary thickness (8 to 10 mm) that can be sufficiently retained even if an obstacle nail is planted on the front surface or the front unit 2000 is attached. It is said that. In this example, the panel plate 1110 is made of a transparent synthetic resin plate.

  The panel plate 1110 has the lowest position in the game area 5a, and an out recessed portion 1111 that is recessed upward from the lower end is formed at a position corresponding to the out opening 1008 of the front component member 1000. Further, the panel plate 1110 is formed with a plurality of openings 1112 penetrating in the front-rear direction and for mounting the front unit 2000.

  Although not shown, the panel plate 1110 has a plurality of inner rail fixing holes at predetermined positions. The inner rail 1002 can be fixed at a predetermined position by fitting and fixing a positioning protrusion (not shown) protruding from the rear side of the inner rail 1002 into the inner rail fixing hole.

  The panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 has a size that includes the panel plate 1110 and has a substantially rectangular outer shape, and is formed to be thicker than the panel plate 1110 (about 20 mm in this example). The panel holder 1120 is made of synthetic resin (for example, thermoplastic synthetic resin). This panel holder 1120 has a holding step portion (not shown) which detachably holds the panel plate 1110 and is recessed from the front side toward the rear side, and has a size substantially equal to the game area 5a inside the holding step portion. And a through hole 1122 penetrating in the front-rear direction.

  The panel holder 1120 also includes a notch 1123 that is notched upward from the lower end at the lower left corner when viewed from the front. The cutouts 1123 coincide with the cutouts 1011 of the front component member 1000, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the cutouts 1011 penetrate the cutouts 1011 and normally guide the lower tank ball path unit 860. The front end openings of the passage 861 and the full tank guide passage 862 face forward.

[5-3. Substrate holder]
Next, the substrate holder 1200 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 132 and 133. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in the shape of a horizontally long box whose upper and front sides are open, and the bottom surface is inclined so as to decrease toward the center in the left-right direction. The substrate holder 1200 can cover the lower part of the back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 from the lower side in a state of being assembled to the game board 5. As a result, it is possible to receive all the game balls discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1008, and the game balls discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000, and are formed on the bottom surface. It can be discharged downward from the discharged discharge part 1201.

[5-4. Main control board unit]
Next, the main control unit 1300 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 132 and 133. The main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 controls a game content and payout of game balls, etc. (see FIG. 133), and a main control board 1310 that houses the main control board 1310 and is attached to the board holder 1200. And are equipped with.

  The main control board box 1320 is provided with a plurality of sealing mechanisms, and when the main control board box 1320 is closed using one sealing mechanism, next, in order to open the main control board box 1320, the sealing mechanism is destroyed. Therefore, a trace of opening and closing of the main control board box 1320 can be left. Therefore, the unauthorized opening / closing of the main control board box 1320 can be found by looking at the traces of the opening / closing, and the deterrence of the unauthorized act on the main control board 1310 is enhanced.

  The main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 is connected to the payout control board 951 and the peripheral control board 1510. In addition, the main control board 1310, via the panel relay board 3031, the function display unit 1400, the gate sensor 2401, the second start opening sensor 2402, the special winning opening sensor 2403, the first entrance sensor 2404, the second entrance sensor. 2405, a starting opening solenoid 2412, an attacker solenoid 2414, a V winning opening solenoid 2416, a general winning opening sensor 3101, a first starting opening sensor 3102, and a magnetic sensor (not shown).

[5-5. Function display unit]
Next, the function display unit 1400 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. As shown, the function display unit 1400 is attached to the lower left corner of the front component member 1000 outside the game area 5a. The function display unit 1400 can be visually recognized from the front (player side) through the through hole 111 of the door frame 3 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1. The function display unit 1400 uses a plurality of LEDs based on a control signal from the main control board 1310 to display a game state (game state), a normal lottery result, a special lottery result, and the like.

  As enlargedly shown in FIG. 129, the function display unit 1400 displays a state indicator 1401 including three LEDs for displaying the game state, and an ordinary lottery result that is drawn by a game ball passing through the gate portion 2003. A normal symbol display 1402 consisting of two LEDs, a normal holding display 1403 consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of holdings relating to the passage of the game ball to the gate portion 2003, and the acceptance of the game ball into the first starting opening 2002. The first special symbol display 1404 consisting of eight LEDs for displaying the result of the first special lottery drawn by, and the second LED consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of reserves for receiving the game ball into the first starting opening 2002 One special reserved number display unit 1405 and a second special lottery result selected by receiving game balls into the second starting opening 2004. Second special symbol display 1406 consisting of the LED, a second special holding number display 1407 consisting of two LEDs for displaying the holding number related to the acceptance of the game ball to the second starting opening 2004, and the first special lottery When the result or the second special lottery result is "big hit" or the like, or when the game ball received in the special winning opening 2005 is received in the first receiving opening 2007, the number of times the opening / closing pattern of the special winning opening 2005 is repeated ( It mainly includes a round display 1408 including five LEDs for displaying the number of rounds.

  In this function display unit 1400, the number of holdings, symbols and the like can be displayed by appropriately turning on / off, blinking, etc. of the provided LEDs.

[5-6. Peripheral control unit]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1500 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 131 and 133 and the like. The peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side of the main effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. The peripheral control unit 1500 is a peripheral control board 1510 (see FIG. 169) that controls the effect presented to the player based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral control board that houses the peripheral control board 1510. And a box 1520. Although not shown, the peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit for controlling a light emission effect, a sound effect, a movable effect, and the like, and an effect display control unit for controlling an effect image. .

  The peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 includes a main control board 1310, an effect operation unit 400, various decorative boards on the door frame 3 side, a main effect display device 1600, a first effect drive board 3032, and a second effect drive board 3033. Etc. are connected.

[5-7. Main effect display device]
Next, the main effect display device 1600 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 132 and 133. The main effect display device 1600 is arranged in the center of the game area 5a in a front view, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. The main effect display device 1600 is removably attached to the rear surface of the rear wall of the back box, approximately in the center thereof. This main effect display device 1600 can be viewed from the front side (player side) through the frame of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled. The main effect display device 1600 is a full-color liquid crystal display device using a white LED as a backlight. The main effect display device 1600 is connected to the peripheral control board and can display a predetermined still image or moving image.

  The main effect display device 1600 includes two left fixing pieces 1601 protruding outward from the left side surface in front view and a right fixing piece 1602 protruding outward from the right side surface in front view. This main effect display device 1600 has two fixing grooves 3010c that are open to the left inner peripheral surface in a front view in a frame-shaped liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b of a back box 3010 described later with the liquid crystal screen facing forward. After inserting the two left fixing pieces 1601 from diagonally rear of the back box 3010, the right fixing piece 1602 side is moved forward, and the right fixing piece 1602 is inserted into the opening of the lock mechanism 3020. Is attached to the back box 3010 by sliding it downward.

[5-8. Overall structure of table unit]
Next, the overall configuration of the table unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 132 and 133. The front unit 2000 of the game board 5 is attached to the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 from the front, the front end projects forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110, and a part of the rear end is the opening 1112. Through, and projects rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110.

  The table unit 2000 of the present embodiment is capable of accepting game balls that have been driven into the game area 5a, and has a plurality of (four in this case) general winning openings 2001 that are always open, and a plurality of general winning openings 2001. Is a first starting opening 2002 which is always open to receive a game ball at a different position in the game area 5a, and a gate portion 2003 which is attached at a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects passage of the game ball. And, to the second starting port 2004 and the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, in which the game ball can be received according to the ordinary lottery result that is selected by the game ball passing through the gate portion 2003. It is provided with a special winning opening 2005 that allows the game balls to be received in either of the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result that is drawn by accepting the game balls.

  A plurality of (four in this case) general winning openings 2001 are arranged in the lower part in the game area 5a, and three are arranged on the left side and one on the right side with respect to the center in the left-right direction. The first starting port 2002 is arranged right above the out port 1008 at the lowermost end in the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction. The gate portion 2003 is arranged near the right end in the front view in the game area 5a and below the center in the vertical direction. The second starting port 2004 is arranged immediately below the gate unit 2003. The special winning opening 2005 is arranged at the height between the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004 at the upper right of the general winning opening 2001 on the right side of the center in the left-right direction.

  Further, the table unit 2000 is mounted on the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction immediately above the outlet 1008, and has a starting opening unit 2100 having one general winning opening 2001 and a first starting opening 2002, The start unit 2100 is mounted on the left side of the starting unit 2100 along the inner rail 1002 and has two general winning openings 2001, and the side unit 2200 is mounted on the right side of the starting unit 2100 when viewed from the front. An attacker unit 2400 having one general winning opening 2001, a gate portion 2003, a second starting opening 2004, a big winning opening 2005, a receiving space 2006, a first receiving opening 2007, and a second receiving opening 2008, and a game. And a frame-shaped center accessory 2500 attached to substantially the center of the region 5a.

[5-8a. Starter unit]
Next, the starting port unit 2100 of the front unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 137. 137 (a) is a perspective view of the starting opening unit and the side unit of the front unit of the game board as seen from the front, and FIG. 137 (b) is a perspective view of the (a) as seen from the rear. The starting opening unit 2100 is arranged directly above the out opening 1008 in the vicinity of the lower end of the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a, and is attached to the panel board 1110 from the front. The starting opening unit 2100 is formed at a position directly above the out opening 1008 at the uppermost position, and is a size that can accept only one game ball at a time and is always open upward as a first starting unit. Mouth 2002, and one general prize that is formed below the first starting port 2002 and on the left side in front view, and is always open upward with a size that can accept only one game ball at a time. And a mouth 2001.

  The starting opening unit 2100 is transparent except for the front faces of the general winning opening 2001 and the first starting opening 2002, and the rear side of the back unit 3000 is passed through the rear side (through the transparent panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100). The unit 3100) is visible.

  The starting opening unit 2100 is attached to the panel plate 1110 so that the general winning opening 2001 and the first starting opening 2002 project forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110, and then open upward, so that the first starting operation is started. The mouth 2002 is located directly below the center of the stage 2530 of the center accessory 2500 described later. Therefore, when the game ball is discharged downward from the center of the stage 2530, it is received in the first starting opening 2002 with a very high probability. The starting opening unit 2100 can guide the game balls received in the general winning opening 2001 and the first starting opening 2002 to the rear of the panel plate 1110 and deliver them to the back front decoration unit 3100 in the back unit 3000. The game balls received in the general winning opening 2001 and the first starting opening 2002 are respectively detected by the general winning opening sensor 3101 and the first starting opening sensor 3102 of the back front decoration unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 (see FIG. 169). ).

[5-8b. Side unit]
Next, the side unit 2200 of the table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 137. The side unit 2200 extends in an arc shape along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the starting opening unit 2100 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the panel board 1110 from the front. The side unit 2200 includes two general winning openings 2001 arranged near the right end in front view, and a right shelf 2201 arranged above the two general winning openings 2001 and inclined downward toward the right. And a left shelf 2202 that is disposed above the right shelf 2201 near the left end in front view and is inclined so as to decrease toward the right.

  One of the two general winning openings 2001 of the side unit 2200 is opened diagonally upward to the right at the lower right end of the right shelf 2201, and the other is diagonally left at the lower left of the right shelf 2201. It opens upward. The two general winning openings 2001 in the side unit 2200 are arranged in a row on the left and right so as to face each other. The side unit 2200 is transparent except for the front faces of the two general winning openings 2001 (right shelf 2201) and left shelf 2202, and the rear side (back through the transparent panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100). The front decoration unit 3100) of the unit 3000 can be visually recognized.

  By attaching the side unit 2200 to the front surface of the panel plate 1110, the two general winning openings 2001, the right shelf portion 2201, and the left shelf portion 2202 project forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110, and the rightmost side. The general winning opening 2001 is located at a position slightly higher than the general winning opening 2001 of the starting opening unit 2100. Further, in the side unit 2200 attached to the panel plate 1110, the right shelf 2201 is lower than the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100, and the left shelf 2202 is higher than the first starting opening 2002. It is in the position. The left shelf 2202 of the side unit 2200 has a left end close to the inner rail 1002 of the front component member 1000, and can guide the game ball flowing down along the inner rail 1002 to the right.

  This side unit 2200 can guide the game ball received in the general winning opening 2001 to the rear of the panel plate 1110 and transfer it to the back front decoration unit 3100 in the back unit 3000. The game ball received in the general winning opening 2001 is detected by the general winning opening sensor 3101 of the back front decoration unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 (see FIG. 169).

[5-8c. Attacker unit]
Next, the attacker unit 2400 of the table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 138 and 139. FIG. 138 (a) is a perspective view of the attacker unit in the front unit seen from the front, and FIG. 138 (b) is a perspective view of the attacker unit seen from the back. In addition, FIG. 139 is an explanatory diagram showing a cross section of the flow path of the game ball in the attacker unit. The attacker unit 2400 is arranged in the game area 5a on the right side of the starting opening unit 2100, which is the lower right corner in front view, and is attached to the front surface of the panel board 1110 from the front. This attacker unit 2400 includes one of the four general winning openings 2001, a general winning opening 2001, a gate portion 2003, a second starting opening 2004, a large winning opening 2005, a receiving space 2006, a first receiving opening 2007, and a second receiving opening 2007. It has an entrance 2008.

  The outer shape of the attacker unit 2400 when viewed from the front is formed in an L shape in which the upper end on the right side extends upward from substantially the center in the left-right direction. In this attacker unit 2400, a gate portion 2003 through which game balls vertically flow (passes) is arranged in the upper right corner, and a second starting opening 2004 that can be opened forward is arranged immediately below the gate portion 2003. ing. In addition, the attacker unit 2400 is provided with a special winning opening 2005 that can be opened upward at the lower left of the second starting opening 2004, and is always open diagonally rightward at the lower left of the special winning opening 2005. One general winning opening 2001 is arranged. Further, in the attacker unit 2400, a receiving space 2006 of a predetermined size is arranged below the special winning opening 2005, through which the game balls received in the special winning opening 2005 circulate. Further, in the attacker unit 2400, a first receiving opening 2007 capable of opening upward is arranged in the receiving space 2006, and at the right side of the first receiving opening 2007, the attacker unit 2400 always opens upward. A second receiving port 2008 is arranged.

  In the attacker unit 2400, the general winning opening 2001 is opened with a size slightly larger than the game ball, and the gate portion 2003 is vertically penetrated with a size slightly larger than the game ball. Further, in the attacker unit 2400, the second starting opening 2004 is opened to the front in a size slightly larger than the game ball, and the special winning opening 2005 is about 4 times the outer diameter of the game ball in the left-right direction. It opens upwards with a width of 5 times.

  The attacker unit 2400 is received by a gate sensor 2401 for detecting a game ball passing through the gate portion 2003, a second start hole sensor 2402 for detecting a game ball received in the second start opening 2004, and a special winning opening 2005. A special winning opening sensor 2403 for detecting a game ball, a first receiving hole sensor 2404 for detecting a game ball received in the first receiving hole 2007, and a first detecting ball for a game ball received in the second receiving hole 2008 Two receiving port sensors 2405.

  The attacker unit 2400 opens and closes the second starting opening 2004 and the second opening opening door 2411, and opens and closes the second starting opening door 2411 according to the result of the normal lottery that is drawn by the passage of the game balls of the gate portion 2003. Mouth solenoid 2412, a special winning opening door 2413 that can open and close the special winning opening 2005, a first special lottery by receiving the game ball into the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004 An attacker solenoid 2414 that opens and closes in accordance with the lottery result or the second special lottery result and the first reception opening 2007 are opened and closed (the game balls that are received in the special winning opening 2005 and circulate in the reception space 2006 are first reception opening 2007). Alternatively, the V winning opening door 2415 and the V winning opening door 2415 are assigned to either the first receiving opening 2002 or the second starting opening. And a, and V winning hole solenoid 2416 to open and close in response to the first special lottery result is the lottery or the second special lottery result by accepting game balls to 004.

  The attacker unit 2400 extends vertically in the upper right corner in a front view, and the gate portion 2003 and the second starting opening 2004 are arranged at the upper end and the lower end, respectively, and a gate passage 2421 through which a game ball can flow, A left side passage 2422 that extends vertically on the left side of the gate portion 2003 and allows game balls to flow, and a right side passage 2423 that extends vertically on the right side of the gate portion 2003 and allows passage of game balls, and a gate passage 2421, Below the left side passage 2422 and the right side passage 2423, and above the special winning opening 2005, the right side passage 2423 extends to the left from the bottom of the right side passage 2423 so that the left end side becomes lower, and the game balls can be distributed. And a passage 2424.

  Further, the attacker unit 2400 vertically extends on both left and right sides of the second starting port 2004 and forms a part of the gate passage 2421, and the second starting port left wall part 2425 and the second starting port right wall part 2426 are formed. And a left side passage bottom wall portion 2427 extending from the upper end of the second starting opening left wall portion 2425 toward the upper left and forming a bottom wall of the left side passage 2422, and a height lower than the gate portion 2003. From the lower end of the right side passage right wall portion 2428 and the right side passage right wall portion 2428 that vertically extends to a height below the second starting opening 2004 and forms the right wall of the right side passage 2423. An attacker passage bottom wall portion 2429 that extends to the left in the left-right direction of the special winning opening 2005 so that the left end side becomes lower, and forms the bottom wall of the attacker passage 2424, and the special winning opening 200. Left side from the left end of the is provided with a release ledge 2430 which extends to the left so as to be lower.

  As shown in FIG. 139, the gate passage 2421 communicates with the left side passage 2422 and the right side passage 2423 at a portion between the gate portion 2003 and the second starting opening 2004 so that game balls can pass therethrough. . The second starting opening 2004 prevents the game ball from being directly received from the left side passage 2422 and the right side passage 2423 by the left and right second starting opening left wall portions 2425 and 2426. There is. The downstream end of the left side passage 2422 merges with the gate passage 2421 above the second starting port 2004 by the left side passage bottom wall portion 2427. The attacker passage 2424 extends to the left of the left side passage 2422. In addition, the big winning opening 2005 that is long open to the left and right has its right end located substantially directly below the second starting opening 2004, and part of its upper side (opening) is covered by the attacker passage bottom wall portion 2429. There is.

  The second starting port door 2411 is capable of closing the second starting port 2004 that is open to the front from the front, and is rotatable around the axis with the lower side extending left and right in the vicinity of the lower end of the second starting port 2004. Installed. The second starting opening door 2411 is rotated (rotated) so that the upper side moves forward by the driving of the starting opening solenoid 2412, thereby opening the second starting opening 2004 and closing the gate passage 2421. The game ball that has flowed down in the gate passage 2421 or the left side passage 2422 can be guided to the second starting port 2004 side and received in the second starting port 2004. The second starting port door 2411 closes the second starting port 2004 when the starting port solenoid 2412 is OFF (when not energized), and opens the second starting port 2004 when the starting port solenoid is ON (when energized). Let

  The special winning opening door 2413 is formed in a plate shape that extends in the front-rear direction and extends in the left-right direction so that the left end is lowered. It is possible. The special winning opening door 2413 closes the special winning opening 2005 by advancing, and guides the game balls circulating on the attacker passage bottom wall portion 2429 of the attacker passage 2424 to the left and then releases the shelving portion 2430. Can be handed over. The special winning opening door 2413 is retracted by driving the attacker solenoid 2414 to open the special winning opening 2005, flow through any of the gate passage 2421, the left side passage 2422, and the right side passage 2423, and then the attacker. The game ball released from the left end of the attacker passage bottom wall portion 2429 of the passage 2424 can be received in the special winning opening 2005. The special winning opening door 2413 closes the special winning opening 2005 when the attacker solenoid 2414 is OFF (non-energized), and opens the special winning opening 2005 when the attacker solenoid 2414 is ON (energized).

  The V winning opening door 2415 is formed in a plate shape that extends in the front-rear direction and extends in the left-right direction in the receiving space 2006 so that the right end is lowered. It is possible to open and close the existing first entrance 2007 (V winning opening). The V winning opening door 2415 closes the first entrance 2007 by advancing, and guides the game ball received in the big winning opening 2005 to the right to constantly open the second receiving opening. Acceptable to 2008. In addition, the V winning opening door 2415 is driven backward by the driving of the V winning opening solenoid 2416 to open the first receiving opening 2007, and with a high probability, the first winning opening of the game ball received in the big winning opening 2005. Acceptable for 2007. The V winning opening door 2415 closes the first receiving opening 2007 when the V winning opening solenoid 2416 is OFF (when not energized), and the first receiving opening when the V winning opening solenoid 2416 is ON (when energized). Release 2007. In other words, the V winning opening door 2415 can distribute the game balls received in the special winning opening 2005 to either the first receiving opening 2007 or the second receiving opening 2008.

  In this attacker unit 2400, the gate passage 2421 is located below the opening on the downstream side of the right guide passage 2540 in the center accessory 2500 described later in a state where the gate passage 2421 is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110, and The portion 2003 and the second starting port 2004 are located above the stage 2530 of the center accessory 2500. Further, the special winning opening 2005 is located above the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100, and the general winning opening 2001 is located below the first starting opening 2002.

  Next, the flow of game balls in the attacker unit 2400 will be described. Since the gate portion 2003 of the attacker unit 2400 is located above the stage 2530 of the center accessory 2500 when assembled on the game board 5, the gate portion 2003 remains open even if the game ball is discharged from the stage 2530. It never passes. Therefore, only the game ball flowing down the right side (right guide passage 2540) of the center accessory 2500 may pass through the gate portion 2003. A left side passage 2422, a gate passage 2421, and a right side passage 2423 are opened side by side from the left in the downstream of the right guide passage 2540, and the game ball flowing down the right side of the center accessory 2500 is any of them. Will enter. Since the upper end opening of the gate passage 2421 in which the gate portion 2003 is arranged is opened upward below the opening on the downstream side of the right guide passage 2540 in the center accessory 2500, the upper end opening of the center accessory 2500 is open. The game ball flowing down the right side enters the gate passage 2421 with a high probability and passes through the gate portion 2003.

  Then, the game ball that has passed through the gate portion 2003 is discharged from the gate passage 2421 to the attacker passage 2424 through the front of the second start opening door 2411 that closes the second start opening 2004 immediately therebelow. At this time, if the second starting opening door 2411 is rotated forward and is in the open position, the game ball that has passed through the gate portion 2003 comes into contact with the back surface of the second starting opening door 2411 and is in the second position. It will be guided to the starting port 2004 side and will be received in the second starting port 2004. The second starting door 2411 corresponds to the ordinary lottery result (ordinary lottery result is “normal win”) when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003 (the game ball is detected by the gate sensor 2401). Since it is driven, the lottery time of the ordinary lottery result, the opening / closing timing of the second starting opening door 2411, etc. are appropriately set to allow the game ball itself for which "ordinary hit" is drawn to the second starting opening 2004. be able to.

  The game ball received in the second starting port 2004 is detected by the second starting port sensor 2402 and then discharged downward (on the substrate holder 1200) at the rear side of the game panel 1100.

  Since the gate passage 2421 communicates with the lower end of the left side passage 2422 on the left side of the portion between the gate portion 2003 and the second starting port 2004, it enters the left side passage 2422 on the left side of the gate portion 2003. The game ball thus played can be circulated to the front side of the second starting opening 2004 without passing through the gate portion 2003. Therefore, in the state where the second starting opening door 2411 is moved to the open position and the second starting opening 2004 can be received, the game ball that has passed through the gate portion 2003 or the game ball that has flowed through the left side passage 2422. Can be accepted into the second starting port 2004 with an extremely high probability. Since the right side of the gate passage 2421 between the gate portion 2003 and the second starting port 2004 communicates with the middle of the right side passage 2423, the gate passage 2421 is connected to the right side passage 2423 on the right side of the gate portion 2003. The entered game ball may be accepted in the second starting opening 2004. On the other hand, a game ball passing through the gate portion 2003 or flowing through the left side passage 2422 may enter the right side passage 2423 through a portion of the gate passage 2421 communicating with the right side passage 2423, It does not always pass in front of the second starting port 2004 (second starting port door 2411).

  If the game ball flowing down the right side of the center accessory 2500 is not received in the second starting port 2004, it is discharged from the lower end of the gate passage 2421 or the right side passage 2423 to the attacker passage 2424.

  The game ball released to the attacker passage 2424 is guided to the left along the inclination of the attacker passage bottom wall portion 2429, and the big winning opening door closing the big winning opening 2005 from the left end of the attacker passage bottom wall portion 2429. It is discharged downward from the left end of the discharge shelf 2430 via 2413. At this time, when the special winning opening door 2413 that closes the special winning opening 2005 is retracted and the special winning opening 2005 is opened, the game balls released into the attacker passage 2424 are highly likely to have the big winning opening. Accepted in 2005. The game ball received in the special winning opening 2005 is sent to the receiving space 2006 after being detected by the special winning hole sensor 2403, and is either the first receiving opening 2007 or the second receiving opening 2008 by the V winning opening door 2415. Be assigned to.

  The game ball received in the first entrance 2007 or the second entrance 2008 is detected by the first entrance sensor 2404 or the second entrance sensor 2405, and then downward (substrate holder) on the rear side of the game panel 1100. 1200).

  The game ball discharged downward from the discharge shelf 2430 may be received in one general winning opening 2001 arranged below. The game ball received in the general winning opening 2001 of the attacker unit 2400 is guided to the rear side of the panel board 1110 and then transferred to the back front decoration unit 3100 in the back unit 3000. On the other hand, the game balls not received in the general winning opening 2001 pass through the out opening 1008 at the lower end of the game area 5a and are discharged downward (on the substrate holder 1200) at the rear side of the game panel 1100.

[5-8d. Center goods]
Next, the center accessory 2500 of the table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 140. FIG. 140 (a) is a perspective view of the center accessory in the front unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 140 (b) is a perspective view of the center accessory viewed from the rear. The center accessory 2500 is arranged in the game area 5a, above the starting opening unit 2100 and the side unit 2200, and slightly above the center in the front view, and is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. Has been. The center accessory 2500 is formed in a frame shape, and the main effect display device 1600 arranged behind the game panel 1100 and various effect units and the like provided in the back unit 3000 can be visually recognized from the front through the frame. You can

  The frame-shaped center accessory 2500 has the entire circumference excluding the lower side projecting forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, and the game ball hit in the game area 5a is in the frame. It cannot be entered.

  The center accessory 2500 has a warp entrance 2520 in which a game ball in the game area 5a is opened so that the game ball in the game area 5a can enter the outer peripheral surface on the left side in front view, and the game ball that has entered the warp entrance 2520 can be discharged into the frame. It is provided with a warp outlet 2522 that is open, and a stage 2530 that can be released into the game area 5a after rolling the game ball emitted from the warp outlet 2522 in the left-right direction.

  The stage 2530 of the center accessory 2500 has a curved shape in which the center side in the left-right direction is recessed, and corresponds to a position directly above the first start opening 2002 of the start opening unit 2100, that is, the center accessory 2500 is displayed on the game panel 1100 (panel board). 1111) is formed in a wavy shape such that the position of the center in the left-right direction is slightly higher than the left and right sides thereof. In this stage 2530, a portion (top portion) slightly higher than both left and right sides in the center of the left and right direction and a lowest portion (valley portion) on both left and right sides thereof are inclined so as to become lower toward the front. Therefore, the game balls can be released from these parts into the game area 5a.

  In the state where the center accessory 2500 is assembled to the game board 5, the central portion in the left-right direction of the stage 2530 (the top) is located directly above the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100. As a result, when the game ball is discharged from the center of the stage 2530, it is received in the first starting opening 2002 with an extremely high probability.

  In addition, the center accessory 2500 is provided with a right guide passage 2540 that guides the game ball that has flowed down along the outer peripheral surface on the right side in front view to the left and guides it downward. The right guide passage 2540 is formed such that the downstream end of the right guide passage 2540 is located slightly left of the gate unit 2003 of the attacker unit 2400 with the center accessory 2500 assembled to the game board 5. There is.

  Further, the center accessory 2500 includes a logo decoration unit 2550 which is arranged in the upper part of the frame and has a predetermined logo (not shown) according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1. The logo decoration unit 2550 includes a translucent logo decoration body 2551 in which a predetermined logo is formed in a relief shape, and a plurality of logo decoration units 2550 attached to the rear side of the logo decoration body 2551 and capable of irradiating light forward. And a logo decoration substrate 2552 on which the LED of FIG. In the logo decoration unit 2550, the logo decoration body 2551 can be appropriately illuminated and decorated by the LEDs of the logo decoration substrate 2552. The logo decoration unit 2550 is formed to be located above the main effect display device 1600 in a front view when the center accessory 2500 is assembled to the game board 5.

  This center accessory 2500 is formed so that the outer peripheral surface on the right side is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball from the right rail 1005 in the front component member 1000 when assembled on the game board 5. Therefore, when the game ball circulates on the right side of the center character 2500, it flows along the outer peripheral surface on the right side of the center character 2500, and all the game spheres flowing on the right side of the center character 2500 are in the right guide passage 2540. Enter and be guided. Accordingly, when the game ball is driven into the game area 5a so as to flow on the right side of the center accessory 2500 (so-called right-handed), the game ball can be passed through the gate portion 2003 with high probability. At the same time, a game ball can be accepted with a high probability of being opened (opened).

[5-9. Overall configuration of back unit]
Next, the overall configuration of the back unit 3000 in the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 141 and 142. FIG. 141 is a perspective view of the back unit of the game board seen from the front, and FIG. 142 is a perspective view of the back unit of the game board seen from the back. The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100. A main effect display device 1600 and a peripheral control unit 1500 are attached to the rear side of the back unit 3000.

  The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and has a box-like shape having an open front, and a back box 3010 having a square opening 3010a in the rear wall, and the back unit 3010. A lock mechanism 3020 for detachably attaching the effect display device 1600, a panel relay board 3031 attached to the left end in rear view below the opening 3010a in the rear surface of the back box 3010, and a rear surface of the back box 3010. A first effect drive board 3032 attached to the rear view right side of the panel relay board 3031, and a second effect drive board 3033 attached to the rear view right side of the first effect drive board 3032 on the rear surface of the back box 3010, Is equipped with.

  Also, the back unit 3000 covers the rear side of the first effect drive board 3032 so as to cover the rear side of the first effect drive board 3032 and the first effect drive board cover 3034 attached to the back box 3010. The second production drive substrate cover 3035 attached to the back box 3010.

  In addition, the back unit 3000 includes a frame-shaped back front decoration unit 3100 attached along the outer peripheral edge at the front end of the back box 3010, and a rear side of the front decoration unit 3100 in the back box 3010 more than the opening 3010a. A back-up movable production unit 3200 attached to the upper side, and a back-rear central movable production unit 3300 attached to the front side of the rear wall of the back box 3010 behind the back-up movable production unit 3200 in the back box 3010. A rear rear left movable effect unit 3400 and a rear rear right movable effect unit 3500, which are attached to the rear rear central movable effect unit 3300 so as to be separated from each other, are provided.

[5-9a. Back box]
Next, the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 141 and 142. The back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 has a box-shaped opening 3010a that is open at the front and penetrates the back wall in a rectangular shape, and a flat plate frame-shaped that projects backward from the periphery of the opening 3010a. A liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b, two fixing grooves 3010c that are recessed outward from the inside of the frame on the right side of the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b in a rear view, and into which the left fixing piece 1601 of the main effect display device 1600 is inserted. A cutout portion 3010d is formed by cutting out from the rear end to the rear wall of the back box 3010 at the vertical center of the left side of the attachment portion 3010b as viewed from the rear, and the lock mechanism 3020 is attached.

  The opening 3010a of the back box 3010 is formed to have substantially the same size as the display screen of the main effect display device 1600. Further, the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b is formed in a size that allows the main effect display device 1600 to be fitted into the frame. In the back box 3010, the lock mechanism 3020 is attached to the rear surface of the notch 3010d on the rear surface so as to be slidable up and down.

  Further, the back box 3010 includes a flat plate-shaped fixing piece portion 3010e extending outward from the front end. The fixed piece portion 3010e is attached to the panel holder 1120 in a state where the front surface is in contact with the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100. The back box 3010 has bosses and mounting holes for mounting the movable effect units and the like formed at appropriate positions.

[5-9b. Back movable production unit]
Next, the back-up movable effect unit 3200 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 143 to 148. FIG. 143 is a perspective view of the back upper movable effect unit in the back unit seen from the front, and FIG. 144 is a perspective view of the back upper movable effect unit in the back unit seen from the back. FIG. 145 is an exploded perspective view of the back raising / lowering unit of the back back movable effect unit as seen from the front side together with the back top moving main body unit, and FIG. 146 is an exploded perspective view of the back side raising / lowering unit of the back top moving effect unit. It is an exploded perspective view seen from back together with a back upper movable main unit. FIG. 147 is an exploded perspective view of the back movable body unit of the back movable production unit disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 148 is an exploded perspective view of the back movable body unit of the back movable production unit disassembled and seen from behind. It is an exploded perspective view.

  The back-up movable effect unit 3200 is attached to the rear side of the front decoration unit 3100 in the back box 3010 and above the opening 3010a. The back side movable effect unit 3200 includes a back side lifting unit 3210 mounted in the back box 3010, and a back side movable main unit 3230 that is moved up and down by the back side lifting unit 3210.

  The back up / down lifting unit 3210 is a flat plate-shaped lifting unit base 3211 mounted in the back box 3010, and a circle for projecting forward from the lower right corner of the lifting / lowering unit base 3211 to rotatably mount the back up movable main body unit 3230. A column-shaped lifting / lowering support shaft 3212, a back-up / down drive motor 3213 mounted on the rear surface of the up-and-down unit base 3211, and having a rotation shaft that extends forward through the lift-unit base 3211, and back-up / down drive. A spur gear-shaped lift drive gear 3214 attached to the rotating shaft of the motor 3213; and a spur gear-shaped lift relay gear 3215 meshing with the lift drive gear 3214 and rotatably attached to the lift unit base 3211. , The operating gear portion 3216a that meshes with the lifting relay gear 3215, and the operating gear portion 3216a An extending portion 3216b extending outward in the radial direction, a cylindrical drive pin 3216c protruding forward from the vicinity of the tip of the extending portion 3216b, and a flat plate-like lifting formed at the tip of the extending portion 3216b It has a detection piece 3216d, and is provided with a lifting link gear member 3216 rotatably attached to the lifting unit base 3211.

  The rear lifting unit 3210 has a drive hole 3217a through which the drive pin 3216c of the lifting link gear member 3216 is rotatably inserted and which penetrates forward and backward on one end side, and on the other end side. Attached to the front of the lifting unit base 3211 and a rod-shaped lifting link member 3217 that has a working hole 3217b that penetrates the working pin 3231b of the back movable body base 3231 of the back movable body unit 3230. A stopper member 3218 that regulates the rotation end of the ascending / descending link gear member 3216 in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, and a first effect drive board 3032 and a second effect drive board that are attached to the stopper member 3218. 3033 and a back upper rotation drive motor 3235 of the back upper movable main body unit 3230 and a back upper device. A back relay board 3219 that relays the connection with the board 3234, and a back lift detection sensor 3220 that is attached to the stopper member 3218 and can detect the lift detection piece 3216d of the lift link gear member 3216 are provided. There is.

  The lifting unit base 3211 is formed of a metal plate. The elevating unit base 3211 is provided with a lower stopper portion 3211a that is bent forward and extends vertically and frontward and rearward in a portion below and to the left of the portion to which the elevating support shaft 3212 is attached. A plate-shaped impact absorbing material 3221 is attached to the surface of the lower stopper portion 3211a that faces the right side. The lower stopper portion 3211a is formed so that the back upper movable main body base 3231 of the back upper movable main body unit 3230 abuts via the shock absorbing material 3221. The rotation end (the downward movement end of the free end (right end in front view) of the back movable body unit 3230) is restricted.

  The lifting drive gear 3214 and the lifting relay gear 3215 are formed to have the same diameter, and the operating gear portion 3216a of the lifting link gear member 3216 is formed to have a larger diameter than the lifting relay gear 3215. The elevating link gear member 3216 has an extending portion 3216b extending outward in a fan shape from the operating gear portion 3216a. The stopper member 3218 has a flat plate-shaped upper stopper portion 3218a extending forward. The side surface of the extending portion 3216b of the elevating link gear member 3216 is in contact with the surface of the elevating link gear member 3216 facing the lower side of the upper stopper portion 3218a, thereby restricting the rotation end of the elevating link gear member 3216 in the counterclockwise direction. .. In other words, the upper stopper portion 3218a restricts the counterclockwise rotation of the lifting / lowering link gear member 3216, so that the upper / lower movable main body unit 3230 is moved upward through the lifting / lowering link gear member 3216. The moving end (upward end) is regulated.

  The back movable body unit 3230 has a shallow box shape with an open rear side, extends left and right, and a back movable body base 3231 rotatably attached to the back lifting unit 3210 near the left end in front view, and a back movable body. A disk-shaped back upper first rotating decorative body 3232 is rotatably attached around an axis extending back and forth from the right end of the base 3231 to the left, and is arranged in front of the back upper first rotating decorative body 3232. And the back upper second rotary decoration 3233 rotatably attached to the back upper first rotary decoration 3232 at a position eccentric to the axis of the back first rotary decoration 3232, and The back decoration substrate 3234 is attached to the rear surface of the back movable body base 3231 that is behind the one-turn decorative body 3232 and the back second rotating decoration 3233.

  Further, the back movable body unit 3230 is attached to the front surface near the left end of the back movable body base 3231, and the rotation shaft penetrates the back movable body base 3231 and projects rearward. 3235, a spur gear-shaped rotation drive gear 3236 attached to the rotation shaft of the back rotation drive motor 3235, a spur gear-shaped input gear portion 3237a that meshes with the rotation drive gear 3236, and a rear side of the input gear portion 3237a And the output gear portion 3237b having an output gear portion 3237b having a smaller diameter than the input gear portion 3237a meshes with the output gear portion 3237b of the transmission relay gear 3237 and is rotatably attached to the back movable body base 3231. The spur gear-shaped first relay gear 3238 meshes with the first relay gear 3238, and the back movable body base 3231 A spur gear-shaped second relay gear 3239 that is rotatably mounted, and a spur gear-shaped third relay gear that meshes with the second relay gear 3239 and is rotatably mounted on the back movable body base 3231. 3240, a first rotary decorative body gear 3241 that meshes with the third relay gear 3240 and integrally rotates with the back first rotary decorative body 3232, a back upper movable main body base 3231, and a back first rotary decorative body 3232. And a second rotating decorative body gear 3242 in the form of a spur gear, which is arranged between the second rotating decorative body 3233 and the second rotating decorative body 3233, and rotates together with the first rotating decorative body 3232. I have it.

  Further, the back upper movable main body unit 3230 is attached to the back upper movable main body base 3231 and detects a back upper rotation detecting sensor 3245 that detects a rotational position of the back upper first rotating decorative body 3232 and a back upper first rotating decorative body 3232. A shaft core that is arranged on the rear side of 3232 and that extends back and forth on the circumference of a predetermined radius centered on the shaft center of the back upper first rotary decoration body 3232 on the front surface of the back movable body base 3231. A plurality of back-up / down decoration bodies 3246 rotatably mounted around the back-up / down decoration body 3246 attached to the rear side of the back-side first rotation decoration body 3232 are brought into contact with the back-up / down appearance body 3246. Of the first cam member 3247 and the second cam member 3248 that rotate the decoration body 3246 and partially project to the outside of the back first rotation decoration body 3232; It s a plurality of return spring 3249 which is urged to rotate in a direction that does not protrude outward from the back on the first rotating decorative body 3232, and a.

  In addition, the back movable body unit 3230 includes a base cover 3250 attached to the back of the back movable body base 3231 so as to cover the rotary drive gear 3236 and the transmission relay gear 3237 from the rear side, and the back decoration substrate 3234. And a substrate cover 3251 attached to the rear side of the back movable body base 3231 so as to cover the rear side.

  The back upper movable main body base 3231 is formed in a disk shape in which the right half extending to the left and right is larger in diameter than the left half. The back movable body base 3231 penetrates in the front-rear direction at substantially the center in the up-down direction at the left end, and is attached to the lifting support shaft 3212 of the back lifting unit 3210 so as to be rotatable. And a working pin 3231b that projects forward in a cylindrical shape near the lower end of the portion and is rotatably inserted into a working hole 3217b of the elevating link member 3217, and a cylindrical shape that projects forward in the approximate center of the disk-shaped portion of the right half. The boss portion 3231c, the first rotation support hole 3231d that penetrates the front and rear at the center of the boss portion 3231c, and is used to rotatably attach the back first rotation decoration body 3232, and the first rotation support hole 3231d. A spur gear-shaped fixed gear portion 32 that is formed on the core on the outer periphery near the front end of the boss portion 3231c and that meshes with the second rotary decorative body gear 3242. Includes a 1e, the.

  In addition, the back movable body base 3231 has a plurality of openings 3231f through which the first LED 3234a of the back decoration substrate 3234 faces forward, and the outer periphery of the disk-shaped portion, which penetrates in the front-rear direction in the disc-shaped portion of the right half. On the circumference of a predetermined radius around the first rotation support hole 3231d in the vicinity, a plurality of cylindrical projections 3246 projecting forward in cylindrical shapes from positions at equal intervals in the circumferential direction are rotatably attached. The support pins 3231g, the immersing stoppers 3231h protruding forward in the vicinity of the respective support pins 3231g, and restricting the rotation end of the back side retractable decorative body 3246 in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, and the respective support pins 3231g. Appearance stopper 323 that protrudes forward in the vicinity and restricts the rotating end of the back-and-out appearance decorative body 3246 in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front. It includes a i, a.

  The back upper first rotary decorative body 3232 has an outer shape formed in a polygonal shape, and is formed larger than the right half disk-shaped portion of the back upper movable main body base 3231. Further, the back first rotating decorative body 3232 is decorated with a swirling shape that is angular, and has a translucent portion that is colored and has a semitransparent translucent property and a metallic luster plated layer. And parts of. The back upper first rotary decorative body 3232 has a cylindrical shape that protrudes rearward from the center of the rear surface and is rotatably inserted into the first rotation support hole 3231d of the back movable body base 3231. The one shaft part 3232a is provided with a second rotation support hole 3232b penetrating forward and backward at an eccentric position and for rotatably mounting the second upper backside rotating decorative body 3233. The first shaft portion 3232a of the upper back first rotating decorative body 3232 has the first rotating decorative body gear 3241 attached to the rear end. In addition, the second shaft portion 3233a of the second upper back rotating decorative body 3233 is rotatably inserted into the second rotation support hole 3232b.

  The back upper second rotary decoration 3233 has a polygonal outer shape, and is formed smaller than the back first rotating decoration 3232. More specifically, the back upper second rotary decorative body 3233 has a diameter that is about half the diameter of the back upper first rotating decorative body 3232. In addition, the second upper back decorative body 3233 is decorated with an angular spiral shape, and has a translucent colored portion and a non-translucent portion including a metallic luster plated layer. And parts of. The back upper second rotary decorative body 3233 has a cylindrical shape protruding rearward from the center of the rear surface and has a second shaft portion 3233a rotatably inserted into the second rotary support hole 3232b of the back upper first rotary decorative body 3232. I have it. The second shaft decoration 3233a of the upper back second rotary decoration 3233 has a second rotary decoration gear 3242 attached to its rear end.

  The back decoration substrate 3234 irradiates a plurality of first LEDs 3234a capable of irradiating light forward, and irradiates light in a direction away from the boss portion 3231c (first rotation support hole 3231d) of the back movable main body base 3231. And a plurality of possible second LEDs 3234b. The plurality of first LEDs 3234a and the second LEDs 3234b are mounted on the front surface, respectively. The backside decorative substrate 3234 includes a flat cable 3234c connected to the backside relay substrate 3219 of the backside lifting unit 3210. The flat cable 3234c is sandwiched between the back movable body base 3231 and the base cover 3250.

  When assembled to the back movable body unit 3230, the plurality of first LEDs 3234a of the back decorative substrate 3234 face the front from the plurality of openings 3231f of the back movable body base 3231 respectively. By the LED 3234a, it is possible to irradiate light from the rear side of the back first rotating decorative body 3232 and the back second rotating decorative body 3233 to make them emit light.

  The plurality of second LEDs 3234b of the backside decorative substrate 3234, in a state of being assembled to the backside movable main body unit 3230, are in the vicinity of the respective support pins 3231g in the backside movable main body base 3231 (centering around the first rotation support hole 3231d). Two near each other in the counterclockwise direction. The second LED 3234b emits light in a state where the back-side appearance / decoration body 3246 is partially projected, so that a portion of the back-side appearance / decoration body 3246 protruding outside the back-side first rotation decoration body 3232 is illuminated. It can be decorated (see FIG. 154 (b)).

  In the speed change relay gear 3237, the input gear portion 3237a is formed to have a larger diameter than the rotary drive gear 3236 and the second relay gear 3239, and the output gear portion 3237b has a smaller diameter than the second relay gear 3239 and the rotary drive gear 3236. They have the same diameter. The first relay gear 3238 is formed to have the same diameter as the input gear portion 3237a of the variable speed relay gear 3237. The second relay gear 3239 is formed to have the same diameter as the third relay gear 3240 and the first rotary decorative body gear 3241.

  Each of the plurality of upper and lower decorative objects 3246 is formed in the same shape. The plurality of back and forth decoration bodies 3246 are provided with a first appearance decoration body 3246A, a second appearance decoration body 3246B, a third appearance decoration body 3246C, a fourth appearance decoration body 3426D, and a fifth appearance decoration body 3246E. ing. The underside appearance decoration 3246 penetrates back and forth and is rotatably attached by the support pin 3231g of the underside movable main body base 3231 being inserted, and extends outward from the base 3246a. A projecting / retracting decorative portion 3246b on which mold decoration is formed, a projecting portion 3246c extending from the base portion 3246a in a direction different from the projecting / retracting decorative portion 3246b, and a columnar projecting portion from the tip of the projecting portion 3246c toward the front. And an abutting portion 3246d. The underside appearance decoration 3246 is formed of a transparent member, and a part of the appearance decoration 3246b is decorated with a plating layer having metallic luster. In addition, on the rear surface, the back-and-out appearance decorative body 3246 is provided with a plurality of concentric lens portions 3246e while extending in an arc shape having a triangular shape with a cross section protruding rearward and having a base portion 3246a as a center. There is.

  The back side retractable decoration body 3246 is assembled such that the retractable decoration portion 3246b is located between the immersion stopper 3231h and the appearance stopper 3231i in the back side movable body base 3231 when assembled to the back side movable body unit 3230. Therefore, the return spring 3249 is in contact with the retractable stopper 3231h of the back upper movable main body base 3231 by the urging force in the counterclockwise direction in front view (see FIG. 151). In this state, most of the back-side retractable decoration body 3246 is located directly behind the back-side first rotating decoration body 3232, and is invisible from the front (in the retracted position).

  The abutment portion 3246d of the back side projecting / retracting decoration body 3246 is capable of abutting with the first cam member 3247 and the second cam member 3248 attached to the rear side of the back side first rotating decoration body 3232, By contacting the first cam member 3247 or the second cam member 3248 that has moved circumferentially by the rotation of the back upper first rotary decorative body 3232, the base portion 3246a (the back movable body) is resisted against the biasing force of the return spring 3249. The support pin 3231g) of the base 3231 is rotated in the clockwise direction, and the entire back surface retractable decoration body 3246 is rotated in the clockwise direction, so that the retractable decoration portion 3246b is moved to the back surface first rotation decoration body 3232. It moves to the outside further and becomes a state where it can be seen from the front (state of appearance position). In addition, when the back and forth decoration body 3246 is swiftly rotated in the clockwise direction, the appearance and decoration part 3246b is brought into contact with the appearance stopper 3231i of the back and upper movable main body base 3231 to rotate in the further clockwise direction. Is regulated. Then, when the contact between the contact portion 3246d and the first cam member 3247 or the second cam member 3248 is released, the urging force of the return spring 3249 causes the back-side retractable decorative body 3246 to rotate in the counterclockwise direction. , Return to the initial immersion position.

  The first cam member 3247 and the second cam member 3248 rotate the retractable decorative portion 3246b of the back-side retractable decorative body 3246 between an retracted position invisible from the player side and an appearance position visible from the player side. It is a thing. The first cam member 3247 includes a flat plate-shaped rotation detection piece 3247a extending rearward. The rotation detecting piece 3247a is detected by the back upper rotation detecting sensor 3245 attached to the back upper movable main body base 3231 to detect the rotational position of the first back upper rotating decorative body 3232. When the first cam member 3247 and the second cam member 3248 are assembled to the back movable body unit 3230, they are rotated by rotating the back first rotating decorative body 3232 (in a counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front), It is possible to make contact with any one of the contact portions 3246d of the back-up / down appearance decorative body 3246 to rotate the back-up / down appearance decorative body 3246 (clockwise in the front view).

  Further, the first cam member 3247 and the second cam member 3248 have a predetermined angle (about 156 degrees) in the circumferential direction on the circumference of a predetermined radius centered on the first shaft portion 3232a of the upper back first rotating decorative body 3232. ) Mounted separately. More specifically, the first cam member 3247 and the second cam member 3248 are arranged on the rear surface so as to be separated at an angle (72 degrees) different from the angle (72 degrees) at which the plurality (five) of the rear protruding / retracting decorative bodies 3246 are separated. It is attached to the one-turn decorative body 3232. As a result, the timings at which the first cam member 3247 and the second cam member 3248 abut on the abutting portion 3246d of the back-side projecting / retracting decorative body 3246 can be different, and the two back-side projecting / retracting decorative bodies 3246 are different. It can appear and disappear at the timing.

  The back-up movable production unit 3200 has a back-up lifting unit 3210 attached to the upper side of the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 and on the left side of the center in front view, and is provided in the lower right corner of the back-up lifting unit 3210. A back movable body unit 3230 is rotatably attached to the lifting support shaft 3212. More specifically, in the back movable body unit 3230, the left end lifting shaft hole 3231a is rotatably attached to the lifting support shaft 3212 of the back lifting unit 3210, and the lower lifting shaft hole 3231a lower side. The action pin 3231b is connected to the drive pin 3216c of the up-and-down link gear member 3216 in the back and up-down elevator unit 3210 via the up-and-down link member 3217.

  In the back upper movable main body unit 3230, the back upper first rotating decorative body 3232 is rotatably attached to the center of the disk-shaped portion of the right half of the back upper movable main body base 3231, and the back upper second rotating member 3230 is rotated. The decorative body 3233 is rotatably attached to the upper first rotating decorative body 3232 at a position eccentric from the center thereof. More specifically, the back upper first rotating decorative body 3232 has a first shaft portion 3232a extending rearwardly rotatably attached to a first rotation supporting hole 3231d of the back upper movable body base 3231. At the rear end of the first shaft portion 3232a, the rotation from the back rotation drive motor 3235 causes the rotation drive gear 3236, the speed change relay gear 3237, the first relay gear 3238, the second relay gear 3239, and the third relay gear 3240. The first rotating decorative body gear 3241 transmitted via the is attached.

  On the other hand, in the back upper second rotary decorative body 3233, the second shaft portion 3233a extending rearward is rotatably attached to the second rotary support hole 3232b of the back upper first rotary decorative body 3232. The second shaft portion 3233a is provided at its rear end with a second rotary decorative body gear 3242 that meshes with the fixed gear portion 3231e of the back movable body base 3231.

  Further, in the back movable body unit 3230, the back retractable decoration bodies 3246 are rotatably attached to a plurality (five) of support pins 3231g projecting forward in the back movable body base 3231, respectively. The back-and-out appearance decorative body 3246 is urged by a return spring 3249 so as to rotate counterclockwise in a front view.

[5-9b-1. Production by movable production unit on the back]
Next, effects using the back-and-front movable effect unit 3200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 149 to 154 and the like. FIG. 149 (a) is a front view of the back movable art production unit showing the back movable main body unit in a normal raised position, and FIG. 149 (b) is shown in a lowered position where the back movable main body unit is rotated. It is a front view of a back upper movable production unit. FIG. 150 is a front view of the upper back movable main body unit schematically showing the rotation of the first upper back decoration and the revolution of the second upper back decoration. FIG. 151 is a front view of the back movable body unit that schematically shows the movements of the plurality of underside protruding / decremented decorative bodies and the LEDs of the back decoration substrate. FIG. 152 is an explanatory view showing the movement of the back upper second rotating decorative body and the back upper retracting decorative body in the back upper movable main body unit according to the rotation angle of the back upper first rotating decorative body, and FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the movement of the back upper 2nd rotation decoration body and the movement on the back upper retracting decoration body following 152 according to the rotation angle of the back top 1st rotation decoration body. FIG. 154 (a) is a front view of the back movable body unit shown together with the LEDs of the back decorative board in a state in which the back first rotating decorative body is rotated 45 degrees counterclockwise from the normal state, (B) is a sectional view taken along the line TT in (a).

  In the normal state, the back side movable effect unit 3200 is in a state in which the back side movable main body unit 3230 extends left and right on the right side of the back side lifting unit 3210 in a front view. The second upper back decorative body 3233 is in the raised position where it is moving upward. In the state of this raised position, the back upper first rotary decorative body 3232 and the back upper second rotary decorative body 3233 are located on the upper side of the main effect display device 1600 in the front view, and at the same time, the frame of the center accessory 2500. It is located on the right side of the logo decoration unit 2550 in the inside and is in a state visible from the player side (front) (see FIGS. 129 and 135, etc.). In a normal state, the up-and-down detection piece 3216d of the up-and-down link gear member 3216 is in a state of being detected by the back up-and-down up and down detection sensor 3220.

  In a normal (raised position) state in which the back upper movable main body unit 3230 extends substantially horizontally, the back upper first rotating decorative body 3232 and the back upper second rotating member which are attached to the right end side of the back upper movable main unit 3230. Due to the weight (self-weight) of the decorative body 3233 and the like, a force that acts to rotate in the direction in which the right end side moves downward (clockwise direction when viewed from the front) acts around the left end lifting support shaft 3212. . Further, in the back movable body unit 3230, the action pin 3231b attached to the lifting link member 3217 of the back lifting unit 3210 is arranged below the lifting shaft hole 3231a (lift supporting shaft 3212). The action pin 3231b tends to move to the left due to the force of the back movable body unit 3230 to rotate in the clockwise direction. As a result, the lifting link member 3217 attached to the action pin 3231b is pressed leftward via the action pin 3231b by the force of the back movable body unit 3230 to rotate in the clockwise direction. Power is working.

  In this raised position, the extension lines connecting the centers of the drive holes 3217a and the action holes 3217b of the lifting link member 3217 pass above the center of the lifting link gear member 3216. Due to the leftward force acting on the member 3217, the elevating link gear member 3216 tries to rotate in the direction in which the drive pin 3216c inserted in the drive hole 3217a moves upward (counterclockwise direction in front view). Will be done. At this time, since the extending portion 3216b of the lifting link gear member 3216 is in contact with the upper stopper portion 3218a of the stopper member 3218, the lifting link gear member 3216 can rotate further in the counterclockwise direction. Instead, the rotation of the up-and-down link gear member 3216 is restricted and maintained in the stopped state.

  As a result, the back movable body unit 3230 does not rotate in the clockwise direction around the lifting support shaft 3212 due to its own weight, but is maintained (locked) in the raised position. Also, in this state, the force of the back movable body unit 3230 to rotate due to its own weight acts on the upper stopper portion 3218a of the stopper member 3218 via the extending portion 3216b of the lifting link gear member 3216, and Since it does not act on the side of the elevator relay gear 3215 that is meshed with the operating gear portion 3216a of the link gear member 3216, it also acts on the back up elevator drive motor 3213 via the elevator relay gear 3215 and the elevator drive gear 3214. There is no such thing. Therefore, in the normal state (state of the raised position), it is not necessary to drive the back up / down drive motor 3213, and the load on the back up / down drive motor 3213 can be reduced.

  Further, in the back-up movable main body unit 3230, the rotation detection piece 3247a of the first cam member 3247 attached to the back-up first rotation decoration body 3232 is detected by the back-up rotation detection sensor 3245. The rotations of the back upper first rotating decoration 3232 and the back upper second rotating decoration 3233 are stopped. Further, in a normal state, a plurality (five) of the back surface retractable decoration bodies 3246 of the back surface movable main body unit 3230 are attached to the rear side of the back surface first rotating decoration body 3232 by the first cam member 3247 and The second cam member 3248 is not in contact (contact) with any of the second cam members 3248. In this normal state, each of the plurality of underside appearance decorations 3246 is brought into contact with the immersion stopper 3231h that regulates the turning end in the counterclockwise direction in front view by the biasing force of the return spring 3249. Therefore, it is in the state of the immersive position, which is directly behind the first upper rotating decorative body 3232. Therefore, the plurality of back and forth decoration bodies 3246 are invisible from the player side (front side). In addition, in each of the plurality of back-side projecting and retracting ornaments 3246 in the retracted position, the respective contact portions 3246d have the first cam member 3247 attached to the back-side first rotating ornament 3232 and the first cam member 3247. The second cam member 3248 is located on the turning path.

  In this normal state, when the up-and-down link gear member 3216 is rotated in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front by driving the back-and-forth up-and-down drive motor 3213, the drive pin 3216c revolves so as to move downward and leftward. Therefore, due to the revolution of the drive pin 3216c, the elevating link member 3217 attached to the drive pin 3216c is pulled to the left. By pulling the elevating link member 3217 leftward, the action pin 3231b of the back upper movable body base 3231 in the back upper movable body unit 3230 attached to the action hole 3217b of the elevating link member 3217 is pulled leftward. As a result, the back movable body unit 3230 rotates in the clockwise direction as viewed from the front around the lifting support shaft 3212.

  When the back movable body base 3231 of the back movable body unit 3230 comes into contact with the lower stopper portion 3211a of the lifting unit base 3211, the driving of the back lifting drive motor 3213 is stopped, and a further clockwise direction. The rotation to is restricted. In this state, the back upper movable main body unit 3230 is substantially vertically extended, and the back upper first rotary decorative body 3232 and the rear upper second rotary decorative body 3233 are in a lower position in which they are moved downward. (See FIG. 149 (b)).

  Since the shock absorbing material 3221 is attached to the lower stopper portion 3211a, even if the back upper movable body unit 3230 is swiftly rotated (moved) from the raised position to the lowered position, the shock is absorbed to reduce the shock. It is possible to avoid damage to the upper movable body unit 3230. Further, the shock absorbing material 3221 can prevent the back and upper movable main body unit 3230 from bouncing back at the lower stopper portion 3211a, and can be reliably stopped at the lowered position.

  In the state in which the back upper movable main body unit 3230 is moved to the lowered position, the back upper first rotating decorative body 3232 and the rear upper second rotating decorative body 3233 are located at the center of the front surface of the main effect display device 1600 (the game area 5a in front view). (See the center of FIG. 168). As a result, since the back first rotation decorative body 3232 and the back second rotation decorative body 3233 are easily seen from the player side, the player's attention is paid to the back first rotation decorative body 3232 and the back second rotation. The decorative body 3233 can be strongly attracted to the decorative body 3233, and the decoration and the movable effect described later can be enjoyed.

  When the back rotation drive motor 3235 is driven to rotate the first rotary decorative body gear 3241 in the counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front in this lowered position, the back rotation first gear 3241 is rotated through the first shaft portion 3232a. The rotary ornament 3232 will rotate in the counterclockwise direction. When the back first rotating ornament 3232 rotates around the first shaft portion 3232a (first rotation supporting hole 3231d), the second shaft penetrating back and forth at an eccentric position with the first shaft portion 3232a. The rotation support hole 3232b revolves around the first shaft portion 3232a. Since the second shaft portion 3233a of the back upper second rotating decoration body 3233 is rotatably attached to the second rotation supporting hole 3232b, the back upper first rotating decoration body 3232 is centered on the first shaft portion 3232a. When rotated, the second upper rotating decorative body 3233 revolves around the first shaft portion 3232a through the second shaft portion 3233a.

  When the back upper second rotary decorative body 3233 revolves around the first shaft portion 3232a, the second rotary decorative body gear 3242 attached to the second shaft portion 3233a of the back upper second rotary decorative body 3233 also moves to the first position. It revolves around the shaft portion 3232a. The second rotary ornamental gear 3242 meshes with the fixed gear portion 3231e of the back movable body base 3231 formed coaxially with the first shaft portion 3232a. When 3242 revolves around the first shaft portion 3232a (fixed gear portion 3231e), the second rotary decorative body gear 3242 rolls along the outer periphery of the fixed gear portion 3231e due to the meshing of gears. The rotating decorative body gear 3242 will rotate (rotate) around the second shaft portion 3233a (see FIG. 150). Therefore, when the back upper first rotary decorative body 3232 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction by the back upper rotational drive motor 3235, the second back upper rotary decorative body 3233 rotates in the counterclockwise direction while rotating the first shaft portion. It will revolve around 3232a.

  In the back upper movable main body unit 3230, since the two first cam members 3247 and the second cam member 3248 are attached to the rear side of the back upper first rotating decorative body 3232, the back upper first rotating decorative body 3232 rotates. Then, the first cam member 3247 and the second cam member 3248 also rotate (revolve around the first shaft portion 3232a). When the first cam member 3247 and the second cam member 3248 revolve, the first cam member 3247 and the second cam member 3248 come into contact with one of the contact portions 3246d of the plurality of back and forth decorative bodies 3246 at the retracted position, and the return spring 3249 is attached. By pressing the abutting portion 3246d against the force, the back-side projecting / retracting decorative body 3246 is rotated around the support pin 3231g, and the projecting / retracting decorative portion 3246b is seen in a front view from the back-side first rotating decorative body 3232. It can be moved to the appearance position outside (see FIG. 151 and the like).

  The outer periphery of each of the first cam member 3247 and the second cam member 3248 is formed in a rhombus, and the contact portion 3246d slides along the outer periphery of the rhombus as the back upper first rotating decorative body 3232 rotates. Move. The movement of the contact portion 3246d with respect to the first cam member 3247 and the second cam member 3248 will be described in detail. First, the inside of the first cam member 3247 and the second cam member 3248 on the front side in the rotational direction on the outer periphery of the rhombus will be described. It abuts near the front end of the facing side, slides rearward along the side, and then folds back near the rear end of the side and slides forward. Then, after moving from the front end in the rotational direction of the outer periphery of the diamond to the side facing the outer side, slide backward along the side facing the outer side and separate from the rear end of the rear side facing the outer side. Behaves like

  The movement of the underside retractable decorative body 3246 due to the rotation of the underside first rotating decorative body 3232 will be described with reference to FIGS. 152 and 153. 152 (a) to (c) and (d) to (f) in FIG. 153 show a counterclockwise rotation of the first upper back decorative body 3232 from the normal state (state of FIG. 152 (a)). It shows a state of being rotated by 15 degrees in each direction. First, in a normal state, as shown in FIG. 152 (a), the rotation detection piece 3247a of the first cam member 3247 is detected by the back rotation detection sensor 3245 to drive the back rotation drive motor 3235 (the back rotation rotation motor 3235). (One rotation of the decorative body 3232 is stopped), and each of the first cam member 3247 and the second cam member 3248 is separated from the abutting portion 3246d of the plurality of underside protruding / retracting decorative bodies 3246. In this state, the first cam member 3247 approaches the contact portion 3246d of the first retractable decoration body 3246A between the contact portions 3246d of the first retractable decoration body 3246A and the fifth retractable decoration body 3246E. It is in the position. In addition, the second cam member 3248 is at a substantially intermediate position between the contact portions 3246d of the third retractable decoration body 3246C and the fourth retractable decoration body 3246D.

  From this normal state, when the upper back first rotating decorative body 3232 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction together with the first cam member 3247 and the second cam member 3248, first, the first cam member 3247 is first retracted and decorated. The abutting portion 3246d of the body 3246A is abutted, and then the second cam member 3248 abuts the abutting portion 3246d of the fourth projecting / retracting decorative body 3246D.

  In the state (the state of FIG. 152 (b)) when the back first rotating ornament 3232 is rotated counterclockwise by 15 degrees from the normal state, the first cam member 3247 causes the first retractable ornament. The abutting portion 3246d of the 3246A first abuts, and the abutting portion 3246d abuts so as to slide rearward in the middle of the front side of the first cam member 3247 facing the inside of the outer periphery of the rhombus. .. As a result, the first retractable decoration body 3246A rotates to a certain degree in the clockwise direction from the retracted position around the support pin 3231g against the biasing force of the return spring 3249, and the star-shaped retractable decoration portion 3246b moves. A part thereof projects outside the first upper rotating decorative body 3232. On the other hand, the second cam member 3248 is in a state immediately after abutting on the abutting portion 3246d of the fourth projecting / retracting decorative body 3246D, and is slid rearward near the front end of the front side facing the inside of the outer periphery of the diamond. The abutting portion 3246d abuts so as to move. As a result, the fourth retractable decoration body 3246D starts rotating in the clockwise direction from the retracted position around the support pin 3231g against the biasing force of the return spring 3249.

  In the state in which the upper back first rotating decorative body 3232 is further rotated 15 degrees in the counterclockwise direction from the state of FIG. 152 (b) (the state of FIG. 152 (c)), the first cam member 3247 has a diamond shape. The abutting portion 3246d abuts so that the front side of the outer periphery facing inward is slid backward, folded back, and slid forward near the front end of the side. As a result, the first retractable decoration body 3246A is further rotated in the clockwise direction around the support pin 3231g against the urging force of the return spring 3249, and more than half of the star-shaped retractable decoration portion 3246b. Is projected to the outer side of the back first rotating decorative body 3232. On the other hand, the second cam member 3248 is in contact with the contact portion 3246d so as to slide rearward in the middle of the front side facing the inside of the outer periphery of the rhombus. As a result, the fourth retractable decorative body 3246D rotates to a certain degree in the clockwise direction around the support pin 3231g against the biasing force of the return spring 3249, and a part of the star-shaped retractable decorative portion 3246b is removed. It projects outward from the first upper rotating decorative body 3232.

  Subsequently, in the state where the back first rotating ornament 3232 is further rotated 15 degrees counterclockwise from the state of FIG. 152 (c) (the state of FIG. 153 (d)), the first cam member 3247 is An abutting portion 3246d abuts on the outer periphery of the rhombus so as to slide rearward in the middle of the front side facing the outside. As a result, the first retractable decoration body 3246A further rotates in the clockwise direction around the support pin 3231g against the biasing force of the return spring 3249, so that the appearance stopper 3231i of the back movable body base 3231 becomes visible. It is in the state of the contacting appearance position, and most of the star-shaped projecting / retracting decorative portion 3246b projects outward from the back upper first rotating decorative body 3232. On the other hand, the second cam member 3248 is abutted by the abutting portion 3246d so that the second cam member 3248 slides backward on the front side facing the inner side of the outer periphery of the diamond and then folds back to slide forward near the front end of the side. There is. As a result, the fourth retractable decoration body 3246D further rotates in the clockwise direction around the support pin 3231g against the biasing force of the return spring 3249, and most of the star-shaped retractable decoration portion 3246b is backed. The upper first rotary decorative body 3232 is projected outward.

  Furthermore, in the state (the state of FIG. 153 (e)) in which the upper back first rotating decorative body 3232 is further rotated by 15 degrees in the counterclockwise direction from the state of FIG. 153 (d), in the first cam member 3247, The contact portion 3246d is rearwardly separated from the outer side of the outer periphery of the diamond. As a result, the first retractable decoration body 3246A rotates counterclockwise around the support pin 3231g by the urging force of the return spring 3249 and contacts the retractable stopper 3231h of the back movable body base 3231. In this state, the star-shaped protruding / retracting decoration portion 3246b is located inside the back upper first rotating decoration body 3232. On the other hand, the second cam member 3248 is in contact with the contact portion 3246d such that the second cam member 3248 slides rearward in the middle of the front side of the outer periphery of the rhombus facing outward. As a result, the fourth retractable decoration body 3246D further rotates clockwise around the support pin 3231g against the urging force of the return spring 3249, and hits the appearance stopper 3231i of the back movable body base 3231. The appearance position is in contact with each other, and most of the star-shaped projecting / retracting decorative portion 3246b projects further outward than the upper back first rotating decorative body 3232.

  Further, in the state in which the back upper first rotating decorative body 3232 is further rotated 15 degrees in the counterclockwise direction from the state of FIG. 153 (e) (the state of FIG. 153 (f)), the first cam member 3247 is The second abutment decoration 3246B is in contact with the contact portion 3246d, and the contact portion 3246d is in contact with the contact portion 3246d so as to slide rearward in the vicinity of the front end of the front side facing the inside of the outer periphery of the diamond. . As a result, the second retractable decoration body 3246B starts rotating in the clockwise direction from the retracted position about the support pin 3231g against the biasing force of the return spring 3249. On the other hand, in the second cam member 3248, the contact portion 3246d of the fourth retractable decoration body 3246D is separated rearward from the outward facing side of the outer periphery of the rhombus, and the fourth retractable decoration body 3246D and the fifth retractable decoration body 3246E. Are located near the middle between the contact portions 3246d. As a result, the fourth retractable decoration body 3246D rotates counterclockwise around the support pin 3231g by the urging force of the return spring 3249 and contacts the retractable stopper 3231h of the back movable body base 3231. It is in the position state, and the star-shaped projecting / retracting decoration portion 3246b is located inside the back upper first rotating decoration body 3232.

  By the way, since the back movable body unit 3230 is provided with a plurality of first LEDs 3234a for irradiating light toward the front on the back decoration substrate 3234, as shown in FIGS. By appropriately illuminating the LED 3234a, it is possible to cause the back upper first rotating decoration 3232 and the back upper second rotating decoration 3233 to emit light. If the first LED 3234a of the back upper decorative substrate 3234 is appropriately illuminated while the back first rotating decorative body 3232 and the back second rotating decorative body 3233 are rotated, the back first rotating decorative body 3232 and the back Depending on the degree of overlap with the second rotating decorative body 3233 and the non-transparent parts of the back first rotating decorative body 3232 and the back second rotating decorative body 3233, etc., a glittering and blinking light emitting decoration can be given to the player. I can show you.

  In addition, the backside decorative substrate 3234 includes a plurality of second backside decoration substrates 3234 that radiate light outward in the radial direction around the first rotation support hole 3231d in the vicinity of the respective support pins 3231g of the backside movable main body base 3231. Since the LED 3234b is provided, as shown in FIG. 154, the back upper first rotating decorative body 3232 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction and the first cam member 3247 and the second cam member 3248 are used to move the back of the retracted position. When the upper appearance decoration body 3246 is moved to the appearance position, by causing the second LED 3234b corresponding to the rear appearance appearance body 3246 to emit light, the rear appearance appearance body 3246 (appearance decoration portion 3246b) at the appearance position. Can be decorated with light emission.

  More specifically, when the second LED 3234b of the corresponding back decoration substrate 3234 is caused to emit light with respect to the back appearance decorative body 3246 at the appearance position, a part of the light diffused from the second LED 3234b appears and disappears. On the rear side of the portion 3246b, a plurality of ridges having a triangular cross section can be reflected and refracted to the front side by the lens portion 3246e arranged concentrically, and the star-shaped projecting / decorating portion 3246b can be illuminated and decorated. (See FIG. 154 (b)). As a result, the embellishment decoration portion 3246b of the embroidered back embellishment body 3246 located on the outer side of the embroidered first back embellishment body 3232 (back embellishment substrate 3234) can be light-emitted and decorated. Since the infestation decoration portion 3246b in which the 3234 is not arranged is light-emitted, it is possible to make the player wonder, and to entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest.

  As described above, according to the back side movable effect unit 3200, the back side up / down drive motor 3213 moves the back side first rotating decoration body 3232 and the back side second rotating decoration body 3233 between the raised position and the lowered position. Since it is possible to move the back first rotation decoration 3232 and the back second rotation decoration 3233 to the lowered position which is the center of the game area 5a, the player's interest is the back first rotation decoration. It can be strongly attracted to the body 3232 and the second upper back decorative body 3233.

  Further, with the back top first rotary decoration 3232 and the back top second rotary decoration 3233 in the lowered position, the back top rotation drive motor 3235 moves the back top first rotary decoration 3232 in the counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front. When rotated, the back upper second rotary decorative body 3233 arranged on the front side of the back upper first rotary decorative body 3232 is rotated counterclockwise while rotating counterclockwise about the first shaft portion 3232a. In addition to being capable of revolving in the direction, a plurality of back-side appearance decorative bodies 3246 arranged on the rear side of the back-side first rotating decoration body 3232 appear outside the back-side first rotating decoration body 3232 at different timings. be able to. As a result, it is possible to show the player a moving effect in which the stars are swirling and the stars are scattered, which can give a strong impact to the player and something good for the player. It is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the game and suppress the decline in interest.

[5-9c. Overall configuration of the rear rear left movable production unit and the rear rear right movable production unit]
Next, the back rear left movable effect unit 3400 and the back rear right movable effect unit 3500 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 155 to 157. FIG. 155 is a front view of the back rear left movable production unit and the back rear right movable production unit in the back unit, and FIG. 156 is a perspective view of the back rear left movable production unit and the back rear right movable production unit as seen from the front. 157 is a perspective view of the back rear left movable effect unit and the back rear right movable effect unit as viewed from the rear.

  The rear rear left movable effect unit 3400 and the rear rear right movable effect unit 3500 of the rear unit 3000 are attached to the rear central movable effect unit 3300 which is attached inside the rear box. The rear-rear left movable effect unit 3400 and the rear-rear right movable effect unit 3500 are a plurality of rear-rear left-handed rotating ornaments that can rotate around an axis along a plane parallel to the surface of the game area 5a (the surface of the panel plate 1110). 3410 and the back right rotation decoration 3510 are provided. The back rear left movable rendering unit 3400 and the back rear right rendering unit 3500 rotate the back rear left rotating decorative body 3410 and the back rear right rotating decorative body 3510 to rotate the back rear left rotating decorative body 3410 and the back rear right rotating. It is possible to change the decoration by changing the portion of the decorative body 3510 seen from the player side (front side).

[5-9c-1. Rear left movable production unit]
The back rear left movable effect unit 3400 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 155 to 139. FIG. 158 is an exploded perspective view of the back rear left movable effect unit and the back rear right movable effect unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 159 is the rear back left movable effect unit and the back right movable effect unit. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the back. In addition, FIG. 160 is an exploded perspective view of the rear-rear left-turning effect unit and the rear-rear-right moving effect unit, which are disassembled from the rear-rear left rotating decorative body, the rear-rear right rotating decorative body, and the rotation connecting mechanism, and are seen from the front. FIG. 161 is an exploded perspective view of the back rear left rotating decorative body, the back rear right rotating decorative body, and the rear rear right rotating decorative body of the back rear left movable rendering unit and the back rear right rotating rendering unit, and the rotation connecting mechanism as seen from behind. 162 (a) is a perspective view of the rotary connecting mechanism in an assembled state, and FIG. 162 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the rotary connecting mechanism. FIG. 163 (a) is an explanatory view showing the movable member of the back rear left movable effect unit from the left side surface, and FIG. 163 (b) is an explanatory view showing the movable member of the back rear left movable effect unit from the front. FIG. 164 is an explanatory view showing the movement of the back-rear left-handed rotation decorative body in the back-rear left movable effect unit.

  As shown, the rear-rear-left movable effect unit 3400 includes a plurality of rear-rear-left rotating decorations 3410 (four in this case) with a predetermined decoration. The plurality of rear back left rotation decorations 3410 are, from the bottom, a first rear rear left rotation decoration 3410A, a second rear rear left rotation decoration 3410B, a third rear rear left rotation decoration 3410C, and a fourth rear rear. It is a left-handed rotating decoration body 3410D. Each of the back left counterclockwise decorations 3410 is formed in substantially the same shape.

  The back left counterclockwise decoration 3410 bulges out in a semi-cylindrical shape and extends obliquely in a disc shape from the end of the first decoration part 3411a and the first decoration part 3411a that imitates the body part of the spotlight. A second decorative portion 3411b imitating the lens portion of the above, and a decorative body main body 3411 having a third decorative portion 3411c extending in a flat shape on the opposite side of the first decorative portion 3411a and having a predetermined character, The decoration main body 3411 includes shaft portions 3412 that respectively project from two side surfaces that intersect the end portion of the second decoration portion 3411b.

  The decoration main body 3411 of the back left counterclockwise decoration 3410 is formed of a transparent member, and is partially decorated with metallic luster. The main body 3411 of the decorative body is formed so that the second decorative portion 3411b can be visually recognized in an inclined state when the first decorative portion 3411a is directed to the front. Although illustration is omitted, the third decorative portion 3411c of the main body 3411 of the decorative body is provided with four characters, which are used as one word, by the rear left-handed rear decorative body 3410.

  Each of the four back left counterclockwise decorations 3410 has its shaft portion 3412 of a predetermined radius so that each second decoration portion 3411b faces the center side in a state where each first decoration portion 3411a faces the front. It is arranged along an arc.

  The rear rear left movable effect unit 3400 is attached to the front rear left base 3420 in the form of a flat plate that extends in an arc shape with a predetermined width, and the front rear left base 3420, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface. It includes a rear back left decoration substrate 3421 and a transparent rear rear left base cover 3422 attached to the rear rear left base 3420 so as to cover the front side of the rear rear left decoration substrate 3421. The back rear left decoration substrate 3421 is mounted such that four LEDs correspond to one back rear left rotating decoration body 3410. These four LEDs are mounted on the shaft portion 3412 of the back rear left rotating decoration body 3410. In between, two of each are placed. That is, the plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear back left decoration substrate 3421 are arranged inside and outside the arc in which four rear rear left rotation decorative bodies 3410 are arranged. The LED on the rear rear left decoration substrate 3421 is a full-color LED.

  In addition, the back rear left movable effect unit 3400 rotates the respective rear sides of the upper shaft portion 3412 of the first back rear left rotating decorative body 3410A and the lower shaft portion 3412 of the second back rear left rotating decorative body 3410B. Below the bearing stand 3423 that is supported and is attached to the front surface of the rear rear left base cover 3422, the upper shaft portion 3412 of the second rear rear left rotating decorative body 3410B and the third rear rear left rotating decorative body 3410C. Side shaft portion 3412 rotatably supporting the respective rear sides of the rear shaft portions 3412 and attached to the front surface of the rear rear left base cover 3422, and the upper shaft portion 3412 of the third rear rear left rotating decorative body 3410C. A bearing stand top 3425 that rotatably supports the rear side of each of the lower shaft portions 3412 of the fourth rear rear left rotation decoration 3410D and is attached to the front surface of the rear rear left base cover 3422; That.

  Also, the rear rear left movable effect unit 3400 rotatably supports the lower shaft portion 3412 of the first rear rear left rotating decorative body 3410A and is attached to the front surface of the rear rear left base cover 3422 and is decorated on the front surface. The front side of the first bearing cover 3426, which is provided with, and the upper shaft portion 3412 of the first back rear left rotation decoration body 3410A and the lower shaft portion 3412 of the second back rear left rotation decoration body 3410B. A second bearing cover 3427, which is rotatably supported and is attached to the front surface of the lower bearing stand 3423 and is decorated on the front surface, and a shaft portion 3412 and a third shaft portion on the upper side of the second rear rear left rotation decoration body 3410B. A third bearing, which rotatably supports the front side of each of the lower shaft portions 3412 of the rear rear left-hand rotating decorations 3410C, is attached to the front surface of the bearing stand 3424, and is decorated on the front surface. The bar 3428, the upper shaft portion 3412 of the third back rear left rotation decorative body 3410C and the front side of the lower shaft portion 3412 of the fourth back rear left rotation decorative body 3410D are rotatably supported and the bearing stand is provided. A fourth bearing cover 3429 that is attached to the front surface of the upper 3425 and is decorated on the front surface, and a rear rear left base that rotatably supports the upper shaft portion 3412 of the fourth rear rear left rotation decorative body 3410D. A fifth bearing cover 3430 attached to the front surface of the cover 3422 and decorated on the front surface.

  Furthermore, the rear rear left movable effect unit 3400 is attached to the front side of the rear rear left base cover 3422 on the rear side of the first bearing cover 3426, and the rotation axis of the rear rear left base 3420 and the rear rear left base cover 3422 is provided. The rear rear left drive motor 3431 projecting in between, the spur gear-shaped drive gear 3432 attached to the rotation shaft of the rear rear left drive motor 3431, and the rear rear left base 3420 meshed with the drive gear 3432. A spur gear-shaped relay gear 3433 that is rotatably attached, a vertically extending drive rack gear 3434a that meshes with the relay gear 3433, an operating rack gear lower 3434b that vertically extends above the driving rack gear 3434a, and an operation. It has an operating rack gear upper portion 3434c that extends vertically above the rack gear lower portion 3434b, and has an operating rack gear lower portion 3434c. 434b and actuating the rack gear on the 3434c is provided with a back left rear drive rack 3434 mounted slidably up and down by the back left rear base cover 3422 so as to be positioned on the front side of the back left rear base cover 3422.

  Further, the back rear left movable effect unit 3400, the driven gear portion 3435a that meshes with the operation rack gear lower portion 3434b of the back rear left drive rack 3434, the cylindrical body portion 3435b protruding forward from the driven gear portion 3435a, and A bevel gear-shaped transmission gear portion 3435c formed at the front end of the body portion 3435b and a transmission gear member below which is attached rotatably around an axis extending in the front-rear direction on the front surface of the back rear left base cover 3422. 3435, a driven gear portion 3436a that meshes with the operating rack gear upper portion 3434c of the rear left drive rack 3434, a cylindrical body portion 3436b that projects forward from the driven gear portion 3436a, and a front end of the body portion 3436b. It has a bevel gear-shaped transmission gear portion 3436c, which is located on the front side of the rear rear left base cover 3422 A transmission gear member upper portion 3436 rotatably mounted around an axis extending to the first rear rear left rotating decorative body 3410A and a third rear rear left rotating decorative body 3410C upper shaft portion. 3412, which are integrally rotatably attached to 3412, respectively, and a transmission gear portion 3435c of a lower transmission gear member 3435 and a transmission gear portion 3436c of an upper transmission gear member 3436, and a bevel gear-shaped rotary gear 3437 which are meshed with each other. , Are provided.

  Further, the rear-left movable effect unit 3400 has a gear portion 3438a that extends in an arc shape that meshes with the drive gear 3432, and a detection piece 3438b that extends in a fan shape at a position different from the gear portion 3438a. The detection gear member 3438 rotatably attached to the front surface of the rear left base 3420 and the rear rear left rotation detection attached to the front rear left base 3420 so as to detect the detection piece 3438b of the detection gear member 3438. And a sensor 3439.

  In addition, the back rear left movable effect unit 3400 includes an upper shaft portion 3412 of the first back rear left rotating decorative body 3410A, a lower shaft portion 3412 of the second back rear left rotating decorative body 3410B, and a third back. A rotation connecting mechanism 3450 is provided that connects the upper shaft portion 3412 of the rear left rotation decoration body 3410C and the lower shaft portion 3412 of the fourth back rear left rotation decoration body 3410D so that rotation can be transmitted. The rotary connection mechanism 3450 includes two (pair) arm portions 3451 projecting from the tip of the shaft portion 3412, and a cross-shaped spider 3452 inserted between the arm portions 3451.

  The rotation coupling mechanism 3450 will be described in detail. The two arm portions 3451 project from the end of the shaft portion 3412 with the same gap in the circumferential direction on the circumference of the shaft portion 3412 separated from the center. Is formed to be narrower than the gap. Further, the spider 3452 has four arm portions 3451 with one arm portion 3451 of the other shaft portion 3412 being inserted into the respective gaps of the two arm portions 3451 of the one shaft portion 3412. It has four cylindrical rod-shaped transmission parts 3452a protruding from the inside surrounded to between the arm parts 3451.

  In the assembled state, the rear rear left movable effect unit 3400 has four rear rear left rotating decorations 3410 arranged in a row in the front view and a second rear rear left rotating decoration 3410B and a third rear rear rotating decorative body 3410. The shaft portions 3412 are arranged on a horizontal line that passes between the rear-rear left-handed rotating decorative body 3410C and arcs centered on the right side thereof. Further, the respective shaft portions 3412 of the four back rear left rotation decorative bodies 3410 are arranged at the same positions in the front-rear direction. That is, the respective shaft portions 3412 are arranged on the same plane parallel to the plane of the game area 5a. Furthermore, in the assembled state, the four back left counterclockwise decorations 3410 are mounted immovably in the direction in which the shaft portions 3412 extend.

  Further, in the assembled state, the transmission gear portion 3435c of the lower transmission gear member 3435 and the transmission gear portion 3436c of the upper transmission gear member 3436 respectively penetrate the lower bearing stand 3423 and the upper bearing stand 3425 and are exposed to the front. ing. In front of the transmission gear portion 3435c and the transmission gear portion 3436c of the transmission gear member lower portion 3435 and the transmission gear member upper portion 3436, the shaft portions 3412 of the two adjacent rear rear left rotation decorative bodies 3410 are connected to each other by the rotation coupling mechanism 3450. Are connected by each.

  Further, in the assembled state, the front side of the back rear left drive motor 3431 is covered with the first bearing cover 3426, and the two rotary coupling mechanisms 3450 are covered with the second bearing cover 3427 and the fourth bearing cover 3429, respectively. The appearance of the left rear movable effect unit 3400 is improved.

  Next, the operation of the rear left movable effect unit 3400 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 163 and 164 and the like. In the normal state of the back rear left movable effect unit 3400, the four rear left counter rotating decorative bodies 3410 direct the front (front) of the first decorative portion 3411a of the main body 3411 of the decorative body (at the first effect position). State). In this state, as shown in FIGS. 163 and 164 (a), the rear back left drive rack 3434 that slides up and down is located at the lower moving end. The relay gear 3433 is meshed near the upper end of the driving rack gear 3434a of the rear rear left drive rack 3434, and the driven gear portion 3435a of the lower transmission gear member 3435 and the lower end of the operating rack gear 3434b and the upper end of the operating rack gear 3434c are engaged. The driven gear portions 3436a of the transmission gear member upper 3436 are in mesh with each other. The back rear left rotation detection sensor 3439 detects the detection piece 3438b of the detection gear member 3438.

  From this normal state, when the relay gear 3433 is rotated in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front by the rear left drive motor 3431 via the drive gear 3432, the rear rear gear is driven by the drive rack gear 3434a meshed with the relay gear 3433. The left drive rack 3434 will slide upward. When the rear left drive rack 3434 slides upward, the driven gear portion 3435a of the lower transmission gear member 3435 and the driven gear portion 3436a of the upper transmission gear member 3436 that are in mesh with the lower operating rack gear 3434b and the upper operating rack gear 3434c, respectively. The lower transmission gear member 3435 and the upper transmission gear member 3436 rotate in the counterclockwise direction at the same speed.

  When the lower transmission gear member 3435 and the upper transmission gear member 3436 rotate counterclockwise, the respective transmission gear portions 3435c and the respective rotation gears 3437 meshing with the transmission gear portion 3436c are counterclockwise in bottom view. It will rotate in the direction of the circumference. As a result, the first back rear left rotation decorative body 3410A and the third back rear left rotation decorative body 3410C and the disc-shaped second decoration portion 3411b are moved forward through the shaft portion 3412 to which the rotary gear 3437 is attached. As it moves, it will rotate about each shaft 3412.

  Then, the upper shaft portion 3412 of the first rear-rear-left-turning decorative body 3410A is connected to the lower shaft portion 3412 of the second rear-rear-left-turning decorative body 3410B by the rotation coupling mechanism 3450 so as to be capable of transmitting rotation. Since the upper shaft portion 3412 of the third back rear left rotation decoration body 3410C is connected to the lower shaft portion 3412 of the fourth back rear left rotation decoration body 3410D by the rotation coupling mechanism 3450 so as to be capable of transmitting rotation, The rotation of each of the first back-rear left rotation decoration 3410A and the third back-rear left rotation decoration 3410C is performed by the second back-rear left rotation decoration 3410B and the fourth back-rear left rotation via the respective rotation coupling mechanism 3450. The second back rear left rotation decoration 3410B and the fourth back rear left rotation decoration 3410D are transmitted to the decoration 3410D, and the first back rear left rotation decoration 3410A and the third back rear left rotation decoration 3410C are transmitted. Flip substantially so that the simultaneously rotated in the direction.

  The rotation transmission by the rotary connection mechanism 3450 will be described in detail. When the shaft portion 3412 on the first back rear left rotation decoration body 3410A and the third back rear left rotation decoration body 3410C side is rotated via the rotation gear 3437, the tip end thereof is rotated. The transmission portion 3452a of the spider 3452 contacts the side surface of the arm portion 3451 of the spider 3452. By abutting on the side surface of the arm portion 3451, the shaft portion 3412 on the side of the second back rear left rotation decoration 3410B and the shaft of the fourth back left rotation decoration 3410D is rotated.

  At this time, the shaft portion 3412 on the side of the first back rear left rotating decoration 3410A and the third back left rotating decoration 3410C, and the second back rear left rotating decoration 3410B and the fourth back left rotating decoration 3410D side The shaft portions 3412 of the cross-shaped spiders 3452 extend in different directions, so that the planes passing through the centers of the four transmission portions 3452a of the cross-shaped spider 3452 have center axes of the two shaft portions 3412 extending in different directions. The four transmission parts 3452a relatively slide between the arm parts 3451 in the extending direction of the arm parts 3451 so as to maintain a state in which they coincide with the plane including the bisector of the corner of the. Becomes Thereby, the rotation of the shaft portion 3412 on the side of the first back rear left rotating decoration 3410A and the rotation of the shaft 3412 on the side of the third back rear left rotating decoration 3410C is smoothly transmitted to the second back left rotating decoration 3410B and the fourth back rear. The shaft portion 3412 on the left rotation decoration body 3410D side can be rotated.

  As described above, by the rotation coupling mechanism 3450 capable of transmitting rotation, the first back rear left rotation decoration 3410A and the second back rear left rotation decoration 3410B, and the third back rear left rotation decoration 3410C and the first back back left rotation decoration 3410C and the first back rear left rotation decoration 3410C and the first back rear left rotation decoration 3410C and the first back rear left rotation decoration 3410C and the first back rear left rotation decoration 3410C. Since the four back rear left rotating decorations 3410D are respectively connected, the four back rear left rotating decorations 3410 can be simultaneously rotated in the same direction and at the same speed by driving the back rear left driving motor 3431.

  Note that when the rear rear left drive motor 3431 rotates the relay gear 3433 in the clockwise direction in front view in order to slide the rear rear left drive rack 3434 upward, the gear portion 3438a meshed with the drive gear 3432 is moved. Through this, the detection gear member 3438 rotates in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front.

  Then, when the detection gear member 3438 rotates clockwise in the front view and the detection piece 3438b becomes undetected by the back rear left rotation detection sensor 3439, the driving of the back rear left drive motor 3431 is stopped. And, the four back left counterclockwise decorations 3410 are stopped in a state in which the respective second decorations 3411b are directed forward (front) (the state of the second effect position rotated by about 62 degrees from the normal state). (See FIG. 164 (b)). In this state, since the disk-shaped second decoration portion 3411b simulating the lens of a spotlight is in a state of facing forward, four round decorations are arranged side by side, and a decoration different from the normal state is provided. It can be shown to the player (see FIG. 167 (b)).

  On the other hand, when the rear back left drive motor 3431 slides the rear rear left drive rack 3434 through the drive gear 3432 and the relay gear 3433 to the upper moving end, the four rear rear left rotation decorations 3410 are respectively moved to the normal movement. With respect to the state (1), the state is rotated (reversed) about the respective shaft portions 3412 by about 180 degrees (state of the third effect position) (see FIG. 164 (c)). In this state, the third decoration portion 3411c with the character decorations faces forward (front), and the words formed by the decorations of the four characters can make the player suggest the arrival of a chance. At the same time, the player can see a decoration different from the normal state (see FIG. 167 (c)).

  In addition, when returning the plurality of left rear back rotating decorations 3410 to the normal state, it is possible to return to the normal state by rotating the rear left driving motor 3431 in the opposite direction.

  As described above, the back rear left movable effect unit 3400 has the respective shaft portions within the angular range of about 180 degrees in which the four back rear left rotating decorations 3410 are reversed from the normal state by the back rear left drive motor 3431. It is possible to rotate in the same direction about 3412 at the same time. As a result, the decoration that faces the front can be changed (changed) in various ways. In addition, by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back rear left decoration substrate 3421, the four back rear left rotating decorations 3410 are independently illuminated and decorated with various colors and brightness. be able to.

[5-9c-2. Rear right movable production unit]
The back rear right movable effect unit 3500 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 155 to 162, 165, 166, and the like. FIG. 165 (a) is an explanatory view showing the movable member of the back rear right movable effect unit from the front side, and FIG. 165 (a) is an explanatory view showing the movable member of the back rear right movable effect unit from the right side. FIG. 166 is an explanatory diagram showing the movement of the back-rear right rotating decorative body of the back-rear right movable effect unit.

  The back rear right movable effect unit 3500 is provided with a plurality of back rear right rotating decorations 3510 (here, four) with predetermined decoration, as shown in the figure. The plurality of rear back right rotation decorations 3510 are, from the bottom, a first back rear right rotation decoration 3510A, a second back rear right rotation decoration 3510B, a third back rear right rotation decoration 3510C, and a fourth back rear. It is a right rotation decoration body 3510D. Each of the rear right rotation decorative bodies 3510 is formed in substantially the same shape.

  The rear right rotation decorative body 3510 bulges out in a semi-cylindrical shape and extends obliquely in a disk shape from the end of the first decorative portion 3511a and the first decorative portion 3511a that imitates the body portion of the spotlight. A second decorative portion 3511b imitating the lens portion of the above, and a decorative body main body 3511 having a third decorative portion 3511c extending in a flat shape on the opposite side of the first decorative portion 3511a and given a predetermined character, The decorative body main body 3511 is provided with shaft portions 3512 that respectively project from two side surfaces that intersect the end portion of the second decorative portion 3511b.

  The decoration main body 3511 of the back right rotation decoration 3510 is formed of a transparent member and is partially decorated with metallic luster. The decorative body 3511 is formed so that the second decorative portion 3511b can be viewed in a slanted state when the first decorative portion 3511a is directed to the front. Although illustration is omitted, the third decorative portion 3511c of the main body of decorative body 3511 is provided with four characters on the back right-turning decorative body 3510, each of which is a single word.

  Each of the four back right rotating ornaments 3510 has its shaft portion 3512 with a predetermined radius so that each second ornament portion 3511b faces the center side with each first ornament portion 3511a facing forward. It is arranged along an arc.

  The rear rear right movable effect unit 3500 is attached to the front rear right base 3520 in the form of a flat plate that extends in an arc shape with a predetermined width and the rear rear right base 3520, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface. It includes a back rear right decoration substrate 3521 and a transparent back rear right base cover 3522 attached to the back rear right base 3520 so as to cover the front side of the back rear right decoration substrate 3521. The back rear right decorative board 3521 is mounted so that four LEDs correspond to one back right rotating decorative body 3510, and these four LEDs are mounted on the shaft portion 3512 of the back right rotating decorative body 3510. In between, two of each are placed. That is, the plurality of LEDs mounted on the back rear right decorative board 3521 are arranged inside and outside the arc where the four back right rotating decorative bodies 3510 are arranged in a row. The LED on the rear rear right decoration substrate 3521 is a full-color LED.

  Further, the back rear right movable effect unit 3500 rotates the rear side of each of the upper shaft portion 3512 of the first back rear right rotating decorative body 3510A and the lower shaft portion 3512 of the second back rear right rotating decorative body 3510B. Below the bearing stand 3523 that is supported and is attached to the front surface of the rear rear right base cover 3522, the upper shaft portion 3512 of the second rear rear right rotating decorative body 3510B, and the third rear rear right rotating decorative body 3510C. Side bearing shafts 3512 rotatably supporting the respective rear sides of the rear shafts 3512 and attached to the front surface of the rear rear right base cover 3522, and the upper shaft portion 3512 of the third rear rear right rotating decoration 3510C. And a bearing stand top 3525 that rotatably supports the rear side of each of the lower shaft portions 3512 of the fourth rear rear right rotation decorative body 3510D and is attached to the front surface of the rear rear right base cover 3522. That.

  Further, the rear rear right movable effect unit 3500 rotatably supports the lower shaft portion 3512 of the first rear rear right rotating decoration body 3510A and is attached to the front surface of the rear rear right base cover 3522 to be decorated on the front surface. The front side of the first bearing cover 3526 provided with the above, the upper shaft portion 3512 of the first back rear right rotation decorative body 3510A and the front side of the lower shaft portion 3512 of the second back rear right rotation decorative body 3510B. A second bearing cover 3527, which is rotatably supported and is attached to the front surface of the lower bearing stand 3523 and is decorated on the front surface, and an upper shaft portion 3512 and a third rear rear right rotation decoration body 3510B and a third A third bearing, which rotatably supports the front side of each of the lower shaft portions 3512 of the rear rear right rotation decorations 3510C, is attached to the front surface of the bearing stand 3524, and is decorated on the front surface. The bar 3528, the upper shaft portion 3512 of the third back rear right rotation decoration body 3510C, and the front side of the lower shaft portion 3512 of the fourth back rear right rotation decoration body 3510D are rotatably supported and also the bearing stand. A fourth bearing cover 3529 that is attached to the front surface of the upper 3525 and is decorated on the front surface, and rotatably supports the upper shaft portion 3512 of the fourth rear rear right rotation decorative body 3510D and also rear rear right base. A fifth bearing cover 3530 is attached to the front surface of the cover 3522 and is decorated on the front surface.

  Furthermore, the rear rear right movable effect unit 3500 is attached to the front side of the rear rear right base cover 3522 on the rear side of the first bearing cover 3526, and the rotation axis of the rear rear right base 3520 and the rear rear right base cover 3522. The rear rear right drive motor 3531 protruding in between, the spur gear-shaped drive gear 3532 attached to the rotation shaft of the rear rear right drive motor 3531, and the rear rear right base 3520 meshed with the drive gear 3532. A spur gear-shaped relay gear 3533 that is rotatably attached, a vertically extending drive rack gear 3534a that meshes with the relay gear 3533, an operating rack gear lower 3534b that vertically extends above the driving rack gear 3534a, and an operation. It has an operating rack gear upper portion 3534c that extends vertically above the rack gear lower portion 3534b, and has an operating rack gear lower portion 3534c. 534b and actuating the rack gear on the 3534c is provided with a back right rear drive rack 3534 mounted slidably up and down by the back right after the base cover 3522 so as to be positioned on the front side of the back right after the base cover 3522.

  Further, the back rear right movable effect unit 3500 includes a driven gear portion 3535a meshing with an operation rack gear lower portion 3534b of the back rear right drive rack 3534, a cylindrical body portion 3535b protruding forward from the driven gear portion 3535a, and Below the transmission gear member, which has a bevel gear-shaped transmission gear portion 3535c formed at the front end of the body portion 3535b and is rotatably mounted around an axis extending in the front-rear direction on the front surface of the rear rear right base cover 3522. 3535, a driven gear portion 3536a meshing with the operation rack gear upper portion 3534c of the rear right drive rack 3534, a cylindrical body portion 3536b protruding forward from the driven gear portion 3536a, and a front end of the body portion 3536b. Has a bevel gear-shaped transmission gear portion 3536c, and is provided on the front side of the rear rear right base cover 3522 A transmission gear member upper portion 3536 rotatably attached around an axis extending to the first rear rear right rotating decorative body 3510A and a third rear rear right rotating decorative body 3510C upper shaft portion. 3512 and a transmission gear portion 3535c of a transmission gear member lower portion 3535 and a transmission gear portion 3536c of a transmission gear member upper portion 3536, respectively, and a bevel gear-shaped rotary gear 3537 that meshes with the transmission gear portion 3535c. , Are provided.

  Further, the rear rear right movable effect unit 3500 has a gear portion 3538a that extends in an arc shape that meshes with the drive gear 3532, and a detection piece 3538b that extends in a fan shape at a position different from the gear portion 3538a. Rear rear right rotation detection mounted on the front surface of the rear rear right base 3520 so as to detect the detection gear member 3538 rotatably mounted on the front surface of the rear right base 3520 and the detection piece 3538b of the detection gear member 3538. And a sensor 3539.

  In addition, the back rear right movable effect unit 3500 includes an upper shaft portion 3512 of the first back rear right rotation decorative body 3510A, a lower shaft portion 3512 of the second back rear right rotation decorative body 3510B, and a third back surface. A rotation connecting mechanism 3450 is provided that connects the upper shaft portion 3512 of the rear right rotation decoration body 3510C and the lower shaft portion 3512 of the fourth back rear right rotation decoration body 3510D so that rotation can be transmitted. The rotation coupling mechanism 3450 has the same configuration as the rotation coupling mechanism 3450 of the rear rear left movable effect unit 3400, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted here.

  In the assembled state, the rear rear right movable effect unit 3500 has four rear rear right rotating decorative bodies 3510 which are vertically arranged in a front view, and the rear rear right rotating decorative body 3510B and the third rear rear right rotating decorative body 3510B. Each shaft portion 3512 is arranged along a horizontal line that passes between the rear rear right rotation decoration body 3510C and an arc centered on the left side thereof. Further, the shaft portions 3512 of the four back rear right rotation decorations 3510 are arranged at the same positions in the front-rear direction. That is, the respective shaft portions 3512 are arranged on the same plane parallel to the plane of the game area 5a. Furthermore, in the assembled state, the four rear rear right rotation decorations 3510 are mounted immovably in the direction in which the shaft portions 3512 extend.

  Further, in the assembled state, the transmission gear portion 3535c of the transmission gear member lower portion 3535 and the transmission gear portion 3536c of the transmission gear member upper portion 3536 penetrate the lower bearing stand 3523 and the upper bearing stand 3525, respectively, and are exposed to the front. ing. In front of the transmission gear portion 3535c and the transmission gear portion 3536c of the transmission gear member lower portion 3535 and the transmission gear member upper portion 3536, the shaft portions 3512 of the two adjacent rear rear right rotation decorative bodies 3510 are connected to each other by the rotation coupling mechanism 3450. Are connected by each.

  Further, in the assembled state, the front side of the back right drive motor 3531 is covered with the first bearing cover 3526, and the two rotary coupling mechanisms 3450 are covered with the second bearing cover 3527 and the fourth bearing cover 3529, respectively. The appearance of the rear right movable effect unit 3500 is improved.

  Next, the operation of the back rear right movable decorative body unit 3500 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 165 and 166. In the normal state, the back rear right movable effect unit 3500 is a state in which the four back rear right rotation decorations 3510 face the first decoration portion 3511a of the decoration body 3511 forward (front) (in the first position). State). In this state, as shown in FIGS. 165 and 166 (a), the back rear right drive rack 3534 that slides up and down is located at the lower moving end. The relay gear 3533 is meshed near the upper end of the drive rack gear 3534a of the rear rear right drive rack 3534, and the driven gear portion 3535a of the transmission gear member lower 3535 and The driven gear portions 3536a of the transmission gear member upper portion 3536 are in mesh with each other. The back rear right rotation detection sensor 3539 detects the detection piece 3538b of the detection gear member 3538.

  From this normal state, when the relay gear 3533 is rotated counterclockwise from the front by the rear right drive motor 3531 through the drive gear 3532, the drive rack gear 3534a meshed with the relay gear 3533 causes the rear gear 3533 to rotate. The rear right drive rack 3534 will slide upward. When this rear rear right drive rack 3534 slides upward, the driven gear portion 3535a of the lower transmission gear member 3535 and the driven gear portion 3536a of the upper transmission gear member 3536 meshing with the lower operating gear 3534b and the upper operating gear 3534c, respectively. The lower transmission gear member 3535 and the upper transmission gear member 3536 rotate in the clockwise direction at the same speed.

  When the lower transmission gear member 3535 and the upper transmission gear member 3536 rotate in the clockwise direction, the respective transmission gear portions 3535c and the respective rotation gears 3537 meshing with the transmission gear portion 3536c rotate clockwise in the bottom view. It will rotate in the direction. As a result, the first back rear right rotation decoration 3510A and the third back rear right rotation decoration 3510C and the disc-shaped second decoration 3511b are moved forward through the shaft portion 3512 to which the rotation gear 3537 is attached. As it moves, it will rotate about each shaft 3512.

  Then, the upper shaft portion 3512 of the first rear rear right rotation decorative body 3510A is connected to the lower shaft portion 3512 of the second rear rear right rotation decorative body 3510B by the rotation coupling mechanism 3450 so as to be capable of transmitting rotation. Since the upper shaft portion 3512 of the third back rear right rotation decoration body 3510C is connected to the lower shaft portion 3512 of the fourth back rear right rotation decoration body 3510D by the rotation connection mechanism 3450 in a rotationally transmissible manner, The rotations of the first back-rear right rotating decoration 3510A and the third back-rear right rotating decoration 3510C are respectively rotated by the second back-rear rotating right decoration 3510B and the fourth back-rear rotating via the respective rotation coupling mechanisms 3450. The second back rear right rotation decoration 3510B and the fourth back rear right rotation decoration 3510D are transmitted to the decoration 3510D, and the first back rear right rotation decoration 3510A and the third back right rotation decoration 3510C are transmitted. Flip substantially so that the simultaneously rotated in the direction.

  The rotation transmission by the rotation coupling mechanism 3450 will be described in detail. When the shaft portion 3512 on the first back rear right rotation decoration body 3510A and the third back rear right rotation decoration body 3510C side is rotated via the rotation gear 3537, the tip end thereof is rotated. The transmission portion 3452a of the spider 3452 abuts on the side surface of the arm portion 3451, and the transmission portion 3452a is attached to the tip of the shaft portion 3512 on the second back rear right rotation decoration body 3510B and the fourth back rear right rotation decoration body 3510D side. By contacting the side surface of the arm portion 3451, the shaft portion 3512 on the side of the second back rear right rotation decoration 3510B and the shaft of the fourth back right rotation decoration 3510D is rotated.

  At this time, the shaft portion 3512 on the first back rear right rotation decoration 3510A and the third back rear right rotation decoration 3510C side, the second back rear right rotation decoration 3510B and the fourth back right rotation decoration 3510D side Since the shaft portions 3512 of the cross-shaped spiders 3452 extend in different directions from each other, the surfaces passing through the centers of the four transmission portions 3452a of the cross-shaped spider 3452 have center axes of the two shaft portions 3512 extending in different directions. The four transmission parts 3452a relatively slide between the arm parts 3451 in the extending direction of the arm parts 3451 so as to maintain a state in which they coincide with the plane including the bisector of the corner of the. Becomes Accordingly, the rotation of the shaft portion 3512 on the side of the first back rear right rotation decoration 3510A and the third back rear right rotation decoration 3510C is smoothly transmitted, and the second back rear right rotation decoration 3510B and the fourth back rear. The shaft portion 3512 on the right rotation decoration body 3510D side can be rotated.

  As described above, by the rotation coupling mechanism 3450 capable of transmitting rotation, the first back rear right rotation decoration 3510A and the second back rear right rotation decoration 3510B, and the third back rear right rotation decoration 3510C and the first back back right rotation decoration 3510C. Since the four back rear right rotation decorations 3510D are connected to each other, the four back rear right rotation decorations 3510 can be simultaneously rotated in the same direction and at the same speed by driving the back rear right drive motor 3531.

  When the rear rear right drive motor 3531 rotates the relay gear 3533 in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front in order to slide the rear rear right drive rack 3534 upward, a gear portion 3538a meshed with the drive gear 3532. The detection gear member 3538 rotates in the counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front.

  Then, when the detection gear member 3538 rotates counterclockwise in the front view and the detection piece 3538b becomes undetected by the back rear right rotation detection sensor 3539, the driving of the back rear right drive motor 3531 is stopped. Then, the four back right rotation decorative bodies 3510 stop in a state in which the respective second decorative portions 3511b are directed to the front (front) (the state of the second effect position rotated by about 62 degrees from the normal state). This is the case (see FIG. 166 (b)). In this state, since the disk-shaped second decoration portion 3511b simulating a spotlight lens faces forward, four round decorations are arranged side by side, and a decoration different from the normal state is provided. It can be shown to the player (see FIG. 167 (b)).

  On the other hand, when the rear rear right drive motor 3531 slides the rear rear right drive rack 3534 to the upper moving end via the drive gear 3532 and the relay gear 3533, the four rear rear right rotation decorations 3510 are respectively moved to the normal positions. With respect to the state (1), the state is rotated (reversed) about each shaft portion 3512 by about 180 degrees (state of the third effect position) (see FIG. 166 (c)). In this state, the third decorative portion 3511c decorated with characters is in a front (front) state, and the words formed by the decoration of the four characters can make the player suggest the arrival of a chance. At the same time, the player can see a decoration different from the normal state (see FIG. 167 (c)).

  Note that when the plurality of back-and-right-turned decorative bodies 3510 are returned to the normal state, the back-and-right right drive motor 3531 can be returned to the normal state by rotating in the opposite direction to the above.

  As described above, the rear rear right movable effect unit 3500 has the respective rear shaft rear right rotating decorations 3510 that are rotated by the rear rear right drive motor 3531 within an angle range of about 180 degrees in which the respective shaft portions are reversed. 3512 can be rotated in the same direction at the same time. As a result, the decoration that faces the front can be changed (changed) in various ways. In addition, by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back-rear right decoration board 3521, the four back-rear right rotation decoration bodies 3510 are independently illuminated and decorated with various colors and brightness. be able to.

[5-9c-3. Directed by the rear left movable production unit and the rear right movable production unit]
Next, a movable effect using the rear-rear left movable effect unit 3400 and the rear-rear right movable effect unit 3500 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 167. FIG. 167 (a) is a front view showing the back-rear left rotating decorative body and the back-rear right rotating decorative body in the rear first left movable effect unit and the rear rear right movable effect unit in the normal first effect position state, FIG. 6B is a front view showing the back-rear left-handed rotating decorative body and the back-rear right-handed rotating decorative body in a state of being rotated to the second effect position, and FIG. It is a front view showing a state in which is rotated to a third effect position.

  The rear rear left movable effect unit 3400 and the rear rear right movable effect unit 3500 in the rear unit 3000 are arranged apart from each other on the left and right, and the main effect display device 1600 faces forward from between them (see FIG. 135). reference). In the normal state, the back-rear left movable effect unit 3400 and the back-rear movable effect unit 3500 have four back-rear left rotating decorative bodies 3410 and a back, respectively, as shown in FIG. 167 (a). The rear right rotation decoration 3510 is in a state of a first effect position in which the respective first decorations 3411a and 3511a are directed forward. In this state, in the back rear left decoration substrate 3421 and the back rear right decoration substrate 3521, the four LEDs corresponding to the back rear left rotating decoration body 3410 and the back rear right rotating decoration body 3510 are caused to emit light, respectively. The entire left-rear rotating decorative body 3410 and the rear rear-right rotating decorative body 3510 can be light-emitted with various colors.

  From this normal state, the back rear left drive motor 3431 and the back rear right drive motor 3531 move the back rear left rotation decorative body 3410 and the back rear right rotation decorative body 3510 in the directions in which the respective inner ends thereof are directed forward. When it is rotated about 62 degrees around the shaft portion 3412 and the shaft portion 3512, the disc-shaped second decoration portion 3411b and the second decoration portion 3511b in the back rear left rotation decoration body 3410 and the back rear right rotation decoration body 3510 move forward. It will be in the state of the facing second production position. In this state, the player can see the decoration in which four round second decoration portions 3411b and second decoration portions 3511b are arranged on the circumference. When the LEDs inside the rear rear left decorative substrate 3421 and the rear rear right decorative substrate 3521 are made to emit light in the state of the second effect position, the disc-shaped rear rear left rotating decorative body 3410 and the rear rear right rotating decorative body 3510 are disc-shaped. The second decoration portion 3411b and the second decoration portion 3511b can be light-emitted and decorated, and the player can be made to see a light-emission effect in which light is emitted from the spotlight.

  From the state of the second effect position, the rear rear left drive motor 3431 and the rear rear right drive motor 3531 cause the rear rear left rotation decoration body 3410 and the rear rear right rotation decoration body 3510 to face the respective second decorations. The portion 3411b and the second decorative portion 3511b are oriented around the shaft portion 3412 and the shaft portion 3512 in the direction toward the outer side of the arc in which the back rear left rotating decoration body 3410 and the back rear right rotating decoration body 3510 are arranged. When rotated by 180 degrees (rotated by 180 degrees from the state of the first effect position), the third decoration portion 3511c with the character decoration on the back rear left rotation decoration body 3410 and the back rear right rotation decoration body 3510 faces forward. It will be in the state of the third presentation position. In this state, the words and phrases formed by the decoration of each four characters can be shown to the player, and the words and phrases can make the player suggest the arrival of a chance. Further, in the state of the third rendering position, four LEDs corresponding to each back rear left rotation decoration body 3410 and each back rear right rotation decoration body 3510 are provided on the back rear left decoration board 3421 and the back rear right decoration board 3521. By making it emit light, it is possible to cause the third decorative portion 3411c and the third decorative portion 3511c of the back-rear left-handed rotating decorative body 3410 and the back-rear right-handed rotating decorative body 3510 to emit light in various colors.

  In the rear-rear left movable effect unit 3400 and the rear-rear right movable effect unit 3500, the rear-rear left rotating decorative body 3410 and the rear-rear right rotating decorative body 3510 can be rotated separately, so that they rotate independently. A variety of effects can be shown to the player by appropriately combining the light emitting decorations.

[5-10. Production on the game board]
Next, main movable effects on the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 168. FIG. 168 is a front view of the game board shown in a state where the back upper first rotary decorative body and the back upper second rotary decorative body of the back upper movable effect unit in the back unit are moved to the lowered position. In a normal state, as shown in FIGS. 129 and 135, etc., the game board 5 passes through a transparent game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) on the outside of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500, and the back front decoration of the back unit 3000. The decoration of the unit 3100 is visible. Further, within the frame (inner side) of the center accessory 2500, the display screen of the main effect display device 1600 attached to the rear side of the back unit 3000 can be favorably viewed from the player side (front side).

  Further, in a normal state, on the upper side of the main effect display device 1600 in the frame of the center accessory 2500, on the right side of the logo decoration unit 2550, on the back side first of the back side movable main body unit 3230 in the back side movable effect unit 3200. The rotating decorative body 3232 and the second upper back rotating decorative body 3233 are visible. Further, through the inside of the frame of the center accessory 2500, on the left side of the main effect display device 1600, a plurality of back-rear left-turning decorative objects 3410 of the back-rear left movable effect unit 3400 are visible, and on the right side of the main effect display device 1600. In addition, a plurality of rear back right rotation decorative bodies 3510 of the rear rear right movable effect unit 3500 are visible.

  The game board 5 is a back front decoration unit of the back unit 3000 according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result that is drawn by the game balls being received in the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004. 3100, the back-up movable effect unit 3200, the back-rear central movable effect unit 3300, the back-rear left movable effect unit 3400, and the back-rear right movable effect unit 3500 perform predetermined effects (movable effect and light emission effect).

  Specifically, as an effect using the back movable performance unit 3200 of the back unit 3000, for example, by driving the back upper lifting drive motor 3213, the back movable main body unit 3230 is rotated clockwise in a front view. , The back first rotation decorative body 3232 and the back second rotation decorative body 3233 from the raised position on the right side of the logo decoration unit 2550 on the upper side of the main effect display device 1600 to the main effect display device 1600 in the center of the game area 5a. To the lowered position on the front of the (see FIG. 168). As a result, the back first rotation decorative body 3232 and the back second rotation decorative body 3233 whose outer circumferences are in a polygonal shape are in a state of being positioned substantially at the center on the front side of the main effect display device 1600, and the main effect display device 1600. Since the effect image displayed on the screen is blocked, it is possible to make the player stand out from the player side and perform an effect that strongly attracts the player's interest.

  Then, in this state, when the back upper rotation driving motor 3235 rotates the back first rotating decorative body 3232 in the counterclockwise direction in front view, the back upper arranged on the front side of the back upper first rotating decorative body 3232 is rotated. The second rotating decorative body 3233 revolves in the counterclockwise direction around the first shaft portion 3232a while rotating in the counterclockwise direction, and is arranged on the rear side of the back first rotating decorative body 3232. In addition, it is possible to show a movable effect in which a plurality of back-side appearance decorations 3246 are projected and appear outside the back-side first rotation decoration 3232 at different timings. As a result, it is possible to show the player a moving effect in which the stars are swirling and the stars are scattered, which can give a strong impact to the player and something good for the player. It is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the game and suppress the decline in interest.

  At this time, by causing the first LED 3234a and the second LED 3234b of the back decoration substrate 3234 to appropriately emit light, the back first rotation decorative body 3232 and the back second rotation decoration 3233 blink, and at the same time, the back decoration appears. It is possible to show the effect that the body 3246 (the projecting / decorating decorative portion 3246b) scatters while shining, and it is possible to further exert the above-described operational effects.

  Thus, in the game board 5 of the present embodiment, the back front decoration unit 3100, the back upper movable effect unit 3200, the back central movable effect unit 3300, the back left movable effect unit 3400, and the back right movable effect unit 3500. , Etc. can be appropriately used to perform a light emission effect, a movable effect, a display effect, etc., and it is possible to entertain the player with various kinds of effects, and to prevent the player's interest in the game from decreasing. can do.

[6. Control configuration]
Next, a control configuration for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. 169. FIG. 169 is a block diagram schematically showing the control configuration of the pachinko machine. As shown in the figure, the main control structure of the pachinko machine 1 is composed of a main control board 1310 and a peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5, and a payout control board 951 attached to the main body frame 4, Each control is shared. The main control board 1310 controls a game operation (progress of a game). The peripheral control board 1510 controls the various effects in the game based on the command from the main control board 1310, and the door frame side effect display device 460 and the main effect based on the commands from the peripheral control section 1511. An effect display control unit 1512 that controls display of effect images on the display device 1600 and the like is provided. The payout control board 951 includes a payout control unit 952 that controls the payout of game balls and the like, and a launch control unit 953 that controls the launch of the game balls by rotating the handle 302.

[6-1. Main control board]
The main control board 1310 for controlling the progress of the game is not shown in detail, but is a main control which is a microprocessor having a ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like. MPU, main control I / O port as an input / output device (I / O device), main control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches are input, and main control solenoid drive for driving various solenoids A circuit and a RAM clear switch for completely erasing the information stored in the RAM incorporated in the main control MPU are provided. The main control MPU has a built-in ROM and RAM, as well as a watchdog timer for monitoring its operation (system) and a function for preventing fraud.

  The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is a first starting opening sensor 3102 for detecting the game ball received in the first starting opening 2002, and a second starting opening sensor for detecting the game ball received in the second starting opening 2004. 2402, a general winning hole sensor 3101 for detecting a game ball received in the general winning opening 2001, a gate sensor 2401 for detecting a game ball passing through the gate portion 2003, a large detecting a game ball received in the large winning hole 2005 First winning slot sensor 2403, first winning slot sensor 2404 that detects the game ball received in the first receiving slot 2007 after being detected by the big winning slot sensor 2403, and second slot after being detected by the big winning slot sensor 2403 A second inlet sensor 2405 for detecting the game ball received in 2008, and a magnetism for detecting illegal magnetism in the game area 5a. Capacitors (not shown), the detection signal from the like are input via the respective main control I / O ports.

  Based on these detection signals, the main control MPU outputs a control signal from the main control I / O port to the main control solenoid drive circuit, so that the start opening solenoid 2412, the attacker solenoid 2414, and the V winning opening solenoid 2416 are output. A drive signal is output, or a status indicator 1401, a normal symbol display 1402, a normal hold indicator 1403, a first special symbol display 1404, a first special hold number display of the function display unit 1400 from the main control I / O port. The drive signal is output to the device 1405, the second special symbol display device 1406, the second special reserved number display device 1407, the round display device 1408, or the like.

  In the present embodiment, the first starting opening sensor 3102, the second starting opening sensor 2402, the gate sensor 2401, the special winning opening sensor 2403, the first receiving entrance sensor 2404, and the second receiving entrance sensor 2405 are not included. A contact type electromagnetic proximity switch is used, whereas a contact type ON / OFF operation type mechanical switch is used for the general winning opening sensor 3101. This is because the game ball frequently enters the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004 and frequently passes through the gate portion 2003, so the first starting opening sensor 3102, the second starting opening sensor 2402, And the detection of the game ball by the gate sensor 2401 frequently occurs. Therefore, a proximity switch having high durability and long life is used for the first starting port sensor 3102, the second starting port sensor 2402, and the gate sensor 2401. Also, when an advantageous game state that is advantageous to the player (a "big hit" game, etc.) occurs, the special winning opening 2005 is opened and the game balls are frequently entered. Therefore, the special winning opening sensor 2403, the first prize The game ball is frequently detected by the entrance sensor 2404 and the second entrance sensor 2405. For this reason, the proximity winning switch 2403, the first receiving port sensor 2404, and the second receiving port sensor 2405 also use proximity switches with high durability and long life. On the other hand, in the general winning opening 2001 in which the game balls do not enter frequently, the detection by the general winning opening sensor 3101 does not occur frequently. For this reason, a mechanical switch having a shorter life than the proximity switch is used as the general winning opening sensor 3101.

  In addition, the main control MPU transmits various kinds of information regarding games (game information) and various kinds of commands related to payout to the payout control board 951, and receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 951. Or Further, the main control MPU transmits various commands related to control of game effects and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control I / O port. When the main control MPU receives various commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 951, the main control MPU shapes these various commands and sends them to the peripheral control unit 1511.

  The main control board 1310 is supplied with various voltages from the power supply board in the power supply board box 930, which will be described in detail later. The power supply board that supplies various voltages to the main control board 1310 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter, simply referred to as “capacitor”) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is cut off. ). With this capacitor, the main control MPU can store various kinds of information in the RAM in the power-off processing even when the power is turned off. The stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM when the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on. The operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch is also output to the payout control board 951.

  Further, the main control board 1310 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit. The power failure monitoring circuit monitors a decrease in various voltages supplied from the power supply board, and outputs a power failure notification signal as a power failure notification when the voltage becomes lower than the power failure notification voltage. This power failure notice signal is input to the main control MPU via the main control I / O port and is also output to the payout control board 951 and the like.

[6-2. Discharge control board]
Although not shown in detail, the payout control board 951 for controlling the payout of the game balls, etc. performs a payout control unit 952 for performing various controls related to the payout, a firing control by a firing solenoid 682, and a ball by the ball feeding solenoid 255. A firing control unit 953 that performs feed control, an error LED display that displays the state of the pachinko machine 1, an error release switch that releases an error displayed on the error LED display, a ball tank 802, and a tank rail. 803, a ball guiding unit 820, and a game ball in the payout device 830 are discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 and a ball removing switch for starting a ball removing operation is provided.

[6-2a. Dispensing control unit]
Although detailed illustration is omitted, the payout control unit 952 that performs various kinds of control related to payouts on the payout control board 951 has a built-in micro ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, a RAM that temporarily stores data, and the like. Issue control MPU which is a processor, issue control I / O port as an I / O device, external WDT (external watchdog timer) for monitoring whether the issue control MPU is operating normally, and issue A payout motor drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 834 of the device 830, and a payout control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches regarding payout are input. The payout control MPU has not only built-in ROM and RAM, but also a function for preventing fraud.

  The payout control MPU of the payout control unit 952 receives various kinds of information (game information) related to the game from the main control board 1310 and various kinds of commands related to the payout in a serial manner via the payout control I / O port, or the main control board 1310. In addition to the operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch from the device being input through the payout control I / O port, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 535 is input, the out-of-ball detection sensor 827, and the payout. Detection signals from the detection sensor 842 and the blade rotation detection sensor 840 are input.

  The detection signals from the out-of-ball detection sensor 827, the payout detection sensor 842, and the blade rotation detection sensor 840 of the payout device 830 are input to the payout control input circuit and input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I / O port. It

  Further, detection signals from a door frame opening switch that detects opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the body frame 4 and a body frame opening switch that detects opening of the body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 are input to the payout control input circuit, It is input to the payout control MPU through the payout control I / O port.

  Further, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 of the foul cover unit 270 is input to the payout control input circuit, and is input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I / O port.

  The payout control MPU outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 834 to the payout motor 834 via the payout control I / O, and a signal for displaying the state of the pachinko machine 1 on an error LED display. , The command for outputting to the error LED indicator via the payout control I / O port or transmitting the command for indicating the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the main control board 1310 via the payout control I / O port in a serial manner. Or, the number of balls actually paid out is output to the external terminal board via the payout control I / O port. This external terminal board is connected to a hall computer installed on the game hall side. This hall computer monitors the player's game by grasping the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1, the game information of the pachinko machine 1, and the like.

  The error LED display is a segment display and displays the state of the pachinko machine 1 by displaying alphanumeric characters and figures. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED indicator include the following. For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it indicates that it is "normal", and when the number "0" is displayed, it indicates that "connection is abnormal" (specifically, the main control board 1310 and That there is an abnormality in the electrical connection between the payout control board 951 and the board), and when the number "1" is displayed, it means "out of ball" (specifically, out of ball). Based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 827, the player is informed that there is no game ball in the payout device 830), and when the number "2" is displayed, it means that "the ball is a ball" (specifically, the blade). Based on the detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840, the payout blade 839 and the game ball are engaged with each other in the payout passage 831d and the payout passage 832d of the payout device 830, and the payout blade 839 is difficult to rotate. "3" is displayed If it is, the fact that there is a "count switch error" (specifically, there is a problem in the payout detection sensor 842 based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 842) is displayed, and the number "5" is displayed. "Retry error" (specifically, the number of retries of the payout operation has reached the preset upper limit value) is displayed, and when the number "6" is displayed, "full retry" is displayed. Is displayed (specifically, the game balls stored in the foul cover unit 270 are full based on the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279), and the number "7" is displayed. If it is, "CR is not connected" is notified (the electric connection is disconnected in any of the payout control board 951 to the CR unit), and the number "9" is displayed. (Specifically, yet that the ball number of game balls no payout has reached a predetermined number spheres) message indicating "stock" when there are informed.

  The ball lending request signal of the game ball from the ball lending button 328 and the return request signal of the prepaid card from the return button 329 are input to the CR unit. The CR unit serially transmits a signal designating the number of game balls to be rented according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 951, and this signal is received by the payout control I / O port and input to the payout control MPU. To be done. Further, the CR unit updates the remaining amount of the prepaid card inserted according to the number of balls of the rented gaming balls, and outputs a signal for displaying the remaining amount on the ball lending / returning display section 330. Is input and displayed in the ball lending / returning display section 330.

[6-2b. Firing controller]
Although not shown in detail in the drawings, a firing control unit 953 that performs firing control by the firing solenoid 682 and ball delivery control by the ball delivery solenoid 255 is a firing control input to which detection signals from various detection switches related to firing are input. A circuit, an oscillation circuit that outputs a clock signal at regular time intervals, a firing timing control circuit that outputs a firing reference pulse for launching a game ball toward the game area 5a based on this clock signal, and this firing reference pulse A firing solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the firing solenoid 682 based on the above, and a ball feed solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the ball feed solenoid 255 based on the firing reference pulse. The firing timing control circuit generates a firing reference pulse based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit so that 100 gaming balls are launched toward the game area 5a per minute, and outputs the firing reference pulse to the firing solenoid drive circuit. A ball-sending reference pulse is generated by multiplying the firing reference pulse by a predetermined number and is output to the ball-sending solenoid drive circuit.

  Regarding the handle unit 300, a handle touch sensor 310 that detects whether or not a palm or a finger is in contact with the handle 302, and a single-shot button that detects whether or not the launch of a game ball is forcibly stopped by the intention of the player. A detection signal from the operation sensor 312 is input to the firing control input circuit and then to the firing timing control circuit. Further, when the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal board are electrically connected, they are input to the firing control input circuit as a CR connection signal and then input to the firing timing control circuit. A signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 307 that electrically adjusts the strength at which the game ball is launched toward the game area 5a according to the rotational position of the handle 302 is input to the firing solenoid drive circuit.

  Based on a signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 307, this launch solenoid drive circuit inputs a drive current for launching a game ball toward the game area 5a with a launch strength corresponding to the rotational position of the handle 302, as a launch reference pulse. When triggered, the output is output to the firing solenoid 682. On the other hand, the ball feeding solenoid drive circuit outputs a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 255 in response to the input of the ball feeding reference pulse, so that the game balls stored in the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 are balled. One ball is received in the sending unit 250, and when the input of the ball sending reference pulse is completed, the output of the constant current is stopped and the accepted game ball is sent to the ball launching device 680 side. Thus, the drive current output from the firing solenoid drive circuit to the firing solenoid 682 is variably controlled, whereas the drive current output from the ball feed solenoid drive circuit to the ball feed solenoid 255 is controlled to be constant. ing.

  The power supply board that supplies various voltages to the payout control board 951 includes a capacitor as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is shut off. With this capacitor, the payout control MPU can store various kinds of information in the RAM of the payout control board 951 in the power-off process even when the power is cut off. When the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on, the stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM of the payout control board 951.

[6-3. Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 169, the peripheral control board 1510 uses the peripheral control section 1511 that performs effect control based on commands from the main control board 1310, and the door frame side effect based on the control data from the peripheral control section 1511. The display device 460, the main effect display device 1600, and the like, and an effect display control unit 1512 that performs drawing control.

[6-3a. Peripheral controller]
Although not shown in detail, the peripheral control unit 1511 that performs the effect control in the peripheral control board 1510, a peripheral control MPU as a microprocessor, a peripheral control ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, and a high-quality sound performance And a sound ROM in which sound information such as music and sound effects referred to by the sound source IC is stored.

  The peripheral control MPU has a plurality of built-in parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, etc. When receiving various commands from the main control board 1310, each decorative board of the game board 5 is based on these various commands. The game board side light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a provided color LED or the like is output from the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board to the first effect drive board 3032 and the second effect drive. From the serial I / O port for the game board decoration drive board, the game board side drive data for transmitting to the board 3033 or outputting a drive signal to a drive motor for operating various effect units provided on the game board 5 It transmits to the one effect drive board 3032 and the second effect drive board 3033, or outputs a drive signal to an electric drive source such as the vibration motor 424 provided in the door frame 3. Door-side drive data for lighting, and door-side light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a color LED or the like provided on each decorative substrate of the door frame 3. Control data indicating a screen for transmitting door-side drive light emission data from the frame decoration drive board serial I / O port to the door frame 3 side and displaying on the door frame side effect display device 460 and the main effect display device 1600 (display Command) from the display control unit serial I / O port to the effect display control unit 1512, and also outputs a control signal (sound command) for extracting sound information from the sound ROM to the sound source IC. To do.

  Detection signals from various detection sensors for detecting the positions of various movable effect units provided on the game board 5 are generated by the first effect drive board 3032 and the second effect drive board 3033 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010. Via the peripheral control MPU. Further, the detection signal from the press detection sensor 440 of the effect operation unit 400 provided in the door frame 3 is input to the peripheral control MPU.

  Further, the peripheral control MPU receives a signal (operation signal) indicating that the effect display control unit 1512 is operating normally from the effect display control unit 1512, and based on this operation signal, the effect display control unit 1512 operates. Watching for activity.

  The sound source IC extracts sound information from the sound ROM based on the control data (sound command) from the peripheral control MPU, and produces various effects from the upper speaker 573 and the speaker 921 provided on the door frame 3, the main body frame 4, and the like. Control is performed so that the combined music and sound effects are played. The volume can be adjusted by rotating the volume protruding rearward from the peripheral control board box 1520 in which the peripheral control board 1510 is housed. In the present embodiment, an acoustic signal (for example, 2ch stereo signal, 4ch stereo signal, 2.1ch surround signal, or sound signal) as sound information is output to the upper speaker 573 on the door frame 3 side and the bass speaker 921 of the main body frame 4. By transmitting a 4.1 ch surround signal, etc., it is possible to present a more realistic sound effect (sound effect) than before.

  In addition to the built-in WDT (watch dock timer) built in the peripheral control MPU, the peripheral control unit 1511 also includes an external WDT (watch dock timer) (not shown). Using WDT together, it diagnoses whether its own system is out of control.

  The display command output from the peripheral control MPU to the effect display control unit 1512 is performed by the serial input / output port, and in the present embodiment, the bit rate (size of data that can be transmitted per unit time) is 19.2 km ( k) BPS (bits per second, hereinafter referred to as “bps”) is set. On the other hand, the initial data, the door frame side lighting blink command, the game board side lighting blink command, which is output from the peripheral control MPU to the first effect drive board 3032 and the second effect drive board 3033 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010, This is performed by a plurality of serial input / output ports different from the movable body drive command and the display command. In this embodiment, the bit rate is set to 250 kbps.

  The first effect drive board 3032 and the second effect drive board 3033 output a lighting signal or a flashing signal based on the received door frame side lighting blink command to the LED of each decorative board provided in the door frame 3. , Or outputs a lighting signal or a blinking signal based on the received game board side lighting blink command to the LED of each decorative board provided in the game board 5.

  Also, the first effect drive board 3032 and the second effect drive board 3033 send a drive signal based on the received drive command to the vibration motor 424 provided in the door frame 3 or each drive motor provided in the game board 5. And output to.

[6-4. Performance display control unit]
Next, although detailed illustration is omitted, the display control MPU as a microprocessor, which is not shown in detail, is included in the effect display control unit 1512 that performs drawing control of the door frame side effect display device 460 and the main effect display device 1600 in the peripheral control board 1510. A display control ROM that stores various processing programs, various commands, and various data, a VDP (abbreviation of Video Display Processor) that controls display of the door frame side effect display device 460 and the main effect display device 1600, and a door frame side effect display device. 460, an image ROM for storing various data of the screen displayed on the main effect display device 1600, and an image RAM for transferring and copying various data stored in the image ROM.

  The display control MPU has a built-in parallel I / O port, serial I / O port, etc., and controls the VDP based on the control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 to display the door frame side effect display device. 460, drawing control of the main effect display device 1600 is performed. If the display control MPU is operating normally, it outputs an operation signal to that effect to the peripheral control unit 1511. Further, the display control MPU receives an in-execution signal from the VDP, and performs the interrupt process when the output of the in-execution signal is stopped every 16 ms.

  The display control ROM includes various programs for generating a screen to be drawn on the door frame side effect display device 460 and the main effect display device 1600, as well as schedule data corresponding to control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511. A plurality of non-resident area transfer schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) are stored. The schedule data is configured by arranging screen data that defines the screen configuration in time series, and defines the order of screens to be drawn on the door frame side effect display device 460 and the main effect display device 1600. The non-resident area transfer schedule data is configured by arranging the non-resident area transfer data, which defines the order when various data stored in the image ROM is transferred to the non-resident area of the image RAM, in time series. The non-resident area transfer data is an order in which the screen data drawn on the door frame side effect display device 460 and the main effect display device 1600 according to the progress of the schedule data is transferred in advance from the image ROM to the non-resident area of the image RAM. Is specified.

  The display control MPU extracts the first screen data of the schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 from the display control ROM and outputs it to the VDP, and then the screen data following the first screen data. It is extracted from the display control ROM and output to VDP. In this way, the display control MPU extracts the screen data arranged in time series in the schedule data from the display control ROM one by one from the top screen data and outputs the screen data to the VDP.

  When the screen data output from the display control MPU is input to the VDP, the sprite data is extracted from the image RAM based on the input screen data to the door frame side effect display device 460 and the main effect display device 1600. The drawing data to be displayed is generated, and the generated drawing data is output to the door frame side effect display device 460 and the main effect display device 1600. Further, when the door frame side effect display device 460 and the main effect display device 1600 do not accept the screen data from the display control MPU, the VDP outputs a running signal to that effect to the display control MPU. A line buffer system is adopted for VDP. The "line buffer method" means that one line of drawing data for drawing the horizontal direction of the door frame side effect display device 460 and the main effect display device 1600 is held in the line buffer, and the one line held in this line buffer is held. Is output to the door frame side effect display device 460 and the main effect display device 1600.

  The image ROM stores an extremely large amount of sprite data and has a large capacity. When the capacity of the image ROM becomes large, that is, when the number of sprites drawn on the door frame side effect display device 460 and the main effect display device 1600 increases, the access speed of the image ROM cannot be ignored and the door frame side effect display device 460. , The speed of drawing on the main effect display device 1600 will be affected. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the sprite data stored in the image ROM is transferred and copied to the image RAM having a high access speed, and the sprite data is extracted from the image RAM. The sprite data is basic data that is data before the sprite is expanded into the bitmap format, and is stored in the image ROM in a compressed state.

  Here, the "sprite" will be described. The "sprite" is an image displayed as a unit on the door frame side effect display device 460 and the main effect display device 1600. For example, when various characters (characters) are displayed on the door frame side effect display device 460 and the main effect display device 1600, the data for drawing each person is called “sprite”. Thereby, when displaying a plurality of persons on the door frame side effect display device 460 and the main effect display device 1600, a plurality of sprites are used. In addition to people, houses, mountains, roads, etc. that make up the background are sprites, and the entire background can be a single sprite. These sprites are set to a position arranged on the screen and a vertical relationship when the sprites overlap with each other (hereinafter, referred to as "order of sprite superposition"), and the door frame side effect display device 460 and the main effect. It is drawn on the display device 1600.

  The sprite is configured by laminating a plurality of rectangular areas each having 64 pixels in the vertical and horizontal directions. The data for drawing this rectangular area is called a "sprite character". In the case of a small sprite, one sprite character can be used for expression, and in the case of a relatively large sprite such as a person, for example, a total of 6 sprite characters arranged horizontally 2 x vertically 3 can be used. Can be expressed. In the case of a larger sprite such as the background, a larger number of sprite characters can be used for expression. Thus, the number and arrangement of sprite characters can be arbitrarily specified for each sprite.

  The door frame side effect display device 460 and the main effect display device 1600 sequentially perform main scanning for setting a display state for each pixel in one direction along the pixel and one direction thereof when viewed from the front from left to right. It is driven by sub-scanning in which main scanning is repeated in the direction intersecting with. When the drawing data for one line output from the effect display control unit 1512 is input to the door frame side effect display device 460 and the main effect display device 1600, the door frame side effect display device 460 and the main effect display are performed as main scanning. The pixels for one line are sequentially output from left to right when viewed from the front of the device 1600. When the output for one line is completed, the door frame side effect display device 460 and the main effect display device 1600 shift to the line immediately below as sub-scanning, and when drawing data for the next line is input in the same manner, Based on the drawing data for the next line, as main scanning, the door frame side effect display device 460 and the main effect display device 1600 are sequentially output to pixels for one line from left to right when viewed from the front.

[7. Game contents]
Next, the game contents by the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 135 and the like. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the player rotates the handle 302 of the handle unit 300 arranged in the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3, whereby the game balls stored in the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 are stored. , Is driven into the upper part of the game area 5a through between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 on the game board 5, and the game with the game ball is started. The game ball hit to the upper part in the game area 5a flows down either the left side or the right side of the center accessory 2500 depending on the hitting strength. Note that the driving strength of the game ball can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle 302, and can be driven more strongly as it is rotated in the clockwise direction, and a maximum of 100 game balls per minute in a row, that is, , You can hit a game ball at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

  Further, in the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) are planted on the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) in a predetermined gauge arrangement at appropriate positions, and the game balls serve as obstacle nails. By abutting, the flow velocity of the game ball is suppressed, and various movements are given to the game ball so that the movement can be enjoyed. Further, in the game area 5a, in addition to the obstacle nail, a wind turbine (not shown) that is rotated by the contact of the game ball is provided at an appropriate position.

  When the game ball that has been driven into the upper part of the center character 2500 enters the left side in the front view of the outer peripheral surface of the center character 2500 that is higher than the highest part, it comes into contact with a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown), The area on the left side of the center accessory 2500 flows down. Then, when the game ball flowing down the area on the left side of the center role object 2500 enters the warp entrance 2520 opening on the outer peripheral surface of the center role object 2500, it is supplied from the warp exit 2522 to the stage 2530.

  The game ball supplied to the stage 2530 rolls on the stage 2530 and moves back and forth, and is discharged forward from either the top of the center in the left-right direction or the valleys on the left and right sides of the top. To be done. When the game ball is discharged into the game area 5a from the top of the center of the stage 2530, the top is located immediately above the first starting port 2002, so that the game ball is accepted by the first starting port 2002 with a high probability. When the game balls are received in the first starting opening 2002, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 321 from the payout device 830 through the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. .

  When the game ball rolling on the stage 2530 is discharged into the game area 5a from the valleys on the left and right sides of the top, it flows down toward the starting opening unit 2100. The game balls released from the stage 2530 of the center accessory 2500 into the game area 5a are the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100, the general winning opening 2001 of the starting opening unit 2100 and the side unit 2200, and the attacker unit 2400. There is a possibility of being accepted in the general winning opening 2001 and the like.

  By the way, when the game ball flowing down to the left side of the center accessory 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2520, the left shelf 2202 of the side unit 2200 pulls it toward the center in the left-right direction, and the general winning opening 2001 of the side unit 2200. Alternatively, there is a possibility of being accepted in the first start opening 2002 of the start opening unit 2100, the general winning opening 2001, or the like. When the game balls are received in the general winning opening 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out from the payout device 830 to the upper plate 321 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. .

  On the other hand, when the game ball struck in the upper part of the center character 2500 in the game area 5a enters the right side of the outermost surface of the center character 2500 (so-called right-handed), It is discharged from the right guide passage 2540 of the center accessory 2500 to the upper part of the attacker unit 2400. Below the downstream end of the right guide passage 2540, the gate portion 2003 and the second starting port 2004 of the attacker unit 2400 are provided, and pass through the gate portion 2003 with a certain probability.

  Then, when the game ball hit to the right passes through the gate portion 2003, a normal lottery is performed in the main control board 1310, and when the result of the ordinary draw is "normal win", the closed second start opening 2004 Is open for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 to 10 seconds), and the game ball can be received in the second starting opening 2004. Then, when the game balls are received in the second starting opening 2004, a predetermined number (for example, four) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 321 from the payout device 830 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. It

  In the present embodiment, in the ordinary lottery performed by the game balls passing through the gate portion 2003, a certain amount of time is set from the start of the ordinary lottery to the suggestion of the ordinary lottery result (for example, 0. 01 to 60 seconds, also referred to as a normal fluctuation time). The suggestion of this ordinary lottery result is displayed on the function display unit 1400 of the game board 5. The second starting port 2004 is normally opened after the elapse of the variable time. As this normal fluctuation time is shorter, the game ball for which “normal hit” is selected in the gate section 2003 will be accepted in the second starting opening 2004.

  It should be noted that if the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003 after the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003 and the ordinary lottery result is suggested, the suggestion of the ordinary lottery result cannot be started. The start of suggesting the result is held until the suggestion of the result of the ordinary drawing is completed. Further, the number of holding of the normal lottery result is limited to four, and if the number is more than four, even if the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003, it is discarded without holding. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the gaming hall side due to the accumulation of reservations.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a game ball is received in the first start opening 2002 and the second start opening 2004, an advantageous game state that is advantageous to the player on the main control board 1310 (for example, "big hit", " "Middle hit", "Small hit", "Probability change (probable change) hit", "Time reduction (time saving) hit", "Per prize" (V prize hole (first entrance 2007) can accept game balls A lottery of the special lottery result that causes "a hit"), etc. is generated. Then, the result of the selected special lottery is suggested to the player over a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds, also referred to as special variation time). The special lottery results that are drawn by accepting game balls in the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 include "miss", "small hit", "2R big hit", "5R big hit", and "5R big hit". "15R big hit", "probability change (probability change)", "time saving (time shortening)", "probability changing short time hit", "probability changing time short hit", "second big hit (for example, character hit)", etc. is there.

  In the case where the special lottery results (first special lottery result and second special lottery result) drawn by receiving the game balls into the first start opening 2002 and the second start opening 2004 are the special lottery results that cause the advantageous gaming state. After the elapse of the special variation time, the special winning opening 2005 becomes ready to receive the game balls in a predetermined opening / closing pattern. When the game ball is received in the special winning opening 2005 while the special winning opening 2005 is open, a predetermined number (for example, 10 or 13) of games are played from the payout device 830 by the main control board and the payout control board 951. The balls are dispensed to the upper plate 321. Therefore, by allowing the special winning opening 2005 to receive the game balls when the special winning opening 2005 can accept the game balls, a large amount of the game balls can be paid out and the player can be entertained.

  When the special lottery result is “small hit”, after the special winning opening 2005 is in an open state in which a game ball can be received for a predetermined short time (for example, 0.2 seconds to 0.6 seconds). The opening / closing pattern for closing is repeated a plurality of times (for example, twice). On the other hand, when the special lottery result is “big hit”, a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) elapses after the special winning opening 2005 is in an open state in which a game ball can be received, or the special winning opening 2005 Accepting a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls, if any one of the conditions is satisfied, a predetermined opening and closing pattern (one opening and closing pattern is called one round) that makes the game ball unacceptable closed state Repeat the number of times (predetermined number of rounds). For example, if "2R jackpot" is 2 rounds, "5R jackpot" is 5 rounds, and "15R jackpot" is 15 rounds, the advantageous game state advantageous for the player is generated.

  In the case of "big hit", change the probability that special lottery results such as "big hit" will be drawn after the big hit game ("probability change"), or change the display time of the effect image that suggests the special lottery result. ("Short-time winning") There is a "hit".

  When the special lottery result (for example, the second special lottery result) is "per prize", after the special winning opening 2005 allows the game balls to be accepted in a predetermined pattern, the first entrance 2007 for a predetermined time. When the game ball can be received in the (V winning opening) and the game ball is received in the first receiving hole 2007, ST (special time) is generated as an advantageous game state. This ST is to maintain a state of probable change or shortening of time during a predetermined number of times of change.

  In the present embodiment, the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004 are received from the start of the special drawing until the result of the special drawing is suggested. (2) When the game ball is accepted in the starting port 2004, the suggestion of the special lottery result cannot be started. Therefore, the suggestion of the special lottery result is suspended until the suggestion of the special lottery result previously drawn is completed. It The number of reserved special lottery results to be reserved is up to four for the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004, and for more than that, the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening are set. Even if the game ball is accepted in 2004, the special lottery result is discarded without being held. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the gaming hall side due to the accumulation of reservations.

  The suggestion of the special lottery result is performed by the function display unit 1400 and the main effect display device 1600. In the function display unit 1400, the main control board 1310 directly controls the suggestion of the special lottery result. The suggestion of the special lottery result on the function display unit 1400 suggests the special lottery result by a combination of the LEDs that are turned on after a plurality of LEDs are repeatedly turned on and off to blink for a predetermined time.

  On the other hand, in the main effect display device 1600, based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510 is indirectly controlled to suggest the special lottery result as an effect image. The effect image that suggests the special lottery result on the main effect display device 1600 is a variable display pattern in which each pattern row is changed in a state where three image rows each including a plurality of patterns are displayed side by side. The columns are sequentially stopped and displayed, and the respective pattern columns are stopped and displayed so that the symbols of the three symbol columns that are stopped and displayed are a combination corresponding to the special lottery result. When the special lottery result is other than “miss”, after the three pattern rows are stopped and the respective symbols are stopped and displayed, a finalized image suggesting the special lottery result is displayed on the main effect display device 1600 to be selected. An advantageous game state (for example, a small hit game, a big hit game, etc.) corresponding to the special lottery result occurs.

  It should be noted that the time indicating the special lottery result on the function display unit 1400 (LED blinking time (fluctuation time)) and the time suggesting the special lottery result on the main effect display device 1600 (the pattern row fluctuates and the final image is confirmed). (The time until is displayed) is different, and the function display unit 1400 is set to a longer time.

  In addition, in the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to the display of the effect image for suggesting the special lottery result by the main effect display device 1600, the effect operation unit 400 (the first operation) in the door frame 3 according to the special lottery result selected by the lottery. Operation buttons 410 of second effect operation unit 400A, third effect operation unit 400B, etc., door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A, decorative rotating body unit 530, etc.), back unit 3000 Using the back front decoration unit 3100, the back upper movable effect unit 3200, the back rear central movable effect unit 3300, the back rear left movable effect unit 3400, the back right movable effect unit 3500, etc., as appropriate, a light emission effect and a movable effect. , Display performance, etc. can be performed, and the player can be entertained by various performances. Interest in the technique can be suppressed.

[8. Relationship between the present embodiment and the present invention]
In the present embodiment, the back upper first rotating decorative body 3232 and the back upper second rotating decorative body 3233 of the back upper movable main unit 3230 in the back movable movable unit 3200 of the back unit 3000 are the same as the present embodiment. The back upper first rotating decorative body 3232 in the embodiment is the first rotating decorative body of the present invention, the back upper second rotating decorative body 3233 is the second rotating decorative body of the present invention, and the back upper in the present embodiment. The first LEDs 3234a of the decorative substrate 3234 respectively correspond to the light emitting means of the present invention.

[9. Characteristic effects of this embodiment]
As described above, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the back upper movable main body unit 3230 of the back upper movable effect unit 3200 includes the back upper first rotating ornament 3232 in front of the back upper first rotating ornament 3232. The second upper backside rotating decorative body 3233 having a smaller outer shape is arranged, and the second upper backside rotating decorative body 3233 is revolved around the first shaft portion 3232a of the first upper back rotating decorative body 3232. The second shaft portion 3233a is arranged, and when the back first rotation decorative body 3232 and the back second rotation decorative body 3233 are respectively rotated, the first shaft portion 3232a and the second shaft portion 3233a are eccentric to each other. Therefore, it is possible to change the degree of overlap with each other according to the change of each rotation angle, and it is possible to show a moving effect in which each of them fluctuates. To the movement of the rolling motion of the rotation (revolution) of the back on the second rotary decoration member 3233 can be largely different, it is possible to show moving effect of feeling swirling round and round the player. Therefore, when the back first rotation decorative body 3232 and the back second rotation decorative body 3233 are rotated (movable effect), a movable effect different from the conventional one can be shown to the player, which is strong against the player. It is possible to give an impact, and it is possible to sufficiently enhance the effect produced by the rotation of the back first rotation decorative body 3232 and the back second rotation decorative body 3233 to entertain the player, and to the game of the player. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, as described above, since the back upper first rotary decorative body 3232 and the rear upper second rotating decorative body 3233 that are eccentric to each other (movable effect) can have a strong impact on the player, When they rotate, the player can be made to think that something is good, and it is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the game and suppress a decrease in interest. Further, since the above-described effects are produced, the back first rotation decorative body 3232 and the back second rotation decorative that can be suitably used for the pachinko machine 1 in which the effect suggesting the special lottery result is executed can be suitably performed. A body 3233 can be provided.

  Further, when the back first rotation decorative body 3232 and the back second rotation decorative body 3233 are respectively rotated, since the outer circumferences of the respective ones are formed in a non-circular variable polygonal shape, those Can be clearly recognized as rotating, and the player can pay attention to the rotation (movable effect) of the back first rotation decoration 3232 and the back second rotation decoration 3233. Moreover, when the back first rotation decorative body 3232 and the back second rotation decorative body 3233 are rotated, the respective shaft centers (first shaft portion 3232a and second shaft portion 3233a) are eccentric to each other. Therefore, it can be shown to the player that they are rotating rattlingly, and it is possible to entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition, when light is emitted from the first LED 3234a of the back decoration substrate 3234, the back first rotation decorative body 3232 and the back second rotation decorative body 3233, which are partially transparent, emit light. Since it can be decorated, the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the back first rotation decorative body 3232 and the back second rotating decoration 3233, and the back first rotating decoration 3232 and the back upper third The decoration of the two-turn decorative body 3233 can be enjoyed. In addition, when the back top first rotation decoration body 3232 and the back top second rotation decoration body 3233 are rotated, light is emitted from the first LED 3234a of the back decoration board 3234 to the front side. The second rotating decorative body 3233 on the back side revolves on the front side of the first rotating decorative body 3232, so that the state of light transmission can be variously changed and the glittering luminous decoration can be shown to the player, which has a strong impact on the player. It is possible to further enhance the effect produced by the back first rotation decorative body 3232 and the back second rotation decorative body 3233, and it is possible to entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest. .

  Furthermore, since the outer shape of the back upper second rotary decorative body 3233 that revolves around the first shaft portion 3232a of the back upper first rotating decorative body 3232 is smaller than that of the back upper first rotating decorative body 3232, When the back first rotation decorative body 3232 and the back second rotation decorative body 3233 are respectively rotated, only the back second rotation decorative body 3233 that revolves around the first shaft portion 3232a is conspicuous. It is possible to suppress, and it is possible for the player to sufficiently recognize the rotation of the back first rotation decoration 3232, and two rotation decorations (a back first rotation decoration 3232 and a back second rotation decoration) are provided. It is possible to maximize the effect produced by the movable effect using the body 3233) and reliably achieve the above-described effect.

  In addition, since the back upper second rotary decorative body 3233 which revolves around the first shaft portion 3232a is arranged in front of the back upper first rotary decorative body 3232, the back upper second rotating decorative body 3232 is arranged from the front side (player side). Since the entire two-turn decorative body 3233 is always visible, it is possible to reliably show the player how the second upper rotary ornament 3233 revolves around the first shaft portion 3232a. The movement of the second rotating decorative body 3233 can be enjoyed.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the back rear left movable effect unit 3400 and the back rear right movable effect unit 3500 in the back unit 3000, the adjoining back rear left rotating decoration body 3410 and back rear right rotating decoration are provided. A plurality of back rear left rotation decorative bodies 3410 and backs in which the shaft portions 3412 of the body 3510 and the shaft portions 3512 extend in mutually different directions, and the respective shaft portions 3412 and 3512 are arranged on the same plane. A rear right rotating decorative body 3510 is provided, and rotation is transmitted between the shaft portion 3412 and the shaft portions 3512 of the rear rear left rotating decorative body 3410 and the rear rear right rotating decorative body 3510 which are adjacent to each other by a rotary coupling mechanism 3450 including a universal shaft joint. Since they are connected as possible, the rear rear left drive motor 3431 and the rear rear right drive motor 3531 cause the first rear rear left rotating decoration 3410A and the third rear rear left. When the shaft portion 3412 and the shaft portion 3512 of the rolled decorative body 3410C, the first back rear right rotation decoration body 3510A, and the third back rear right rotation decoration body 3510C are rotated, another second back rear surface is generated through the rotation coupling mechanism 3450. Rotation is transmitted to the shaft portion 3412 and the shaft portion 3512 of the left rotation decoration body 3410B, the fourth back rear left rotation decoration body 3410D, the second back rear right rotation decoration body 3510B, and the fourth back rear right rotation decoration body 3510D. Therefore, it is possible to simultaneously rotate a plurality of back-and-back left rotating decorations 3410 and a plurality of back-and-right rotating decorations 3510.

  The rotation transmission by the rotary connection mechanism 3450 (universal joint) will be described in detail. The rear rear left drive motor 3431 and the rear rear right drive motor 3531 allow the first rear rear left rotation decoration 3410A and the third rear rear left rotation decoration. When the shaft portion 3412 or the shaft portion 3512 of the 3410C or the first rear back right rotation decoration body 3510A and the third back rear right rotation decoration body 3510C is rotated, the transmission portion 3452a of the spider 3452 is provided on the side surface of the tip end arm portion 3451. Abutting, and further, the transmission portion 3452a is the axis of the second back rear left rotation decoration 3410B and the fourth back rear left rotation decoration 3410D and the second back rear right rotation decoration 3510B and the fourth back rear right rotation decoration 3510D. By contacting the side surface of the arm portion 3451 at the tip of the portion 3412 and the shaft portion 3512, the second back rear left rotation decoration body 3410B and the fourth back rear left rotation decoration body 3 Shaft portion of 10D and the second back right after rotating decorative body 3510B, and fourth back after clockwise rotation decorations 3510D 3412 and the shaft portion 3512 is able to rotate. At this time, the shaft portion 3412 or the shaft portion of the first back-rear left rotation decoration 3410A, the third back-rear left rotation decoration 3410C, the first back-rear right rotation decoration 3510A, or the third back-rear right rotation decoration 3510C. 3512, and the shaft portion 3412 and the shaft portion 3512 of the second back rear left rotation decoration body 3410B and the fourth back rear left rotation decoration body 3410D and the second back rear right rotation decoration body 3510B and the fourth back rear right rotation decoration body 3510D. Since the and are extending in different directions, the plane passing through the center of the four transmission portions 3452a of the cross-shaped spider 3452 bisects the angle of the central axis of the two shaft portions 3412 and 3512. The four transmission parts 3452a relatively slide between the arm parts 3451 in the extending direction of the arm parts 3451 so as to maintain a state in which they match the plane including the line. Accordingly, even if the two shaft portions 3412 and 3512 that are connected are different in the extending direction, the first back rear left rotation decorative body 3410A and the third back rear left rotation decoration body 3410C and the first back The rotation of the shaft portion 3412 and the shaft portion 3512 of the rear right rotation decoration body 3510A and the third back rear right rotation decoration body 3510C is controlled by the second back rear left rotation decoration body 3410B and the fourth back rear left rotation decoration body 3410D and the second. The second back rear left rotation decoration 3410B and the fourth back rear left rotation decoration are smoothly transmitted to the shaft portion 3412 and the shaft portion 3512 of the back rear right rotation decoration 3510B and the fourth back right rotation decoration 3510D. It is possible to rotate the shaft portion 3412 and the shaft portion 3512 of the 3410D, the second back rear right rotation decoration body 3510B, and the fourth back rear right rotation decoration body 3510D.

  In this manner, the first rear back left rotation decoration 3410A, the third rear rear left rotation decoration 3410C, the first rear rear right rotation decoration 3510A and the first rear rear left rotation decoration 3410A When three back-and-right rotation decorative bodies 3510C are rotated, a plurality (a large number) of back-and-left left rotating decoration bodies 3410 and back-and-right rotating decoration bodies 3510 can be rotated. Since it is possible to reduce the number of the back rear left drive motors 3431 and the back rear right drive motors 3531 to the back rear right rotation decorative body 3510 as much as possible, the back rear left drive motors 3431 and the back rear right drive motors 3531 are provided. The required space can be made as narrow as possible, and the space required for the plurality of back-and-left left rotating decorations 3410 and the plurality of back-and-right rotating decorations 3510 can be relatively wide. That. Therefore, since it is possible to widen the space of the back-rear left-turning ornament 3410 and the back-rear-turning ornament 3510, the rotation range of the back-rear left-turning ornament 3410 and the back-rear-turning ornament 3510 is increased. To make the movement more entertaining, or to make the back-rear left-turning ornament 3410 and the back-rear-turning ornament 3510 larger and more conspicuous. Since the impact when rotating by increasing the number of the bodies 3510 can be enhanced, the effect of movement and decoration of the plurality of back-and-back left rotating decoration bodies 3410 and back-and-right rotating decoration bodies 3510 is further enhanced. Therefore, it is possible to entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

  In addition, the first back-rear left rotation decoration 3410A, the third back-rear left rotation decoration 3410C, the first back-rear right rotation decoration 3510A, and the third back-rear right rotation decoration 3510C are connected to the back-rear left drive motor 3431 and the back. When rotated by the rear right drive motor 3531, a plurality of back rear left rotation decorations 3410 and back rear right rotation decorations 3510 in which the respective shaft portions 3412 and shaft portions 3512 extend in different directions via the rotation coupling mechanism 3450. Since they can be rotated at the same time, it is possible to show the player a movement (moving effect) with a sense of unity while the movements of the plurality of back-and-left left rotating decorations 3410 and back-and-right rotating decorations 3510 are disturbed. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the effect produced by the plurality of back-and-left counterclockwise decorations 3410 and the plurality of back-and-right rotation decorations 3510. At this time, since the shaft portions 3412 and the shaft portions 3512 of the plurality of back-and-left left rotating decorations 3410 and the plurality of back-and-right rotating decorations 3510 are arranged on the same plane, a plurality of players can be provided. It is possible to make it easier to recognize the back-and-left counterclockwise decorations 3410 and the back-and-right rotation decorations 3510 as belonging to the same group. Even if 3510 rotate at the same time, the player does not feel uncomfortable, and entertains the movement (movable effect) of a plurality of back-rear left-turning ornaments 3410 and back-rear right-turning ornaments 3510 that rotate at the same time. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

  Further, two (a pair) arm portions 3451 are projected from the respective shaft portions 3412 and the tip ends of the shaft portions 3512 of the two back rear left rotation decorations 3410 and the back rear right rotation decorations 3510 which are adjacent to each other. Since the number of the arm portions 3451 is minimized, the circumferential gap between the arm portions 3451 is inserted as wide as possible without increasing the outer diameter of the arm portions 3451. The transmission portion 3452a of the spider 3452 can have a thickness that has sufficient strength. Therefore, damage to the spider 3452 can be reduced by making the transmission portion 3452a of the spider 3452 as thick as possible, and the game is interrupted due to damage during the game, which gives the player discomfort. Can be avoided, and a decrease in interest in the game by the player can be suppressed.

  In addition, as described above, since it is possible to prevent the rotation coupling mechanism 3450 (universal joint) from increasing in size, the space for the back rear left rotation decoration body 3410 and the space for the back rear right rotation decoration body 3510 is relatively large. Since it can be made wider widely, the rotation range of the back-rear left-turning decoration 3410 and the back-rear right-turning decoration 3510 can be increased to make the movement more pleasing, or the back-rear left-turning decoration 3410 and the back It is possible to increase the size of the rear right rotating decorative body 3510 to make it stand out, or increase the number of the back rear left rotating decorative body 3410 and the back rear right rotating decorative body 3510 to enhance the impact when rotated. , It is possible to further enhance the effect produced by the movements and decorations of the plurality of back-and-back left rotating decorations 3410 and the back-and-right rotating decorations 3510, and entertaining the player to entertain the game. It can be suppressed lower.

  Further, since the rotation is transmitted via the spider 3452, a time lag of rotation transmission due to expansion and contraction (spring constant) of the rubber and spring is compared with the case where the rotation is transmitted using rubber and spring. Therefore, it is possible to rotate a plurality of back-rear left-handed rotating decorations 3410 and a plurality of back-rear-right rotating decorations 3510 at the same time. Therefore, when the plurality of back-rear-left rotating decorations 3410 and the back-rear-right rotating decorations 3510 are rotated by the back-rear-left driving motor 3431 and the back-rear-right driving motor 3531, the plurality of back-rear-left rotating decorations 3410 and Since the rear right rotating decorative body 3510 rotates at the same time, a plurality of back rear left rotating decorative bodies 3410 and back rear right rotating decorative body 3510 rotate in order in a delayed manner, which gives an unnatural feeling to the player. It is possible to avoid giving a sense of incongruity, and to entertain the player with the movement of the plurality of back-rear left-turning decorative bodies 3410 and the back-rear right-turning decorative body 3510 that have a sense of unity and suppress a decrease in interest. be able to.

  In addition, the transmission portion 3452a of the spider 3452 is connected to the first back rear left rotation decoration body 3410A, the third back rear left rotation decoration body 3410C, the first back rear right rotation decoration body 3510A, and the third back rear right rotation decoration body 3510C. The side surface of the shaft portion 3412 and the arm portion 3451 of the shaft portion 3512, the second back rear left rotation decoration body 3410B, the fourth back rear left rotation decoration body 3410D, the second back rear right rotation decoration body 3510B, and the fourth back rear right A universal shaft joint (rotational coupling mechanism 3450) that transmits rotation between two shaft portions 3412 and shaft portions 3512 by simply sandwiching the shaft between the shaft portion 3412 of the rotary ornament 3510D and the arm portion 3451 of the shaft portion 3512. Since it can be assembled, the number of parts can be reduced and the assembly can be done more easily than when a universal joint or constant velocity joint is used as a universal joint. Cal effort to be able to or facilitate an increase in costs for the gaming machine can be suppressed.

  Although the present invention has been described above with reference to the preferred embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and various improvements are made as shown below without departing from the gist of the present invention. And the design can be changed.

  That is, in the above embodiment, the one applied to the pachinko machine 1 as a gaming machine is shown, but the invention is not limited to this, and a pachi-slot machine or a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a pachi-slot machine are fused together, It may be applied, and even in this case, the same effect as the above can be obtained.

1 Pachinko machine 2 Outer frame 3 Door frame 4 Main body frame 5 Game board 5a Gaming area 3000 Back unit 3200 Back movable work unit 3210 Back lifting unit 3230 Back movable body unit 3231 Back movable body base 3231c Boss portion 3231d First Rotation support hole 3231e Fixed gear portion 3232 Back first rotating decorative body (rotating decorative body, first rotating decorative body)
3232a First shaft portion (first shaft core)
3232b Second rotation support hole 3233 Back second rotation decoration body (rotation decoration body, second rotation decoration body)
3233a Second shaft portion (second shaft core)
3234 Back decorative substrate 3234a First LED (light emitting means)
3235 Back rotary drive motor 3236 Rotation drive gear 3237 Speed change relay gear 3238 First relay gear 3239 Second relay gear 3240 Third relay gear 3241 First rotation decoration body gear 3242 Second rotation decoration body gear

Claims (1)

A game board in which a game area in which a predetermined game is played is formed,
A body frame to which the game board is attached,
A door frame provided on the body frame so as to be openable and closable,
An upper plate body in which a game medium for playing a game in the game area is stored,
A lower plate body provided on the door frame and having a storage area formed by a bottom wall portion of a predetermined shape and a standing wall portion of a predetermined height;
Equipped with
The standing wall portion is composed of a plurality of standing wall portions extending in the same direction or different directions,
The cover means provided to cover the upper part of the storage area is formed as a member separate from the lower tray body, and is directly connected to the lower tray body regardless of the open / closed state of the door frame with respect to the body frame. Fixedly installed in the form
The cover means includes a cover standing wall portion directly connected to the lower tray body, and a cover ceiling portion that is continuous with an upper portion of the cover standing wall portion and covers the storage area at a position higher than the standing wall portion of the lower tray body. Including,
Above the cover ceiling part, the cover means functions so as to be a predetermined internal space that is out of reach of the player,
The standing wall portion of the lower dish body is configured such that the outer surface thereof is covered with a part of the bulging portion that forms the front surface of the door frame, and is difficult to be seen from the front of the gaming machine.
The cover means is configured as a separate body from the member forming the bulging portion,
It is configured so that the player can take out the game medium stored in the storage area from a position higher than the upper end of the standing wall portion of the lower tray body and lower than the cover ceiling portion,
A connecting portion between the cover means and the lower tray body is connected so as to contact two or more standing wall portions of the plurality of standing wall portions.

Images